= potrereres ps Brae ee, ee ee oe ee ee oS ἜΝ ἃ μ- Pert ἔνε ει (--{---«-- ;» sat etae: ae iin ot fet os Τὰ Bn > ’ 5? et, μ᾿ té + eas Swot aa na a wane a hae anti aoa aS 44-4 δι ἐν ἦν ἀν Ἂ 4». mom. 45,4»... “ν᾽ Oh Mth Wes tos en ς yh A et te werates ahhh, US Set ae ΩΝ i σὲ 68h si te ena ὩΣ ΩΝ Kor τὰ ἘΡΊΠΗΣ ees ie τοῖς ἦν RAP EP Aah, es aot ieee AB Al ἀλέαν te ES 2 ΟΣ ΠΟ Ω hehe ete tes reece oes 5 3 5 τ 3 αν ὰ > ΕΣ +3333 ει Pee ζ resets ᾿ς PSE hye he he hg ne ty Ee he DE Ds apenetees 4 asst eS ehet Bere τὰ 2 pcstee otsates πεέξεξεςς Digitized by the Internet Archive In 2009 with funding from Boston Library Consortium Member Libraries https://archive.org/details/gospelaccordingtOOamer SE TD V4a-¥ ie GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. Cranslated from the Greek, ON THE BASIS OF THE COMMON ENGLISH VERSION. Witt Nop nS. THE GRASS WITHERETH, THE FLOWER PADETH : BUT THE WORD OF OUR Gop SHALL STAND FOR EVER.—ISA. 40: 8, NEW YORK: AMERICAN BIBLE UNION. LOUISVILLE: BIBLE REVISION ASSOCIATION. LONDON: TRUBNER & CO., No. 60 PATERNOSTER ROW. 1858. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1858, by ; THE AMERICAN BIBLE UNION, In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the Southern District of New York. ENCE ΟΕ ΕΚ: “GENERAL RULES FOR THE DIRECTION OF TRANSLATORS AND REVISERS EMPLOYED BY THE AMERICAN BIBLE UNION. “], Tue exact meaning of the inspired text, as that text expressed it to those who understood the original Scriptures at the time they were first written, must be translated by corresponding words and phrases, so far as they can be found, in the vernacular tongue of those for whom the version is designed, with the least possible obscurity or indefiniteness. “2. Wherever there is a version in common use, it shall be made the basis of revision, and all unnecessary interference with the established phraseology shall be ayoided; and only such alterations shall be made as the exact meaning of the inspired text and the existing state of the language may require. : “3. Translations or revisions of the New Testament shall be made from the received Greek text, critically edited, with known errors corrected. : “SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO THE REVISERS OF THE ENGLISH NEW TESTAMENT. “1. The Common English Version must be the basis of the revision: the Greek Text, Bagster & Sons’ octayo edition of 1851. “2. Whenever an alteration from that version is made on any authority additional to that of the reviser, such authority must be cited in the manuscript, either on the same page or in an appendix. “3. Eyery Greek word or phrase, in the translation of which the phraseology of the Common Version is changed, must be carefully examined in every other place in which it occurs in the New Testament, and the views of the reviser be given as to its proper translation in each place.” ; ; Tus Introduction is necessarily limited to a brief notice of the plan adopted in the Revision of the Gospel of Mark, pursuant to the above Rules and Instructions. In reference to the various readings of the text, I have endeavored to observe a just medium between the extreme of retaining words, which do not belong to the inspired record, and that of following the bolder critics, who have made changes, the propriety of which is often more than questionable. Readings sanctioned by the two earliest versions—the Syriac and Vulgate—are entitled to more regard than has been awarded to them by some, who have labored to settle the language of the text on a firm basis. As to the language of the Revision, it has been my aim to follow the admirable model furnished by the Common Version, as far as faithfulness to the inspired Original would allow. In a few instances, it has been necessary to employ words, which are not found in that version. It is believed, however, that such words belone to that family, which ordinary use, in conversation and writing, has rendered familiar to all classes of English readers. The specific reasons, which led to the adoption of such words, will be seen in the notes. Occasional changes in the arrangement of sentences have been made, while the words remain unaltered. A servile adherence to the Greek order sometimes led the early English translators to violate the propriety of their own language. As a necessary result, they framed sentences which were inharmonious and obscure. Where supplementary words, in the English Version, were not demanded by perspicuity, or the ‘laws of our laneuage, they have been omitted. In some instances, where a sentence would be iv. INTRODUCTION. obviously imperfect without a supplement—and the sense indicated that a particular word or brief phrase was understood—then that word or phrase has been introdueed, and ‘talicized. In these _ cases, the supplied words have been drawn from a parallel passage, or one where the language of the text in some other part of the New Testament, exhibited the full form of expression. I may be permitted to express my conviction that the plan of employing supplementary words, and indi- cating them by the Italie letter, was a decided improvement in biblical translation. The Old Testament orthography of names has been followed, with the exception of a single one. 1 have not deemed it necessary to change Beelzebub to Baalzebub, because the former has become common wherever the English Scriptures are read. The punctuation of the English Version has been retained, with the exception of a few cases. The notes usually furnish reasons for the change. Occasionally, however, a comma has been inserted before a relative, or where a term or phrase stood in apposition with a word, and served to define it. As this punctuation is now well established, as a usage of our language, it has not been deemed necessary to notice the added points, in the margin. Conciseness has been deemed an important element in the language of the notes. A diffuse style would have swelled the work and greatly augmented the expense of printing. It is hoped, however, that brevity in expression will not be found inconsistent with perspicuity. Where the text admitted two modes of rendering, either of which afforded a good sense, I have placed that which was deemed the best, in the body of the Revision, while the other appears in a note, as an “alternative rendering.” It is very possible that the reader may, in his judgment, approve that contained in the note, as the superior one. At all events, I trust the work of the Final Revisers will be materially aided by this plan. The result, in these cases, is similar to that obtained by the marginal readings of the English Version. In the Greek text, the phraseology.of Mark is often identical with that of Matthew. In all such cases, it is obvious that the language of the translation should present the same harmony. The Translators of the English Version of Mark have often varied from their own pattern, in Matthew. I have corrected these errors, wherever they have been detected. Though I am far from imagining that this Revision is free from faults, still, I feel conscious that I have endeavored faithfully to accomplish my task. I indulge the hope, that the result of protracted and wearisome labor will aid in the great object of presenting a faithful translation of “the lively oracles” to those, who speak our mother-tongue. I can look back on the days spent on this work, with gratitude to “the Father of Lights,” who has preserved me until it is brought to a close. The Revision is now submitted to the candid judgment of those, who regard the word of God as “a lamp to their feet and a light to their path.” Ct, eee πὰ, AUTHORITIES OUOTED IN THE NOTES. VERSIONS OTHER THAN EN GLISH. Vulgate, edition of Van 1.85, 1824. — N.T., Fleck, Leipsic, 1840. Beza’s N. Test., 1624, and London, 1814. Montanus’ Revision of Pagnini, New York, 1831. rasmus’ N. Test., Frankfort, 1653. Castalio’s N. Test., London, 1776. Peshito Syriac. Edited by Buchanan and Watts, London, 1816. Luther’s German, Frankfort, 1838. Belgie (Low Dutch), Dortrecht, 1817 and 1737, cited as “ Belg.” Martin’s Bible, N. Y., 1839, cited as “G. Fr.” Swiss French, Lausanne, 1849, cited as “5S. Fr.” De Wette’s Bible, Heidelberg, 1839. Luther's Bible. Hebrew N. Test. of British and For. Bib. Soc., Bagster. De Valera’s Spanish, revised 1850, New York, cited as “ Span.” Spanish, translated for A. B. U., cited as “ Iber.” (Iberian.) Diodati, revised by Achilli, for A. B. U., 1854, cited as “ Ital.” Murdock’s Translation of the Peshito Syriac N. Test., New York, 1855, cited as “ Murdock, Syr.* Danish Bible, published by A. B. Soc., New York, 1856. De Sacy’s N. T. Schott’s N..T., Greek and Latin, Leipsic, 1839. French Genevan. EARLY ENGLISH VERSIONS. * “o ᾿ ᾽ Ἢ Ω 5 . | Wiclif’s, 'yndale’s, Cranmer’s, Geneva, Rhemish, as published in the English Hexapla. L. Tomson’s, London, 1579. RECENT ENGLISH VERSIONS. Wakefield’s N. T., Cambridge, 1820. Dickinson’s N. Test., Boston, 1833. George Campbell's four Gosp., Philad, 1799, cited as “ Camp.” A. Campbell, N. T., Bethany, Va., cited as “A. Camp.” Penn, Book of N. Covenant, London, 1836. Wesley's N. Test., with notes, New York, 1835. Sharpe’s N. Test., London, 1844. Kendrick’s N. T. Prof. A. Kendrick, Philadelphia. MANUSCRIPT VERSIONS IN LIBRARY OF A. B. UNION. Pechy, Transl. of Mark. One, marked and cited as “ Q.” CRITICAL EDITIONS OF THE GREEK TESTAMENT. Tittmann, edited by Prof. Robinson, New York, 1842. Knapp, fourth edition, Leipsic, 1820. a Scholz, as published in’ Bagster’s Mng. Hexapla. Lachmann, London, Berlin, 1846. Griesbach, Cantabrigiz Noyo-Anglorum, 1809. Tischendorf, Leipsic, 1850. Theile, Leipsic, 1856. Bloomfield’s N. 'T., with Notes. Fritzsche’s N. T., with commentary. Leipsic, 1830. EDITIONS OF THE TEXTUS RECEPTUS. Erasmus, Wittenberg, 1653. Leusden, New York, 1831. Elzevir, 1624, republished by Mill 1707, published again by Bagster in Polymicrian Test. Prof. Wilson’s N. Test., Philadelphia, 1831. Prof. Robinson’s Harmony of Gospels, cited as “ Rob. (Harmony).” He has given some emendations of Text. Recept. of Mark. LEXICONS AND DICTIONARIES. . Liddell and Scott’s Greek Lexicon, New York, 1840, cited as “ Liddell.” Robinson's Lex. N. Test., New York, 1855, cited as “ Rob.” Scapula’s Gr. Test., Basle, 1520. 5 Heidericus’ Gr. Lex., Leipsie, 1767. Greenfield’s Lex. N. Test., London, 1829. Bretschneider’s Lex. N. Test., cited as “ Bretsch.” Gesenius’ Heb. Lexicon. vl Leverett’s Lat. Dictionary, Boston, 1839. Johnson’s Eng. Dictionary, Philadelphia, 1805. Webster’s Eng. Dictionary, 4to, 1848. GRAMMARS &e. Buttmann’s Gr. Gram., by Prof. Robinson, New York, 1851. Anthon’s Gr. Gram., New York, 1844. Kiuhner’s Gr. Gram., translated by B. B. Edwards and 8. H. Taylor, New York, 1853. Winer’s Gr. N. Test., translated by Stuart and Robinson, 1825. Stuart’s Gr. N. T., second edition, Andover, 1841. Trollope’s Gr. Gram. N. Test., London, 1842. Prof. Crosby’s Gr. Gram., sixteenth edition, Boston, 1855. Prof. C. A. Goodrich’s Gr. Gram., Hartford, 1831. AUTHORITIES QUOTED IN THE NOTES. Rost’s Gr. Gram., London, 1829. Green’s Gr. N. Test. Dialect., London, 1842. Hoogeven’s Greek Particles, abridged by Seager, 1829. Bullion’s Eng. Gram., New York, 1849. COMMENTARIES &e. Trollope’s Analecta Theologica, London, 1842, cited as “Trollope (Analecta).” ὩΣ Bloomfield’s Recensio Synoptica, London, 1826. ‘ Notes on his*N. Test., cited as “ Bloomf. (N. T.).” Sholefield’s Hints for an Improved Version of N. Test., 1842. SEPTUAGINT. The edition quoted is that of Leander Van Ess, Leipsic, 1824. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.” KING JAMES’ VERSION, CHAP I. Tue beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ the Son of God; 2 As it is written in the proph- ets, Behold, I send my messenger before thy face, which shall pre- pare thy way before thee ; 3 The voice of one crying in the wilderness, Prepare ye the way of the Lord, make his paths straight. 4 John did baptize in the wil- derness, and preach the baptism = "os γέγραπται > \ BEX TALS, L6ov, ἐγὼ ἔμπροσθέν σου. lod Ν / εἴτε Tas τρίβους GREEK TEXT. CHAP. I. "APXH τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ’In- σοῦ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ: ἀγγελόν μου πρὸ προσώπου σου, ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου > ΄σ ’ / ‘E: γι Tos ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ᾿τοιμάσατε \ eas , τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου" ΄ 3 “ vero ᾿Ιωάννης βαπτίζων ἐν τῇ / / "ἢ ἐρήμῳ, καὶ κηρύσσων βαπτισμα REVISED VERSION. CHAP. I. TuE beginning of the gospel 1 of Jesus Christ,» the Son of ἐν τοῖς προφή- God; as it is written *in the 2 ἀποστελλῶ Tov prophets, Behold, I send my messenger before thy face, who 3 Dav) βοῶν- shall prepare thy way before thee ; °a voice of one crying πη 3 the desert, ‘Prepare the way of the Lord, make his straight. John ing in ‘the desert, and *preach- > f εὐθείας ποι- αὐτοῦ. *’ Eyé- paths fwas immers- 4 * As the titles of the narratives of the Evangelists were added long after they were written, and as they vary in different copies, I regard the simple form of the E. Version preferable to any other, and haye, therefore, retained it, with the omission of “Saint.” * The grammatical structure of this verse demands a comma after “ Christ,” as the phrase “the Son of God” is exegetic. So the E. V., Hd. 1611, Geneva, Wakef., Sharpe, Thom., A. Camp., Dick. Wesley. S. ¢ ΄-“᾿ πάντες ἐν τῷ Lopdavn ποταμῷ ε - » / δὰ ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς νης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου, καὶ ζώνην δερματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐσθίων ἀκρίδας THE GOSPEL ACCORDING ΤῸ MARK.—CHAP. I. REVISED VERSION. ing the ‘immersion of repent- ance, for the remission of sins. And there went out to him all 5 the }country of Judea, and *those of Jerusalem, and ‘were all im- mersed ™by him “in the river Jordan confessing their sins. And John was clothed with 6 camel’s hair, and with ea leath- ern girdle about his loins, and rhe ate locusts and wild hon- ey. «And he preached, saying, 7 ὁ ἦν δὲ Twav- Τ Καὶ ἐκήρυσ- and N. T., and by the early Greek Heclesiastical writers com monly termed “ the Fathers,” coincides with that of the Classics. 3. The very general agreement of Lexicographers, such as Sca- pula, Stephens, Suicer, Schreyellius, Hedericus, Greenfield, Bret- schneider. Eyen Robinson—though he hazards an opinion ina note, that “the scarcity of water in certain cases render it proba- ble that affusion was the act,” yet, so far as philology is concerned, gives his testimony in harmony with other Lexicographers. 4. The word, in a large number of Versions, has been rendered by words equivalent to zmmerse. 5. The most distinguished Reformers, such as Luther, Calvin, Beza, Melancthon, Tyndale, have expressed their unhesitating belief in fayor of the above definition. Many distinguished scholars, whose denominational connections would naturally haye led to another view, take the position of the Reformers. Among these may be named Witsius, L’Enfant, Piscator, Zanchius, Abp. Secker, Mastricht, Marloratus, Stackhouse, Burkitt, J. Wesley, Bp. Taylor, Grotius, Castalio, Lampe, Limborch, Vossius, Abp. Usher, Doddridge, G. Campbell, and Macknight. 6. The uniform practice of the Greek Church in all its branches, from the earliest period to the present time. The derivates of this verb, as βάπτισμα, ete., should be ren- dered in harmony with its signification. m “by;” os. Rob., Wesley, Kend. “by,” is obsolete. » “in the river Jordan;” ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ. Wesley, Sharpe, Kend., Thom., Wakef., Camp., Dick., Tyndale, Cran., Geneva. Mont., Beza, Eras, “in Jordane flumine ;’’ Castal., “in Jordane fluyio.” The E. Y. has followed the incorrect rendering of the Vulgate, “in Jordanis flumine.” So of course, Rheims, but Wiclif, with better judgment, “in the flum (fluwmine) Jor- dan.” “Of,” in the sense of ° “4a leathern girdle ;” ζώνη» δερματένην. So (E. V)., Matt. 3:4. Kend., Wesley, Pechy, Thom., Camp., Sharpe, Dick., Rheims. De Wette, “einem ledernen Giirtel;” Belg., “eenen lederen gordel.” P “he ate;” ἐσθίων. Kend., Pechy, Sharpe, Wakef. There is no emphaszs in the text, which demands the auxiliary “ did.” a“ And.” As the text has a period after ἄγριο», I have fol- ‘ THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. I. 3 KING JAMES’ VERSION. cometh one mightier than I after me, the latchet of whose shoes 1 am not worthy to stoop down and unloose. 8 I indeed have baptized you with water: but he shall baptize you with the Holy Ghost. 9 And it came to pass in those days, that Jesus came from Naza- reth of Galilee, and was baptized of John in Jordan. 10 And straightway coming up out of the water, he saw the heavens opened, and the Spirit like a dove descending upon him. GREEK TEXT. Ζ ov τ. , ae, λέγων, ρχεται ὃ ἰσχυροτε- , - > > pos μου ὀπίσω μου, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ c ‘\ t - Ἂν © , ἱκανὸς κύψας λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα n « / - st τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ. * ἐγὼ A 3 ’ὔ «ε tal 3 σ > μὲν ἐβάπτισα ὑμᾶς ἐν ὕδατι: av- Ν \ / Q cad > , τὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν ITver- ε ͵,ὔ Η / ματι “Ayio. " Kai ἐγένετο ev gay sie) 7 ἘΠ 2 53 > ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις, ἦλθεν Ln- a Ν \ cod covs ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲτ τῆς 1 αλιλαί- Ν > , ε ᾿ς 5 VA as, καὶ ἐβαπτίσθη ὑπὸ ᾿]ωάννου > Ν » / 10 Ν > / εἰς τὸν Lopdavny. καὶ εὐθέως » , 5. Ν na 9 3 ἀναβαίνων ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕδατος, εἰδε , Ν » Ἂν σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς, καὶ Ν a ‘\ τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν κατα- REVISED VERSION. rOne mightier than J, cometh af- ter me, ‘the strap of whose shoes Tam not worthy to stoop down and tloose. I indeed immerse 8 you "in water, but he vwill vim- merse you *in the Holy Spirit. And it came to pass in those 9 days, "that Jesus came from Nazareth of Galilee, and 7was immersed ‘by John in the Jor- dan. And ‘immediately com- ing up out of the water, he saw the heavens “parted, and the Spirit like a dove descending 11 And there came a voice from lowed its punctuation, and begin “and” with a capital. The sentence is thus rendered mare perspicuous. In Biblical plrase- ology, this conjunction often commences sentences. τ “Qne mightier than I,” ete. Kend., Camp., Dick. “ Gelui qui est plus puissant que moi vient aprés moi.” the natural arrangement of the sentence. 5. Pri, This is * “strap;” ἑμάντα. Rob. (Zuds), “a thong, strap of leather.” It here refers to the strap which fastened the sandal to the foot. Bloomf. (in loco), “the strap (or strapping), or lacing of whose sandals.” “Latchet” is obsolete. “String” would not be ac- curate, t “loose;” λῦσαι. Rob. So (E. V.), Matt. 16:19; 21:2. Mark 7:35. Luke 13:15,16. John 11:44. See the quota- tion Acts 13 : 25, “whose shoes of his feet I am not worthy to loose” (λῦσαι). “Unloose” is incérrect, as the prefix “un” has a negative force, as in “untrue,” “untie,” “unwritten,” ete. See Webster on “ Unloose.” As an alternation, “untie.” So Wakef., Dick., Campbell, Thom. «in water;” ἐν ὕδατε. Sharpe, Pechy, Kend., Camp., Thom., Wiclif. Montanus, “in aqua;” S. Fr., dans l’eau;” Ther., “in aqua;” De Sacy, “dans l’eau;” Ital., “nell’ aqua.” Compare y. 5, ἐν τῷ Ἰορδανῃ ποταμεῷ, which the ΤΠ. V. properly renders, “in the river of Jordan,” not “with the river of Jor- dan.” The erroneous rendering of the Vulgate, “ baptizavi vos aqua,” was adopted by Tyndale, and from him copied by Cran., Gen., and the E. V. y “will.” This auxiliary is substituted for “shall,” on the ground that John used the language of prediction, not of au- thority. Wakef., Wesley, Dick., Camp., Sharpe, Thom. ~ “(will) immerse;” βαπτίσει. See y. 5, note 1. Kend., Camp. Ital., “immergera ;” Iber., “sumergira;” Belg., “zal— doopen;” Luther and De Wette, “ wird—taufen.” x “in the Holy Spirit;” ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίαν The preposition na 3) 4S > / βαῖνον ἐπ᾿ avtov: iN ον τὴν ν : kat dovy|upon him. And there came a 11 should have its ordinary force here, as in the phrase, ἐν ὕδατι. See last note. By present usage, “ Ghost” is equivalent to “ spec- tre, apparition.” Spirit should be substituted for it in all cases in the N.T. Kend., Camp., Pechy have, “in the Holy Spirit ;” (Wiclif, “in the Holy Ghost;”) Mont., “in Spiritu Sancto ;” Ttal., “nello Spiritu Santo; ” Iber., “in Espiritu Santo.” y “that.” As this word is a supplement, it should be ztalczzed. It is inclnded in brackets (as supplementary) in the Iber., “ei: aquellas dias [que] vino Jesus.” : = “was immersed.” See v. 5, note ]. * “by John;” ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου. “Of,” as instrumental, is obso lete. So Wesley, Wakef., Camp., Sharpe, Kend., Pechy. This change is made in all similar cases, in this Revision. >» “the Jordan;” τὸν Ἰορδανην. The article is properly re tained by Pechy, Sharpe, Dick., Thom. Luther and De Wette, “jm Jordan;” Belg., “in de Jordane;” S. Fr., “dans le Jour- dain ;” Span. and Iber., “en el Jordan ;” Ital., “nel Giordano.” This noun is always accompanied by the article in the N. T. ‘As the idiom of the Greek and English is similar in reference to the names of rivers, the article should always be translated. © “immediately ;” εὐθέως. This word is rendered in the E. V., “immediately,” “straightway,” “forthwith,” and in a very few instances, “as soon as.” As “immediately” is now in com- mon use, while “forthwith” and “straightway” are, to say the least, obsolescent ; I have rendered it uniformly by the first term. Most of the later English translators have employed “imme- diately.” 4 “parted ;” σχιζομένους. Kend. “The generic sense of the verb is, to part asunder, to separate,” Liddell. The rendering of the E. V. originated in the “ ccelos apertos” of the Vulgate, where σχεζομένους has been confounded with ἀνεῴχϑησαν, ἴῃ the parallel Matt. 3:16. Such ill judged attempts to harmoniz the writers, in a version, ought not be imitated. “ Mont., “scis gos ccelos.” 4 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. I. KING JAMES’ VERSION. heaven, saying, Thou art my be- loved: Son, in whom I am well pleased. 12 And immediately the Spirit driveth him into the wilderness. 13 And he was there in the wilderness forty days tempted of Satan; and was with the wild beasts ; and the angels ministered unto him. 14 Now after that John was put in prison, Jesus came into Galilee, preaching the gospel of the king- GREEK TEXT. > / > fal > a \ 53 ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν, Σὺ εἰ e/ XN < ὁ υἱὸς μου ὃ ἀγαπητὸς; EV @ εὐ- / 9 ἊΝ Ν ΄- δόκησα. 1" Καὶ εὐθὺς τὸ Πνεῦ- 3, AEN > / > \ , μα αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει εἰς τὴν ἐρη- pov. | καὶ ἣν ἐκεῖ ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ «ε , 4 / ἡμέρας τεσσαράκοντα, πειραζό- oN ~ = > μενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ, καὶ ἦν \ a / ἊΝ ev re μετὰ τῶν θηρίων" Kai οἱ ἄγγελοι / fal διηκόνουν αὐτῷ. \ ἊΝ a META δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι Ν > 4 3 > o τὸν Iwavynv, ἦλθεν ὃ ᾿Ϊησοῦς > \ ΄ ΄ Ν εἰς τὴν ] αλιλαίαν, κηρύσσων τὸ > 4 ΄σ a εὐαγγέλιον τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ REVISED VERSION. voice ‘from the heavens, say- ing, Thou art my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased. And immediately the Spirit fsendeth him forth into the desert. And he was there, in the desert, forty days, ®tried 4by Satan; and was with the wild beasts; and the angels ministered to him. Now after! John ‘was delivered up, Jesus came into Galilee, preaching the gospel of the kingdom of God, and saying, The time is 15 14 dom of God, 15 And saying, The time is ful- filled, and the kinedom of God is ¢ “from the heavens ;” ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν. So in v.10 (E. V.). Tn all cases. I would make the nwmber correspond with that of the text, where οὐρανός oceurs. It is true, that the singular and plural may often be coincident, according to Hebrew usage, still, as either form is used in our language, exactness will sustain a literal rendering. So Wakef., Dick., Wiclif. Vule., Hras., Mont. Beza, “ccelis;” G. Fr. and S. Fr., “ciewx;” Span. and Iber., ρ “cielos;” Syriac, basen. Γ΄ “sendeth him forth;” αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει. Sharpe, Newcome. Although the idea of force and effort is often conveyed by this verb, other cases occur in which that idea is dropped, and the thought is simply that of sending forth. Thus Matt. 9 : 38, “Pray ye therefore the Lord of the harvest, that he will send forth laborers "--ἐκβάλῃ ἐργάτας. John 10 : 4, “he putteth forth his own sheep”—ra ἔδια πρόβατα ἐκβάλῃ---“ π goeth before them.” Matt. 9:25, Ὅτε δὲ ἐξεβλήϑη ὃ ὄχλος---“ when the peo- ple (crowd) were put forth.” Mark 1 : 43, “forthwith sent him away ᾿-εὐθέως ἐξεβάλην αὐτὸν. Jas. 2 : 25, “she had received the messengers, and sent them out another way ”—xal ἑτέρᾳ 00@ ἐκβαλοῦσα. The parallel Matt. 4 : 1, confirms the above render- ing ; ἀνήχϑη εἷς τὴν #oeuov—(Jesus) “ was led up into the wilder- ness” (desert). Bretsch., “Facio ut exeat, abeat aliquis, verbo, cohortatione, increpitatione, emitto, jubeo abire.” Syriac das} eum eduxit, “to send forth,” has a latitude of signification which renders it a proper equivalent for the Greek verb. It may be added that Greenfield has defined this yerb in the above motified sense, “to order to depart, to send away, dismiss, impel to go.” 8 “tried;” πειραζόμενος. De Wette, “ward versucht ;” Rob., “to attempt, to assay, to tempt, to prove, to put to the test,” “To try” corresponds accurately with πειράξζω. « Tempt” is used in some cases in the E. V. where from its present sense the English reader is lead to believe that God incites men to sin. The word is now always understood to convey the idea fel i σ / Θεοῦ, * καὶ λέγων, Ὅτι πεπλή- ἊΝ a ρωται ὁ καιρὸς, Kal ἤγγικεν ἡ fulfilled, and the kingdom of God *draweth near; repent of an effort to lead one to violate the Divine law. There may be a few instances, such as James 1 : 13, where “tempt” would be most appropriate, still in general, I would use “try” as most exact. In all cases, the reader will understand the nature of the act or “trial,” without the danger of being misled. h “by;” ὑπὸ. “For” is no longer used to indicate the cause or agent. In every instance where ὑστὸ with the genitive indi- cates the cause, it should be rendered “by,” or “through.” The former is generally preferable; thus δεὰ may have an appropriate equivalent in “through.” Wakef., Dick., Wesley, Sharpe, Thom., Campbell. In all cases like the present, I use “ by.” ' “that,” which occurs in the EH. V. before “John,” is quite superfluous. It is not employed by Wakef., Kend., Dick., Wes- ley, Sharpe, Campbell, Tyndale, or Geneva. }«“ John was delivered up ;” τὸ παραδοϑήναι. Sharpe, Pechy, Q, Wakefield. This verb signifies, to deliver wp, give over to any one. The object for which the act is performed, must be ascer- tained from other words expressed or understood. Should it be necessary to indicate more than the verb implies, the ellipsis must be filled by a supplement. In this instance, the literal rendering without a supplement is deemed sufficient. See Rob. on παραδί- Sout. The word is rendered wniformly in the Revision of this gospel. De Wette, “ Johannes iiberliefert war ;” Belg., “Joan- nes overgeleverd was;” S. Fr., “Jean eut été livré;” Iber., “despues de ser entregado Juan;” Vulg. “traditus est ;” Beza, “traditus fuit.” The rendering of Erasmus, “ comprehensus esset Johannes,” gaye rise to that of Tyndale, “after John was taken.” Hence the Genevan, “after John was committed to prison,” and the H.V. The verb is rendered as above in (EK. V.) Matt. 10:17, 19, 21; 24:9; Mark 13:9,11. Rom.8:32. 1 Cor. 15:24. k “draweth near ;” ἤγγικεν. Pechy. So Luke 21:8 (E. V.), ὃ καιρὸς ἤγγοιε, “the time draweth near.” Jas. 5 : 8, ἡ παρ- ovoia τοῦ Κυρίου ἤγγικε, (HK. V.), “the coming of the Lord THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. 1. 8 KING JAMES’ VERSION. at hand: repent ye and believe the gospel. 16 Now as he walked by the sea of Galilee, he saw Simon, and Andrew his brother, casting a net into the sea: for they were fishers. 17 And Jesus said unto them, Come ye after me, and I will make you to become fishers of men. 18 And straightway they for- sook their nets, and followed him. 19 And when he had gone a little further thence, he saw James the son of Zebedee, and John his brother, who also were in the ship mending their nets. 20 And straightway he called them: and they left their father Zebedee in the ship with the hired servants, and went after him. 21 And they went into Caper- naum; and straightway on the sabbath-day he entered into the synagogue and taught. GREEK TEXT. / lol fol ΄σ βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ: μετανοεῖτε, i s καὶ πιστεύετε ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ. 16 na \ \ \ “εριπατῶν δὲ παρὰ τὴν : é θάλασσαν τῆς [Τ αλιλαίας, «ide δὰ Σίμονα καὶ ᾿Ανδρέαν τὸν ἀδελ- ΝΟ a / φὸν αὐτοῦ, βάλλοντας ἀμφίβλη- ᾽ τι , 5 \ στρον ev TH θαλάσσῃ" ἦσαν yap τ: > 17 \ S > > ‘cs ἁλιεῖς: “καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ In- a - / σοῦς, Aevre ὀπίσω pov, καὶ ποιὴή- ΄σ « ΄- , co ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώ- ΄ \ πων. | Καὶ εὐθέως ἀφέντες τὰ a Le δίκτυα αὐτῶν, ἠκολούθησαν av- lf) y) \ 3 ΄σ > / 19. Καὶ προβὰς ἐκεῖθεν ὀλί- S 7 ἣν ΄σ γον, εἶδεν ᾿]άκωβον τὸν τοῦ Ze- ΄ὔ ἊΝ βεδαίου, καὶ ᾿]Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελ- N fol Ν 5 ΄ φὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ Υ͂ / \ {7 πλοίῳ καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίκτυα. 20 ς > ΄ Leer? > , καὶ εὐθέως ἐκάλεσεν αὐτούς" Ν / ΄- καὶ ἀφέντες τὸν πατέρα αὐτῶν Ζεβεδαῖον ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ μετὰ τῶν a con ’ μισθωτῶν, ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω av- τοῦ. , = Ἵ Kat εἰσπορεύονται εἰς Ka- hy ΄ ΄ περναούμ: καὶ εὐθέως τοῖς σαβ- rn \ Bacw εἰσελθῶν εἰς THY συναγω- TO. ἐ REVISED VERSION. ‘and believe the gospel. Now 16 as he ™was walking by the sea of Galilee, he saw Simon, and Andrew, his brother, casting a net into the sea 3s for they were efishers. And Jesus said to them, »Come after me, and I will make you become fishers of men. And immediately they left their nets and followed “- him. And ‘going on a little 19 further thence, he saw James, the son of Zebedee, and John, his brother, who also were in the ship, mending their nets. And immediately he called them; and they left their father Zebedee in the ship with the hired servants, and went after him. And they went into Ca- pernaum; and immediately ton the sabbath he entered into the 22 And they were astonished γὴν, ἐδίδασκε. 92, / “5 καὶ e€emrAno-|synagogue and taught. And 22 draweth nigh”. The verb is usually rendered in the E. V., “to come near,” or “nigh.” The perfect is used for the present when an action commenced in past time and still continues. Troll., 250., p. 132. 1 “ye,” which is placed after “repent” in the E. V., is un- necessary, as there is no emphasis which requires the nominative to be expressed, either in the Greek or English. The nominative is not inserted by Dick., Camp., Tyndale, Cran., Geneva, Pechy. Several instances of this kind occur in the Εἰ. V. of Mark, in all which the imperative has a nominative expressed, though there is no emphasis. As the idioms of the Greek and English are alike in such cases, I follow the text, and do not employ a nomina- tive. m “was walking ;” περισατῶν. Wakef., Sharpe, Dick. The participial construction is employed by Kend., Vulg., Mont. Beza, Castalio, Span., Iber., Belg. » A semicolon is placed after “sea” by Sharpe, A. Campbell, and De Wette. The connection of the clauses, “casting a net into the sea,” and, “for they were fishers,” is too intimate for the colon. Several versions include “for they were fishers” in a parenthesis, as the Εἰ V. of 1611, Wesley, Geneva, and Rheims. I have retained this word, and yet, I of substituting “fishermen” for it, in all “ Fishermen” is found ° “fishers ;” ἁλεεῖς. suggest the propriety cases, in conformity with present usage. in the E. V., Luke 5 : 2. P “come.” For the omission of “ye” as the nominative, see y. 15, note 1. 4 “pecome.” omitted after such verbs as make, dare, ete. Rule 18., p. 110. τ “going on;” προβὰς. Kend., Pechy, Thom. So Matt. 4:21 (E. V.), προβὰς, “going on.” Rob., προβαίνω, “to go forward, to advance ;” Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal., “ pro- eressus;” Belg., “voortgegaan zijnde.” Liddell says, “In com- position with verbs, zo seems sometimes to be quite pleonastic, but it usually involves the notice of on, forth.” 5 “the Sabbath;” τοῖς σάββασιν. So Luke 13:10. Wes- ley, Sharpe, Dick., Camp. 5S. Fr., “au sabbat ;” De Wette, “am Sabbath.” “Day” is superfluous. It is omitted in this construction (E.V.), Mark 2 : 27, 28. Luke 6 : 6; 18 : 15, ete., where σάββατον occurs. “To,” the sign of the infinitive, is preperly Bullion’s E. Gr., ” 27, 6 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. J. KING JAMES’ VERSION. at his doctrine: for he taught them as one that had authority, and not as the scribes. 23 And there was in their syna- gogue a man with an unclean spirit; and he cried out, 24 Saying, Let ws alone; what have we to do with thee, thou Jesus of Nazareth? art thou come to destroy us? I know thee who thou art, the Holy One of God. 25 And Jesus rebuked him, say- ing, Hold thy peace, and come out of him. 26 And when the unclean spirit had torn him, and cried with a loud voice, he came out of him. 27 And they were all amazed, insomuch that they questioned among themselves, saying, What thing is this? what new doctrine is this? for with authority com- GREEK TEXT. > ΙΝ ΄“ tal > col 53 σοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ: ἣν Ν ΄ Ξ > \ e » Ye yap διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσί- 7 re αν ἔχων, καὶ OVX ὡς οἱ γραμ- -“ 23 oe Nae 2 “ ματεῖς. Kai ἣν ἐν τῇ συνα- ΩΝ a sf 2 ly γωγῇ αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεὺ- v4 Ν > , ματι ἀκαθάρτῳ, Kal ἀνέκραξε, 94 , 3, FA CIs Ν ‘ λέγων, Ha, τί ἡμῖν Kat σοὶ, ᾽ ΩΝ ΄ > Incod ΜΝαζαρηνέ; ἦλθες ἀπο- A «ε cal 3 ’΄ 3 λέσαι ἡμᾶς; οἶδὰ σε τίς εἶ, ὁ “ fal Rs ἅγιος τοῦ Θεοῦ. “ἢ Kat ἐπετίμη- > Arey Ὁ σι , σεν αὐτῷ ὁ Inaovs, λέγων Di- , 4 3 a μώθητι, καὶ ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ. 20 SINS l& 55 Ν A Kai σπαράξαν αὐτὸν τὸ πνεῦ- ἣν > Yh iA μα τὸ ἀκάθαρτον, καὶ κράξαν an 7 3 a > 3 a φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, ἐξῆλθεν ἐξ αὐτοῦ. 97 boing J , / “ καὶ ἐθαμβηθησαν πάντες, ὥστε ° Ν c Ἂν ,ὔ συζητεῖν πρὸς αὑτοὺς, λέγοντας, a , «ε Ν Ti ἐστι τοῦτο; τίς ἡ διδαχὴ ἡ Ν o “ > καινὴ αὕτη, OTL KAT ἐξουσίαν καὶ ΄ 7 lal » ν τοῖς πνεύμασι τοῖς ἀκαθάρτοις t “teaching ;” δεδαχῆ. lif. Greek. Kend., Pechy, Wesley, Sharpe, Wic- As “teaching” may signify either the thing taught, or the manner of giving instruction, it corresponds accurately with the ter distorquebantur.” spasms.” Bloomf., N. 'T., in loco. T. non nisi de egrotis, quorum membra a genio malo—vehemen- REVISED VERSION. they were astonished at his ‘teaching, for he taught them as one “having authority, and not as the scribes. And there was in their synagogue a man with an unclean spirit; and he cried out, saying, YAh! what have we to do with thee, »Jesus of Na- zareth ? hast thou come to de- stroy us? I know thee who thou art, the Holy One of God. And Jesus rebuked him, saying, *Be silent, and come out of him. And the unclean spirit 7con- vulsing him, and 7erying out with a loud voice, came out of him. And they were all amazed, so that they questioned among themselves, saying, *What is this? what new ‘teaching is this? for with authority ‘he commandeth even the unclean Bretsch., “ distorqueo, concutio. In N. Rob, “in N. Τ᾿, to convulse, to throw into “The root of the verb σπάω is used by medical writers « “having authority ;” ἐξουσίαν ἔχων. So (KE. V.), Matt. 7:29. Pechy, Kend., Dick., Camp., Sharpe. 8. Fr., “ayant autorite.” y “Ah!” “Ea, Kend., G. Camp., Dick. Geneva. Wakef. (“Hah!”) Eras., Beza, “Ah!” 6. Fr.“ Ah!” §. Fr., “Hah!” Span. “Ah!” Tber., “Ea!” Ital. “Oh!” De Wette, “Ha!” Rob. (ἔα), generic, ah, aha. ~ “thou,” before “Jesus,” is superfluous. It was first em- ployed by Wiclif, and copied by Tyndale and other early English Translators. It has not been used by Wesley, Pechy, Wakef,, Dick., Sharpe, Thom., A. Campbell, or L. Tomson. The pronoun does not occur in Vule., Eras., Beza, Castal., Luther, De Wette, G. Fr., 5. Fr., Span., Iber., or Ital. See vy. 29, note j. * “ Be silent ;” Φιμώϑητι. Kend., Pechy, Dick., Campbell, Thom. “ΤῸ hold one’s peace,” is no longer employed in conver- sation or writing, unless in cases when there is an attempt to quote from the E. V. ¥ “convulsing him ;” σπαράξαν αὐτὸν. Pechy, Dick., Thom- son, Campbell. Iber., “ habiendolo agitado convulsivamente.” The verb literally signifies, “to tear or lacerate, but here, and Luke 9 : 39, to throw into violent convulsions and spasms, such as accompany epilepsy, which are sometimes called oxagayuoi, though usually σπασμοὶ by the Greek medical writers. See to signify causing convulsion or spasm, and in the passive, to be convulsed,” Liddell. 'The literal sense, to rend, is inconsistent with the parallel narrative, Luke 4 : 33-36, καὶ δέψαν αὐτὸν τὸ δαιμόνιον εἰς μέσον, ἐξῆλθεν απὸ αὐτοῦ, μηδὲν βλάψαν aitéy— “he came out of him and hurt him not.” * “erying out;” χράξαν. Rob., κράξω. Bretsch., “ clamo, vociferor.” So (BE. V.), 9:24; 10:47. Luke 4:41; 9: 39, ete. The participial construction is most concise and harmoni ous. It has been adopted by Wakef., Wesley, Kend.,° Wiclif Rheims, 8. Fr., Belg., Span., Iber. Wesley, Wakef., Kend., Rob., E. V. 1 Thess. 1:17. In this case, the a “so that;” wore. of Mark 4:37. 2 Cor. 3: 7. particle has the force of ta. b “ What is this?” Zé ἐστι τοῦτο; + Wakef., Kend., Wesley, Thom. Mont., Bras., Beza, “Quid est hoc?” Belg., “ Wat is dit?” De Wette, “ Was ist das?” G. Fr., “Qu’est ceci?” S. Fr., “ Qu’est-ce que ceci?” Iber., “ Qué es esto?” Ital., “ Ch’ é questo?” © “teaching ;” διδαχὴ. Sharpe, Wesley, Campbell, Pechy, Kend. See v. 22, note t. 4 “he cornmandeth.” This is the natural order. So Pechy, Kend., Wesley, Dick., Wakef., Sharpe, Thom., Campbell. So also in the E. Y. of Luke 4:36, where the Greek text is the same. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO KING JAMES’ VERSION. mandeth he even the unclean spirits, and they do obey him. 28 And immediately his fame spread abroad throughout all the region round about Galilee. 29 And forthwith, when they were come out of the synagogue, they entered into the house of Simon and Andrew, with James and John. 30 But Simon’s wife’s mother lay sick of a fever ; and anon they tell him of her. 31 And he came and took her by the hand, and lifted her up; and immediately the fever left her, and she ministered unto them. 32 And at even when the sun did set, they brought unto him all that were diseased, and them that were possessed with devils. 33 And all the city was gather- ed together at the door. 34 And he healed many that were sick of divers diseases, and cast out many devils; and suffered MARK.— CHAP. I. GREEK TEXT. 4 ἐπιτάσσει, καὶ ὑπακουουσιν αὐ- 9 2 ΝΥ ic \ a 28° HENAGe δὲ ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ ΣΝ > oe wi ye a εὐθὺς εἰς ὅλην THY περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας. / fol “9. Kat εὐθέως ἐκ τῆς συναγω- a , 3 Ν γῆς ἐξελθόντες, ἦλθον εἰς τὴν Sx af / A > / οἰκίαν Σίμωνος καὶ ᾿Ανδρέου, A > / Ν > , μετὰ ᾿]ακώβου καὶ ᾿[ΪΠωαννου. Ν Ν ὅ ἡ) δὲ πενθερὰ Σίμονος κατέ- / Ἄ KelTO πυρέσσουσα: καὶ εὐθέως a ᾽ fal Ν See 31 Ν λέγουσιν αὐτῷ περὶ αὐτῆς. “καὶ δι, » προσελθὼν ἤγειρεν αὐτὴν, κρα- τήσας τῆς “χειρὸς αὐτῆς" καὶ ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετὸς εὐθέως, καὶ διηκόνει αὐτοῖς. * ᾿Οψίας δὲ ’ “ ἐδ ε ὅλ € γενομένης, ὅτε ἔδυ ὁ ἥλιος, 4 X DEN / Ἂν ἐφερον πρὸς αὑτὸν πάντας τοὺς fal my AY κακῶς ἔχοντας καὶ τοὺς δαιμονι- / Ν ξ / (4 ζομένους: καὶ ἢ πόλις oAn ΟἹ la 53 x \ if ἐπισυνεγμένη ἣν πρὸς THY θυραν. 34 Ν 5» , \ a καὶ ἐθεράπευσε πολλοὺς κακῶς la / ἔχοντας ποικίλαις νόσοις" καὶ / δαιμόνια πολλὰ ἐξέβαλε, καὶ οὐκ τῳ; « “they obey.” as there is no emphasis in the text. Dick., Pechy, Wakef. f “directly ;” εὐϑὺς. The auxiliary “do” should not be employed, So Wesley, Kend., Campbell, Although this adverb, like et téas,-may 1 “ with.” place of “ of.” ? m ἐς Immediately τ᾿ εὐϑέως. ς . » “evening haying come ;” REVISED VERSION. spirits, and ‘they obey him. And ‘directly his fame spread abroad ‘through the ‘surrounding region of Galilee. twhole And immediately, when they 2 Jeame out of the synagogue, they entered into the house of Simon and Andrew, with James and John. But Simon’s *mother- in-law lay sick ‘with a fever ; and immediately they tell him of her. And he came and took her by the hand, and lifted her up; and immediately the fever left her, and she ministered to them. And having come, when the sun °set, they brought to him all the sick and rthe demoniacs. And the twhole city was gathered together at the door. who were sick ‘with *various diseases, and cast out many ‘de- nevening And he healed many : τὸ ie) τ oO 31 32 99 Wakef., Thom. See v. 10, note ec. ὀψίας γενομένης. In such constructions, “ with” should be used in Kend., There 1s an un be rendered “immediately,” still, as εὐθέως occurs at the begin- ning of the next verse, our idiom demands a diversity as to form in rendering similar to that of the text. Wesley, Wakef., Dick., and G. Camp. have distinguished these words in their versions. “Directly” is now more generally used than “ straightway.” δ΄ “through;” εἰς. Kend., A. Camp., Dick., Thom., Pechy. As an alternative rendering, “ into.” So Wesley, Wakef. h «The whole;” ὅλην. Pechy, Sharpe. Hras., Beza, “ to- tum.” Rob. and Liddell, ὅλος. ' “surrounding region;” περίχωρον. Kend. verbo), “ circumjaciens, finitimus.” “ About” is a tautology. } “came out ;” ἐξελϑόντες. Sharpe. The use of this auxili- ary “to be” with intransitive verbs, is a violation of the English idiom, ¢however common it may be in the E. V. and in some writers of the seventeenth century. It is an idiom borrowed from the French. Wherever an auxiliary is required with this class of verbs, “have” should be employed. I have corrected this form in most cases. See Webster's Dict., Introd., p. lv. « “mother-in-law ;” πενϑερὰ. Kend., Dick., Thom. So E. V., Matt. 10:35. Luke 12:53 Bretsch. (in necessary variety in rendering this phrase in the BH. V., such as, “when it was evening,” “in the evening,” “when the evening had arrived.” The above rendering has been wunzformly given in this Revision. It is deemed accurate. In the phrase, γενομένου σαββάτου, the participle receives the same rendering, in this Re- vision. See ch. 6 : 21, note. ο “set;” ἔδυ. This is literal, as a rendering of the aorist “did” is superfluous and inaccurate, as it conveys the idea of emphasis. So Sharpe, Pechy. Ρ “the demoniacs.” Kend., Campbell, Sharpe, Pechy. As the word “demon” is transferred whenever it occurs, for the reasons assigned y. 34, note t, τοὺς δαιμονεξομένους is properly represented by “ the demoniacs.” 4 “whole;” ὅλη. Kend., Pechy, Sharpe, Campbell, Dick.. Wakef. Mont., Eras., Beza, Castalio, “tota;” Iber., “toda.” Rob., Liddell. r “with.” See vy. 30, note 1. Wakef., Camp. ® “various 3” ποικίλεαις. t “ demons ;’ Wakef., Pechy, Kend., Diclk., Rob. » δαιμόνια. Wakef. Campbell, Dick., Sharpe, 8 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. I. KING JAMES’ VERSION. not the devils to speak, because they knew him. 35 And in the morning, rising up a great while before day, he went out and departed into a soli- tary place, and there prayed. 36 And Simon, and they that were with him, followed after him. 37 And when they had found him, they said unto him, All men seek for thee. 38 And he said unto them, Let us go into the next towns, that I may preach there also: for there- fore came I forth. 39 And he preached in their synagogues throughout all Gali- lee, and cast out devils. 40 And there came a leper to him, beseeching him, and kneeling down to him, and saying unto him, If thou wilt, thou canst make me clean. 41 And Jesus, moved with com- GREEK TEXT. M4 lal Ν ᾿ σ 3) nore λαλεῖν τὰ δαιμόνια, ὅτι ἤδει- / σαν αὐτόν. 25 A Ὁ Kat πρωὶ ἔννυχον λίαν ava- Ν 355 “5 ἊΣ Se > στὰς ἐξῆλθε, καὶ ἀπῆλθεν eis 3, / a / ἔρημον τόπον, κἀκεῖ προσηύχετο. 36 Ν ΄ DEEN ε ,ὔ καὶ κατεδίωξαν αὐτὸν ὁ Σίμων « a /, καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ: * καὶ εὑρόν- eS , eA Tes αὐτὸν, λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, Ort 4 4 πάντες ζητουσί ce. “ὃ Kat λέ- a 3 ιν γει αὐτοῖς, ᾿γωμεν εἰς τὰς ἐχο- 4 / o ΄- μένας κωμοπόλεις, ἵνα κἀκεῖ κη- , > a A 3 ρύξω: εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ἐξελήλυθα. oy , ΄- 9. Kai ἦν κηρύσσων ἐν ταῖς συν- ΄ a > d \ αγωγαῖς αὐτῶν, εἰς ὅλην τὴν Ta- NN / , λιλαίαν, καὶ Ta δαιμόνια ἐκβάλ- λων. a εκ, \ Ν 10 Καὶ ἔρχεται πρὸς αὐτὸν λε- XN lol ἊΝ πρὸς, παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν καὶ γο- a Ν 2 cal νυπετῶν αὐτὸν, καὶ λέγων αὐτῷ, “ ᾽ν" ΄ , 2 2 Ort, ἐὰν θέλῃς, δύνασαί με \ cal καθαρίσαι. “1 Ὃ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς REVISED VERSION. mons, and he did not suffer the demons to speak, because they knew him. And in the morn- 35 ing, risimg up "while it was quite dark, he went out and departed into a solitary place, and there prayed. And Simon 36 and ‘those with him, followed after him. And when they had 37 found him, they say to him, *All are seeking thee. And rhe 3e saith to them, Let us go into the next towns, that I may preach there also ;* for "1 have come forth *for this. And he preachs9 ed in their synagogues ‘through ‘the whole of Galilee, and cast out demons. ‘And a leper 40 ‘cometh to him, beseeching him, and kneeling to him, and say- ing to him, If thou wilt, thou canst "cleanse me. And Jesus 41 Thom. 8. Fr., “demons ;” Span. and Iber., “ demonios.” There 2 “T have come forth;” ἐξελήλυϑα. Dick. Eras. and Fritz- is no difference of szgnification between δαέκω» and δαιεόνεον. These words are applied to a class of “ unclean spirits,” who are the servants of Satan. See Luke 8 : 29, 30. Matt. 9 : 34; 12:24. Mark 3: 22-26. “]Πάβολος, when it refers to spiritual existence, is applied, in the singular, to Satan κατ ἐξοχήν. There are many “demons,” yet but one “Devil.” As we haye no single term which is the equivalent of “demon,” we are obliged to transfer, when we can not translate. See G. Campbell’s Prelim. Dissertations VI., Part. I., where these words are fully examined. The two words I have rendered uniformly by “ demon.” ΕΣ « “while it was quite dark;” ἔννυχον λέαν (= κατὰ ἔννυχον χρόνο»). Wakef., “very dark;” Bretsch., “tempore matutina, multa adhuc nocte ;” Fritz., “mane, multa adhuc nocte;” S. Fr., “comme il faisait fort obscur.” vy «those with him;” of μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ. “ Were” is superfluous. w “they say ;” λέγουσιν. Wakef., Pechy. Mont., Hras., Beza, Castalio, “ dicunt ;” Span., “ dicen.” x “All are seeking thee ;” Πάντες ξητοῦσί oe. Wakef., Pechy, Kend. 8. Fr., “tous te cherchent;”” De Wette, “Alle suchen dich.” “ For” is superfluous. y “he saith;” λέγει. Sharpe, Wesley, Kend., Wakef., Thom. 5. Fr., “il dit;” De Wette, “ er sagt.” s A semicolon is placed after “also” by Sharpe, Camp., Dick., Thom Kend., Dick. sche, “egressus sum;” Beza, “sum egressus;” Castalio, “ pro- fectus sum.” The use of the auxiliary “to be” is incorrect. See vy. 29, note j. Kend. Vulg., Mont., Beza, “ad This arrange- b “for this;” εἰς τοῦτο. hoc;” S. Fr., “pour cela;” Iber., “para eso.” ment is adopted, as the natural one, in English. ¢ “through ;” εἰς. See vy. 28, note g. 4 “the whole of Galilee ;” ὅλην. Pechy. So (EH. V.) Matt. 26:13. Mark 8:36; 14:9; 15:33. Luke 8:39. 1 John 5:19. Eras. Beza, “in tota Galilea ;” Castal., “per totam Galilzeam.” e “ And a leper.” This arrangement is deemed preferable to that of the E. V. as more simple and concise, especially as the verb of which “leper” is the agent, is rendered literally in the present. So Wakef., Camp., Kend. f “cometh ;” ἔρχεται. Sharpe, Pechy, Wakef. De Wette, “kommt.” Although the present, especially in Hellenistic, some- times is used aoristically, yet, where the literal rendering affords a good sense, it seems advisable to translate it by the Fnglish present. . δ΄ «}neeling to him;” γονυπετῶν αὐτὸν. Wakef., Sharpe, Kend., Wiclif, “kneeled.” “Down” is superfluous. It is omitted in (E. V.) Mark 10 : 17, where the text is γονυπετήσας αὐτὸν. There is nothing corresponding to “down” in Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castalio, S. Fr., Span., Iber., Belg. Kend., Dick.. Thom. h “cleanse ;” xatagione. So this verb THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. I. KING JAMES’ VERSION. passion, put forth Ais hand, and touched him, and saith unto hin, I will; be thou clean. 42 And as soon as he had spoken, immediately the leprosy|’, departed from him, and he was cleansed. 43 And he straitly charged him, and forthwith sent him away ; 44 "And saith unto him, See thou say nothing to any man; but go thy way, shew thyself to the priest, and offer for thy cleansing those things which Moses com- manded, for a testimony unto them. 45 But he went out, and began fo publish ἐξ much, and to blaze abroad the matter, insomuch that Jesus could no more openly enter into the city, but was without in desert places: and they came to him from every quarter. is rendered v.42. As “ to cleanse concise form is adopted. τ “as he spoke;” εἰπόντος αὐτοῦ. } “he strictly charged ;” ἐμβριμησάμενος. T.), Trollope (Analecta). verbo), Bloomf. (N solete. ” is “to make clean,” the more Sharpe, Kend. GREEK TEXT. Ἂς » ,ὔ Ν a σπλαγχνισθεὶς, ἐκτείνας THY χεῖ- oO > cal , > Lal pa, ἥψατο αὐτοῦ, καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, 4 > θέλω, καθαρίσθητι. Καὶ εἰ- πόντος αὐτοῦ, εὐθέως ἀπῆλθεν am αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπρα, καὶ ἐκαθαρί- ΄ 7 an. ** Καὶ ἐμβριμησάμενος > cal > / ε / _ Ben αὐτῷ, εὐθέως ἐξέβαλεν αὐτὸν, 44 Ν λέ Se es "O ὃ Ν καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, “Opa, μηδενὶ \ vv > > o& μηδὲν εἴπῃς: ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυ- δ a a δ - τὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ, καὶ προσέ- veyke περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου ἃ προσέταξε Μωσῆς, εἰς μαρτύ- ριον αὐτοῖς. “ἢ Ὃ δὲ ἐξελθὼν "΄ , \ Ν ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ δια- ἊΣ , a φημίζειν τὸν λόγον, ὥστε μηκέτι ‘ , lol ΕΣ / αὐτὸν δύνασθαι φανερῶς εἰς πό- 5 ΄- » , Aw εἰσελθεῖν: ἀλλ᾽ ἔξω ἐν ἐρή- , 3 Ε Ν μοις τόποις ἦν, καὶ ἤρχοντο πρὸς apes , αὐτὸν πανταχόθεν. REVISED VERSION. moved with compassion, stretch- ed out his hand and touched him, and saith to him, I will; be cleansed. And ‘as he spoke, immediately the leprosy depart- ed from him and he was cleans- ed. And the strictly charged him, and immediately sent him away: and saith to him, See that thou say ‘nothing to any one; but ἸρῸ show thyself to the priest and offer ™on account of thy cleansing, "what Moses com- manded, for a testimony to them. But he went out, and began to publish it much, and to blaze abroad the matter, so that °Jesus could Pno longer openly enter tinto a city, but was without in desert places: and they came to him from every quarter. offering). take Μωῦσῆς. Kend., Rob. (in © « Jesus.” « Straitly ” is ob- 45 the plural form of ἃ, it evidently refers to τὸ δῶρον (the gift, Comp. Matt. 8 : 4, προσένεγκε τὸ δῶρον, 6 προσέ- Wakef. As Ἰησοῦς is not expressed in the text, although it is understood, in αὐτὸ», “ Jesus” should be ztalicized. Sharpe, Wesley, and Pechy have inserted “he.” But as the k “ (nothing)—to any one;” Thom. 85. Fr. “ (rien)—a personne.” μηδενὶ. Kend., 1“g0;” ὕπαγε. Wesley, Dick., Wakef., Sharpe, Campbell, Thom., Pechy. “To go one’s way,” is obsolete. In the E. V. this verb in the imperative is often rendered simply by “ go,” as in Matt.5:41; 9:6; 18:15; 19:21; 20:4. Rev.10:8. ™ “on account of thy cleansing ;” περὲ τοῦ καϑαρισμοῦ σου. ᾿ Castalio, “ ob tui purgationem ;” S. Fr., “au sujet de ta purifi- catione ;” Iber., “con respecto ἅ tu limpia.” Rob. on the use of περὶ with the genitive (2), remarks that it is employed when the genitive indicates the ground, motive, or occasion of the action, i. g., on account of, because of. “For,” in this instance, is am- biguous. Common readers often suppose that the offering was enjoined to effect a complete cleansing, instead of being a testi- mony that the sufferer was already healed. » “what ;” ἃ. Wakef., Kend., Wesley. De Wette, “ was;” 5. Fr. “ce que ;” Span. and Iber., “lo que.” Notwithstanding reference to Christ is beyond a doubt, the above supplement is correct. De Wette, “er;” Iber., “ [Jesus]” (bracketed, as a supplement) ; Belg., “ hij.” P “no Jonger ;” μηκέτε. Kend., Campbell, Thom., Rob. So (E. V.), 1 Thess. 3:1,5. 1Tim.5:23. 1 Pet. 4 : 2. ” a “into a city;” εἰς πόλιν. Pechy, Thom., Sharpe, Q (“a town”); De Wette, “in eine Stadt ;” Fritz. “inire oppida.” From the fact that Christ “ preached (vy. 39) in their synagogues throughout all Galilee” (comp. Matt. 4 : 23-25), and from the parallel Luke 4 : 44, where the healing of the leper is said to have occurred ἐν sud τῶν πόλεων, “in one of the cities,” i. e., of Galilee, it seems clear that it was not at Capernaum, where Christ had been before he commenced his mission through Gali- lee. Hence, there is no reason to suppose that the article is omitted before πόλων, because the context renders that noun definite, and that Capernaum is indicated. Probably the early English translators inserted the article, because Capernanm is noticed in ch. 2: 1. 10 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. II. KING JAMES’ VERSION. CHAP. II. AND again he entered into Capernaum, after some days; and it was noised that he was in the house. 2 And straightway ety were gathered together, insomuch that GREEK TEXT. CHAP. IL. Καὶ πάλιν εἰσῆλθεν εἰς Ka- περναοὺμ δὲ ἡμερῶν: καὶ ἠκού- Capernaum, after some days; σθη ὅτι εἰς οἶκόν ἐστι: 7 θέως συνήχθησαν πολλοὶ, ὥστε REVISED VERSION. CHAP. II. AND again he entered into 1 and *it was heard that he was in the house. And immediately 2 many were assembled, ‘so that 2 καὶ εὐ- there was no room to receive μηκέτι χωρεῖν μηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν ἄργοῃ «the place before the them, no, not so much as about / 3 , ΄- Ἂν / O the door: and he preached {πο θύραν" καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λό- door could ‘no longer ‘contain word unto them. | VOU. 3 And they came unto hin, > Καὶ ἔρχονται πρὸς av- them: and "Π6 spoke the word to them. And they come to 3 Ν Ν a > / παρε τα 5 ye TOV, παραλυτικὸν φέροντες. aipo-|, . ppd ΤΑ Sere 3 bringing one sick of the palsy, ep pep ΠΡΟ rs bringing ‘a paralytic, ‘car- which was borne of four. 4 And when they could not come nigh unto him for the press, Guy ΄ μενον ὑπὸ τεσσαρων. 4 Ν \ Kat ΜῊ vied “by four. And Jas they 4 ΄, 7 > a XN δυνάμενοι προσεγγίσαι αὐτῷ διὰ could not "come near him *on Ν yy > / \ they uncovered the roof where he|Tov ὄχλον, ἀπεστεγασαν Tnv| account of *the crowd, ?they un- * “it was heard ;” ἠκούσθη. Wesley, Wakef., Pechy. Bele., “het wierd gehoord ;” Vulg., Mont., Beza, Eras., Fritz., “ audi- tum est;” S. Fr. “on oui dire.” Heb. N. T., savin The verb is used impersonally, or as equivalent to ἡ ἀκοή ἠχούσϑη, as in John 9 : 32, οὐκ ἠκούσθη, and may be rendered, “ they heard.” (Kend.) Though less literal, this phrase would accord better with our idiom. It is, therefore, recommended as an alternative rendering. Syr., wee. > “were assembled ;” συνήχϑησαν. Kend., Wakef. So (E. V.) Matt. 26:57; 28:12. Acts4:31; 11:26. * “so that;” ὥστε. Rob. This is a common rendering in the E. V. a « (not) even;” μηδὲ, verbo). Iber., “ (ni) aun.” Wakef., Dick., Thom., Rob. (in ¢ “the place;” τὰ (μερῆ subauditur). De Wette, “der Platz ;” Fritz, “locus ;” S. Fr. “Vespace.” Ζὰ refers to the πρόϑυρον, the Latin vestibulum. “Locus ante januam domitis vacuus, per quem a via aditus accessusque ad aedes est.” Aulus Gellius, quoted by Liddell. Bloomf. (in loco), “ The sense of the passage is, ‘so that there was no longer space for them in the vestibule’ [much less in the house itself].” Γ΄ “even—no longer ;” μηκέτε-- μηδὲ. Fritz, “non amplius ne.” Μηδὲ alone in the middle of a sentence, is equivalent to “not even” (Rob.) ; but as there is a double negative, the above rendering in which the negative of μηκέτε is retained, presents the thought of the text. Pechy has, “not even—any longer.” ® “contain ;” χωρεῖν. Wakef., Thom., Q. Rob. (in loco) ; S. Fr., “ contenir.” So (E. V.) John 2:6; 21 : 25. » “he spoke ;” ἐλάλει. Kend., Pechy, Wesley. Vulg., Beza, “loquebatur ;” Span. and Iber., “ hablaba.” i “a paralytic ;” παραλυτικὸν. Wesley, Kend., Campbell, Pechy. Span. and Iber., “un paralitico.” As this word is in common use, it is preferable to the periphrasis of the E. V. This rendering should be uniform. } “carried ;” atoduevoy. Kend., Pechy, Campbell, Rob., Greenf. (αὔρω). So (1. V.) John 5:10. k “by ;” toro. See ch. 1 : 5, note τῇ. 1 “as.” Pechy, Wakef. S. Fr., “ comme ;” Span., “ como ;” Ttal., “come.” Butt.,3144:1. (The particle is used) “ instead of a minor clause, with a conjunction, e. g., as, because, after that, of, ete.” Kiihner, 3312 : 1. ™ “come near ;” προσεγγίσαι. Kend., Sharpe, Wakef. “ Near” is preferred to “nigh,” as more common and euphonous. ἃ “on account of ;” δεὰ (cum accus.). Rob. “ For,” in this sense, is nearly obsolete. ° “the crowd;” τὸν ὄχλον. Kend., Wesley, Sharpe, Dick., Campbell. Vulg., Beza, Eras., “turba;” S. Fr., “la foule ;” Span. and Iber., “ gentio;” Liddell, “a throng of people, an irregular crowd.” A special sense of this word is that of the populace, twrba, as opposed to δῆμος (the people). De Wette, “wegen des Volkes.” LIrender this word wnzformly by “ crowd.” There is no instance in which that word is not the proper equiva- lent, at least, in this gospel. It is thus distinguished from “ mul- titude” (πλῆϑος), and “ people” (δῆμος and λαός). P “they unroofed ;” ἀσεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην. Rob., Liddell (ἀπεστεγάζω). “To uncover the roof,” implies that something which coyered the roof was remoyed. Fritz., comparing this passage with the parallel Luke 5 : 18, arrives at the following judicious result, “ Sustulement tectum ἐνὶ, ubi erat, eo ipso loco effodisse bajalos tegulas, cui Jesum scirent subjectum.” In a few words, the roof was flat, the house being covered with tiles, and these overspread with a cement. The unroofing consisted in re- moving a portion of this covering by digging through it, or digging out the tiles and cement (ἐξορύξαντες), and thus making an opening, through which the bearers could lower the para- lytic. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. II. 11 KING JAMES’ VERSION. was: and when they had broken it up, they let down the bed wherein the sick of the palsy lay. 5 When Jesus saw their faith, he said unto the sick of the palsy, Son, thy sins be forgiven thee. 6 But there were certain of the scribes sitting there, and reason- ing in their hearts, 7 Why doth this man thus speak blasphemies? who can for- give sins but God only ? 8 And immediately, when Jesus perceived in his spirit that they so reasoned within themselves, he said unto them, Why reason ye these things in your hearts ? 9 Whether is it easier to say G&S > lal Comevol Ev ταις GREEK , Ψ > heey ΄ στέγην ὕπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες a ‘ ΄ 3.0}. ek Fe χαλῶσι τὸν κράββατον, eh @ ὁ Ν / παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο. \ Fig - \ > - δὲ ὁ ᾿Πησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν ΄ “ a {2 λεγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ, Texvor, > ,ὔ [2 « Ἃ ἀφεωνταί σοι αἱ ἁμαρτίαι σου. + 5 ,ὔ ΄ σαν δέ τινες τῶν γραμμα- , > 5 τέων ἐκεῖ καθήμενοι, Kat διαλογι- Τὶ οὗτος οὕτω λαλεῖ βλασφη- μίας; τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρ- τίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς, ὁ Θεός; εὐθέως ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ, ὅτι οὕτως δια- λογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, εἶπεν av- τοῖς, Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν; TEXT. REVISED VERSION. roofed %¢the place where he was ; and "digging through, they let down ‘the couch on which tthe paralytic lay. And Jesus "see- ὃ ing their faith, vsaith to the paralytic, ~Child, thy sins are forgiven thee. But there were 6 xsome of the scribes sitting there, and reasoning in their hearts, Why doth this man thus yutter *revilings? Who can 7 forgive sins *but one, even God? And immediately, when 8 Jesus perceived in his spirit that they *thus reasoned within themselves, he said to them, °Why do ye reason these things in your hearts? ‘Which is 9 > ἰδὼν Us > “ καρδίαις αὐτῶν, 8 Kat 9 yom + τι ἐστιν a “the place.” This supplement is necessary to complete the sentence. So Beza has the supplement loc’. S. Fr., “ de lieu.” τ “dioging through ;” ἐξορύξαντες. Greenf., Bretsch. (in loco), “ perfodientes ;” Hras., “perfosso tecto;” Beza, “ eoque perfosso.” The supplement of the E. V., “ τ, is dropped as un- necessary. * “the couch;” τὸν κράββατον. Wesley, Pechy, Wakef., Campbell, Newcome, Dick., Thomson. Rob., Bretsch., “lectus vilior et humilior, unum tanttiim hominem capiens.” So in all cases. The rendering is uniform, in this Revision. t See v. 3, note i. a “seeing 35” ἐδὼ». Wesley, Sharpe, Pechy, Kend. §. Fr., “ yoyant.” : v “saith ;” λέγει. Pechy, Wakef., Sharpe. w « Ohild;” τέκνου. Wakef., Pechy. De Wette, “ Kind ;” S. Fr., “mon enfant.” There is not the slightest necessity for departing from the literal signification of this word. See Liddell. x “some ;” cues. Wakef., Kend., Dick., Rob. So often in BE. V. Υ “utter;” λαλεῖ. So 2 Cor.12:4, E. V. Our idiom de- mands that the Greek verb should be thus rendered before a complement, such as “ revilings.” So Rev. 10:3, 4. “ Utter” often oceurs in the E. V. as synonymous with “speak.” Job B:10. Ps. 106:2; 119:171. Prov.14:5. Isa. 32:6. The sense of AwAée is often modified by the adjuncts. Rob. = “yevilings ;” Bhaopnutas. De Wette, “ Lasterungen.” This word and its cognate verb have acquired in modern usage, a sense which does aot accord with biblical usage. Hence, it should be tra) slated. 1t has been made, in ecclesiastical use, to compre- hen { all kiuds of irreverence toward God or his truth, wrong opinions, mistaken views, and interpretations of the Scriptures, and has been used as a convenient missile by angry polemics. Linwood, as quoted by Webster, gives the following ecclesrastzcal definition : “ Blasphemy is an injury offered to God, by denying that which is due and belonging to him, or attributing to him that which is not agreeable to his nature.” See Rob. on this word, and ch. 3 : 28, note. See also G. Campbell's Preliminary Dissertations to Four Gospels. 2 “but one, even God?” εἰ μὴ εἷς, ὃ Θεός; Pechy. Fritz., “nisi unus, nempe Deus.” ‘There is much difference in the punctuation of this sentence in different copies of the Text. Recept. Erasmus, Leusden, Mill (as reprinted in Bagster’s Polymicrian Text), Wilson (Gr. Test., Philad., 1831), Robinson (Harmony), and Bloomfield (N.'T.), have no comma after εἶξε. In the critical Hditions, the comma is omitted by Knapp and Tittmann, and inserted by Scholz. If the comma is disregarded, then the rendering of this passage in the H. V. gives the true sense. I follow Bagster’s punctuation and, therefore, render as above. In the parallel passage Matt. 19 : 17, Bloomfield inserts the comma. So in his text of Mark 10 : 17, where this phrase is repeated. Ὁ “thus ;” οὕτως. Wakef., Sharpe, Dick., Thom. So in v. 7. ¢ “ Why do ye reason;” 7ί---διαλογίξεσϑε. Campbell, Pe- chy. The construction should harmonize with that of v. 7, “ Why doth this man,” ete. Usage fully sanctions “do” in interrogative sentences. ἃ « Which is easier ;” ΤΊ ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον. Wakef., Dick., Kend. De Wette, “ Was ist leichter;” Belg., “ Wat is ligte- lijker ;” S. Ἐπ. “ Qu’est-ce qui est le plus facile ;” Vulg., Mont., “quid est facilius.” “Whether,” as used here in the E. \Wajet obsolete. 12 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. II. KING JAMES’ VERSION. to the sick of the palsy, Thy sins be forgiven thee; or to say, Arise, and take up thy bed, and walk? — 10 But that ye may know that the Son of man hath power on earth to forgive sins, (he saith to the sick of the palsy,) 11 I say unto thee, Arise, and take up thy bed, and go thy way into thine house. 12 And immediately he arose, took up the bed, and went forth before them all; insomuch that they were all amazed, and glori- fied God, saying, We never saw it on this fashion. 13 And he went forth again by the sea-side ; and all the multitude resorted unto him, and he taught them. 14 And as he passed by, he saw Levi the son of Alpheus, sitting at the receipt of custom, and said GREEK TEXT. εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτι- κῷ; ᾿Αφέωνταί σοι αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, "Εγειραι, καὶ ἀρόν σου τὸν κράββατον, καὶ περιπάτει; 10 ¢. \ 2Q7 a > , ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε, ὅτι ἐξουσίαν 2 «ε eX >» > / > ΄ ἔχει ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι τ τως 3 2 ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἁμαρτίας, (λέγει τῷ ° 1 Ν / 2, παραλυτικῷ.) é Σοὶ λέγω, ἐγει- Ν 2 pat, καὶ apov τὸν κράββατον σου, > Ν ‘Gael καὶ ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἰκὸν σου. / 2 Καὶ ἠγέρθη εὐθέως, Kat ἄρας τὸν κράββατον, ἐξῆλθεν ἐ ἐναντίον πάντων: ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάν- τας, καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν Θεὸν, λέ- co 2Q/ “ ΕΗ γοντας, τι οὐδέποτε οὕτως εἰ- δομεν. 15. Kai ἐξῆλθε πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν’ καὶ πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτὸν, καὶ ἐδίδα- ᾽ ͵΄ 14 τσ να ΄ σκεν αὑτους. «Καὶ παράγων 5: An XN fal εἶδε Aeviv τὸν τοῦ ᾿Αλφαίου, id Ν καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον, καὶ REVISED VERSION. easier, to say to the paralytic, ‘Thy sins are forgiven thee ; or to say, ‘Rise, and take up thy couch and walk? But that ye 10 may know that the Son of man hath *fpower on earth to forgive sins (he saith to the paralytic), I say to thee, *Rise, and take up thy couch, and *go into thy - il - house. And immediately he 12 rose, ‘and taking up the couch, went forth before ‘them all, *so that they were all amazed, and glorified God, saying, We never And he went 13 forth again by the sea-side and saw Wf =thus. all the crowd came to him, and he taught them. And as "he 14 passed along, he saw Levi, the son of Alpheus, sitting at ethe unto him, Follow me. And he λέγει arose, and followed him. > o αὐτῷ, t 4 ᾿Ακολούθει 4 a Kai ἀναστὰς ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ. μοι. re τον and said to him, Fol- low me. And he rose and fol- e «Thy sins As the article is used here in place of the possessive pronoun, it would not seem necessary to italicize it, as a supplement. See Kiihner, 3244. 4. Crosby, Greek Gram., ὃ 482. 5” Αἱ ἁμαρτίαι. f «Rise.” As a genera. rule, “rise” is preferable to “ arise.” It accords with our present usus loguendi. ff or, authority. So Wesley and Wakef. & « Rise,” “arise” is now restricted to poetry. It is deemed best to follow the modern orthography, in most cases. Kend., Wesley, Wakef. See ch. 1 : 44, h “905” ὕπαγε. note 1. 1 «And taking up;” καὶ ἄρας. Wesley, Dick., “and tak- ing ;” Thom., “and having taken ;” S. Fr., “et ayant pris.” By preserving the participial construction, καὶ has its proper place, and accuracy and literality are secured. } “them all;” ἐναντίον πάντων. Wakef. This pronoun is really supplementary, and should be ¢talicized. It was taken from the parallel Luke 5 : 25, where it is found in the text, ἐνώ- πίον αὐτῶν. Wulg., Mont., Beza, “coram omnibus;” S. Fr., “ devant tous ;” Belg., “in aller tegenwoordigheid ;” Iber., “ de- lante de todos [ellos].” k “so that ;” wore. Wesley, Kend., Dick., Sharpe, Rheims, Vulg., Mont., “ita ut ;” Iber., “asi que.” Rob. (in loco.) Bret- schneider, ὥστε, “In media oratione, et ubi pendet ab anteceden- tibus, est conjunctio eventum indicans: wt, τα ut.” So (E. V.) Matt. 8 : 28; 13:2,32. Mark 3:20; 4:1; 15 δὲ ete: 1 “7t.” This word is a supplement, and should be ttalzcized. τὰ “thus ;” οὕτως. Kend., Pechy, Wesley, Rob. (E. V.) Matt. 26:54. Luke1:25; 2:48. John4: 6. » “he passed along;” παράγων. Kend., Campbell, Dick. use the participial construction, “passing along.” Rob. (παρά- yo), Intransitive, “to pass along, to pass by.” Bretschneider, « pratereo.” ° «the tax-office ;” τὸ τελώνιον. Sharpe, Dick. As this word is derived from τέλος which is generic, and applicable tc any zmpost, like our word “ tax,” it may be properly rendered by “tax-office.” Imposts, or taxes of all kinds were collected by the τελώναι, the Roman publicant. “ Toll-office,” or “ custom-house,” are too limited in their significations. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. II. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 15 And it came to pass, that as Jesus sat at meat in his house, many publicans and sinners sat also together with Jesus and his disciples; for there were many, and they followed hin. 16 And when the scribes and Pharisees saw him eat with pub- licans and sinners, they said unto his disciples, How is it that he eateth and drinketh with pub- licans and sinners ? 17 When Jesus heard if, he saith unto them, They that are whole, have no need of the phy- sician, but they that are sick: 1 came not to call the righteous, but sinners, to repentance. 18 And the disciples of John, and of the Pharisees, used to fast : P “he;” αὐτὸν. The reference of the pronoun to Jesus is GREEK TEXT. 3: ΄ » “ ΄- Kai ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ κατακεῖ- Ν cal a σθαι αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ, . / Αἱ - x Ge καὶ πολλοὶ τελῶναι καὶ ἁμαρτω- / (αὐ ΕΣ a Aol συνανέκειντο τῷ ᾿Ϊ]ησοῦ καὶ r cal > lal a ΑΝ τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ: ἦσαν γὰρ \ Ἂς » / > na πολλοὶ, Kat ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ. 16 καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ Φα- al ’ / Ν 5 ,ὔ ρισαῖοι, ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐσθίοντα \ fal ΄ « μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτω- a + “ ΄σ λῶν, ἔλεγον τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐ- col a7 A lol cal τοῦ, Ti ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει καὶ πίνει; / «>? - 1 Καὶ ἀκούσας ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς λέγει ΄σ / 7] © αὐτοῖς, Ov χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ / > col « nr ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ κακῶς ἢ 4 ἔχοντες. οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι δι- / ἰλλὰ « Ἂ ἈΝ > καίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλοὺς εἰς με- tf 3 « τάνοιαν. ὃ Καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθη- ἊΝ > 4 Ν « cot ταὶ Iwavvov καὶ ot τῶν Φαρι- REVISED VERSION. lowed him. And it came to pass, that as Phe sreclined at. table in his house, many ttax- gatherers and sinners ‘also tre- clined with Jesus and his dis- ciples, for they were many, and they followed him. And when the seribes and the Pharisees saw him veating with “the tax- gatherers and sinners, they said to his disciples, Why is ἐξ that he eateth and drinketh with xthe tax-gatherers and sinners ? yAnd Jesus hearing it, saith to them, Those who are well, have no need of "ἃ physician, but those who are sick. I came not to call the righteous, but sinners. And the disciples of John and ‘the Pharisees, used to fast ; and they retained for greater accuracy. So Wakef., Dick., G. Camp. 15 15 15 5. not as clear as in 0}. 1 : 45 (see note in this verse), hence I prefer a literal translation. So Pechy, Sharpe. Vulg., Eras., Mont. have the pronoun (expressed or understood), while Beza and Cas- talio have introduced Jesus. Should it be deemed best to em- ploy it in the Revision, I advise that it should be dtaliczzed. 4 “reclined at table;” κατακεῖσθαι. Kend., Q., “reclined at meat;” Rob. (in loco), “to recline at table ;” Bretsch. (in verbo), “ |Dicitur] de accumbentibus mens@, accumbo ;” De Wette, “zu Tische niederlegte ;” Hras., Beza, “accumberet ;” Iber., “secostado [a la mesa].” Aveéxecwae has the same signification, when applied to the act of taking food. See Rob. on this last word. I suggest, as an alternative rendering of these two words, “recline to eat.” I deem this, to say the least, fully equal for accuracy, with “recline at table,’ while it is more concise and harmonious. ® “tax-oatherers ;” τελῶναι. Rob., Sharpe, Wakef. Most late translators have felt the necessity of employing an equivalent for the Greek, more familiar than the Latin “ publicani,” which, although introduced into the earlier English versions, has failed to become naturalized in our language. See v.14, note o. This word has been rendered wnzformly. * “also.” ‘This position of the word is demanded by our usus loquends. So Kendrick. t “reclined with ;” συναέκειντο. Rob., Q., Kend. De Wette, “Jegten sich.” See note q. It is not deemed necessary to repeat “at table,” as it occurs in this verse. * “the Pharisees ;” of Φαρισαῖοι. The article should be Fr., “les pharisiens ;” Iber., “los Fariseos ;” Belg., “ de Phari- 7ees.” Y “eating ;” ἐσϑίοντα. Thom. Beza, “ edentem.” Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, Kend., w “the tax-gatherers;” τῶν τελωνῶν. The article should not be omitted here, as τελωνῶν belongs to πολλοὶ τελῶναε in v.15. It is retained by Sharpe, Belg., De Wette, S. Fr., Span., Iber. Dick. uses the demonstrative, “ these." x See last note. y “And Jesus hearing ;” Kat ἀκούσας ὃ Ἰησοῦς. Wesley, Kend., Wakef. §. Fr. “Ht Jésus ayant entendu;” Belg., “ Ende Jesus hoorende ;” Span., “ oyendo Jesus.” = “Those who are well;” of ἰσχύοντες. Kend., Wakef., Rob., Greenf. “ Whole,” in this sense, is obsolete. α “a physician ;” ἐατροῦ. Kend., Wesley, Pechy, Wakef., Campbell, Sharpe, Dick., Thom. §. Fr., “de médecin ;” Iber., “de médecin.” The definite article is unwarranted by the text. * εἰς μετάνοιαν in the Textus Receptus was probably taken from Luke 5:31. It is rejected by Griesbach, Scholz, Lach- mann, Knapp, Tischend., Fritz., Bloomf., and bracketed by Titt- mann. Bloomf. says: “These words are wanting in many of the best MSS., in nearly all the versions, and in some Fathers.” © “the Pharisees.” Instead of of τῶν» Dageoatwy—the read ing of the Text. Recept—Griesb., Scholz, Lachmann, Tischend., Tittmann, Knapp, and Fritz. have of Φαρισαῖοι. This is recog- nized by the Vulgate. It is probably the genuine reading. It is followed by Sharpe, Dick., Wesley, Pechy, Penn. 14 \ KING JAMES’ VERSION. and they come, and say unto him, Why do the disciples of John, and of the Pharisees fast, but thy disciples fast not ? 19 And Jesus said unto them, Can the children of the bride- chamber fast, while the bride- groom is with them? As long as they have the bridegroom with them, they cannot fast. 20 But the days will come, when the bridegroom shall be taken away from them, and then shall they fast in those days. 21 No man also seweth a piece of new cloth on an old garment: else the new piece that filled it up, taketh away from the old, and the rent is made worse. 22 And no man putteth new wine into old bottles: else the new wine doth burst the bottles, and the wine is spilled, and the bottles will be marred: but new THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. II. GREEK TEXT. / if ΑΝ» σαίων νηστεύοντες" καὶ ἔρχονται 7 > Lal / ε καὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, Avari οἱ μα- A> ΄ Nace a θηταὶ ᾿]ωάννου καὶ οἱ τῶν Φαρι- i , ε \ \ σαίων νηστεύουσιν, οἱ δὲ σοὶ Ν μαθηταὶ οὐ νηστεύουσι; 19. Kat εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿]ησοῦς, My δύ- νανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος, ἐν ᾧ ὃ γυμφίος μετ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐστι, vn στεύειν; ὅσον χρόνον μεθ᾽ ἑαυ- lad yx \ / > 7 τῶν ἐχουσι TOV νυμφίον, ov du- / 3 / νανται νηστεύειν: *” ἐλεύσονται Wk , a 5 nye ER) > δὲ ἡμεραι ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ am av- a ε 7 Ν / / τῶν ὃ νυμφίος, Kal τότε νηστεύ- > 5 a e / σουσιν ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις. ἊΝ > Ἂν > / δ, Ἵ καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους > 7 3 ERE, aN: Te Ve ἀγνάφου ἐπιῤῥάπτει ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ: εἰ δὲ μὴ, αἴρει τὸ πλή- ρωμα αὐτοῦ τὸ καινὸν τοῦ πα- λαιοῦ, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνε- 2 Ν ᾽ Ν ΄ 3. ται. ~~ καὶ οὐδεὶς βάλλει οἶνον ΄, > ) \ / > \ νέον εἰς ἄσκους ,παλαιους" εἰ δὲ x μὴ, ῥήσσει ὁ οἶνος ὁ νέος τοὺς ἀσκοὺς, καὶ ὁ οἶνος ἐκχεῖται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοὶ ἀπολοῦνται: ἀλλὰ οἶνον REVISED VERSION. come, and say to him, Why do the disciples of John and “those of the Pharisees fast, but thy disciples fast not? And Jesus said to them, Can ‘the sons of the bride-chamber fast while the bridegroom is with them? As long as they have the bride- groom with them, they can not fast. when the bridegroom ‘will be But the days will come taken away from them, and then they *will fast in those days. »And no one seweth a piece ‘of undressed cloth on an old gar- ment; else the new piece which filled it up, taketh away from the old and a worse rent is made. *And no one putteth new wine into old bottles; else the new wine doth burst the bottles and the wine 115 spilt, and the bottles ™will be ruined : ἃ ΠΟ ΒΘ. imperfect if οἱ is disregarded. tence is, οὗ μαϑηταὶ. 8. Fr., “ ceux des pharisiens ;” Iber., “los e the sons; of Campbell, Dick., Pechy. If the ellipsis is supplied, the sen- “Those” may be properly substituted for “the disciples,” as that expression occurs before the conjunction. ” ot viot. Kend. Vulg. “fli.” The υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος were the same with the φέλοι The sentence is man.” de los Fariseos.” , Mont., Eras., Beza, Dick., Campbell. in almost all cases, or with a negative, “ any one.” Liddell, and Bretsch. on this word. i“ of undressed cloth ;” édxovs ἀγνάφου. Bretsch., “fullonem nondum expertus ;” Vulg., 21 22 οὐδεὶς at the commencement of v. 22 by “and no man.” γι dale and Geneva give the conjunction its proper place, “ Also nu Οὐδείς, when standing alone, may be rendered “ no one,” See Rob., Q., Pechy, Thom., τοῦ νυμφίου. If the idiom which is found here, should be dis- regarded, we might say, with some late translators, “ companions of the bridegroom ;” this, howeyer, is a paraphrase. f «will be taken away ;” ἀπαρϑῇ. As this is the language of prediction, “will” is the proper auxiliary for the future. Sharpe, Kend. & «will fast ;” Thom., Wakef. h « And no one ;” Καὶ οὐδεὶς. Pechy, Dick., Kend. Mont., Eras., “et nemo;” De Wette, “Und niemand.” There is not sufficient authority for dropping xa from the text, as has been done by some critics. On this omission Fritz. remarks: “ Per- peram, nam copula hoe loco opus est.” The position of “ also” in the E. V. presents a thought which is not found in the text. The force of καὶ here, is “ furthermore.” The E. V. renders xat γνηστεύσουσιν. See last note. Pechy, Q., Kend., Sharpe, “rudis ;” Beza, “impexum ,” Belg., “ ongevold” (unfulled) ; De Wette, “ ungewalktes.” } “a worse rent is made ;” χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται. Pechy, Dick., Bloomf. (Annot.) In the nature of things, the former rent is supposed to exist no longer, when the “old cloth” is mended. As σχέσμα is anarthrous, the above rendering is appro- priate. k “ And no one;” Kai οὐδεὶς. Thom., Dick., Wakef., Sharpe. De Wette, “ Und niemand ;” S. Fr., “et personne ne.” See v. 21, note h. 1 “ig spilt.” This preterite of “spill” is used as it harmonizes with the pronunciation and is equally correct with “spilled.” Sa (BH. V.) 2 Sam. 14 : 14, “as water spilt on the ground.” Liddell, Bretsch. “ Ruin,” “Marred” is obsolete. ” m “will be ruined;” ἀπολοῦνται. as a verb, occurs in the E. V., Isa. 3 : 8. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. II. 15 KING JAMES’ VERSION. wine must be put into new bot- tles. 23 And it came to pass, that he went through the corn-fields on the sabbath-day ; and his dis- ciples began, as they went, to pluck the ears of corn. 24 And the Pharisees said unto him, Behold, why do they on the sabbath-day that which is not law- ful? 25 And he said unto them, Have ye never read what David did when he had need, and was an hungered, he and they that were with him ? 26 How he went into the house of God, in the days of Abiathar the high priest, and did eat the shew-bread, which is not lawful to eat, but for the priests, and gave also to them which were with him ? 27 And he said unto them, The GREEK TEXT. / > 5 ἊΝ x νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινοὺς BAn- 3 τέον. 3 / vA °° Kai ἐγένετο παραπορεύε- BLN ΣῚ ° ΄ ἊΣ σθαι αὐτὸν ἐν τοῖς σάββασι διὰ Lol / la © TOV σπορίμων, καὶ ἤρξαντο οἱ \ > a ε ΩΣ lal / μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ὃδὸν ποιεῖν τίλ- δ. fe υ e λοντες τοὺς στάχυας. “ καὶ οἱ a ΕΣ > YA Φαρισαῖοι ἔλεγον αὐτῷ, “Ide, τί Lal 5 o , [ ποιοῦσιν ἐν τοῖς σάββασιν, ὃ » γ΄ 5 Ν οὐκ ἔξεστι; “ἢ Καὶ αὐτὸς ἔλεγεν » lal / αὐτοῖς, Οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε, τί ἐποίησε Aap, ὅτε χρείαν. ἔσχε καὶ ἐπείνασεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ per’ αὐτοῦ; “ὃ πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν 53 cat “ ΄ cal οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐπὶ A βιάθαρ τοῦ > / QA \ a ἀρχιερέως, καὶ TOUS ἄρτους τῆς / 5, A > wy προθέσεως ἐφαγεν, οὗς οὐκ ἔξε- στι φαγεῖν εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσι, καὶ ἔδωκε καὶ τοῖς σὺν αὐτῷ οὖσι; “Ὁ Κιαὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς, To σάββα- τον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο, REVISED VERSION. but new wine must be put into new bottles. And it came to 23 pass, that he went throuch the fields of grain on *the sabbath, and his disciples began, as they went, to pluck the rears of grain. And the Pharisees said to him, *Behold, why rare they doing ‘on the sabbath that which is not lawful? And he 25 said to them, Have yenever read what David did, when he had need, and twas hungry, he and those with him? how he went 26 into the house of God, in the days of Abiathar the high priest, and "ate ‘the show-bread, which it is not lawful “for any to eat, xexcept the priests, and gave also to those who were with him? And he said to them, The Sabbath was made for man,’ not man for the Sab- bo 4 no κι » “through the fields of grain ;” dca τῶν σπορίμων. Dick., “ grain-fields.” “sown,” hence sometimes “ fit for sowing ;’ land.” Like the Latin “sata,” it is also used for the crops grow- “agrt consitt, segetes.” it refers to the crops, the grain standing in the fields. obviously generic, it is properly rendered by “ grain,” or “ fields of grain.” “Grain” being the name of the edible portions of cer- tain plants, which constitute the chief food of man and beast, as See Webster on “ Grain.” Kend., Pechy, Sharpe, So in v. 27, 28, Wee τὸ σάββατον is proper- “un sabbat.” ing in the fields, segetes. Bretsch., wheat, rye, barley, maize, and oats. ° “the Sabbath;” τοῖς σάββασι. Dick., Campbell. ly rendered by “ Sabbath.” Syriac, jDaac. S. Fr., note s. P “ears of grain;” στάχυας. Rob., Kend., Dick. See note ἢ on this verse. a“ Behold!” *Zde. hortative particle, lo! behold! Rob. render it as an imperative “see,” or “look.” I deem the proper force of the word, an exclamation point is Vulg., Montanus, Beza, Eras., “ Hece!” Iber.,| though not italicized. The conjunction was taken from the Vulg., where the “et non homo propter sabbatum.” Mont., and Castalio do not employ “ et.” Pechy, Iber., De Wette, Belg. placed after it. “Mira!” * “are they doing ;” ποιοῦσιν. The Eng. progressive form of | rendering is, It is also our mode of expressing So Wakef., Dick. the present is most accurate. present continued action. This imperative has passed over into a Several late translators Kend., ᾽ γῆ σπόρεμα, “ seed- Here As it is a “ate;” ἔφαγεν. bread.” w “ for any.” See ch. 1 : 21, sentence. “ for any.” To present what |“ except.” Sharpe. ® “on the Sabbath.” The literal sense of this adjective is ley, Wakef., Sharpe. x “except the priests.” ment “any,” it should not be expressed before “ priests.” See y. 23, note o. Kend., Dick., Wes- S. Fr., “au sabbat;” Syr. διῶ. t “was hungry ;” ἐπείνεσεν. Wesley, Kend. So Mark 11:12. “Was an hungered ” is obsolete. Wesley, Kend., Thom., Sharpe, Wakef. There is no emphasis, which demands the word “ did.” Y “show-bread.” 'This orthography is demanded by the correct mode of writing the verb of which it is a derivate, and it har- monizes with the pronunciation. So Wesley, Webster, “ show- This supplement is necessary to complete the If no supplement is used, then an entire change in the structure of the sentence js necessary, such as, “ which none were allowed to eat, except the priests.” The phraseology of the E. V. violates the propriety of our language. So Wesley and Pechy, As “for” occurs before the supple- Kend., y “The conjunction “and” of the E. V. is really a supplement It is omitted as superfluous. So Kend., Eras., Beza, No conjunction in 16 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. III. KING JAMES’ VERSION. sabbath was made for man, and not man for the sabbath : 28 Therefore, the Son of man is Lord also of the sabbath. CHAP. III. AnD he entered again into the synagogue; and there was a man there which had a withered hand. 2 And they watched him, whether he would heal him on the sabbath-day ; that they might accuse him. 3 And he saith unto the man which had the withered hand, Stand forth. 4 And he saith unto them, Is it | » lawful to do good on the sabbath- days, or to do evil? to save life, or to kill? but they held their peace. 5 And when he had looked round about on them with anger, being grieved for the hardness of their hearts, he saith unto the man, Stretch forth thine hand. And he stretched ἐξ out: and his 8 “to see.” voir ;” Ttal., “ per vedere.” Tyndale, Thom., Campbell. This supplement is necessary, if we | and Geneva haye, GREEK TEXT. ΘΕ, a \ Ν / ovx ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ σάββατον. 28 Ὁ [es eae) Pa eG a ὥστε κύριος ἐστιν ὃ υἱὸς TOU ἀνθρώπου καὶ τοῦ σαββάτου. CHAP. Iii. KAI εἰσῆλθε πάλιν εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, καὶ ἢν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρω- πος ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα, 2 καὶ παρετήρουν αὐτὸν εἰ τοῖς σάββασι θεραπεύσει αὐτὸν, ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ. ὃ καὶ λέ- yee τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ ἐξηραμμένην ἔχοντι τὴν χείρα, "ἔγειραι εἰς τὸ μέσον. * Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, ξεστι τοῖς σάββασιν ἀγαθο- ποιῆσαι, ἢ κακοποιῆσαι; ψυχὴν σῶσαι, ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι; Οἱ δὲ ἐσιώπων. > καὶ περιβλεψάμενος αὐτοὺς μετ᾽ ὀργῆς, συλλυπούμε- νος ἐπὶ τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν, λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ, ” Ek- τεινον τὴν χεῖρά cov. Καὶ ἐξέ. τεινε, καὶ ἀποκατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ REVISED VERSION. bath: Therefore, the Son of 28 Man is Lord also of the sab- bath. CHAP. IiIl. Anp he entered again into 1 the synagogue; and there was aman there who had a wither- ed hand. And they watched 2 him, *¢o see whether he would heal him on *the sabbath; that they might accuse him. And 3 he saith to the man, who had the withered hand, ‘Rise up in the midst. And he saith to 4 them, Is it lawful to do good on “the sabbath, or to do evil? to save life, or to kill? But ‘they were silent. And when 5 he had looked fround on them with anger, ®erieving for the hardness of their hearts, he saith to the man, *Stretch out thy hand. And he stretched G. Fr., 8. F'r., “pour | here, and in the parallel passage already quoted. ‘Tyndale, Cran., “ Arise, and stand in the midst.” would not violate our idiom. The sentence is awkward, and quite remote from our mode of speaking and writing. Still, if we drop αὐτὸν, this rendering will then be correct, “And they watched whether he would heal.” JI submit this as an alternative rendering. The sense is preserved by this, and no supplement is necessary. Beza omits αὐτὸν, and translates, “ observabant an sabbato sanaturus esset eum.” > “the sabbath.” See ch. 2 : 23, note o. ¢ “Rise up in the midst ;” Ἔγειραι eis τὸ μέσον. Pechy. Dick., “ Arise in the midst.” Wesley and Campbell, “ Stand up in the midst.” Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castalio, “ Surge in medium.” Belg., “ Staat op in het midden.” §. Fr., “ Léve-toi la au milieu.” Span., “ Levantate en medio.” Iber., Levéntate |i ponte] en medio.” The text here is elliptical; in Mark 6 : 8, the ellipsis is applied, Ἔγειραι καὶ στῆϑε εἰς τὸ μέσον, B. V., “Rise up, and stand forth in the midst.” I deem the above literal rendering more appropriate. By supplying the ellipsis from Luke, we might say, “ Rise up, and stand forth in the midst. It is obvious that ἔγεεραε should he rendered wniformly qd “the sabbath.” See ch. 2 : 23, note o. ¢ “they were silent ;” οἱ---ὀἐσιώπων. Kend., Pechy, Dick., Thom., Camp. “ΤῸ hold one’s peace” is antiquated. f “had looked round;” περιβλεψάμενος. Pechy, Kend,, Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, Thom. “About,” which often occurs as an appendage to “round” and “around,” in the E. V., is super- fluous and entirely obsolete. & «“ orieving ;” συλλυπούμενος, Kendrick, Wesley. “ being grieved,” Sharpe. h “Stretch out ;” Ἔκτεινου. Sharpe, Camp,, Wakef., Kend. Ex, eompounded with this same verb, in the next clause, is ren- dered by “ out ;” ἐξέτεινε, “he stretched zt out.” This unneces- sary departure from wniformity of translation, which the Εἰ. V. presents, originated with Tyndale. The following citations will show that other versions have avoided this error. Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal., “ extende—extendit ;” S. Fr., “¢tends— étendit ;” De Wette, “strecke—streckete ;” Iber., “ estendie— estendio ;” Ital., “ stendi—stese.” THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—C BAP. ἯΙ Wi KING JAMES’ VERSION. hand was restored whole as the other. 6 And the Pharisees went forth, and straightway took counsel with the Herodians against him, how they might destroy him. 7 But Jesus withdrew himself with his disciples to the sea: and a great multitude from Galilee followed him, and from Judea, 8 And from Jerusalem, and from Idumea, and from beyond Jordan ; and they about Tyre and Sidon, a great multitude, when they had heard what great things he did, came unto him. 9 And he spake to his disci- ples, that a small ship should wait on him, because of the mul- titude, lest they should throng him. 10 For he had healed many; insomuch that they pressed upon him for to touch him, as many as had plagues. 11 And unclean spirits, when they saw him, fell down before him, and eried, saying, Thou art the Son of God. i The reading of the Text. Recept., dyes ὡς ἡ ἄλλη, “is re- a A « la Ἂς αὐτοῦ ὑγιὴς ὡς ἡ ἄλλη. Καὶ ke ,ὔ € ΄σ fA ἐξελθόντες οἱ Φαρισαῖοι εὐθέως Ν fal « cal , μετὰ τῶν Hpwdiavav συμβου- > lal “ λιον ἐποίουν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ, ὅπως ‘ / αὐτὸν ἀπολέσωσι. ΚΑΙ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς ἀνεχώρησε μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν: καὶ πολὺ πλῆθος Ν Lod / ἀπὸ τῆς Τ αλιλαίας ἠκολούθησαν lal Ἂς “ > lal αὐτῷ, Kat ἀπὸ τῆς Lovdaias, 8 Ce > Ne / Ὁ > Ν καὶ ἀπὸ “Ἱεροσολύμων, καὶ ἀπὸ col sf col τῆς Ιδουμαίας, καὶ πέραν τοῦ » ΄ Ν « Ν , Ν Topdavou: καὶ οἱ περὶ Tvpov καὶ a lad A ze Σιδῶνα, πλῆθος πολὺ, ἀκούσαν- 3 3 oe » UA 53 XN > Tes ὅσα ἐποίει, ἦλθον πρὸς av- / 353 ΄- ΄ τόν. ° καὶ εἶπε τοῖς μαθηταῖς col ε Α αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρ- tot > lal ὃ \ ἣν Ε Ao “ a si a neh cellar smgon ΤᾺ μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτον. πολλοὺς γὰρ ἐθεράπευσεν, ὥστε ἐπιπί- πτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται, ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας" GREEK TEXT. ‘ καὶ τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα, ὅταν αὐ- XN Ἢ / > ta Tov ἐθεώρει, προσέπιπτεν αὐτῷ, ΄ “ Ν 5 καὶ ἔκραξε, λέγοντα, “Ὅτι σὺ εἶ Ρ “Jest they should press on him ;” REVISED V®8RSION. ἐξ out: and his hand was re- stored.' And the Pharisees 6 went out, and immediately took counsel with the Herodians against him, how they might destroy him. And Jesus *with- 7 drew with his disciples to the sea: and a great multitude from Galilee followed him, and from Judea, and from Jerusalem, and 8 from Idumea, and from beyond tthe Jordan; and those about Tyre and ™Zidon, a great mul- titude, "hearing what great things he did, came to him. And he spoke to his disciples, 9 that a small ship should wait on him, eon account of the crowd, Plest they should press on him. For he had healed many: so that as many as had diseases rushed on him to touch him. And tthe unclean spirits, when they saw him, fell down before him, and ‘cried out, saying, Thou art the Son ~ 1 uy ϑλίβωσιν αὐτόν. jected (says Bloomf.) by most critics, and canceled by almost all the Editors, from Griesbach to Scholz, as introduced from Matt. 12:13.” It is not recognized by the Vulg., or Syriac. It is apurious, beyond all reasonable doubt. 1 “went out;” ἐξελϑόντες. Walkef., Campbell, Thom. “Out” is now in common use rather than “ forth,” with verbs of motion. « “withdrew ;” ἀνεχώρησε. Wesley, Dick., G. Camp., Wakef. Belg., “vertrok;” De Wette, “entwich.” This verb occurs fourteen times in the N. Test.; but it is rendered reflexively only here and in the parallel Matt. 12:15, in the E. V. “ Himself” is unnecessary. 1 “the Jordan;” τοῦ Ἰορδανου. Camp., Thom. See ch. 1 : 9, note Ὁ. m ἐς Zidon.” The Old Test. orthography. » “hearing ;” ἀκούσαντες. Sharpe, Kend., Wakefield. The participial construction is preserved by Wesley, Campbell, Dick., 5. Fr., Span., Iber. Sharpe, Kend., Pechy, ° “on account of ;” dec (cum accusat.) Liddell. “ Because of” 1s obsolete. Kend., Rob., Greenf., Wakef., Dick. See Rob. Greenf., “to press upon a person in a crowd ;” Bretsch., “ premo, de multitudine aliquem cireumdante.” “To throng,” as a transitive verb, is obsolete. Vulg., “ ne com- primerent eum ;” Eras., “ premerent eum ;” Beza, “ ne opprime- rent eum.” 4 “rushed on him;” ἐπισίσπτεων αὐτῷ. Rob., “to rush upon ;” De Aha “ einstiirzten (rushed im upon) ;” Fritzsche, “irruerent in eum.” Fritz. makes this remark: “ Formula ἐπι- πίπτειν tet, quum omnino notet zrruere in aliquem (iiber Je- manden herfallen), quacumque id fiat mente ἢ. 1. ut apparet, de iis dicitur, qui acti summa Jesu contrectandi cupiditate, tam tre- pidé ad eum accurrunt, ut alter alteri sit impedimento.” This yerb is usually rendered “to fall upon,” in the E. V. Syriac, wok Σ cond) (“that they rushed on him.”) Heb. ΝῚ Τὸ, bp ἦρε. τ “the—spirits ;” τὰ πνεύματα. Pechy, G. Camp., Sharpe. De Wette, “die—Geister ;” Belg., “de geesten ;” Iber., “los espiritus ;” S. Fr., “les esprits.” * “cried out ;” ἔκραξε. Thom. See ch. 1 : 26, rote z. 18 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 12 And he straitly charged|o υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ. them, that they should not make him known. 13 And he goeth up into a mountain, and calleth unto him whom he would: and they came unto him. 14 And he ordained twelve, that they should be with him, and that he might send them forth to preach, 15 And to have power to heal sicknesses, and to cast out devils. 16 And Simon he surnamed Peter. 17 And James the son of Zebe- dee, and John the brother of James, (and he surnamed them Boanerges, which is, The sons of thunder,) 18 And Andrew, and Philip, and Bartholomew, and Matthew, and Thomas, and James the. son of Alpheus, and Thaddeus, and GREEK TEXT. 12. Kat πολλὰ 3 / ᾽ σ΄ ae \ Jee. ἐπετίμα αὐτοῖς, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὸν φα- Ν ΄ 13 x > νερὸν ποιήσωσι. «Καὶ ἀνα- ip My, ἊΝ βαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος, καὶ προσκα- as ἃ 4 , λεῖται ovs ἤθελεν αὐτός: καὶ HLA N ἜΠΗ 14 N ἀπῆλθον πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ > ΄, ΄ “ Bi > ἐποίησε δώδεκα, ἵνα WoL [MET 5 - Ν Ὡ > / > αὐτοῦ, Kal ἵνα ἀποστέλλῃ av- \ Ud 7 τοὺς κηρύσσειν, ““ καὶ ἔχειν ἐξ- / / \ / ουσίαν θεραπεύειν τὰς vocous, 39 ΄,΄ ΄ καὶ ἐκβάλλειν τὰ δαιμόνια: 1° ΄ 7 ἐπέθηκε τῷ Σίμωνι ὄνομα 17έ- 17 Ne? ΄ Ν a Tpov" καὶ ᾿Ιάκωβον τὸν τοῦ 4, ἊΝ Ζεβεδαίου, καὶ ᾿]ωάννην τὸν Ν fol ΄ὔ ἀδελφὸν τοῦ ᾿]Ιακώβου: καὶ ἐπέ- ° / \ θηκεν αὐτοῖς ὀνόματα Boavepyes, “ 2 BAN “ 18 Ν Ὁ ἐστιν, Ὑἱιοὶ βροντῆς" καὶ ᾿Ανδρέαν, καὶ Φίλιππον, καὶ Bap- θολομαῖον, καὶ ΠΠἼατθαῖον, καὶ cal 4 Ν a Θωμᾶν, καὶ ᾿]άκωβον τὸν τοῦ ᾿Αλφαίου, καὶ Θαδδαῖον, καὶ Σί- Ν και THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. III. REVISED VERSION. of God. And he ‘strictly 12 charged them "not to make him known. ‘the mountain, and ¥calleth to - And he goeth up into 13 him, whom he would: and they ra came to him, And *heappoint- 14 ed twelve, that they should be with him, and that he might send them forth to preach, and to have power to heal ydiseases and to cast out the demons. And Simon he surnamed Peter. And James the son of Zebedee, and John the brother of James (and he surnamed them Boan- erges, which is, ‘Sons of thun- der), and Andrew, and Philip, and Bartholomew, and Matthew, and Thomas, and James the son of Alpheus, and Thaddeus, and ἜΝ 8 Simon the Canaanite, 19 And Judas Iscariot, which Ν Ki / M@vVa TOV QAVQAVITNV, ΄ - Β 19 καὶ ᾿Τού-Ἰ Simon *the Cananite, and Judas 19 ” t “strictly ;” πολλὰ. Wesley, Wakef., Thom., Camp., Kend., Pechy. Belg., “scherpelijk ;” Wulg., Erasmus, “ yehementer.” Webster remarks : “ For this (i. 6. straztly), strictly is now used.” « “not to make him known.” Wakef., Kend., Wesley, Camp- bell. The rendering by the infinitive is equally exact as to sense, more concise, and accordant to present usage. So S. Fr., “il leur défendait—de le faire connaitre ;” Ital., “ egli divietava loro —di farlo conoscere.” aD y “the mountain ;” τὸ ὅρος. Wesley, Kend., Wakef., Sharpe, Thom. De Wette, “den Berg ;” Belg., “den berg;” S. Fr., “Ja montagne ;” Ital., “sul monte ;” Iber., “al monte ;” Heb. N.T., ann. The “mountain” was one well known. It was in the vicinity of Capernaum ; hence, the article should be retained. Fritz. quotes this passage, and says, “ conscendit montem Caphar- naumo vicinum.” ~ “calleth to him ;” προσκαλεῖται. As προς in composition answers to “to,” this last word should not be italicized. It is not a supplement. So in all cases where this verb occurs, with a pronoun supplementary. x “he appointed ; ” ἐποίησε. Geneva, Wakef., Thom., Kend. Beza, and Castalio, “ constituit ;” S. Fr., “il—institua ;” Iber., “ constituyo ;” Belg., “hij stelde;” De Wette, “er bestellete.” Fritzsche, “ Verbum ποεῖν h. 1. est constituere (bestellen).” “ Ordained” should be exchanged for “ appointed,” among other reasons, because it has acquired a technical meaning in reference to ecclesiastical action, in setting men apart to the ministry. Rob. (in verbo), “In the sense of ‘to create,’ ‘to constitute,’ ‘ to appoint,’ spoken of offices or duties, etc.” y “diseases ;” νόσους. Wesley, Wakef., G. Camp., Dick., Kend. So (E. V.) ch.1:34. Luke 9:1. Matt.4:24. Acts 19:12. “Sicknesses” is obsolete. » «Sons of thunder ;” Y%ol βροντῆς. ΑΒ viol is anarthrous, no article should be placed before its equivalent, “sons.” The article was first introduced here by Tyndale. It has been prop- erly omitted by Wesley, Dick., Kend., Wakef., Sharpe, Campbell, Thom., S. Fr., Ital., Belg., Luther, De Wette. ? a “the Cananite;” τὸν Κανανίτην. There is a mistake in the mode of spelling this word, in the K. V. It stands there as “ Qanaanite,” an inhabitant of Canaan. This deviation from the Greek misleads common readers. The word is an appellative from the Hebrew zp, zealot. In the parallel passage, Luke 6:15, it is translated, Siaava τὸν καλούμενον Ζηλωτὴν, BH. V. “ Simon, called Zelotes,” i. e., Simon called “the Zealot.” Buet schneider (in verbo), “ homo fervidus, incensus zelo. Hoe sensi accipiendum esse videtur cognomen Simonis, apostoli. Lue. 6:15 Acts 1 : 13, ei impositum, quia facile excandescebat ira et zelo.’ The correct orthography of this word occurs in Pechy, Wakef. L. Tomson, S. Fr., Montanus, Beza (Edition of 1590, and 1624) Belg., De Wette, Iber. The erroneous spelling probably origin ated with Cranmer, who has, “ Symon of Canaan.” THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. III. 19 KING JAMES’ VERSION. also betrayed him: and they went into an house. 20 And the multitude cometh together again, so that they could not so much as eat bread. 21 And when his friends heard of it, they went out to lay hold on him: for they said, He is beside / κεν αὐτὸν. φαγεῖν. at 2 αὐτόν. himself. 3 ? στη. 22 And the scribes which came} , { απο down from Jerusalem, said, He hath Beelzebub, and by the prince of the devils casteth he out devils. 23 And he called them τέο him, and said unto them in par- ables, How can Satan cast out Satan ? 24 And ifa kingdom be divided against itself, that kingdom can. not stand. 25 And if a house be divided against itself, that house cannot stand. 26 And if Satan rise up against himself, and be divided, he can- not stand, but hath an end. 27 No man can enter into a Μ, ἐπ ἐν παραβολαῖς / a exBadrAciv; 7* σταθῆναι 25 SN 26 κια €KELV?)° 27 τέλος ἔχει. b “who also delivered him up;” ὃς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτόν. Wakef., Q., Pechy. 8. Fr., “celui qui le livra.” See ch. 1 : 14, note j. I follow the punctuation of the Greek text by placing a period after “up.” So the texts of Knapp, Tittmann, Tisch., Scholz, Fritzsche, Lach. In those critical editions, as well as Bagster’s, a new section commences with the words, Kaé ἔρχον- tae εἰς οἶχον. This division and punctuation is followed by S. Fr., Ital., Iber., Vulg., Eras. (Greek and Latin), Castalio, Syriac, Kend., Pechy, Wakef., Thom., Belg., De Wette. Fritz. has the following remark: “ Manifestum est vocabulis καὶ Zoyovrae εἰς oizoy, novam rem Marcum ordiri (comp. vy. 13), ἢ. r., relicto monte domum veniunt.” ” ¢ “into a house ;” εἰς οἶκον. As this also admits the render- ing “ home,” I place in the margin, “or, went home.” Compare Matt.8:14; 17:24. Mark. 1 : 29. 4“ (not) even;” μήτε. Kend., Wakefield, Sharpe, Dick., Bloomf. (N. T.), Rob. (ὧν loco). S. Fr. “pas méme;” De Wette, “nicht einmal ;” Bretsch. (in verbo), “ In media oratione ue-quidem ;” Beza, Castal., “ ne-quidem.” * “his kindred ;” of zag’ αὐτοῦ. “ Kindred” is used here in preference to “relatives.” ete, 93 it is a Biblical word. The GREEK TEXT. dav ᾿Ισκαριώτην, ὃς καὶ παρέδω- ‘ yy 5 Kat ἔρχονται εἰς οἰκον" / Va ΕΣ a συνέρχεται πάλιν oxAos, ὥστε Ν / Ν᾿ μὴ δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς μήτε ἄρτον καὶ παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐξῆλθον κρατῆσαι ᾿ἄχεγον γὰρ, 5 Kai οἱ γραμματεῖς οἱ ε / he Ἱεροσολύμων καταβάντες "Or -βεελζεβοὺλ ἔχει; "Ore ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαι- μονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια. 28 χσ ΄ NED Kai προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς, cal ’ὔ ΄σ cal ITs δύναται Σατανᾶς Σατανᾶν Ν 38 ΄ καὶ ἐὰν βασιλεία > » ce A ΄ » / ep ἑαυτὴν μερισθῃ, ov δύναται ἡ βασιλεία Ν 3X SSL. 3) 1:3) ie NS καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὴν μερι- a ,ὔ ΄σ ΄ > σθῇ, ov δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ oi- ᾿ \ > € ΄ καὶ εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς ΠΡ" S19. = 6 \ τς ΄, ἀνέστη ἐφ ἑαυτὸν καὶ μεμέρι- ’ / o > A σται, ov δύναται σταθῆναι, ἀλλὰ y, ov δύναται οὐδεὶς REVISED VERSION. *who also delivered him up. And they went ‘into a house. And the crowd com- 20 Iscariot, 20 καὶ eth together again, so that they could ‘not even eat bread. And 21 when this kindred heard of it, they went out ‘to lay hold of him, for they said, He is beside himself. And the scribes, who 22 came down from Jerusalem, said, He hath Beelzebub, and by the prince of *the demons, he casteth «ut the demons. And he *ealled them to him, and 23 said to them in parables, How can Satan cast out Satan? And 24 ‘ifa kingdom is divided against itself, that kingdom can not stand. And if a house "15 di- 25 vided against itself, that house can not stand. And if Satan 26 *riseth up against himself and Ys divided, he can not stand, but hath an end. ™No one can 27 A ἀκούσαντες οἱ "Ort ἐξή- y+ >’ a ἔλεγεν aurots, » / ἐκείνη" “kindred” were the “mother and brethren” noticed in v. 31. Fritz. remarks, “ Interpretum multO maxima pars v. οὗ zag’ av- τοῦ explanat Jesu cognatos.” Beza, “ ipsius propinqui ;” Wake- field, “ his own family ;” Rob. (in loco), “ his kindred, relatives ;” Wesley, “his relatives.” = f “to lay hold of ;” κρατῆσαι. Present usage requires “ of” instead of “on,” with this verb. So in E. V., “to take hold” (which may be regarded as nearly synonymous) is followed by “of” in2Sam.6:6. Ps.35:2. Zech. 1: 6. Ε “the demons;” τὰ δαιμόνια. Sharpe, Thom. 8. Fr., G. Fr., De Sacy, “les démons ;” Iber., “ los demonios.” » “to him.” See ν. 13, note w. i «if a kingdom is divided.” It is now a settled grammatical principle in our language, that a conditional action or state be- longing to the present time, must be put in the indicative, as to form. ) “js divided.” k “yiseth up.” 1 “jis divided.” m “No one;” οὐδεὶς. Eras., Beza, Castal., “ non—quisquam.” See note νυ. 24. See note v. 24. See note νυ. 24. Sharpe, Pechy, Dick., Camp., Kend, See ch. 2 : 21, note ἢν, 20 THE GOSPEL ACCURDING TO MARK.—CHAP. III. KING JAMES’ VERSION. strong man’s house, and spoil his goods, except he will first bind the strong man; and then he will spoil his house. 28 Verily, I say unto you, All sins shall be forgiven unto the sons of men, and _ blasphemies wherewith soever they shall blas- pheme : 29 But he that shall blaspheme against the Holy Ghost hath never forgiveness, but is in danger of eternal damnation : oN, διαρπάσει. 28 28 GREEK TEXT. A 7, 7°? a > \ τὰ σκεύη TOV ἰσχυροῦ, εἰσελθὼν ἊΝ ΄- ΄ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ, διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ “πρῶτον τὸν ἰσχυρὸν δή- καὶ τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, “ ΄ 5 ΄ ἐν δ: ὅτι πάντα ἀφεθήσεται τὰ ἁμαρ- / - « o > ig τήματα τοῖς υἱοὶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Ν 7 ΕΝ καὶ βλασφημίαι ὅσας ἂν βλασ- y, A > oA φημήσωσιν- “ἢ ὃς δ᾽ av βλασφη- / > ἊΝ ΄- No pnon εἰς τὸ LIvevpa τὸ “Ay.ov, 5 ΜΞ, of \ ,:° οὐκ ἔχει ἄφεσιν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, » > 4 / 5 > / / ἀλλ᾽ ἔνοχός ἐστιν αἰωνίου Kpl- REVISED VERSION. enter into "the strong one’s house and eplunder his goods, Punless she shall first bind the strong one; and then he will plunder his house. "Truly, I 28 say to you, all sins *will be for- given to the sons of men, and twhatever "revilings ‘they may utter ; but he who “shall revile 29 *the Holy Spirit, never hath forgiveness, but is ‘liable to eternal scondemnation : because 30 ” " “the strong one’s ;” τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ. The article is retained here as it is by the Τὸ. V.in the next member of the sentence, τὸν ἰσχυρὸν. The literal rendering of the adjective ἐσχυροῦ is deemed more accurate than that of the E. V., which inserts the supplement man’s. So in the latter part of the sentence. Thus Wesley, Campbell, Wakefield, Thom., “the strong—the strong ;” Belg., “eens sterken—den sterken;” S. Fr., “de celui qui est fort—celui qui est fort ;” De Wette, “des Gewaltigen— den Gewaltigen ;” Iber., “del fuerte—al fuerte ;” Span., “ del valiente—al valiente.” ° “plunder ;” διαρπάσαι. Wesley, Sharpe, Dick., Campbell, Thom., Pechy. Rob. (in verbo), “to plunder, pillage.” “To spoil,” as a transitive verb, is now used in a different sense. P “unless ;” ἐὰν μὴ. Rob., Kend., Wesley, Sharpe, Pechy. Vulg., Beza, Hras., Castal., “ nisi.” 9 “he first bindeth ;” δήσῃ. See note νυ. 24. τ «Truly ;” Ἀμὴν. This is the Hebrew vax which adyerb- ially signifies, “ truly,” “certainly.” Gesenius, Lex. Rob. (in verbo), “ Emphatically, at the beginning of a sentence, truly, verily.” Comp. Luke 9 : 27, ἀληϑῶς. “ Verily” is no longer used, except in quotations from the Scriptures, or in an imitation of their phraseology. In all cases where “ verily” occurs, I use “truly.” * “will be forgiven ;” ἀφεθήσεται. Kend., Sharpe. De Wette, “ werden—vergeben.” As the future is sometimes ex- pressed by the form of the Latin subjunctive and the English potential, both of which are closely related to the general idea of the future, I suggest as an alternative rendering, “may be for- given.” See Winer, 334. 5 (a). Stuart’s Gr. N.T., 3136, 7 (0). t “whatever ;” ὅσας. Pechy, G. Campbell, Thom., “what- woever.” Rob. Ga verbo), “ with ἂν (ἐὰν), whosoever, whatsoever.” Our idiom demands that the equivalent for this word should be placed before that for βλασφημίαι. = “yrevilings ;” βλασφημίαι. Kend., Thomson, “ slanderous speeches ;” Wakef., “ wicked speeches.” Rob. (in verbo), “ Gen- erally of persons and things, i. q. slander, railing: See note on the verb βλασφημέω, v. 29. v “they may utter ;” βλασφημήσωσιν. one » reviling.” Kend. This render- ing is adopted to avoid a violation of the usus loquendi of our language, which would be inevitable, should we say, “ whatever revilings they may revile.” Still, should it be deemed important to make a sacrifice of propriety to literality, we could say, “ what- ever revilings they may revile with.” ~ “shall revile ; βλασφημήσῃ. Kend., Dick. So (E. V.) Matt. 27:39. Rob., “to speak evil of, rail—slander, to revile.” Bretsch., “ famam alterius ledo, facio ut male audzat; dictis con- tumeliosis aliquem proscindo, convicia dico.” So he says of this passage, “loqui in alicujus contumeliam.” Greenf., “to calumni- ate, rail, revile, treat with calumny and contumely.” The def initions of this word resolve themselves into two senses “ to slander,” and “ to revile.” In other words, to speak evil of one generally, or, to speak evil of one to his face. The verb occurs thirty-five times in the N.T. In twenty of these, it is transferred in the Anglican form “blaspheme.” In the other cases, it re- ceives some one of the following renderings, “ to reyile,” to rail on,” “speak evil of,” “slanderously report,” and “defame.” As “laspheme ” has acquired an ecclesiastical sense, which deviates from the Greek, it is desirable to give the word a rendering which will express the idea with as much accuracy as possible. “Revile” is selected for this purpose. See the article on the word βλασφημία and its cognates, in G. Campbell's Preliminary Dissertations. "Webster gives the technical sense of this word, as it has been employed in ecclesiastical usage, thus, “ To speak of the Supreme Being in terms of irreverence.” A second definition is, “ To revile or speak reproachfully of God or the Holy Spirit.” x “the Holy Spirit.” See ch. 1:8, note x. I omit “against,” εἷς, as it is superfluous after “ revile,” which is a transitive verb. -Βλασφημέω often governs the accusative, as in Luke 23 : 39, Rev. 16:11. Kend., “revileth the Holy Spirit ;” Dick., “shall revile the Holy Spirit.” y “neyer hath.” Our usus loquendi demands this arrangement. Span., “ nunca jamas tendra.” © “liable ;” ἔνοχός. Wesley, Pechy, Thom., Kendrick, Rob., Liddell. a “ condemnation ; 5:24. Rob. ” κρίσεως. Pechy. So (E. V.) John 3:19; THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IV. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 30 Because they said, He hath an unclean spirit. 31 There came then his brethren and his mother, and standing with- out, sent unto him, calling him. 32 And the multitude sat about him; and they said unto him, Be- hold, thy mother and thy brethren without seek for thee. 33 And he answered them, say- ing, Who is my mother, or my brethren ? 34 And he looked round about on them which sat about him, and said, Behold, my mother and my brethren ! 35 For whosoever shall do the will of God, the same is my brother, and my sister, and mother. CHAP. IV. Anp he began again to teach by the sea-side: and there was gathered unto him a great multi- tude, so that he entered into a ship, and sat in the sea; and the b “Now ;” Ov. cle, like ‘ now’ quence of one clause after another (= KE. V., Luke 10:36. Sharpe. in English, is often used to denote the mere se- jam vero, porro, ete.) ,” Lid- GREEK TEXT. σεως: * ὅτι ἔλεγον, Πνεῦμα » s 2, y+ ἀκάθαρτον ἐχει. Ἔρχονται 5 © \ at Se , » οὖν οἱ ἀδελφοὶ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ av- a Μ΄ e col > τοῦ, καὶ ἔξω ἑστῶτες ἀπέστειλαν ἊΝ - / πρὸς αὐτὸν, φωνοῦντες αὐτόν. ὌΠ y er? καὶ ἐκάθητο ὄχλος περὶ αὐτὸν" “4 δὲ ai ie aN Ἀ ε ,., εἶπον δὲ αὐτῷ, ᾿Ιδου, ἡ μητὴρ Ν ΄ > / 3, δι σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου ἔξω ζη- τοῦσί σε. * Καὶ ἀπεκρίθη av- ΄- ε / τοῖς, λέγων, Tis ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ ΩΝ ε > μου ἢ οἱ ἀδελφοί pov; ** Kat ΄ ΄ \ ἊΣ περιβλεψάμενος κύκλῳ τοὺς περὶ aren / / 3 «ε αὐτὸν καθημένους, λέγει, [de, ἡ prep μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου. ὅδ ὃς γὰρ ἂν ποιήσῃ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ > 2 \ ff > / ἀδελφὴ μου καὶ μήτηρ ἐστί. CHAP. IV. KAI πάλιν ἤρξατο διδάσκειν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν: καὶ συνή- xn πρὸς αὐτὸν ὄχλος πολὺς, ὥστε αὐτὸν ἐμβάντα εἰς τὸ πλοῖ- ον καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ: καὶ πᾶς ὃ ὄχλος πρὸς τὴν θά- “This parti- REVISED VERSION. they said, He hath an unclean spirit. *Now chis brethren and his mother came, and standing without, sent to him, calling him. And ‘a crowd “was sit- ting about him; and they said to him, Behold thy mother and thy brethren without ‘are seek- ing thee. And he answered them, saying, Who is my mgther or my brethren? And looking faround on those who sat about him, he saith, Behold my mother and my brethren! ever shall do the will of God, She is my brother and sister and mother. CHAP. IV. “AND again he began to teach by the sea-side- and a great crowd "was gathered to him, so that he entered into ‘the ship and sat in the sea; and ‘all the For who- : eo w ow or μενος, does not modify its signification at all. We often find pre- positions in composition followed by the same preposition before anoun. Αύκλῳ is used adverbially, and has the sense of “around.” dell, Rob. Johnson (Dict.) says, “now is sometimes a particle of connection.” Ody is frequently rendered in the H. V. as a connec- tive by “then.” This word, however, in this instance, would be understood by readers to signify, “at that time.” If fully satis- fied that it referred to v. 21, I should render it, “ therefore.” © “his brethren and his mother came.” This is the natural arrangement. It is that of Wakef., Sharpe, Kend., Dick., Thom. That of the E. V. was copied from Tyndale. e¢ “a crowd ;” ὄχλος, is anarthrous. So Sharpe, Penn. S. Fr., “une foule ;” Ital., “ una moltitudine.” a « was sitting ;” ἐχάϑητο. Kend., Wakef., Pechy. S. Fr., * était assise.” accurate here. © “are seeking ; ζητοῦσι. Pechy. "The sense of action con- tinued in the present, is obviously indicated by this verb. “For” is unnecessary after the verb, as it is always transitive; or, if “for” is regarded as an adverb, it is still superfluous. τ “ayound.” ZZegt, in composition with- the participle βλεψά- The ordinary rendering of the imperfect is most See Rob. (κύκλος). See v. 5, note f. & “he;” οὗτος. Kend., Wakefield. When this pronoun is emphatic, it may be rendered, “ he,” “ this one,” or “ this man.” It is often translated by “he,” in E. V. “The same” is the proper equivalent of 6 αὐτός. Kiihner’s Greek Gram., ὃ 303. 3 : (3). * « And again,” οἷο. ; Καὶ πάλιν xv. Δ. This order which is according to the text, is adopted by Wesley, Dick., Campbell, Vule., Eras., Beza, De Wette, Iber. > “was gathered.” This is the order of Wesley, Dick., Wakef ¢ “the ship;” τὸ πλοῖον. The article should not be dropped, as the noun is definite, having reference to the ship (πλοεαρέον») of ch.3:9. Bloomf. (N.'T.) in loco. The article is retained by Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, Thom., Pechy, S. Fr., Ital., Belg., De Wette, Iber. 4 “all the crowd,” πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος. Πᾶς is rendered thus by Wakef,, Thom. Beza Eras., “tota turba;” 8. Fr., “toute la foule.” r LS KING JAMES’ VERSION. whole multitude was by the sea, on the land. 2 And he taught them many things by parables, and said unto them in his doctrine, 3 Hearken; Behold, there went out a sower to sow. 4 And it came to pass as he sowed, some fell by the way-side, and the fowls of the air came and devoured it up. 5 And some fell onstony ground, where it had not much earth ; and immediately it sprang up, because it had no depth of earth : 6 But when the sun was up, it was scorched ; and because it had no root, it withered away. 7 And some fell among thorns, and the thorns grew up, and chok- ed it, and it yielded no fruit. 8 And other fell on good ground, and did yield fruit that sprang up, and inereased, and brought forth, some thirty, and some sixty, and some an hundred. GREEK TEXT. 3 a lod 5 2 Ν λασσαν ἐπὶ THF γῆς ἦν. καὶ 3Q/ 5 \ 2 “ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς ἐν παραβολαῖς Ἂς Ν ΕΣ 3 lal 3 cal moAAa, καὶ ἐλεγεν αὑτοῖς ἐν TH lad an ΟῚ / Ν διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ, ° Axkovere. ἰδοὺ, tot « , a rot ἐξῆλθεν ὃ σπείρων τοῦ σπεῖραι" "2 3 cal f A 1 καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ σπείρειν, ὃ \ yA Ν \ c Ν Ν μὲν ἔπεσε παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν, καὶ 5 Ν \ ° 5 “ ἊΝ ἦλθε τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ / Teas δ...» \ »~ κατέφαγεν αὐτὸ. “ ἄλλο δὲ ἔπε- ἊΝ ΄σ aS 3 σεν ἐπὶ τὸ πετρῶδες, ὅπου οὐκ 53 ΓΕ if, A 5 ΄, εἶχε γῆν πολλήν: καὶ εὐθέως » 4 Ν Ἂν Ν SA if ἐξανέτειλε, διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν βά- ΄ \ / Gos γῆς" “ ἡλίου δὲ ἀνατείλαντος 3 / ἊΝ \ \ NS: ἐκαυματίσθη, καὶ διὰ TO μὴ ἔχειν ε ΄ + sy ῥίζαν ἐξηράνθη. | καὶ ἄλλο ἔπε- > αν > / \ > rey σεν εἰς Tas ἀκάνθας: καὶ ἀνέβη- « 7 ‘ Lp σαν αἱ ἄκανθαι, καὶ συνέπνιξαν en \ »” αὐτὸ, Kal καρπὸν οὐκ ἔδωκε. 8 Ν » y > \ fat καὶ ἀλλο ἔπεσεν εἰς THY γὴν \ ΄, Ν »ὰ 7 Ν τὴν καλὴν: καὶ ἐδίδου καρπὸν > , Ν 5 ΄ Ν ἀναβαίνοντα καὶ αὐξάνοντα, καὶ Ε a ΄ Noa ε “4 ἔφερεν ἕν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἕν ἑξή- THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IV. REVISED VERSION. crowd was by the sea, on the land. And he taught them many things by parables, and said to them ‘in his teaching, Hearken; behold ‘the sower went out to sow. And it came to pass as he sowed, some fell by the way-side, and ‘the birds teame and ‘devoured it. And some fell on ‘the rocky ground, where it had not much earth; and immediately it sprang up, because it had no depth of earth: but when the sun was up, it was scorched, and because it had no root, it withered away. And some fell among kthe thorns, and the thorns erew up, and choked it, and it yielded no fruit. And ‘some fell ™into "the good ground and yielded fruit °growing up and increasing, and Pit bore, some thirty, and some sixty, and some * “in his teaching ;” ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ. Wesley, Sharpe. See ch. 1:22, note t. The word here signifies the act of teaching (see Rob., δεδαχή), in other words, the phrase is equal to ἐν τῷ διδάσκειν», “as he taught.” ’ f “the sower;” 6 σπείρων. Kend., Q., Dick. De Wette, “der Samamn ;” S. Fr., “le semeur ;” Span., “el sembrador ;” Beza, “quidam sator ;” Castalio, “quidam sator.” As both Matthew and Luke have 6 σπείρων, it is advisable to retain the article. I have followed the order of the ΤΠ. V. of Matt. 18 : 4 (that of the Greek being the same as here), as most natural. ® “the birds;” τὰ πετεινὰ. Wesley, Dick., Thom., Camp. Ὁ Fowls” is now restricted to “ poultry.” » χοῦ οὐρανοῦ of the Text. Recept. is rejected by Grieshach, Scholz, Titt., Knapp, Lach., Tisch., Fritz., and Bloomfield. It is spurious. ' “devoured ;” κατέφαγεν. Wesley, Kend., Thom. The ad- verb “up” is superfluous. It is admissible only with “ate.” The preposition κατὰ is intensive, in composition with the verb. } “the rocky ground ;” τὸ πετρῶδες. De Wette, “den felsi- gen Grund.” Wakef., Dick., Campbell, Thom., render στετρῶδες “rocky,” though they have improperly omitted the article. The Belg. regards the noun as definite by rendering it, “het steen- achtige.” So Κ΄. Fr., “Vendroit pierreux.” The parallel, Luke 8:6, has ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν, “on the rock (Rob., πέτρα), hence the rendering “ rocky ” is obviously correct here. k “the thorns;” τὰς ἀκάνϑας. Wakef. De Wette, “die Dornen ;” S. Fr., “les épines.” 1 “some ;” ἄλλο. Soinv. 5,7. Thom. m™ “into ;” ets. Pechy. S. Fr., “dans.” The rendering of the E. V. “on” would be appropriate if the text were as in Matt. 18 : 8, ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν. Although “into” or “on” would afford a good sense, it is still desirable to preserve the zndevidw ality of style of the evangelists, as far as propriety will allow. » “the ;” τὴν (γῆν). As in the description of the localities where the seed fell, we have the article with ὁδὸν, πετρῶδες, and ἀκάνϑας, it should be retained here. So Wakef., Pechy, Kend., Belg., De Wette. S. Fr., “la bonne terre.” ° “orowing up;” ἀναβαίνοντα. Wesley. So ἀνέβησαν, y. 7. The E. V. confounds the significations of ἀναβαένω and ἐξανατέλλω in y. 5 by rendering both, “spring up.” By fol- lowing the participial construction, we avoid the introduction of a relative “ that” or “ which,” after “ fruit.” p “it.” Kend. The insertion of this pronoun is necessary, since the nominative of the verb is not καρπός, “ fruit,” but ἄλλο (σπέρμα), “ other” (seed). As the H. V. places the rela- tive “that” after “fruit,” the common reader is mislead by re- ferring it (according to the general usage of our language), to that word, as its nearest antecedent, and then finding “ brought forth” without a nominative expressed, coupled to “increased,” he | naturally supposes, that the two verbs haye the same nominative. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IV. 23 KING JAMES’ VERSION. GREEK TEXT. REVISED VERSION. 9 And he said unto them, He|xovta, καὶ ἕν ἑκατόν. ἣ Kal ἔλε-} ἃ hundred. And he said, ‘He 9 that hath ears to hear, let him hear. 10 And when he was alone, they that were about him, with the twelve, asked of him the para- ble. 11 And he said unto them, Unto you it is given to. know the mys- tery of the kingdom of God: but unto them that are without, all these things are done in parables: 12 That seeing they may see, and not perceive; and hearing they may hear, and not under- stand; lest at any time they should be converted, and their sins should be forgiven them. 13 And he said unto them, Know ye not this parable? and how then will ye know all para- bles ? 14 The sower soweth the word. 15 And these are they by the > - ε y Sj > ΄ γεν αὐτοῖς, O ἔχων wra ἀκούειν » ΄, 10 Say \ » / ἀκουέτω. Ore δὲ ἐγένετο , > / > XN € καταμόνας, ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν οἱ Ν Ν ΄- / \ περὶ αὐτὸν σὺν τοῖς δώδεκα τὴν παραβολήν. ' Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐ- “- «ε cal ΄ὔ > \ τοῖς, Ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὸ μυστήριον τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ: ἐκείνοις δὲ τοῖς ἔξω, ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται: 2 ἵνα βλέποντες βλέπωσι, καὶ μὴ ἴδωσι: καὶ ἀκούοντες ἀκούω- σι, καὶ μὴ συνιῶσι: μήποτε ἐπι- στρέψωσι, καὶ ἀφεθῇ αὐτοῖς τὰ ἁμαρτήματα. 1 Καὶ λέγει αὐ- τοῖς, Οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην; καὶ πῶς πάσας τὰς Ν παραβολὰς γνώσεσθε; 1 ὁ σπεί- Ν / Ὁ pov τὸν λόγον σπείρει. © οὗτοι ΄ » ε \ \ eg “ δέ εἰσιν οἱ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν, ὅπου who hath ears to hear, let him hear. And when he was alone, those who were about him, with the twelve, asked him "concern- ing the parable. And he said to them, To you it is given to know ‘the secret of the king- dom of God: ‘but to those with- out, all these things are done in parables; that seeing they may see, and not perceive; and hearing they may hear, and not understand ; "lest ythey should turn, and their sins should be forgiven them. And ~he saith to them, Know ye not this para- ble? and how then will ye know all *my parables ? The sower soweth the word. 14 And these are they by the way- 15 4 αὐτοῖς of the Textus Receptus. by Griesb., Scholz, Lach., 'Titt., Bloomf. This pronoun is canceled Knapp, Tischend., Fritzsche, Omitted by Wesley, Sharpe, Dick., Camp., Pechy. 15:51. not signify something which is incomprehensible in its own no- ture, but simply what was wnrevealed. See 1 Cor. 2 Rom. 16 : 25, 26. : 7-13, and See an able examination of this Bloomf. (N. T.) remarks that “the word is omitted in very many MSS., nearly all the versions, and is canceled by almost every Editor from Wetstein to Scholz.” Not recognized by Syriac or Vulgate. * “concerning the parable ;” τὴν παραβολήν. Kend., Pechy, Wakef. 5S. Fr., “sur la parabole;” Beza, “de parabola ;” Span., “de la parabola ;” Iber., “acerea del simil;” G. Fr., “touchant cette parabole;” De Wette, “um das Gleichniss.” The verb ἐροτάω (often construed with an accusative of the person and a genitive of the thing, with seg?) has, here, two accusatives. παραβολήν is to be rendered like segi τῆς παρα- βολῆς. So in ch. 7:17, we have ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν οἱ μαϑηταὶ ae sya - αὐτοῦ περὶ τῆς παραβολῆς. * “the secret ;” τὸ κυστήρεον. Kend., Pechy. Wielif, “ privi- lin ee Dick., Thom., G. Camp., “ secrets ;” Castal., “ arcanum.” Syriac, ie Heb. N. T., tio-my. Rob. (μυστήριον), “In N. ἽΝ spoken of facts, doctrines, and principles, not fully revealed. Spec. the mystery of the gospel, the christian dispensation, as having been long hidden and first revealed in later times.” The signification of the word as employed in this passage, may be seen by reference to Coloss. 1 : 26, 27. The word should be translated, not transferred, in all cases. Every truth contained in the Scriptures was a mystery or secret to man, previous to the period when it was revealed. “ Mystery,” in biblical usage, does word in G. Campbell’s Prelim. Dissertations, Dissert. IX. Kend., Pe- The verb t “but to those without ;” ἐκείνοις δὲ tots ἔξω. chy, Campbell. De Wette, “jenen aber draussen.” “are” is superfluous. ἃ “lest ;” μήστοτε. Kend., Pechy, Sharpe, Campbell. So in (ΕΒ. V.) Matt.7:6; 13:29; 15:32. Mark14:2. Heb.4:1. ” y “they should turn ;” ἐπεστρέψωσι. Pechy, Thom., Tyndale, Cran., Geneva. De Wette, “sie sich—bekehren ;” Beza, “se conyertant.” Trollope’s Gram., 349, p. 127, “It often happens that the middle sense may be equally and more appropriately expressed by an intransitive verb.” Rob. (in verbo), “ It is some- times intransitive, or with a reciprocal pronoun implied, to turn one’s self about.” So Acts 16:18, ἐπεστρέψας τῷ πνεύμκατε εἶπε, Where éavroy is understood. Mark 5 : 30, ἐπεστρας εὶς ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ. w “he saith;” λέγει. Wesley, Sharpe, Pechy, Wakef. Vulg., Eras., Mont., “ ait ;” Castal., “inquit.”. This should not be ren- dered by the imperfect, as ἔλεγεν properly is, in v. 11. x “my parables ;” Pechy, Kend., Wakef., Dick. The article here has the force of the possessive pronoun. Crosby’s Gr. Gram., 7482. Kiiihner, 27 244, 302. In these cases it is not necessary to ztalicize the English possessive as a supple ment. Campbell, “ [my] parables.” tas παραβολὰς. 24 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. 10. KING JAMES’ VERSION. way-side, where the word is sown; but when they have heard, Satan cometh immediately, and taketh away the word that was sown in their hearts. 16 And these are they likewise which are sown on stony ground ; who, when they have heard the word, immediately receive it with gladness ; 17 And have no root in them- selves, and so endure but for a time: afterward, when affliction or persecution ariseth for the word’s sake, immediately they are offended. 18 And these are they which are sown among thorns; such as hear the word, 19 And the cares of this world, and the deceitfulness of riches, and the lusts of other things en- GREEK TEXT. / ε / eC A > / σπείρεται ὁ λόγος, καὶ ὅταν ἀκού- / y ε σωσιν, εὐθέως ἔρχεται ὁ Σατα- σ΄ , Ν / Ν νᾶς καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον τὸν / a / ἐσπαρμένον ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐ- Ν & / 16 καὶ οὗτοί εἰσιν ὁμοίως c 3 \ 4 / ol ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι, Ie, » ΄ N 7 Ol, ὅταν ἀκούσωσι TOV λόγον, Ev- 4 SN an , θέως μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνουσιν 9 oN Ν 3 7 αὐτὸν, ~' καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσι ῥίζαν > « lal > X / / > ἐν eavTots, ἀλλὰ προσκαιροί εἰ- Ξ / , x σιν" εἶτα γενομένης θλίψεως ἢ na ἊΝ Ν γ > / διωγμοῦ διὰ τὸν λόγον, εὐθέως Σ Ξ σκανδαλίζονται. ὃ καὶ οὗτοί Ν 5 ΄ / εἰσιν οἱ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπειρό- - , \ Ἢ μενοι, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ τὸν λόγον γ © / ἀκούοντες, καὶ αἱ μέριμναι a a / « ΄ὔ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, καὶ ἡ ἀπάτη - / \ AY τοῦ πλούτου, καὶ αἱ περὶ τὰ λοιπὰ μ / ἐπιθυμίαι εἰσπορευόμεναι συμ- τῶν. REVISED VERSION. side, where the word is sown; yand when they have heard, Sa- tan cometh immediately, and tak- eth away the word, which was sown in their hearts. And these 16 are they 77in like manner, who are sown on ‘the rocky ground; who, when they have heard the word, immediately receive it with ‘joy ; and have no root in 17 themselves, "but endure ‘for a time ; afterward, when affliction or persecution ariseth, “on ac- count of the words, immediately ‘they fall away. And these are 18 they, who are sown among ‘the thorns, such as hear the word, and the “anxieties of this world and the deceitfulness of riches, 19 and "the inordinate desires of y “and ;” καὶ. Kend., Pechy, Sharpe. Bele., “ende ;” Iber., “i.” yy “in like mamner.” This is substituted for “likewise,” which is ambiguous, as it often signifies “ also.” Hras., Vulg., “et ;” » “the rocky ground.” See vy. 5, note j. 2 “joy;” χαρᾶς. Wesley, Thom., Pechy. So (E. V.) in parallels, Matt. 13:20, Luke 8:13. G. Fr. S. Fr, “avec joie.” This word occurs in the N. 'T. fifty-nine times, and is ren- dered by “ joy” in fifty-four of these instances. > “but;” ἀλλὰ. Kend., Pechy. Belg., “maar ;” De Wette, “sondern ;” Vulg., Beza, “sed ;” S. Fr., “mais.” - So in parallel (E. V.) Matt. 13 : 21. “ “for a time;” πρόσκαιροί. Wesley. G. Fr. and §. Fr., “pour un temps;” Belg., “voor eenen tijd.” This word is equivalent to πρὸς καιρὸν, Luke 8 : 13, which Jiterally signifies, “for a time.” I would place in the margin this note, “ Gr., are for a time.” 4 “on account of the word ;” διὰ τὸν λόγον». Kend., Thom. Beza, Hras., “propter sermonem;” Vulg., “ propter vyerbum.” Rob., dec (cum accusat.) e “they fall away ;” σχανδαλίζονται. Kend., Wakef., Q., Rob., Greenf. This word is not found in classic writers. In the Septuagint it is used actively, for “ causing one to stumble,” and passively, for “stumbling.” In the N. T. its use is tropical. 1. In a moral sense, to offend, vex; passively, be offended or vexed, with a dative of the person; ἐν text, to take offense at one, so as to desert, revolt, or fall away from him. 2. To cause one to offend, to entice into sin, lead astray; and passively, to be enticed into sin, ledgastray, to fall away from the truth. In the sense of vexing or irritating, this verb is by no means used as frequently as many have supposed. “To dzsgust” and “ to be disgusted” would often be an exact rendering. The recent origin of “ disgust” must, however, render it exceptionable. By substituting it for “ offend,” in many cases where the latter occurs, the reader will see its appropriateness. In short, “ offend” is used in the 1). V. with a latitude of signification, which is not allowed by the present usage of our language. In Luke 8 : 13, parallel, ἀφίστανταε occurs. This is properly rendered in the Εἰ. V. by “ they fall away,” and this is the sense of the verb in question, in the passage before us. For the causative signification of the verb see ch. 9 : 42, note. f “the thorns;” τὰς ἀκάνθας. Wakef., Kend., Pechy. 8. Fr., “les épines;” De Wette, “die Dornen ;” Belg., “de door- nen.” See y. 7, note k. δ “ anxieties ;” «éocuvas. This word is well defined by Rob. “anaious thought,” as dividing (weeéfa) up and distracting the mind. So the verb μερεμνάω, to be anxious, troubled, take anar- ous thought. In the sense in which “care” is now used, men may have “ care,” without “anxiety.” All the duties of life de- mand “care” (as we now employ the word), but “anxiety” is morally wrong. The antique phrase “carking care” is an equiva- lent to μερέμνα, and to the thought we now convey by “ anxie- ty.” Comp. Matt. 6 : 25. ras, Beza, “solicitudines ;” Bloomf. (N.'T., on Matt. 13 : 22), “anxious care.” h “the inordinate desires ;” α---ἐπεϑυμίαι. The following note, extracted from the Revision of Ephesians (published by the A.B. U.), is deemed appropriate, “ Ἐσεϑυμέα, “irregular and excessive desire,” Eadie. Usually, lust’ or concupzseence in the E. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IV. 25 KING JAMES’ VERSION. tering in, choke the word, and it becometh unfruitful. 20 And these are they which are sown on good ground; such as hear the word, and receive if, and bring forth fruit, some thirty- fold, some sixty, and some an hun- dred. 21 And he said unto them, Is a candle brought to be put under a bushel, or under a bed? and not to be set on a candlestick ? / γίνεται. ” Ψ ἘΠῊΝ EPXETAL, tva ὑπὸ V. The former term is inadmissible, as present usage restricts it to one species of desire. “ Concupiscence” is not a familiar term, and has never obtained a place in our language as a conversational word. Besides this, it is a serious objection, that it has no plural in its Anglicized form. “Inordinate” occurs in Ezek. 23 : 11. Coloss. 3:5. See Rob. and Bretsch. * “the good ground ;” τὴν γῇν τὴν καλὴν. Wesley, Pechy, Kend. Belg., “de goede aarde ;” De Wette, “das gute Land ;” 8. Fr., “la bonne terre ;” Span., “la buena tierra.” The article should be retained, from its reference to y. 8, τὴ» γῆν. 1 “the lamp ;” ὁ λύχνος. Wakef. Belg., “de kaarse ;” De Wette, “die Leuchte ;” S. Fr., “la lampe;” Iber., “la lamp- ara ;” Ital., “la lampada.” This word is uniformly, though im- properly, rendered by “candle” in the E. V. Candles were un- known at the period of the Sayiour’s adyent. The article is re- tained on the ground, that when a well known article belonging to the ordinary furniture of every house was spoken of, the article was employed, because the name of that article was defin- tte. In this respect, the idiom of the Greek and English is the same. So we say, “the clock,” “the stove,” etc. In reference to a single house, these names are viewed as monadic. On the other hand, we sometimes omit the definzte article in cases of this kind, and such is the usage in Greek. In the parallel, Luke 8 : 16, we have λύχνον---κλίνης, without the article. In Matt. 5:15, both usages occur in the same sentence, οὐδὲ καέουσε λύχνον καὶ τιϑέ- In such eases, it is deemed best to preserve the characteristic style of each writer as far as possible, without violating the propriety of our own language. ” aow αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον, ἀλλ emi τὴν λυχνίαν. k “the bushel ;” τὸν μὄδιον. For the use of the article here, see last note. The capacity of the Roman modius was about one peck, English measure. Hence, “ bushel” is a very loose approxi- mation toward the capacity of the modius. Still, as far as the moral lesson is concerned, accuracy, in exhibiting the capacity of the measure, is not important. Various plans haye been sug- gested or adopted in reference to the mode of expressing the weights, measures, and coins of the text of the Scriptures. It is difficult to see that any thing would be gained, in passages like the present, by substituting “measure” or “ corn-measure” for “bushel.” The subject becomes really more indefinite by the GREEK TEXT. πνίγουσι Tov λόγον, καὶ ἄκαρπος kal οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλὴν σπαρέντες, οἵτινες ἀκούουσι τὸν λόγον καὶ παραδέχονται, καὶ καρποφοροῦ- σιν, ἕν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἕν ἑξή- κοντα, καὶ ἕν ἑκατόν. ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς, Mire ὁ λύχνος ΕΣ « Ν ἣν 1 » a Fic ἢ ὑπο τὴν κλίνην; οὐχ Wa ἐπὶ REVISED VERSION. other things entering in, choke the word, and it becometh un- fruitful. And these are they, 20 who were sown on ‘the good ground; such as hear the word, and receive it, and bear fruit, some thirty, some sixty, and some a hundred. And he 21 said to them, Is ‘the lamp brought to be put under *the bushel or under ‘the table-seat, Ἵ Kat ἂν tal τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ change. Many later translators transfer the original word, slightly altered, so as to harmonize with the vernacular in ter- mination, and place a note in the margin indicating the capacity— distance, space, or value. Now, in this case, we have some serious difficulties. For instance, it is impossible to determine, with any considerable accuracy, the length of many lineal measures noticed in the Scriptures; an approximation is all we can reach. It is well known that the value of the coins noticed in the N. T. varied greatly at different periods, as the precious metals were more or less abuadant. In the O. T., the earlier translators gen- erally transferred the Hebrew terms. It would have been well if this course had been adopted in the N. T., at the proper time. As this was not done, however, and English readers have become familiarized with the “ pound,” “penny,” “ bushel,” ete., by which the original words have been long represented, the propriety of changing them for the original words—which must sound strange- ly in the ears of common readers—may be questionable. On the whole, we are not in the same position as we should be, were we now engaged in making the first English translation. We are restrieted by the phraseology of the Common Version, which has become familiar by usage. I take the liberty of suggesting that a set of marginal notes, drawn up with more accuracy than those found in our common quarto editions of the Common Version, should be inserted in the margin, giving a concise explanation of the value of coins, the extent of measures, ete. In reference to coins, the value should be stated according to the * sterling” standard of Britain, and the decimal reckoning of dollars and cents, in the United States. 1 “the table-seat ;” τὴν κλίνην. Fritzsche, “lecto triclinari.” This word, here, designates the sofa, or seat, on which persons reclined at meals. See Rob. So it is used ch. 7:4, Luke 8:16. The seat was cushioned, and usually contained three persons. ‘Trollope (Analecta,) remarks that “din does not signify a bed, but a couch, on which they reclined at meals, and which seems to have been frequently used as a hiding place. Suetonius (Caligula), “ proripere se e strato sub lectum condere solebat.” When this word is used for an article on which the sick lay, as it is in a few instances, it probably refers to a mere cushion or stuffed quilt. Bedsteads are unknown in the East For the article τὴ», joined to this noun, see note j on this verse. 26 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IV. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 22 For there is nothing hid, which shall not be manifested ; neither was any thing kept secret, but that it should come abroad. 23 If any man have ears to hear, let him hear. 24 And he said unto them, Take heed what ye hear: With what measure ye mete, it shall be measured to you: and unto you that hear, shall more be given. 25 For he that hath, to him shall be given: and he that hath not, from him shall be taken even that which he hath. 26 And he said, So is the king- dom of God, as if a man should cast seed into the ground ; 27 And should sleep, and rise night and day, and the seed should spring and grow up, he knoweth not how. 28 For the earth bringeth forth fruit of herself; first the blade, GREEK TEXT. τὴν "λυχνίαν ἐπιτεθῇ ; 22 οὐ γάρ ἐστί τι κρυπτὸν, ὃ ἐὰν μὴ φανε- ρωθῇ: οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα εἰς φανερὸν ἔλθῃ, "Ὁ εἰ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω. * Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς, Βλέπετε τί ἀκούετε. ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστε- / eon ΄ / θήσεται ὑμῖν τοῖς ἀκούουσιν. > ὃς γὰρ, ἂν ἔχῃ; δοθήσεται αὖ- τῷ" καὶ ὃς οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. “ὁ Καὶ ἔλεγεν, Θὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὡς ἐὰν av- θρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, “ καὶ καθεύδῃ καὶ ἐγείρη- ται νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, καὶ ὁ σπό- ρος βλαστάνῃ καὶ μηκύνηται ὡς οὐκ οἶδεν αὐτός. “ὃ αὐτομάτη γὰρ ἡ γῆ καρποφορεῖ, πρῶτον REVISED VERSION. and not to be set on ™the lamp- stand? For there is nothing 22 "hidden which ewill not be mani- fested ; nor was any thing kept secret, but that it should »come to light. e¢If any one thath ears 23 to hear, let him hear. And he 24 said to them, Take heed what ye hear; *by the measure with which ye measure, it twill be measured to you; and to you who hear, more "will be added. For whoever hath, to him will 25 be given: and he who hath not, veven what he hath wwill be taken from him. And he said, 26 The kingdom of God is as if a man should cast seed yon the ground ; and should sleep and 27 rise night and day, and the seed should spring and grow up, he knoweth not how. For the 28 ‘oround bringeth forth fruit of itself; first the blade, then ™ “the lamp-stand;” τὴν λυχνίαν. Sharpe, Rob., Liddell. In E. V. uniformly, though improperly, “ candlestick.” » “hidden.” This is the preterite participle of “ to hide.” ° “will.” The reason for substituting “ will” for “ shall” ap- pears v. 24, note t. P “come to light ;” εἰς πανερὸν ἔλϑῃ. Kend., Rob., pave- ρός. This idiomatic expression is accurate in presenting the thought in a familiar and forcible manner. 4 “Tf any one;” Hives. Sharpe, Wakefield., Kend.; Vulg., Fras, Beza, Castalio, “si quis;” S. Fr., “si quelqu’un ;” Iber. and Span. “si alguno;” Belg., “zoo iemand;” De Wette, “ Wenn jemand.” τ “hath;” ἔχει. When the Eng. verb is conditional from a conjunction or other particle, the present indicative, rather than the subjunctive, is to be employed. See ch. 3 : 24, note i. ” 2 ἐν @ μέτρῳ με- τρεῖτε. ‘The preposition and dative, instrumental. Hence, “ by” is appropriate. G. Fr. and S. Fr., “De ja mesure dont yous mesurez ;” Iber., “con la medida con que medis;” Beza, “ qua mensura metimini.” “Mete” is obsolete. Perspicuity demands the change, which is made in the language of the Τὶ. V. t “will be measured.” Kend., Sharpe, Wakef. As the verb here presents the idea simply of a future action, the auxiliary “ will” is deemed most accurate. 5. “by the measure with which ye measure ; « “will be added;” προστεϑήσεται. Castal., “addetur ;” Mont., Eras., Beza, “adjicietur.” In the parallel, Luke 8 : 18, the E. V. properly uses “ be given,” but there the text has δοϑήση- Rob. (zgooriInur), Gener. “to join unto, to add unto ;” Liddell, “to put to, to add;” Bretsch., “de augmento: insuper addo.” ‘This verb occurs eighteen times (Εἰ. V.), and is rendered by “add” eleven times. In the remaining seven instances, it usually has the force of an adverb (cterwm) by a Hebraism. For the use of “ will,” auxiliary, see last note. Y “even what;” καὶ 6. Sharpe, Kend., Pechy. Vulg., Hras., Beza, Castal., “ etiam quod ;” S. F'r., “ cela méme que.” wee all si ται. For use of this auxiliary see note t. x “as if;” otcws—os. Thomson. G. Fr., “comme si.” I English the connection of “so” (or “ thus”) with “as if,” isa pleonasm, unless we supply the ellipsis which is found in the con- struction of the text—thus—‘ The kingdom of God is “so” (thus) it is as if,’ etc. Should it be deemed necessary to give both particles a place by their equivalents, I suggest the alternative rendering, “The kingdom of God is thus, as if,’ ete. Vulg., Eras., “ quemadmodum si.” y “on the ground ;” ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς. Pechy, 'Thom., Wakef. De Wette, “auf.” Bloomfield, Annot. So (E. V.) ν. 5,8. Matt. 6:19; 9:6; 24:3. Mark 4:1; 6:47, 48; 8:6. Rob. ἐπὶ. “Ground,” which is a common signification of γῇ, is deemed more appropriate than “earth,” as it obviously refers to cultévated ground or soil. So v. 26. 2 “oround.” See last note. ® “itself.” The neuter pronoun is used wm prose, in our language. So Pechy, Kend., Wakef., Sharpe, Thom. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IV. KING JAMES’ VERSION. then the ear, after that the full corn in the ear. 29 But when the fruit is brought forth, immediately he putteth in the sickle, because the harvest is come. 30 And he saith, Whereunto shall we liken the kingdom of God? or with what comparison shall we compare it ? 31 It is like a grain of mustard- seed, which, when it is sown in the earth, is less than all the seeds that be in the earth : 32 But when it is sown, it grow- eth up, and becometh greater than all herbs, and shooteth out great branches; so that the fowls of the air may lodge under the shadow αὐτήν; ; ὃς, ὅταν σπαρῇ GREEK TEXT. χόρτον, εἶτα στάχυν, εἶτα πλήρη σῖτον ἐν τῷ στάχυϊ. παραδῷ ὁ καρπὸς, εὐθέως ἀπο- / Ν / “ / στέλλει TO δρέπανον, ὅτι παρέ- © / στηκεν ὁ θερισμὸς. 3 Ν lé Ve °° Kai ἔλεγε, Tit ὁμοιώσω- \ ΄, = “ x μεν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ; ἢ ἐν ποίᾳ παραβολῇ παραβάλωμεν Ἵ ὡς κόκκῳ “σινάπεως, κρότερος πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων ἐστὶ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς" σπαρῇ, ἀναβαίνει, καὶ γίνεται πάντων τῶν λαχάνων μείζων, καὶ ποιεῖ κλάδους μεγάλους, ὥστε δύνασθαι ὑπὸ τὴν σκιὰν αὐτοῦ 27 REVISED VERSION. the ear, *then the full grain in the ear. But when the fruit 29 doffereth itself, immediately he putteth in the sickle, because the harvest thath come. And he said, To what shall we liken the kingdom of God, or with what comparison shall we com- pare it? IJ¢ is like a grain of mustard-seed, which when it is sown fon the ground, is ‘the least of all the seeds *on the ground: ‘and yet when it is sown, it groweth up, and be- cometh the greatest of all the herbs, and shooteth out great branches, so that "the birds of the air ‘ean lodge under its 29 Grav δὲ 31 ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς: μι- 32 NEO KQL OTQAV of it. > “then;” εἶτα. So in the preceding clause (E. V.) Kend., Sharpe, Wakef. So Luke 8:12. John 19:27; 20 : 27, ete. © “orain;” σῖτον. Sharpe, Rob., Liddell. As this word comprehends the various seeds which serve for food, it is best rendered by a generic equivalent. See ch. 2 : 23, note p. ἃ « offereth itself ;” παραδῷ. Bloomf. (Annot.) Fritz., “se tradiderit ;” Trollope, (Gram.) “presents ztse/f.” Winer (231 ὁ : 2) remarks that after active verbs of a transitive signification, the reflexive pronoun is sometimes omitted. ‘“ Here (says he) also may be referred Mark 4 : 29, παραδῷ, quum (se) tradiderit,” ete. Bloomf. (N. T.), after noticing the difficulties which translators haye found in this passage, observes, “The best mode of removing the difficulty is (with Beza, Heupel, Wolff, Kuincel, and Fritz.) to suppose an ellipsis of ἑαυτὸν, as in the case of many other active verbs to which use imparted a reciprocal sense.” So this verb is used reciprocally, in the sense of “ present,” or “ commit.” 1 Pet. 2 : 23. 5. “hath come ;” Dick., “hath arrived.” This auxiliary harmonizes with our usus loquendi, and gives the proper sense of the verb. It forms one of those perfects, which embrace ᾿ παρέστηκεν. the present, or the time, which is now before us. See ch. 1 : 38, note a. f “on the ground.” See v. 20, note i. Wakef. Fr., “sur la terre.” ® «the least of all the seeds;” μικρότερος πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων. Pechy So parallel Matt. 13 : 32. Dick., “the smallest of all the seeds.” Pechy remarks on the rendering, “ the least of all the seeds :” “There can be no doubt as to the propri- ety of this change on logical grounds; the comparative form would, clearly, if taken literally, imply that the mustard-seed was not itself a seed.” In addition to this remark, I suggest that “Jess than all seeds” is not correct English. Our usus loquendi, if we use the comparative, would demand this phrase, “ which is less than any other seed.” This is submitted as an alternative rendering. De Wette, “der kleinste aller Samen ;” Beza, “ mini- mum est;” Castal., “omnium terrestrium seminum vel mini- mum ;” Belg., “het minste is yan alle.” The superlative is used in this passage by Wesley, Camp., Thom., L. Tomson. See y. 20, note i. 1 “and yet;” καὶ. This conjunction sometimes closely con- nects two opposed clauses. Hoogeven (καὶ). It thus performs the office of μὲν and δὲ, as in John 9 : 30, οὐκ οἴδατε πόϑεν ἐστὶ, καὶ ἀνέῳξέ, κιτ.1., EB. V., “ye know not whence he is, and yet he hath opened,” ete. In cases of this kind, the conjunction has not, in itself, an adversative sense, but, as Hoogeven remarks; takes it from the nature of the opposed clauses or members. Rob. (xai.) 1 “the greatest of all the herbs ;” πάντων τῶν λαχάνων μεεί- ζω». Camp. and Dick. use the superlative here. It is appropri- ate on the same principle which applies to μεκρότερος, in vy. 31. See y. 31, note g. Should it be deemed best to retain the com- parative form, then an alternative rendering which does not vio- late the propriety of the English, would be, “greater than any. other herb.” TI retain the article as in v. 31. The Greek and English harmonize in this use of the article. The parallel, Matt. 18 : 32, κεῖζων τῶν λαχάνων, is rendered in the EH. V., “ the greatest among herbs.” See the use of the comparative μεέζων for the superlative in Matt.18:1. Mark 9:34. Luke 9 : 46. 1 Cor. 8:13. So ἐλεεινότεροι, 1 Cor. 15:19, E. V., “ most miserable.” Trollope, (Gram.) 343, obs. 5. k “birds.” 1 “can;” δύνασθαι. of the verb in the E. V. δ “ on the ground.” See v. 4, note g. Pechy. This is a common rendering KING JAMES’ VERSION. 33 And with many such para- bles spake he the word unto them, as they were able to hear it. 34 But without a parable spake he not unto them: and when they were alone, he expounded all things to his disciples. 35 And the same day, when the even was come, he saith unto them, Let us pass over unto the other side. 36 And when they had sent away the multitude, they took him even as he was in the ship. And there were also with him other little ships. 37 And there arose a great storm of wind, and the waves beat into the ship, so that it was now full. 38 And he was in the hinder part of the ship, asleep on a pil- low: and they awake him, and say unto him, Master, carest thou not that we perish ? m™ “he spoke ;” ἐλάλει. preached.” » “he did not speak ;” οὐκ ἐλάλει. Kendrick, Thomson. Thom. This arrange- THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IV. GREEK TEXT. ἈΝ Ἂν a cal τὰ πετεινὰ TOU οὐρανοῦ κατασκη- - Ὁ) 4 νοῦν. * Kat τοιαύταις παραβο- lot ΄σ 3 ΄ > cal Αι λαῖς πολλαῖς ἐλάλει αὑτοῖς τὸν / A > [4 > 7 λόγον, καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν" 4 \ lod > 3 ΄ χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλά- a > \ ca λει αὐτοῖς: Kar ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς cal > Ain , 4 μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἐπέλυε πάντα. 5 KAT λέγει αὐτοῖς ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ὀψίας γενομένης, Ζιέλ- θωμεν εἰς, Τὸ περᾶν. Ὁ Καὶ ἀφέντες τὸν ὄχλον, παραλαμβά- νουσιν αὐτὸν ὡς ἢν ἐν τῷ “πλοίῳ: καὶ ἄλλα δὲ πλοιάρια ἦν μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ. *' καὶ γίνεται λαῖλαψ > ft 7 ‘ N 7 ἀνέμου μεγάλη: τὰ δὲ κύματα 3 / > Ν val 4 ἐπέβαλλεν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, WOTE αὐτὸ ἤδη γεμίζεσθαι. “δ καὶ ἣν x αὐτὸς ἐπὶ τῇ πρύμνῃ ἐπὶ τὸ Ἂς προσκεφάλαιον καθεύδων: καὶ / Ν διεγείρουσιν αὐτὸν, καὶ λέγουσιν 4 4 αὐτῷ, Ζιδάσκαλε, od μέλει σοι REVISED VERSION. shadow. And with many such 33 parables, ™he spoke the word to them, even as they were able to hear ἐξ. But without a parable, "he did not speak to them: and when they were alone, che ex- plained all things to his disci- ples. And Pthat day, sevening 35 having come, he saith to them, Let us pass over to the other side. And ‘leaving the crowd, 36 they took him as he was in the ship. And there were also other little ships with him. And there arose a great ‘storm 37 of wind, and the waves "dashed into the ship so that it vwas now filling. And he was wat 38 «the stern, asleep on ‘the pil- low: and they awake him and say to him, *Teacher, dost thou Tyndale, “ he Ve; t “storm ;” λαῖλαψ. Though I retain the rendering of the it is not without a conviction that the sense of “storm” has changed since 1611, so that we now apply it to a fall of ment is adopted as natural, and one which furnishes a sentence easily enunciated. Kend., Camp., “ he told nothing.” ° “he explained ;” ἐπέλυε. Wakef., Thom., Dick., Newcome, Pechy. Rob. and Liddell (i verbo). Pp “that ;” ἐκείνῃ. Campbell, Rob., Liddell. Mont., Vulg., “ila die;” Hras., Beza, “die illo;” Castal., “illo die.’ This pronoun joined with ἡμέρα, is rendered “ that” in (Εἰ. V.) Matt. 7:22; 22:46; 24:36; 26:29. Mark14:25. Luke6 : 23, etc. 4 “evening ;” oyéas. Pechy, Campbell, Wesley, Sharpe. “yen” now belongs to poetry. There is no necessity for the insertion of a supplementary article “the” before “evening.” See ch. 1 : 32, note n. τ “Jeaving (the crowd) ;” ἀφέντες (τὸν ὄχλον). Campbell, Thomson. Tyndale, Cran., Geneva, “left ;” Castal., “omissa multitudine ;” S. Fr., “ils eurent laissé ;” Belg., “ ge- talen hebbende;” De Wette, “lassend ;” Bretsch. (in verbo), “Tinquo aliquem sew aliquod, ich yerlasse.” So (E. V.) Matt. 4:11; 8:15; 22:22; 26:44. Mark 8:13. John 14:18. ® “other little ships with him.” This is the natural order for our language. So Pechy. S. Fr., “d'autres bateaux étaient avee lui:” De Wette (who reads zoza), “ andere Schiffe mit ihm.” I do not regard the evidence sufficiently decisive to au- thorize the change of πλοεάρια to πλοῖα. See Fritz. (in loco.) Kend., G. las it has been (HE. V.) John 3 : 2 rain, hail, or snow. I, therefore, suggest “ gust” as a substitute. See Webster on “storm.” The definition of gust, “a blast of wind of short duration,” presents the idea here conveyed by λαῖλαψ. ἃ “dashed ;” ἐπέβαλλεν. COran., Wakef., Kend., L. Tomson, Dick., Rob. (ὧν loco), Liddell. The pronoun ἕαυτά is understood after this verb, literally, “the waves threw themselves into,” ete. Fritz. says, “ ἐπεβάλλειν, h.1., sensu intransitive notat se ijzcere.” Mont., “ injiciebant ;” S. Fr., “se jetaient;” Iber., “se arroja ban las ondas.” τ “was—filling ;” γεμέζεσϑαι. Wakefield, Kendrick, Pechy, Sharpe, Thom. S. Fr., “s’emplissait ;” Tber., “se llenaba.” w “ats” ἐπὶ (τῇ πρύμνῃ). Rob., Liddell. S. Fr. “a (la poupe).” x “the stern;” τῇ πρύμνῃ. Wesley, Wakef., Camp., Sharpe, Thom., Kend. So Acts 27 : 29. y “the pillow ;” τὸ προσκεφάλαιον. Wesley, Sharpe, Pechy. Bloomf. (N. 1), “the pillow.” The article having a peculiar force, as pointing to a particular part of the furniture of the ship. Ihber., “ el cabezal.” z “Teacher ;” “ιδάσκαλε. Kend., Pechy, Sharpe, Wakef. De Wette, “ Lehrer.” So this word should be rendered in all cases, Acts 13:1. 1 Cor. 12 : 28, THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. V. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 39 And he arose, and rebuked the wind, and said unto the sea, Peace, be still. And the wind ceased, and there was a great calm. 40 And he said unto them, Why are ye so fearful? how is it that ye have no faith? 41 And they feared exceeding- ly, and said one to another, What manner of man is this, that even the wind and the sea obey him? CHAP. V. Anp they came over unto the other side of the sea, into the country of the Gadarenes. 2 And when he was come out of the ship, immediately there met him out of the tombs a man with an unclean spirit, 3 Who had Ais dwelling among the tombs; and no man could bind him, no, not with chains: 4 Because that he had been often bound with fetters and chains, and the chains had been plucked asunder by him, and the 29. Eph. 4:11. 1 Tim. 2: 7. 5:12. a “we are perishing?” ἀπολλύμεϑα; chy, Wakef., Dick. b «Be silent;” σεώπα. Beza, “ Sile;” S. Fr., “ Fais silence.” ing, “ ei, Kend. ciseness of the Greek, and is equally forczble. note. © “to one another ;” πρὸς ἀλλήλους. (in verbo), Liddell. So (E. V.) Matt. 24:10. John 13 : 34; 15 312,17. Acts 19 : 38, ἃ « Who then is this?” Tis ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν; De Wette, “ Wer ist doch dieser?” S. Fr., “Wie is doch deze?” Tber., “ Quién pues es este ?” chy, Kend., Sharpe. “Qui done est celui-ci?” “ Chi é dunque costui?” Belg., ® “came to,” οἷο. ; ἤλϑον εἷς. Pechy. 2 Tim. Dick. Vulg., Hras., Castal., “Tace ;” As an alternative render- This idiomatic term imitates the con- The adverb “over” is un- necessary, not being demanded by the text or the exigentia loci. So in the parallel, Matt. 8 : 28, ἐλϑόντε αὐτῷ is rendered in the E. V., “he was come” (properly, “ he came”). “Over” originated in the rendering of the Vulgate, GREEK TEXT. ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα; 9 Kat διεγερ- θεὶς ἐπετίμησε τῷ ἀνέμῳ, καὶ εἶπε τῇ θαλάσσῃ, ᾿Σιώπα, πεφί- μωσο. Καὶ ἐκόπασεν 0 ἄνε- μος, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη μεγάλη. 10 καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Τί δειλοί ἐστε οὕτω; πῶς οὐκ ἔχετε πί- ΄ / στιν; “ Καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν do- / \ +. Ν > Bov μέγαν, καὶ ἔλεγον πρὸς ἀλ- ΄, ἐπε, ἐν) κιοκὶλ > “ λήλους, Tis apa οὗτος ἐστιν, ὅτι xX c y+ Ν « 4 c καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπα- / > cal κούουσιν αὐτῷ; CHAP. Y. j 5 N a KAT ἦλθον εἰς τὸ πέραν τῆς ΄ XN ΄ na θαλάσσης, εἰς THY χώραν τῶν tad 2 iB Ταδαρηνῶν. * καὶ ἐξελθόντι αὐ- a 3 cal τῷ ἐκ τοῦ πλοίου, εὐθέως ἀπήν- τησεν αὐτῷ ἐκ τῶν μνημείων ἂν- θρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ, ὅ ὃς τὴν κατοίκησιν εἶχεν ἐν τοῖς μνημείοις: καὶ οὔτε ἁλύσεσιν οὐ- Ν ᾽ / JBN - 4 \ δεὶς ἡδύνατο αὐτὸν δῆσαι, * διὰ \ Burk ΄ ΄ \ TO αὐτὸν πολλάκις πέδαις Kal “2 ’ a ἁλύσεσι δεδέσθαι, καὶ διεσπᾶ- Tons VES SRT ἘΓΡΉ: “yvenerunt trans fretum maris.” REVISED VERSION. not care that *we are perish- ing? And he rose and rebuk- ed the wind, and said to the sea, »Be silent, be still! And the wind ceased and there was a great calm. And he said to them, Why are ye so fearful? how is it that ye have no faith ? And they feared exceedingly, and said ‘to one another, 7Who then is this, that even the wind and the sea obey him ? CHAP. V. Anp they «came to the other side of the sea, into the country of the Gadarenes. And as he came out of the ship, immedi- ately there met him out of the tombs a man with an unclean spirit, who had his dwelling ‘in the tombs ; and ‘no one could bind him, ‘not even with chains: because fhe had “often been bound with fetters and chains, and the chains "had been burst 41 Beza correctly renders, “ vene- runt in ulteriorem,” ete.; 8. Fr., “ils arriverent a l'autre bord ;” Bloomf. (N. T.), Pe- Sharpe, Pechy, “And they came to ;” otra parte del mar.” Syr., ee) poss 12/2. ” b “as he came ; See ch. 14 : 61, ἐξελϑόντι αὐτῷ. S. Fr., “ comme il sortait.” © “in (the tombs) ;” ἐν τοῖς μνημείοις. v. 5 (ἐν τοῖς μνήμασιν), BK. Vv. Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, G. See ch. 1 : 38, note a. Span., ..“Y vinieron a la Kend., Wesley, Sharpe. So é is rendered in Camp., Thom., Dick. Vulg., Eras., Beza, “ in monumentis ;” 8 Sharpe, Thom., Rob. ἃ “no one;” οὐδεὶς. note h. Wakef, Pe-| “ “not even;” οὔτε. Ttal., order. Wesley, Sharpe, δεσμούς σου, BK. V., h “had been burst ;” διεσπᾶσϑαι. Rheims, “he had burst.” “purst thy bands.” Fr., “ dans les sepuleres ;” De Wette, “in den Begrébnissen.” See ch. 2:21, Pechy, Wakef., Sharpe. Kend., Camp., Thom., Rob. (in loco.) f “that,” after “because,” in the E. V., is dropped by Sharpe, Pechy, Wesley, Wakef., G. Camp., Thom., Dick., Kend. There is nothing in the text to demand it. ® “often been.” Wesley. This is the natural and proper Thomson, “he burst ; So Jer. 2 : 20, Sept., δεέσπασας τοὺς The definition of ” THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. V. KING JAMES’ VERSION. fetters broken in pieces: neither could any man tame him. 5 And always, night and day, he was in the mountains, and in the tombs, crying, and cutting himself with stones. 6 But when he saw Jesus afar off, he ran and worshipped him, 7 And cried with a loud voice, and said, What have I to do with thee, Jesus, thow Son of the Most High God? I adjure thee by God, that thou torment me not. 8 (For he said unto him, Come out of the man, ¢how unclean spirit.) 9 And he asked him, What 7s thy name? And he answered, Tas πέδας dels αὐτὸν διαπαντὸς τοῖς ὄρεσι τὸν λίθοις. ΄-“ τ ἐλ τοῦ ὑψίστου; / 9 Καὶ ἐπηρώτα 2 saying, My name is Legion: ἴον 0”0#% A \ 2, Ψ. we are many. ἐγεῶν eae . 3 ΧΙ Ν 10 And he besought him much! ἐσμεν. Kat “burst” by Webster is, “To break or lence.” rend by force or vio- 1 “in the tombs and in the mountains;” ἐν τοῖς μνήμασιν καὶ ἐν tots ὄρεσε. This is the reading of Griesbach, Scholz, Knapp, Tittmann, Lachmann, Tischendorf. It is recognized by Syriac, Vulgate, and approved by Fritzsche and Bloomfield. } “erying out;” κράζων. Rob. See ch. 1 : 26, note z. « “for off;” ἀπὸ μακρόϑεν. “ Afar” is now restricted to poetic language. Alternative rendering, “ from far.” In present usage the equivalent is, “at a distance.” “ Far off” occurs in the E. V., Gen. 44:4. Numb. 2:2. 2Sam.15:17. Eph. 2:13. 1 “did reverence to him;” προσχύνησεν αὐτῷ. Rob. (in verbo), “In N.T. and generally, to do reverence or homage to any one, usually by kneeling or prostrating ones’self before him ; Sept. every where for Aymmuin ‘to bow down, to prostrate ones’- self in reverence.”” So Sept., 2 Sam. 9:6, καὶ ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, καὶ προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ, BH. V., “he fell on his face and did reverence to him.” 1 Kings 1 : 31, προσεκύνησε τῷ βασιλεῖ, EK. V., “ did reverence to the king.” Reverence paid to men, is no longer termed “ worship.” Hence, a word which, in present usage, implies the adoration of the heart, is less accurate here, and in similar instances, than one which has primary reference to that attitude by which the superi- ority of power or rank was indicated. = “crying out;” κράξας. Walkef. See ch. 1 : 26, note z. GREEK TEXT. - > > ΄σ \ « / Ν σθαι ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις, καὶ συντετρίφθαι, καὶ οὐ- Γ 7 ἴσχυε δαμάσαι: XN e iA νυκτὸς Kal ἡμέρας ἐν “ a καὶ ἐν τοῖς μνήμασιν 53 7 / ἣν κράζων καὶ κατακόπτων ἑἕαυ- > Ἂν Ν S 5 δ 7δὼν δὲ τὸν ᾽7η- fol > Ν / wy ἂς σοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν, ἐδραμε καὶ / > fal προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ, “ ΄ 53 Eas φωνῇ μεγάλῃ εἶπε, Τί ἐμοὶ a e\ lol a καὶ σοὶ, ᾿]ησοῦ, vie τοῦ Θεοῦ Ν XN δ) Θεὸν, μὴ με βασανίσῃς" * ἔλεγε Ἂν a , Ν cod yap αὐτῳ, ᾿Εξελθε, τὸ πνεῦμα Ν » / 2 πὰ ie) / To ἀκάθαρτον ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. Kai ἀπεκρίθη, λέγων, REVISED VERSION. asunder by him and the fetters broken in pieces: nor could any one tame him. And al- ways, night and day, he was ‘in the tombs and in the mountains, Jerying out, and cutting himself with stones. But when he saw 6 Jesus ‘far off, he ran and ‘did reverence to him, and ™eried 7 out with a loud voice and said, What have I to do with thee, Jesus," Son of the Most High God? eI implore thee by God, that thou torment me not ;? (for 8 he shad said to him, Come out of the man, unclean spirit.) And he asked him, What is thy 9 name? And ‘he saith to him, My name is Legion, for we are many. And he besought him 10 5 καὶ ‘ 7 και Κρα- c / Ν ὁρκίζω σε τὸν 3), ὟΝ / αὐτὸν, Tt σοι τὰ μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ΄ ἊΝ παρεκάλει αὐτὸν » The supplementary “thou” of 1). V. is superfluous. No supplement in Dick., Camp., De Wette, S. Fr., Iber. ° “J implore thee ;” δρκέξζω oe. Castal., “ obtestor te.” The verb here has the sense of “ obtestor,” “to zmplore vehemently,” “to beseech.” Bretsch. (in loco), “ obtestor.” So 1 Thess. 5 : 27, ὁρκίζω ὑμᾶς τὸν Κύριον, EB. V., “I charge you by the Lord.” In the parallel, Luke 8 : 28, δέομαί σου, “I beseech thee.” Bloomf. (N. 1.) remarks on this verb, “ here (as Grotius, Rosen- miller, and Kuincel have thought) it has the force of oro, ob- testor te per Deum.” Fritz., “recte explicuit Grotius, oro, ob- testor te per Deum.” ‘The colloquial phrase in English “ for God’s sake, I beseech you,” has the same force. Compare Ho- race, Β.1., Ode 8:1, “per omnes te Deos oro.” I use “im- plore” (though a non-biblical word) in order to make a distine- tion similar to that of the text, between this passage and the parallel, Luke 8 : 28. P As the text has a colon after βασανέσῃς, a semicolon has been placed after “ not.” a “had said;” ἔλεγε. Tyndale, Wakefield., G. Camp., Dick., Bloomf., Newcome. “Where the relation of time is sufficiently clear from the context, the aorist can be employed instead of the pluperfect, in narration,” Buttm., 3137. 3. τ “thou.” See v. 7, note n. 5 “he gaith.” Sharpe, Pechy. “that had been done ;” τό γεγονός. Wakef. Eras, “ (quid esset) quod acciderat ;” Beza, “ [quid illud esset] quod factum fuerat.” read αὐτοὺς. Vulg., “ eos See ch. 1 : 32, 34, notes. 4 “who had had;” τὸν ἐσχηκότα. Kend., Pechy, Wesley. S. Fr., “qui ayait eu.” This part. has the force of a pluperf. Trollope, 350: 6. See ἑωρακότες, John ὁ : 45 © “the demoniac.” 32 KING JAMES’ VERSION. was possessed with the devil, and also concerning the swine. 17 And they began to pray him to depart out of their coasts. 18 And when he was come into the ship, he that had been pos- sessed with the devil prayed him that he might be with him. 19 Howbeit, Jesus suffered him not, but saith unto him, Go home|” to thy friends, and tell them how great things the Lord hath done for thee, and hath had compassion on thee. 20 And he departed, and began to publish in Decapolis how great things Jesus had done for him. And all men did marvel. 21 And when Jesus was passed |» over again by ship unto the other side, much people gathered unto him: and he was nigh unto the sea. ¢ The supplement “also” of the E. V. is superfluous. Camp., Thom., Wakefield, Pechy, dropped by Wesley, Kend., Sharpe. f “entreat ;” παρακαλεῖ». Luke 15 : 28. 1 Cor. 4 : 18. Camp., Thom., Rob. So E. V., ἀπ brio ΟἿ ἢ THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VY. GREEK TEXT. a ὃ ζ a ἂν ἊΝ τῶ τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ, καὶ περὶ τῶν ΤᾺ Ν ,΄ χοίρων. | καὶ ἤρξαντο παρα- > Oe tN > - 5 ἣν a καλεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν a 3 / ὁρίων αὐτῶν. 1° Καὶ ἐμβάντος a 5 ἂν ΄σ th αὐτοῦ εἰς TO πλοῖον, παρεκάλει Sous ε \ of ‘> > αὐτὸν ὁ δαιμονισθεὶς, iva ἢ μετ᾽ > - « A 5 a 5 αὐτοῦ. “ὃ ὁ δὲ Inaods οὐκ ἀφῆ- τῶν > ἈΝ ΄ὔ > eg κεν αὑτὸν, ἀλλὰ λέγει avTo, Ν 3 / \ Yaraye εἰς τὸν οἶκον cov πρὸς Ν \ » ol τοὺς σοὺς, Kal ἀνάγγειλον αὐτοῖς σ“ / ὅσα σοι ὁ Κύριος ἐποίησε, Kai 3 , Ἃ a ἡλέησέ oe. 9 Kat ἀπῆλθε καὶ ἤρξατο “κηρύσσειν ἐν τῇ» Ζεκα- πόλει, ὅσα ἐποίησεν αὐτῷ ὃ ᾽Ϊη- σοῦς- καὶ πάντες ἐθαύμαζον. 2 ΄ a 7} KAI διαπεράσαντος τοῦ ]ησοῦ πέραν, αὐτὸν, σαν. 5 Cal / ΄ > Ν εν τῷ πλοίῳ πάλιν εἰς TO / ay \ we συνήχθη ὄχλος πολὺς ἐπ eee Ἂν \ ΄, καὶ nv παρὰ τὴν θαάλασ- 22 ἥῶ Ν id A »” Ὁ αι loov, EPXETAL els REVISED VERSION. demoniac and ‘concerning the swine. And they began to fen- 17 treat him to depart from their Sporders. And *as he went 18 into the ship, he who had been possessed with the demons, ‘en- treated him that he 'might re- main with him. And yet he did not suffer him, but saith to him, Go home to thy friends and tell them thow much the Lord hath done for thee, and =hath pitied thee. And he de- parted and began to publish in Deeapolis how much Jesus had done for him. And call Pwon- dered. And when Jesus had passed over again ‘in the ship to the other side, a great crowd gathered to him; and he was by the sea-side. And behold, 22 - 9 It is 1 “how much ;” 1. m “hath pitied ;” Sharpe, Wesley, Dick. the apparently adversative force. ὅσα. De Wette, “ wie viel.” > 7 AEH OE. It is the true reading. Kai here has Rob., καὶ. See ch. 6 : 19. Wakef., Kend., Dick., Rob. (ὅσος). Kend., Wakef., “ pitied ;” Sharpe, Buttm., 3137. 3, & «orders ;” ogiwy. This noun, in classic usage, has the same signification as ὅρος, a bound, goal; hence, in the plural, τὰ ὅρια, the boundaries, bound, frontier. Liddell. By Hebraism it signifies the place included within certain boundaries, and might be represented by our later word “ district,” or, when the bound- aries were not well defined, by “territory.” “Coast” is no longer a proper equiyalent for this word. As “ borders” is gen- erally well understood in the sense of “region” or “ territory,” and has the advantage of being a “ biblical word,” it is deemed most appropriate. So (H. V.) Matt. 4:13. I have rendered ὅρια uniformly “ borders.” So Wakef., Kend., Pechy, Newcome, Dick. Vulg., Erasmus, Beza, Mont., Castalio, “ finibus ;” Iber., “ confines ;” De Wette, “ Grenzen.” h “as he went;” ἐμβάντος αὐτοῦ. Wette, “als er in das Schiff trat.” 1 “entreated ;” παρεκάλει. Wesley, Kendrick. De See v. 17, note g. } “micht remain;” 7. Kendrick. De Wette, “ er—bleiben durfe ;” Castal., “ at esset ei comes.” « « And yet he did not suffer.” Instead of 6 δὲ Ἰησοῦς of the Text. Recept., Griesb., Scholz, Tischend., Knapp., Titt., Fritz. read, καὶ οὐκ. Recognized by Syriac and Vulg. So De Wette, “hath had pity ;” Rob. (ὧν verbo), “ to pity.” “ When the relation of time is sufficiently clear from the context, the aorist can be employed, instead of the perfect.” See v. 19, note m. Kend., Dick., Camp., Wakef., Thom. Kend., Pechy, Rob. “Marvel” 2 “ how much.” ο “all;” πάντες. P “wondered ;” is obsolete. ἐθαύμαζον. a “Jesus had passed over again ;" διωπεράσαντος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ - πάλιν. Sharpe. Pechy, “had crossed over again.” The aorist participle being rendered by a finite verb, the pluperfect is appropriate. See v. 8, note. See also ch. 1:38, note. Iber., “habiendo passado Jesus.” ” r “in the ship;” ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ. So (H. V.) ch.4:36. Wes ley, Kend., Wakef., Camp., Pechy.. 5. Fr., “ dans la barque ;” Iber., “en la barea;” Belg., “en het ship ;” De Wette, “im Schiffe.” Compare ch. 3:9. “ By ship” was copied from Tyn- dale. The article is specific here, and should not be dropped. The above authorities are cited in reference to the proper render- ing of ἐν, not of πλοίῳ. “Dy the sea-side ;” σταρὰ signifies along, beside,” Liddell. παρὰ τὴν ϑάλασσαν. “ With the aceus. This sentence is correctly THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. V. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 22 And behold, there cometh one of the rulers of the synagogue, Jairus by name; and when he saw him, he fell at his feet, 23 And besought him greatly, saying, My little daughter lieth at the point of death: I pray thee, come and lay thy hands on her, that she may be healed; and she | + shall live. 24 And Jesus went with him; and much people followed him, and thronged him. 25 And a certain woman which had an issue of blood twelve years, 26 And had suffered many things of many physicians, and had spent all that she had, and was nothing bettered, but rather grew worse, 27 When she had heard of Je-|’ sus, came in the press behind, and touched his garment: 28 For she said, If I may touch but his clothes, I shall be whole. 29 And straightway the foun- tain of her blood was dried up; and she felt in her body that she was healed of that plague. 33 GREEK TEXT. “ ΄ , τῶν ἀρχισυναγώγων, ὀνόματι > "4 \ ok δ iy ]άειρος, καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, πίπτει Ν \ ΄ a πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ: * καὶ ΄ ‘\ A ,ὔ παρεκάλει αὐτὸν πολλὰ, λέγων, σ Ν ΄ , 2 ΄ Ort τὸ θυγάτριόν μου ἐσχάτως 2, a > Ν > Cal zs Lal A exer ἵνα ἐλθὼν ἐπιθῇς αὐτῇ Tas -“ a “-“ Ἃ χεῖρας, ὅπως σωθῇ καὶ ζήσεται. ** Καὶ ἀπῆλθε μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ: καὶ ᾽ , lal Ν ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ ὄχλος πολὺς, Ν / 2 / καὶ συνέθλιβον αὐτον. 25 Ν ΄ 9 » ΓΗ ὦ Kai γυνή τις οὖσα ἐν ῥύσει of , αἵματος ἔτη δώδεκα, *° καὶ πολ- \ fo) e Ν a » a Aa παθοῦσα ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἰατρῶν, , n kai δαπανήσασα τὰ Tap ἑαυτῆς 4 Ν \ > a πάντα, καὶ μηδὲν ὠφεληθεῖσα, » Ν ΄σ Ν ΄σ ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον εἰς τὸ χεῖρον ἐλ- col / - θοῦσα, “ ἀκούσασα περὶ τοῦ lal 3 ΄ lal 7 Inoov, ἐλθοῦσα ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ ᾿΄ oS ert / 2 — ἥψατο τοῦ ἱματίου αὐ- fal x τοῦ" * ἔλεγε γὰρ, "Ort, κἂν τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ ἅψωμαι, σω- θήσομαι. 9. Καὶ εὐθέως ἐξη- ράνθη ἡ πηγὴ τοῦ αἵματος αὐτῆς, καὶ ἔγνω τῷ σώματι ὅτι ἴαται rendered “ by the sea-side,” Εἰ. V., Μαίί. 18:1. 4:1. Acts10:6. The phrase should (as far as propriety will allow) be rendered uniformly. t “entreated.” See v. 17, note f. = “earnestly ;” πολλὰ. See v. 10, note t. mently.” y “will live.” Kend., Sharpe. ¥ “he went ;” ἀπῆλϑε. Geneva. Wesley, Sharpe, Tyndale, Cranmer, 5. Fr., “il s’en alla;” Iber., “I se fué ;” Belg., “ hij ging ;” De Wette, “er ging.” As the nominative is not ex- Mark 2 at all.” So Liddell. Greenf., “ vehe- Sharpe. * “was not at all benefited ;” μηδὲν ὠφεληϑείσα. Pechy, “ was nothing benefited ;” Rob., “ μηδέν, as adverb, not “ Bettered” is no longer current. > “having heard ;” « «Tf I may but touch ;” x@v—ayauae. Geneva, Sharpe, Pechy, Dick. Rob. on κῶν, “ if—but.” Wakef., Thom. Camp., “ if—but.” a “ garments ;” ἑκατίων. REVISED VERSION. there cometh one of the rulers of the synagogue, Jairus by name, and when he saw him, he fell at his feet, and tentreated 23 him "earnestly, saying, My lit- tle daughter is at the point of death: I pray thee, come and lay thy hands on her, that she may be healed and she rwill live. And whe went with him; 24 and a great crowd followed him and *pressed on him. And 25 a certain woman ’who had had an issue of blood twelve years, and had suffered ‘much from 26 many physicians, and had spent all that she had, and ‘was not at all benefited, but rather grew worse, having heard of Jesus, 27 came in the crowd behind and touched his garment: for she 28 said, ‘If I may but touch his ‘garments, 1 shall be healed. And immediately the fountain 29 of her blood was dried up; and she felt in ‘her body that she Kend., ἀκούσασα. Wakefield, Pechy, Thomson, Tyndale, Cranmer, So Pechy. So the singular ἑμκάτιον, pressed in the text, and as there is no obscurity as to the agent, “he” should be employed instead of the supplement “ Jesus.” x “pressed on;” συνέϑλεβον. Dick., Wakefield. Rob. (in verbo), “to press upon a person in a crowd ;” Liddell, “ to press.” “To throng” is obsolete. See on ϑλέβω ch. 3 : 9, note. y “who had had;” οὖσα. Wesley, Pechy. The participle (aorist) δασπανήσαντα, in the next clause, is properly rendered in the ἘΠ V. by the pluperf. “had spent.” The tense of the equiva- lent of οὖσα should be in that tense. Our usus loguendi demands this. Eiwé is defective, having no aorist or pluperfect. * “much ;” πολλὰ Wakef., Dick., Kend., Pechy, Sharpe, Camp., Thom., Rob. Υ. 217, is rendered “ garment” in the E. V. There is no necessity for changing the rendering here. In other versions, the word, in these verbs, is rendered uniformly. S. Fr., “ vétement—véte- ments ;” Span., “ vestido—yestido;” Vulg., “ vestimentum— vestimentum ;” Mont., “ vestimentum—vestimenta.” So Eras, and Castalio. Iber., “ vestido—vestidos ;” De Wette, “ Kleid— Kleid ;” Belg., “ kleed—kleederen.” The E. V. copies Tyndale. ¢ “T shall be healed ;” σωϑήσομαι. Sharpe, Kend., Rob. (on σώξω). G. Fr., “je serai guérie.” f “her.” “The article τῷ, joined with σώκεατε, is equivalent to the possessive pronoun,” Kiihner, 3244, 4. Hence “her” ig not a supplement. 84 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 30 And Jesus, immediately knowing in himself that virtue) ὃ had gone out of him, turned him about in the press, and said, Who touched my clothes? 31 And his disciples said unto | 5 him, Thou seest the multitude thronging thee, and sayest thou, Who touched me ὃ 32 And he looked round about to see her that had done this thing. 33 But the woman, fearing and trembling, knowing what was done in her, came and fell down before him, and told him all the truth. 34 And he said unto her, Daugh- ter, thy faith hath made thee whole; go in peace, and be whole of thy plague. 35 While he yet spake, there came from the ruler of the syn- agogue’s house certain which said, Thy daughter is dead: why trou- blest thou the Master any further? 36 As soon as Jesus heard the THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. V. GREEK TEXT. 5 / 30 καὶ εὐθέως > a > Ν > e “ Ν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς ἐπιγνοὺς ἐν ἑαυτῷ τὴν ΄ / “-“ ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν, > ὧν 3 an Ww 2, ἐπιστραφεὶς ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ, ἔλεγε; σ a ,ὔ Tis μου ἥψατο τῶν ἱματίων; ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος. ' “ Ἵ Kal ἔλεγον αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ ’ a ie νὴ 3 αὐτοῦ, Βλέπεις τὸν ὄχλον συν- ΄ὔ΄ 7 θλίβοντα σε, καὶ λέγεις, Tis μου ἥψατο; ™ Καὶ περιεβλέπετο > lal Ν a ἰδεῖν THY τοῦτο ποιήσασαν. * ἡ \ \ ° Ν / de γυνὴ φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα, > “- ἃ , >> trae evdvia ὃ γέγονεν ἐπ᾽ αὐτῇ, ἦλθε , 5 3 καὶ προσέπεσεν αὐτῷ, καὶ εἶπεν > a “-“ \ > / 34 ε αὐτῷ πᾶσαν THY ἀλήθειαν. ὁ \ 3 a / « δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῇ, θύγατερ, ῆ πίστις σου σέσωκέ σε: ὕπαγε εἰς εἰρή- νὴν, καὶ ἴσθι ὑγιὴς ἀπὸ τῆς μά- στιγός σου. Ey Ἔτι αὐτοῦ λα- λοῦντος, ἔρχονται ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχι- συναγώγου, λέγοντες, Ὅτι ἢ θυγάτηρ σου ἀπέθανε: τί ἔτι / \ ΄΄ « σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον; ὁ ὋὉ ern) = > / > [Δ Ν δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς εὐθέως ἀκούσας τὸν REVISED VERSION. was healed of that plague. And 30 ‘immediately, Jesus knowing in himself that "the power had gone out of him, ‘turned round in the crowd, and said, Who touched my Jgarments? And his disciples said to him, Thou seest the crowd “pressing on thee, and sayest thou, Who touched me? And the was looking round to see her who had done this. But the woman fearing and trembling, know- ing what ™had been done "to her, came and fell down before him, and told him all the truth. And he said to her, Daughter, thy faith ehath healed thee; go in peace and be whole of thy plague. While he was Pstill speaking, there came *some from the house of the ruler of the syn- agogue, who said, Thy daughter is dead; why troublest thou rthe teacher any further? ‘But 36 as soon as Jesus heard the word 34 = “jmmediately.” This place is properly given to the adverb If placed after Jesus, it is made to qualify whereas it belongs to “turned round;” in other words, εὐθέως is to be construed not with ἐπεγνοὺς, but with So Sharpe, “ And straightway Jesus,” ete.; Thom- by Kendrick. “ knowing,” ἐπιστραφεὶς. son, “ turning about immediately.” h «The power.” Wesley, Sharpe, Thom., 8. Fr., Luther. (δύναμις.) article. Fritzsche, “ vim sanatricem.” power that had gone out of him.” ' “turned round ;” ἐπεστραφεὶς. Pechy, Rob. The article is retained by De Wette, Span., Iber., Bele., Aivauts, here, implies that power by which miracles were wrought, and which is thus defined Rom. 15 : 19, δυνάμει σημείων καὶ τεράτων, ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος Θεοῦ. As the noun is entirely definite, it should have the Marginal note, “or, the Sharpe, Pechy, Thomson. use the pluperf. Rob., σώζω (2). See Rob. p “ While he was speaking.” 1 “he was looking round ;” περιβλέπετο. “ circumspiciebat ;” S. Fr., “il regardait tout autour.” usual rendering of the imperfect, as implying continued action, is exact. Trollope, (Gram.) Ρ. 129 (2). m “had been done ;” γέγονεν. Ὁ “to her;” ἐπὶ αὐτῇ. ° “hath healed :" σέσωκέ. Wakefield. Beza, This Rost, (Gram.) 3116 (10). Thom., Pechy, Wakef., Kend Bloomf., Kend., Wakef., Pechy. See v. 28, note e. Kend., Sharpe. still speaking ;” “Ere αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος. Kend., Pechy, Wakef., Dick., Thomson, “ Now while he was Vulg., Beza, “ adhue eo loquente.” 4 “some came from the house of the ruler of the synagogue.” Wakef. and Pechy have properly used the supplement some, as Kend., “turned about.” It is unnecessary to place the equiva- lent of ἑαυτόν (which is understood in constructions of this kind) in the Revision. The idiom of our language leaves “ him- self” to be supplied by the mind of the reader. In this respect, our uy loquendi is like that of the Greek. “Round” is used euphonia grati. 1 “ garments.” See y. 28, note e. k “pressing on.” See v. 24, note y. Ρ ΕἸ y. τένας is understood before ἔρχονταε ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου. Fritz. and Bloomf. By this arrangement, the passage is rendered more harmonious and perspicuous. r “the teacher.” See ch. 4 : 38, note z. 2 “But;” Je. Wakef., Dick. Vulg., Eras., Beza, “ autem ;” Castal., “at;” 8. Fr. “mais;” Span., “mas;” Ital., “ma;” Luther, De Wette, “aber.” The particle is obviously adversa tive. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. V. KING JAMES’ VERSION. word that was spoken, he saith λόγον λαλούμενον λέγει τῷ ἀρχι- | A Δ 3 unto the ruler of the synagogue, | συναγώγῳ, Μὴ φόβου, μόνον > > “ ὅ Καὶ οὐκ ἀφῆκεν > ve > n nan οὐδένα αὐτῷ συνακολουθῆσαι, εἰ Ν vo Ν > 4 Ν μὴ Πέτρον καὶ ᾿Ϊάκωβον καὶ ᾿Τωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν ᾿]ακώβου. Be not afraid, only believe. FAG 37 And he suffered no man tose follow him, save Peter, and James, | and John the brother of James. 38 And he cometh to the house of the ruler of the synagogue, and seeth the tumult, and them that wept and wailed greatly. 39 And when he was come in, he saith unto them, Why make ye | τοὺς ᾿ this ado, and weep? the damsel 15. γεέ Gu7ows, Ti not dead, but sleepeth. | KAaLeTE ; 40 And they laughed him to scorn. But, when he had put them all out, he taketh the father | and the mother of the damsel, and them that were with him, and en- tereth in where the damsel was lying. 41 And he took the damsel by the hand, and said unto her: Tali- tha-cumi: which is, being inter- preted, Damsel, (1 say unto thee) arise. 42 And straightway the damsel arose, and walked; for she was of the age of twelve years. And they were astonished with a great astonishment. 38 Tas ToAAG. κείμενον. \ = Tarida, κοῦμι: , Ν νευόμενον, To λέγω,) ἔγειραι. GREEK TEXT. Oavev, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει. 5 / ἊΣ; 7 7 ἀνέστη TO κοράσιον καὶ περιεπα- 3 \ ae ΄ Los Tel, ἦν yap ἐτῶν δώδεκα" καὶ ἐξέ- ᾽ / La στησαν ἐκστάσει μεγαλῇῃ. 8 καὶ 35 REVISED VERSION. that was spoken, he saith to the ruler of the synagogue, Fear not, only believe. And he suffered no one to follow him texcept Peter, and James, and John the brother of James. καὶ ἔρ χεται εἰς ἘΝ ΕΒΕΣ And he cometh to the house of 38 ; ͵ Ν ~ 47 | the ruler of the synagogue, and a aaa Seer ioe ie — seeth va tumult, “and those who βυβοῦ; peers “4 = ἀλαλάζον- wept and wailed *much. And 39 ee εἰσελθὼν λέ: ywhen he came in, he saith to : θορυβεῖσθε «Καὶ them, Why do ye make a tumult τὸ παιδίον οὐκ az Jand weep? ‘the child is not " Καὶ dead, but-sleepeth. And they 40 κατεγέλων αὐτοῦ. ὁ δὲ ἐκβαλὼν ‘laughed at him. But when he ἅπαντας, παραλαμβάνει τὸν Ta-|had put them all out, he taketh τέρα τοῦ παιδίου καὶ THY μητέρα the father and the mother of καὶ τοὺς μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Kai εἰσπο- the child, and those with him, peverar ὕπου ἦν τὸ παιδίον ava-|and entereth in where *the Ή καὶ κρατήσας τῆς child was lying. And he took 41 χειρὸς τοῦ παίδιου, λέγει αὐτῇ, sess yh tip eat ou PWD τε κα we which is, ΕΣ interpreted: a is ls (σοὶ Damsel, (I say to thee) rise. “Καὶ εὐθέως And immediately the damsel 42 rose and ‘walked about, for ‘she was twelve years old. And they were greatly astonished. s t “no one;” (odx)—oddéva. Bharpe. = “except;” εἰ μὴ. Dick., Kend., Camp. So (HE. V.) Matt. 19:9. John 19:11. Rom.9:29. “Save” is obsolete. “But,” which is often used for εἰ μεὴ in the E. V., is, to say the least, obsolescent. * “a tumult ;” ϑόρυβον. Kend., Pechy, Sharpe. Iber., “un alboroto ;” De Wette, “siehet Larmen.” There is nothing to demand the indefinite article here. Kendrick, Pechy, Wakefield, w “qnd.” As there is no conjunction in the text, this word should be italicized, as a supplement. = “much ;” πολλὰ. Rob. So (E.V.) ch.1:45. John 14:30. Rom. 15 : 22; 16:12. 1 Cor.16:19. “Greatly,” in such con- structions, is obsolete. y “when he came in;” εἰσελθὼν. parallels, Matt. 9 : 23. note. * “the child;” τὸ σπαιδίον. Kend., Pechy, Rob. (wn verbo.) So ἐλϑὼ»---εἷς, in the Luke 8:51 (E. V.) See ch. 1 : 38, The E. V. confounds this word with κοράσεον, which is properly rendered “damsel,” in v. 41,42. In all cases, except ch. 5 : 39, 40, παιδίον is rendered “ child,” or “ little child,” in the Ἐς V. * “laughed at;” κατεγέλων. Sharpe, Kend., Wakef., Thom. The verb occurs only here, Matt. 9 : 24, and Luke 8:53. It has no greater force, in consequence of the use of κατὰ, than “ to laugh at.” “To laugh to scorn,” is no longer in use. As an alternative rendering, “ derided.” > “the child.” See vy. 39, note Ὁ. ¢ “the child.” See v. 39, note b. 4 “saith ;” λέγει. Sharpe, Pechy, Wakef., Thomson. Vulg. Mont., Hras., “ait ;” Beza, Castal., “ dicit.” ¢ “walked about ; περιεπάτει. Rob. (in verbo), Thomson Bretsch., “ abambulo, deambulo ;” De Wette, “ wandelte umher.” f “she was twelve years old;” 7—éray δώδεκα. Wesley, Wakef., Camp., Thom., Sharpe, Pechy. & «they were greatly astonished ;” ἐξέστησαν ἐκστάσεε μεγά- Jn. A literal translation, like that of the E. V., introduces a Hellenistic or Hebrew idiom, which will always appear unnatural 36 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VI. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 43 And he charged them strait- ly that no man should know it; and commanded that something should be given her to eat. CHAP. VI. AnpD he went out from thence, and came into his own country; and his disciples follow him. 2 And when the sabbath-day was come, he began to teach in the synagogue: and many hear- ing him were astonished, saying, From whence hath this man these things? and what wisdom 7s this which is given unto him, that even such mighty works are wrought by his hands? 3 Is not this the carpenter, the son of Mary, the brother of James, and Joses, and of Juda, and Si- mon? and are not his sisters here with us? And they were offended at him. 3 But Jesus said unto them, A prophet is not without honour, but in his own country, and among his own kin, and in his own house. 5 And he could there do no mighty work, save that he laid his hands upon a few sick folk, and healed them. to English readers. Peshy recommends the aboye phrase. GREEK TEXT. a A διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς πολλὰ, iva Ν “ - Sime led μηδεὶς γνῷ τοῦτο: καὶ εἶπε δοθη- ναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν. CHAP. VI. 3 a“ 3 ~~ > KAT ἐξῆλθεν ἐκεῖθεν, καὶ ἦλ- Ν a θεν εἰς τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ: καὶ > > > tal ε \ ἀκολουθοῦσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ > 7 2 Ν / ΄ αὐτοῦ" “ καὶ γενομένου σαββα- ΕΣ » col a Tov, ἤρξατο ἐν TH συναγωγῇ δι- 4 δάσκειν: καὶ πολλοὶ ἀκούοντες > /, / / ἐξεπλήσσοντο, λέγοντες, dev ΄ a τούτῳ ταῦτα; καὶ Tis ἡ σοφία ἡ tod “ “ δοθεῖσα αὐτῷ, ὅτι καὶ δυνάμεις lol ‘\ ΄σ cal ΄σ τοιαῦται διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ , ee, γίνονται; * οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ 4 eX Ν τέκτων, ὃ υἱὸς Mapias, ἀδελφὸς \? ‘4 a δὲ LaxoBov cat’ Iwan cai’ Tovda ἊΝ ,ὔ καὶ Σίμωνος; καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ 2 ἊΝ ᾽ a ey \ Ce ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ἡμᾶς; 3 cal Καὶ ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ. a Ν - a yf * ἔλεγε δὲ αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς, “Ort 3 / \ οὐκ ἔστι προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὑτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τοῖς ΄ lal col συγγενέσι καὶ ἐν TH οἰκίᾳ αὑτοῦ. REVISED VERSION. And he charged them strictly 48 that ‘no one should know it, and commanded that something should be given her to eat. CHAP. VI. AND he went out from thence, 1 and came into this own coun- try; and his disciples follow him. And *the sabbath having 2 come, he began to teach in the synagogue; and many hearing him were astonished, ‘and said, From whence hath this man these things? and what wis- dom zs this which is given to him, that even such mighty works are wrought by his hands? Is not this the car- 3 penter, the son of Mary, the brother of James, and Joses, dand Judas, and Simon, and are not his sisters here with us? And ‘they had a difficulty as to him. But Jesus said to them, 4 A prophet is not without honor, fexcept in his own country and among his own *kindred, and in his own house. And he ὃ could do no mighty work there, except that he laid his hand on a few sick ‘persons and heal- De has been adopted in the O. T. (from the Hebrew.) Tn that case, Wette, “sie geriethen in grosses Erstaunen.” σολλὰ. See ch. 3 : 12, note t. “no one;” μηδεὶς. Rob., Sharpe, Kend., Pechy, Thomson. 5. Fr., “personne ne ;” Span. and Iber., “nadie ;” De Wette, “ niemand.” h “strictly ;” * “his own.” The translators of the HE. V. read αὑτοῦ instead of αὐτοῦ (“his”) which last is found in Bagster’s text. Bloomf. has αὐτοῦ, while the Elzevir, Mill, Montanus, Wilson, Erasmus, Robinson (Harmony,) have αὑτοῦ. So Griesb., Scholz, Knapp, and Titt. In v. 4, Bagster has, ἐν τῇ πατρίδε αὑτοῦ. Vulg., Mont., Hras. (Latin), Beza, Castal., all have “suam,” not “ ejus.” > “the sabbath having come;” yevouévov σαββάτου. See ch. 1 : 21, 32, notes. © “and said ;” λέγοντες. Thom., Camp. Perspicuity demands the finite verb here. ἃ “ond Judas ;” καὶ Ἰούδα. S. Fr., “ disaient.” No preposition is necessary be- fore this name. It is in the genitive (Doric form), and has Yov- | das, as its nominative. Hence, “ Judas” is the proper orthogra- phy in English, unless we follow that mode of spelling which “ Judah,” Camp., Wakef., Sharpe, Thom., have “and Judas.” * “they had a difficulty as to him,” ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ. Sharpe, “they found a difficulty in him.” The thought presented here is, that they could not reconcile the humble condition of Jesus with their ideas of the Messiah. There is no evidence that their anger was excited, as the present sense of the word “ offend” implies. They were rather confounded at the dzfficulty, which his case presented. These persons could not be said “ to revolt” from Christ, for they had neyer been among his professed fol- lowers. -As the verb does not admit an uniform rendering, un- less in the literal sense “to stumble, we are obliged to vary the translation, so as to present the thought by appropriate phrases, which will meet the exigentia loci. See ch. 4:17, note. Alter- native, “ they were perplexed about him.” τ “except;” εἰ μὴ. Rob. See ch. ὃ : 87, note v. Kendrick, Pechy, Camp. & “kindred ;” συγγενέσι. Rob., Wesley, Dick., Pechy, Kend., Thom., L. Tomson, Rheims. h “except;” εἰ μὴ. Rob. See ch. 5: 37, note v. ' « persons.” This is properly a supplement. Kend., Dick. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VI. 37 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 6 And he marvelled because of their unbelief. And he went round about the villages teach- ing. 7 And he called unto him the twelve, and began to send them forth by two and two; and gaye them power over unclean spirits ; 8 And commanded them that they should take nothing for their journey, save a staff only; no scrip, no bread, no money in their purse : 9 But be shod with sandals ; and not put on two coats. 10 And he said unto them, In what place soever ye enter into an house, there abide till ye de- part from that place. 11 And whosoever shall not re- ceive you, nor hear you, when ye depart thence, shake off the dust under your feet, for a testimony against them. Verily, I say unto you, It shall be more tolerable for Sodom and Gomorrah in the day GREEK TEXT. / a 5 Kat οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἐκεῖ οὐδεμίαν ὔ “ \ δύναμιν ποιῆσαι, εἰ μὴ ὀλίγοις eg Ν ΄σ ἀῤῥώστοις ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας, > s 6 Ns 3 ΄ \ ἐθεράπευσε. 5 καὶ ἐθαύμαζε διὰ \ a ΄ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν: καὶ περιῆγε \ / , ΄ τὰς κώμας κύκλῳ διδάσκων. ΄“ Ν ,ὔ Τ KAT προσκαλεῖται τοὺς δώ- 3, 5 \ dexa, καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοὺς ἀπο- , , στέλλειν δύο δύο, καὶ ἐδίδου av- rat ΄ Ἂν τοῖς ἐξουσίαν τῶν πνευμάτων rad 4 / τῶν ἀκαθάρτων. ἣ Kal παρήγ- ΄- ε A γειλεν αὐτοῖς, iva μηδὲν αἴρωσιν > ὁδὸ > \ e7 ὃ / 7 εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον \ ΄ Ν 4 Ν ᾿ \ μὴ πήραν, μὴ ἄρτον, μὴ εἰς τὴν / > «ε ζώνην χαλκόν: ἣ ἀλλ᾽ ὑποδεδε- / 4 Ν Ν » / μένους σανδάλια: καὶ μὴ ἐνδύ- / “ : σησθε δύο χιτῶνας. \° Καὶ ἔλε- > “ σ aN > / γεν αὐτοῖς, ᾿ που ἐὰν εἰσέλθητε ᾽ ca o » εἰς οἰκίαν, ἐκεῖ μένετε ἕως av ἐξ- έλθητε exeiOev. | μὴ δέξωνται ὑ ὑμᾶς, μηδὲ ἀκούσω- σιν ὑμῶν, ἐκπορευόμενοι ἐκεῖθεν, ἐκτινάξατε τὸν χοῦν τὸν ὑποκάτω ΄ “ « ΄σ δ τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν, εἰς μαρτύριον ΄ Ν ΄ὔ eee / αὐτοῖς. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀνεκτὸ- y / ΕΣ ΓΑΕ τερον ἔσται Σοδόμοις ἢ [Ὀμοῤ- ΝΡ ΩΣ x και οαιθε αν REVISED VERSION. And ‘he wondered 6 kon account of their unbelief, and he ‘went round the villages And he called ™to 7 him the twelve, and began to send them forth "two by two; ed them. teaching. and gave them power over °the unclean spirits ; and command- 8 ed them that they should take nothing for their journey, Pex- cept a staff only; no sbag, no bread, no money in their ‘gir- dle; but de shod with sandals, 9 And 10 he said to them, "Wherever ye and not put on two coats. enter into a house, there tre- main till ye depart from that And whoever shall not 11 receive you, nor hear you, when ye depart thence, shake off the place. dust under your feet, for a testi- mony "to them. “Truly, vit will be more tolerable for Sodom “or Gomorrah in the day of judg- of judgment, than for that city. | pois ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως, ἢ τῇ qo-| ment, than for that city. And 12 } “he wondered.” See ch. 5 : 20, note p. * “« Wherever ye enter;” Ὅπου ἐὰν εἰσέλϑητε. Wakefield, ® “on account of ;” dee (cum accusat.) solete. 1 “went round the villages ;” περιῆγε τὰς κώμας. Κύκλω is to be joined to zegujye, not κώμας. Ε joined by classical writers to verbs compounded with περὶ. See| is ἃ common rendering of this verb in the N. T. Bloomf., in loco. τὸ «to him.” See ch. 3 : 13, note. » “two by two;” δύο δύο. ava δύο. So Kend., Sharpe, Camp. o “the.” P “except ;” εἰ μὴ. 4“ “hag.” Dick., Camp., Pechy, Rob. τ “girdle ;” ζώνην. As an alternative rendering, “ at (their unbelief).” By Hebraism instead of the classic Τῶν occurs both before the noun and adjective. It is properly retained by Sharpe, Dick., Camp., Pechy, Thom., 8. Fr., Iber., Span., Luther, De Wette, Belg., Ital. See ch. 5 : 37, note v. “ Because of” is ob-| Sharpe. and subj., Matt. 8:19; Kendrick Wesley, “ Wheresoever Ἷ Ἢ Son ΕἾΤ} It is often sub- t “yemain ; obsolescent. ua ὦ Truly ;” Aur. “ Serip” is obsolete. Mévete. « “to them;” αὐτοῖς. Wakef., Pechy, Newcome, Scholefield (quoted by Pechy). Fritz- sche, “iis;” Vulg., Hras., “in testimonium eis;” Castal., “sit eis testimonio ;” S. Fr., “pour leur étre en témoignage ;” De Wette, “ ihnen ;” Iber. v “it will be;” ἔσται. w “or;” ἢ. So marg. of H. V. Geneva, L. Tom. Beza, Wakefield, Dick. De Wette, “in den| Montanus, Eras., “aut ;” Span., “0.” So (E. V.) Mark 14:14. So with the relative adverb 24:28; 26:13. Rob. (ὅσου) ; Liddell. ye,” etc. Kend., Dick. Beza, “ manete.” This « Abide” is Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva, Wiclif, , “a ellos.” See ch. 3 : 28, note. Kend., Thom. The rendering “and,” as Giirtel ;” Belg., “in den gordel.” Rob. says, “the fold of the girdle sewed as a pocket or purse for money.” though a? occurred in the text, was derived from Matt. 10 : 15, where the reading is, Yodduar καὶ Γομόῤῥων. 38 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 12 And they went out, and preached that men should repent. 13 And they cast out many devils, and anointed with oil many that were sick, and healed them. 14 And king Herod heard οὔ, him, (for his name was spread abroad,) and he said, That John| ἡ the Baptist was risen from the dead, and therefore mighty works do shew forth themselves in him. 15 Others said, That it is Eli- as. And others said, That it is a prophet, or as one of the prophets. 16 But when Herod heard there- ἡ of, he said, It is John, whom I be- headed: he is risen from the dead. 17 For Herod himself had sent forth and laid hold upon John, and bound him in prison for He- GREEK TEXT. / λει ἐκείνῃ. Kai ἐξελθόντες ¢ / ἐκήρυσσον ἵνα μετανοήσωσι: 18 καὶ δαιμόνια πολλὰ ἐξέβαλ- λον, καὶ ἤλειφον ἐλαίῳ πολλοὺς ἀῤῥώστους καὶ ἐθεράπευον. 14 Καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς “Ἡρώδης, (φανερὸν γὰρ ἐγένετο τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ,) καὶ ἔλεγεν, Ὅτι ᾿Ιωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐκ νεκρῶν ἠγέρθη, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἐνεργοῦσιν αἱ δυνάμεις ἐν αὐτῷ. 5 3, “ 15 άλλοι ἔλεγον, Ὅτι ᾿ Πλίας » 3, \ δ, oe ἐστίν: ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, “Ort ΄ 2 Ν ΩΣ « - “ προφήτης ἐστὶν, ἢ ὡς εἷς τῶν fol > ΄ \ προφητῶν. '° ᾿Ακούσας δὲ ὁ ΄ 5 od A \ Hpodys εἶπεν, “Ore ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπε- ΄ » ΄ “ι΄. ᾽ κεφάλισα ᾿ΪΠωάννην, οὗτος ἐστιν" Ν a αὐτὸς ἠγέρθη ἐκ νεκρῶν. “ἷ Ad- Ν \ ἜΣ ΄ 3 ie τὸς yap ὁ Hpwdns ἀποστείλας ᾽ ΄ Ν > v2 NN ἐκράτησε τὸν ᾿Ϊωάννην, καὶ €dn- ΔΟΘΑ, 5 a na A σεν αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ, διὰ THE GOSPEL ACCORDING ΤῸ MARK.—CHAP. VI. REVISED VERSION. they went out and preached that And they 13 cast out many demons, and anointed with oil many that were sick, and healed them. And 14 king Herod heard of him (for his name *had become *known) and he said, ‘John *the Im- merser ‘hath risen from the dead and therefore mighty works ‘are active in him. Others said, ‘It is Elijah. And others said, ‘It is a prophet, fas one of the prophets. But when Herod heard "of him, he said, ‘This is John whom I behead- ed; he ‘hath risen from the dead. For Herod himself had 17 sent forth and Jlaid hold of John and bound him in ‘the =men should repent. 16 x “men.” wized. This word is a supplement, ἃ “ are active ;” be active.” and is, therefore, zta/- ἐνεργοῦσιν. So Liddell. Rob., “ to work,” “ to do,” “ to The verb often has the sense of work- “Working effectually,” y “had become ;” ἐγένετο. Kend. The sense of this verb, Jfiert, is appropriate here. Vulg., Beza, Castal., “ factum erat ;” De Wette, “ward (bekannt).” “Aorist in narration is often equivalent to pluperfect,” Butt., 137: 3. Sce ἔλεγε, ch. 5 : 8. * “known ;” φανερὸν. Kendrick, Pechy. Tber., “ pablico.” Rob. So (E. V.) Matt.12:16. Mark 3:12. « “That,” which occurs in the Τὶ. V. before “ John,” is dropped, as ὅτε is here a mere sign of quotation. See Rob. (6zz) It is omitted by Wesley, Wakef., Dick., Camp., Thom., Q., Kendrick, Pechy. With these agree Eras., Beza, Castal., S. Fr., Span., Iber., Ital., Belg., De Wette, Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva. This particle is similarly used twice in y. 15, and should not be trans- lated. b«the Immerser;” 6 Βαπτίζων. A. Camp., Q., Iber. Bele., “die daar doopte;” Luther and De Wette, “ der Taufer.” Green: field’s Heb. N.T., bau. The participle with the article has the force of a substantive. It is equivalent to the substantive, 6 βαπτιστὴς. See τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ, vv. 24, 25. See ch. 1 : 6, note. Rob., Bretsch. * “hath risen.” The perf. and first aorist pass. of this verb usually have the active signification, “to arise.” So (E. V.) Matt. 8:15, ἐγέρϑη, “she arose.” Ibid. Matt.9:25; 2: 19; 14, 21; 9 : 7,19, ete. Rob. ing so as to produce a desired result. efficio. Bretsch. “ύναμις, in this clause, is by a metonymy, used for the energy or power by which miracles were wrought. A less literal translation would present the thought more clearly to English readers, “ mighty works are wrought by him.” This is submitted for consideration. It is nearly the language of Wakefield. Dick., Campbell, Pechy, and Thom. have, “ miracles are performed by him.” Sharpe, “the mighty powers work in him.” ee “that.” See v. 14, note. f “or” which occurs in the E. V., is omitted on the ground that 7 does not belong to the text. It is rejected by Griesbach, Scholz, Titt., Knapp, Lachmann, Tischendorf, Rob. (Harmony), Bloomf. It is not recognized by the Syriac, or Vulgate. © «of him.” This supplement is appropriate here, as it is in y. 14, especially as we have ἤκουσεν 6 βασιλεὺς Ἡρώδης there, and ἀκούσας δὲ ὃ Ἡρώδης here. So Wakef., Pechy. h “this;” οὗτος. Wesley, Dick. The usual signification of this demonstrative, especially with a relative sentence. Rob. i “hath risen ;” ἐγέρϑη. See ν. 14, note. ) “Jaid hold of ;” ἐκράτησε. See ch. 3 : 21, note. k “the prison ;” τῇ φυλακῇ. The article is retained on the ground that the noun is specific, as it refers to the fortress of THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VI. KING JAMES’ VERSION. rodias’ sake, his brother Philip’s wife: for he had married her. 18 For John had said unto He- rod, It is not lawful for thee to have thy brother’s wife. 19 Therefore Herodias had a cuarrel against him, and would have killed him; but she could not: 20 For Herod feared John, knowing that he was a just man and an holy, and observed him: and when he heard him, he did many things, and heard him glad- ly. 21 And when a convenient day was come, that Herod on his birth- day made a supper to his lords, high captains, and chief estates of Galilee ; 22 And when the daughter of the said Herodias came in, and danced, and pleased Herod, and them that sat with him, the king said unto the damsel, Ask of me 39 GREEK TEXT. ε 4 Ν ΄ “Πρωδιάδα τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου “ ) “-“ > “-“ “ ao ἘΝ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν Ἄν 8 + \ ca ἐγάμησεν. ἔλεγε γὰρ ὁ ᾿Ιω- ἄννης τῷ pod,” ‘Ore οὐκ ἔξε- στί σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου. “ὃ Ἢ δὲ “Hpw- Ν a Lal 2, διὰς ἐνεῖχεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἤθελεν ἣν ΄- / αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι" καὶ οὐκ 70v- varo. “ἢ ὁ γὰρ ᾿Ηρώδης ἐφο- βεῖτο τὸν ᾿Τωάννην, εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον, καὶ / / / συνετήρει αὐτόν: καὶ ἀκούσας » - Ν > 2 Ν « / αὐτοῦ, πολλὰ ἐποίει, καὶ ἡδέως αὐτοῦ ἤκουε. “' καὶ γενομένης « / > / “ ε / ἡμέρας evKaipov, ὅτε LHpwdns τοῖς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ δεῖπνον ἐποί- EL τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ καὶ τοῖς ΄ cal , ΄“ χιλιάρχοις καὶ τοῖς πρώτοις τῆς / Ταλιλαίας, ™ καὶ εἰσελθούσης lod Ν fal “ ε τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς τῆς ᾿Πρω- διάδος, καὶ ὀρχησαμένης, καὶ ἀρεσάσης τῷ “Ἡρώδῃ καὶ τοῖς συνανακειμένοις, εἶπεν ὃ βασι- λεὺς τῷ κορασίῳ, Αἴτησόν με ὃ Macherus, in which John was confined. Josephus, Antiq., Β. 18 :5, $2. So the article is found in the parallel, Luke 3 : “de gevangenisse ;” Luther, “in das Gefangniss ;” S. Fr., prison ;” Span. and Iber., “ la carcel.” 1 “for the sake of Herodias.” Pechy. cuaty demand this arrangement. χα (60 ν᾽" δὲ. be rendered by “ so,” “ now,” ete. that.” §S. Fr., “or.” “had a grudge ;” évetyer. or κότον, “ grudge.” Alternative, “was enraged against him.” ° “and yet ;” καὶ. This particle is merely continuative, and may See Rob. Thus Wakef., “so Pechy, Bloomf. of this verb, when expressive of hostile feeling Bloomf. deems the latter appropriate here. Rob. notices the force of καὶ in cases like the present, “ apparently adyersative, but only when the thought is clear in itself, without the aid of an adversative particle, and yet, and nevertheless.” “Rarely in a strong antithesis without a negative, καὶ may be given by but, though not necessarily.” 20. Belg., “ la Euphony and perspi- r “when ;” ὅτε. Thom. The subject , 1s χόλον, “rage,”| * “ commanders ;” lent. ” ἃ “ chief men ; v¥ “the same ;” 4 “day haying come ;” here instead of “being” as in the similar construction oyéas γενομένης (ch. 1 : 32), on the ground that the auxiliary “have” and its inflections should be used with intransitive verbs. ch. 1:38. Webster, Introd., p. iv. Rob., Wesley, Wakefield, Sharpe, Campbell, * “for his lords ;” rots μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ. Camp., and Thom. have “ for” before the noun. according to present usage. χιλιάρχοις. other instances, is used generically ; “ commander ” “ Captain” was formerly employed, in the same sense. πρώτοις. lete. S. Fr., “ principaux ;” αὐτῆς τῆς. Eng. translators omit αὐτῆς. REVISED VERSION. prison !for the sake of Herodi- as, his brother Philip’s wife; for he had married her. For John had said to Herod, It is not lawful for thee*to have thy brother’s wife. ™So Herodias "had a grudge against him and would have killed him; cand yet could not: for Herod feared John, knowing that he was Pa just and holy man, and obsery- ed him; and when he heard him, he did many things, and heard him gladly. And a con- venient ‘day having come, when Herod on his birth-day made a supper ‘for his lords and tcom- manders and "the chief men of Galilee; and when the daugh- ter of ‘the same Herodias came in, and danced, and pleased He- rod and those “who reclined with him at table, the king said to the damsel, Ask *me - 9 20 22 γενομένης ἡμέρας. “ Having” is used See Span., “ habiendo yenido.” Wesley, Sharpe, “To” is not Rob: This word here, and in is its equiva- Sharpe, Rob. “ Estates” is obso- Tber., “ ἃ los primeros.” Thom., “ this same.” Some later Although “ the said” may answer P “a just and holy man.” This is the proper order in English. Kend., Wesley, Wakef., Dick., Campbell, Thom. A similar ar- rangement is found in Belg., “ een rechtvaardig ende heilig man.” De Wette, “einen gerechten und heiligen Mann.” the purpose of defining the noun, still, the expression is antiquat- ed, unless in the language of jurisprudence. w «“ who reclined—at table.” See ch. 2 : 15, note. x “of” is superfluous after “ask.” Correct usage leaves it to be supplied by the reader's mind. 40 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VI. KING JAMES’ VERSION. whatsoever thou wilt, and I will give ἐξ thee. 23 And he sware unto her, Whatsoever thou shalt ask of me, I will give ἐξ thee, unto the half of my kingdom. 24 And she went forth, and said unto her mother, What shall I ask? And she said, The head of John the Baptist. 25 And she came in straight- way with haste unto the king, and asked, saying, I will that thou give me, by and by, in a charger, the head of John the Baptist. 26 And the king was exceed- ing sorry ; yet for his oath’s sake, and for their sakes which sat with him, he would not reject her. 27 And immediately the king sent an executioner, and com- manded his head to be brought: and he went and beheaded him in the prison ; 28 And brought his head in a charger, and gave it to the dam- sel; and the damsel gave it to her mother. 29 And when his disciples heard —_—_,—— GREEK TEXT. 3N\ / / , Ν ἐὰν θέλῃς, καὶ δώσω σοί: “5 καὶ 3) Pageants Neds > ὦμοσεν αὐτῇ, Ort ὃ ἐάν με ai- / / 4 « ὕ THONS, δώσω σοὶ, ἕως ἡμίσους ΄ ε \ τῆς βασιλείας pov. “ὁ Ἢ δὲ ἐξελθοῦσα εἶπε τῇ μητρὶ αὐτῆς ; ν ἢ εὐ ρ Ὁ ΄ » 53 Tt αἰτήσομαι; ᾿Η δὲ εἶπε, Τὴν Ν > 4 cal a κεφαλὴν “Iwavvod τοῦ Barri- στοῦ. “ὃ Καὶ εἰσελθοῦσα εὐ- / Ν “ Ν \ θέως μετὰ σπουδῆς πρὸς Tov Ba- / 3 ΄ / / σιλέα, ἡτήσατο, λέγουσα, Θέλω “ tal 5 ΕἸ o 3 δ. ἢ, ἵνα μοι δῷς ἐξ αὐτῆς ἐπὶ πί- A, \ > 4 cal νακι τὴν κεφαλὴν Iwavvov τοῦ Βαπτιστοῦ. “ὃ Καὶ περίλυπος / « \ AS \ γενόμενος ὁ βασιλεὺς, διὰ τοὺς “ \ ὅρκους Kal τοὺς συνανακειμένους > 9 ΄΄ > A > ΄ οὐκ ἠθέλησεν αὐτὴν ἀθετῆσαι. 27 \ 527 > ε καὶ εὐθέως ἀποστείλας ὁ βα- A 7 2 ΄ὔ σιλεὺς σπεκουλάτωρα ἐπέταξεν 3 “ A \ > an ἐνεχθῆναι τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ. ‘ A \ ΄ *8 ὃ δὲ ἀπελθὼν ἀπεκεφάλισεν SX 3 a a Soe αὐτὸν ev TH φυλακῇ, καὶ ἤνεγκε \ Y a τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ πίνακι, Ἂς 27, \ an καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτὴν τῷ Kopacia Ν Ν 4 7. 3 \ cr καὶ TO κοράσιον ἔδωκεν αὐτὴν TH Ν ΓΕ τὸ 29 rN > / μητρὶ αὐτῆς. Kai ἀκούσαν- « > mE. τες οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἦλθον, Kal REVISED VERSION. whatever thou wilt, and I will give it Yto thee. And he swore 25 to her, Whatever thou shalt ask me, I will give ἐξ *to thee, seven to the half of my king- dom. And she went out, and said to her mother, What shall Task? And she said, The head of John *the Immerser .And she came in immediately with haste to the king, and asked, saying, I will that thou ‘wouldst give me 4forthwith *on a platter the head of John ‘the Immerser. And the king was ‘exceedingly sorry; yet, "on account of his oaths, and of those ‘who reclined with him at table, he would not reject her. And immediately the king sent Jone of his guard and com- manded his head to be brought ; and he went and beheaded him in the prison; and brought his head ‘on a platter, and gave it to the damsel; and the damsel gave it to her mother. And when his disciples heard of 7, 27 28 29 e “the Immerser. 7 “to thee ;” δώσω σοί. The preposition must be expressed before the objective, in all cases where that case is separated by a word, or words, from verbs of giving, ete. Such is “the existing state of our language.” Thus in a biblical phrase, “I will surely give the tenth to thee,” Gen. 28 : 22. If we change the order, the preposition must be dropped, “I will surely give thee the tenth.” * “to thee.” See last note. * “even to;” ἕως. Thom. So (ΕΒ. V.) Luke 2:15. The later Greek writers often omit the preposition which belongs to the noun limited by ἕως, leaving it to be supplied by the mind. See Rob., ἕως. > “the Immerser.” See y. 14, note. ¢ “wouldst.” This word is inserted, in conformity with present usage @ “forthwith ;” ἐξ αὐτῆς (ὥρας subauditur). Kend., Pechy. ad “on a platter ;” ἐπὶ πένακι. Kend., Q., Rob. So (EH. V.) Luke 11 : 39. Ἐπὶ, in this case, is rendered “on” by Sharpe and Wakef. See Rob. (ἐπὶ) See y. 14, note. * “exceedingly.” This is the proper orthography of the ad- verb, and should be adopted uniformly. So Kend., Dick. The orthography is varied in different parts of the H. V. ® “on account of ;” δεὰ (cum accus.) Kend., Rob. See ch. 2 : 4, note. h “oaths ;” ὅρκους. Wakef., Dick., Sharpe, Thom., Pechy. 8. Fr., “serments ;” Iber., “ juramentos ;” Belg., “de eeden;” Syriac, Ἰδι δάσο (fem. plural). The rendering “ oath” seems to have originated in the juramentum of the Vulgate. i “ who reclined.” See ch. 2 : 15, note. } “one of his guard;” σπεκουλάτωρα. Wesley, Wakefield, “one of his guards ;” De Wette, “einem Trabanten.” The word (the Latin speculator or spiculator) designates a life-guard man. Such soldiers often acted—as they now do in the Hast—as execu- tioners. Robinson. Fritzsche derives it from the Latin specu- lari. k “on a platter.” See v. 22, note. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VI. KING JAMES’ VERSION. of tt, they came and took up his corpse, and laid it in a tomb. 30 And the apostles gathered themselves together unto Jesus, and told him all things, both what they had done, and what they had taught. 31 And he said unto them, Come ye yourselves apart into a desert place, and rest a while: for there were many coming and going, and they had no leisure so much as to eat. 32 And they departed into a desert place by ship privately. 33 And the people saw them departing, and many knew him, and ran afoot thither out of all cities, and outwent them, and came together unto him. 34 And Jesus, when he came out, saw much people, and was moved with compassion toward them, because they were as sheep 1 “aq tomb.” The article τῷ (μνημείῳ) is rejected by all edi- 4a GREEK TEXT. 3 N a > a \ » ἦραν TO πτῶμα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔθηκαν ΔῈ Ἂν 3 ° , αὐτὸ ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ. 30 aN ΄ ς 3 , Kai συνάγονται οἱ ἀπόστο- Ν Ν > fol Ων > 7, λοι πρὸς τὸν ]ησοῦν, καὶ ἀπὴγ- ’ if) > lal / Ν σ yetAav αὐτῷ πάντα, καὶ οσὰα > / \ “ 3 / ἐποίΐίσαν καὶ ὅσα ἐδίδαξαν. Ἵ καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Aevre ὑμεῖς » > / / αὐτοὶ Kar ἰδίαν εἰς ἔρημον To- / πον, καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε ὀλίγον. 5 Ν eh 8 , \ ε Hoav yap οἱ ἐρχομενοι καὶ οἱ « ΄ὔ Ν Ν 5ῸΝ ὑπάγοντες πολλοὶ, καὶ οὐδὲ φα- lal > a 32 Sis γεῖν ηὐκαίρουν. καὶ ἀπῆλθον ΕΣ ye lal εἰς ἔρημον τόπον τῷ πλοίῳ κατ᾽ 5 > \ « ΄ ἰδίαν. *° Καὶ εἶδον αὐτοὺς ὑπά- - εν SZ γοντας οἱ ὄχλοι, καὶ ἐπέγνωσαν > Ν / Ν ~ > AY αὐτὸν πολλοί: καὶ πεζῇ ἀπὸ πα- a a ,ὔ , σῶν τῶν πόλεων συνέδραμον cr “ ἊΝ ἐκεῖ, καὶ προῆλθον αὐτοὺς, καὶ ΄- Ν 246 Wi 34 ν συνῆλθον πρὸς αὐτὸν. καὶ = \ 3, » cal Ν ἐξελθὼν εἶδεν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς πολὺν δ, Ὧν 5 / > > ὄχλον, Kal ἐσπλαγχνίσθη er > “ “ 5 / αὐτοῖς, OTL ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα ‘ j 27? r “goings away ; ὑπάγοντες. REVISED VERSION. they came and took up his corpse, and laid it in 1a tomb. And the apostles "came to- 30 gether to Jesus and told him all things, both what they had done, and what they had taught. And he said to them, Come ye 31 yourselves apart into a des- ert place, and rest "a little while: for there were many coming and going, and they had eno leisure not even to eat. And they departed into a desert 32 place Pby the ship privately. And %the crowds saw them "going 33 away, and many knew him and ran thither *by land ‘from all the cities, and outwent them and came together to him. And 34 Jesus “coming forth, saw a great crowd, and was moved with compassion ‘towards them, be- cause they were ‘like sheep Pechy. Rob. (in verbo), “To tors from Matthzi to Scholz. See Bloomf. ™ “came together ;” συνάγονται. Kend., Wakefield, Rob. Bretsch., “ convenio.” So (E. V.) Matt. 27:62. Luke 22 : 66. Acts 13:44; 15:6; 20: 7. » “a little while ;” ὀλέγον. “ While” simply, is equivalent to “time.” Ὀλίγον, if we suppose χρόνον understood, is properly rendered as above. As an alternative rendering, “a little.’ So Pechy. 8S. Fr., “un peu;” De Wette, “ein wenig ;” Iber., “un poco.” ? ° “no—eyen;” οὐδὲ. Pechy. Wakef., Sharpe. Rob. (0002.) Beza, “ne—quidem;” 8. Fr., “ne—pas méme ;” Iber., “ ne— aun.” P “by the ship;” τῷ πλοίῳ. See ch.4:1, note. As this is the dative instrumentalis, “ by” is appropriate. 9 “the crowds.” Οἱ ὄχλοε of the Textus Receptus has been dropped by Griesb., Scholz, Knapp, Titt., Lach., Fritzsche, and Bloomf. It is not recognized by the Syriac, or Vulgate. It is regarded as spurious by Wesley, Sharpe, Campbell, and De Wette. The supplement “the crowds” is taken from the paral- lels Matt. 14 : 13, and Luke 9 : 11, where we haye οὗ ὄχλοι. If we employ “they” as the nominative, the language is rendered ambiguous, as “ they” occurs before “ departed.” go, go away to a place.” So (EK. V.) John 6:67; 14:28. Wes- ley and Thom. adopt the participial construction. Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, “ abeuntes ;” Syriac, Il. * “by land;” πεζῇ. Wakef., Pechy, Kend., Q., Dick., Thom., Bloomfield, (Ν. 1) De Wette, “zu Lande.” Syriac, jaais. Tber., “por tierra.” Strictly speaking, this is the adj. πεζός, with 6d@ understood. In the present construction, it is regarded as an adverb. When it refers to traveling, it is opposed to ἐν Odyss., B. 11 : 58. Liddell. Wesley, Kend., Dick., Wakefield, Pechy, wnt. t “from ;” azo. Thom. « “coming forth.” Kend., Wesley, “ coming out;” S. Fr. “ étant sorti;” Vulg., “exiens;” Beza and Hras., “ egressus ;” Belg., “ uitgaande.” y “towards.” This is the present orthography of the word. Both forms, “ toward” and “ towards,” occur in E. V. w “like ;” ὡς. This word is substituted for “as,” to free the sentence from the two hissing sounds, s and sh. The sense remains unchanged. The word is rendered by “like,” (E. V-) Matt. 6:29; 28:3. Mark 4:31. Luke 12:27, ete. This change might be made in numerous instances, with great advan- tage as to euphony. 42 KING JAMES’ VERSION. not having a shepherd: and he began to teach them many things. 35 And when the day was now far spent, his disciples came unto him, and said, This is a desert place, and now the time is far passed : 36 Send them away, that they may go into the country round about, and into the villages, and buy themselves bread: for they have nothing to eat. 37 He answered and said unto them, Give ye them to eat. And they say unto him, Shall we go and buy two hundred pennyworth of bread, and give them to eat? 38 He saith unto them, How many loaves have ye? go and see. And when they knew, they say, Five, and two fishes. 39 And he commanded them to make all sit down by companies upon the green grass. 40 And they sat down in ranks, GREEK TEXT. \ ws , Ἂς + μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα: καὶ ἤρξατο ΄,΄ τὴ / XN διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς πολλά. ὃ Καὶ y+ oe fal iz. ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης, / tal ἊΝ προσελθόντες αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ ᾽ 5 / σ Ε ΄ αὐτοῦ λέγουσιν, Ore ἔρημος / yy CA ἐστιν ὁ τόπος, καὶ ἤδη ὥρα πολ- , 36 > / > \ “ An. ἀπολυσὸν avrous, ἵνα 3 / > Ν ΄ » \ ἀπελθόντες εἰς τοὺς κύκλῳ ἀγροὺς 7 4 5 καὶ κώμας, ἀγοράσωσιν ἑαυτοῖς la A ΄ὔ ἄρτους" τί γὰρ φάγωσιν οὐκ BA 37 ΣῈ \ > Ν ἔχουσιν. Ο δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς Ss ΄σ / ΄ rn εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Aore αὐτοῖς ὑμεῖς la Στὴ ἊΝ ΄ > Or φαγεῖν. Kai λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, > / 3 / «ἀπελθόντες ἀγοράσωμεν διακο- σίων δηναρίων ἄρτους, καὶ δῶμεν 3 lal ΄-“ ε \ 4 αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν; “ἢ Ὃ δὲ λέγει lal 7 y+ αὐτοῖς, Ilocovs ἄρτους ἔχετε; Gen? Sey, Ν , ὑπάγετε καὶ ἴδετε. Καὶ γνόντες ΄ὔ , / / λέγουσι, “]έντε, καὶ δύο ἰχθύας. 4 a rod ” Kat ἐπέταξεν αὐτοῖς ἀνακλῖναι ΄ / / πᾶντας συμπόσια συμπόσια ἐπὶ -» fal 7, 40 ἈΝ eek? τῷ χλωρῷ XOPTes ἀνα ρϑιαιεῦπες. σον πρασιαὶ πρασιαὶ, ἀνὰ ἑκατὸν THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VI. REVISED VERSION. *having no shepherd: and he began to teach them many things. And when the day 35 was now far spent, his disciples came to him and said, This is a desert place and now ’much time hath passed; send them 36 away that they may go *into the surrounding country and villages, and buy themselves ‘loaves: for they have nothing to eat. But he answered and 37 said to them, Give ye them ‘something to eat. And they say to him, Shall we go and buy two hundred pennyworth of ‘loaves and give them ‘that to eat? ‘And he saith to them, 38 How many loaves have ye? go and see. And when they knew, they say, Five, and two fishes. And he commanded them *to 39 make all recline by companies on the green grass. And "they 40 lay down ‘in squares, by hun- by hundreds, and by fifties. καὶ ava πεντήκοντα. “᾿ καὶ Aa- dreds, and by fifties. And 4t * “having no shepherd ;” μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα. Wesley, Dick.,| © “that.” This supplement is introduced on the principle Sharpe. So (HE. V.) Matt. 9 : 36. noticed in y. 37, note. Eras., “ quod ;” Castalio, “ quibus.” y “much time hath passed ;” ὥρα πολλή. This noun is the f « And.” 4. Sharpe. Vulg., “et.” Beza, Eras. and Cas- subject of παρῆλϑε understood, as the parallel, Matt. 14:15, proves, 7 ὥρα ἤδη παρῆλθεν. “Hath” is used instead of “ is,” on the principle noticed in ch. 1 : 38, note. As “hath passed ” is not expressed in the text, it is marked as a supplement. * “into the surrounding country ;” εἰς τούς κύκλῳ ἀγρούς. Kend., Pechy. Eras., Beza, Fritz., “in circumjacentes agros.” * “loaves ;” ἄρτους. Sharpe. Rob., “ Pl. ἄρτοι, loaves.” Eras., Beza, Castalio, “ panes ;” S. Fr., “ des pains.” So (E. V.) vv. 38, 41, 44. > «But;” 2% Pechy, Wakef. Beza, “at.” So (E. V.) in parallel, Luke 9:13. Belg., “maar;” De Wette, “aber ;” Ther., “mas.” The particle is adversative, and should not be omitted. © “something.” Every reader feels that this sentence is harsh and imperfect, unless the object of the verb is expressed. Our idiom demands this supplement. It is based on the object τέ of the verb ἔχουσιν, in v. 36, Eras., “ quod—edant ;” Castalio, “cibum.” 4 “loaves.” See ν. 36, note. talio render the particle adversatively. Belg., “ ende ;” Luther and De Wette, “aber ;” G. Fr. and S. Fr., “ et.” = “to make—recline ;” ἀνακλῖναι. - Campbell and Sharpe, “Jie down ;” Rob (in verbo), “to make lean back, or recline in order to take a meal.” In the N. T., it is nearly synonymous with κατάκειμεαι. Bretsch. (dvax.), “facto ut aliquis reclinis ja- ceat,—de cibo recreandis: facio discumbere ; jubeo ut recumbant.” De Wette, “niederliegen zu lassen;” Iber., “los hiciesen re- clinar.”” See ch. 2 : 15, note. h “they lay down;” ἀνέπεσον. Sharpe, Rob. Liddell, “ to lie down,” “recline at table ;” Rob., “to lie down.” See last note. Vulg., Eras., Mont., Beza, Castalio, “ discubuerunt ;” De Wette, “sie liessen sich nieder.” i «in squares ;” seaovat πρασιαὶ. Kend., Q., Rob. Mont., “are are ;” Beza, “per areolas” (little garden-beds). Liter- ally, a small rectangular plot of ground, like a garden-bed, hence anything, which has the form of a square or oblong. So troops drawn up in squares. The word is repeated by Hebraism to indi- cate distribution, and is equivalent to ἀνὰ πρασιάς. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VI. 43 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 41 And when he had taken the five loaves, and the two fishes, he looked up to heaven, and blessed, and brake the loaves, and gave them to his disciples to set before them; and the two fishes divided he among them all. 42 And they did all eat, and were filled. 43 And they took up twelve baskets full of the fragments, and of the fishes. 44 And they that did eat of the loaves, were about five thousand men. 45 And straightway he con- strained his disciples to get into the ship, and to go to the other side before unto Bethsaida, while he sent away the people. 46 And when he had sent them away, he departed into a mountain to pray. 47 And when even was come, the ship was in the midst of the sea, and he alone on the land. 48 And he saw them toiling in 1 “to them all.” S. Fr., “a tous;” Vulg., GREEK TEXT. \ Ν , 2 Ν βὼν τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους καὶ τοὺς , / ν 2 Ἂς δύο ἰχθύας, ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐ- Ν / / pavov, εὐλόγησε: καὶ κατέκλασε A x ’ ΄ τοὺς ἄρτους, καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μα- θηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα παραδῶσιν αὐ- a Ἢ χ NEP as , eek τοῖς" καὶ τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας ἐμέρι- “ 42 \ ¥ , σε πᾶσι. καὶ ἔφαγον πάντες, /, > καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν: ** καὶ ἦραν ΄ ΄ / κλασμάτων δώδεκα κοφίνους πλήρεις, καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἰχθύων. 1 καὶ ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες τοὺς ἄρ- τους ὡσεὶ πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες. 5. Καὶ εὐθέως ἠνάγκασε τοὺς μα- θητὰς αὐτοῦ ἐμβῆναι εἰς τὸ πλοῖ- ον, καὶ προάγειν εἰς τὸ πέραν πρὸς ηθσαϊδὰν, ἕως αὐτὸς ἀπο- λύσῃ τὸν ὄχλον. a ταξάμενος αὐτοῖς, ἀπῆλθεν εἰς τὸ ὄρος προσεύξασθαι. “τ Kai ὀψίας γενομένης, ἣν τὸ πλοῖον ἐν μέσῳ τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ αὐ- τὸς μόνος ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς. “ἢ Καὶ εἶδεν αὐτοὺς βασανιζομένους ἐν ἊΝ » καὶ ατπτο- Erasmus, Beza, REVISED VERSION. when he had taken the five loaves and the two fishes, he looked up to heaven, and bless- ed and broke the loaves and gave them to his disciples to set before them; and the two fishes he divided 'to them all. And they all ‘ate and ‘were satisfied. And they took up twelve baskets full of the frag- ments, and of the fishes. And =those who ate of the loaves, were® five thousand men. And immediately he constrained the disciples °to enter into the ship, rand go before shim to the other side, towards Bethsaida, while he sent away the crowd. ‘And when he had dismissed them, he departed into ‘the mountain to pray. And tevening having come, the ship was in the midst of the sea, and he alone on the land. And he saw them harass- 4° 42 46 41 Castal., “ omnibus ;” Wiclif, Rheims, “to all;” Belg., “ voor allen ;” De Wette, “allen.” There is no necessity for abandon- ing the usual signification of the soe to, or for. It is : properly retained in the Heb. N. T., 552>, and the Syriac, ems. “Among them” was copied from Tyndale. “Them” is properly a supplement ; in the preceding clause it is expressed—adrois. k “ate;” ἔφαγον. Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, Kend., Pechy. There is no emphasis here, to render “ did ” necessary. 1 “ were satisfied ;” ἐχορτάσϑησαν. So (H.V.) ch.8:4. Pe- zhy, Wesley, Kend., Camp., Thom. In John 6 : 12, where the verb is éverdradnoar, “ were filled” is accurate. Present usage is decidedly in favor of “ were satisfied.” ” = “those who ate;” of φαγόντες. Kend. “ Did” is super- fluous. » “about,” which in the Εἰ. V. is the equivalent of ὡσεὶ, is omitted on the ground that the latter has been canceled by Griesbach, Scholz, Knapp, Lach., Tischend., Fritzsche, Robinson (Harmony). It is not recognized by the Syriac or Vulgate. It is not noticed in the Versions of Sharpe, Dick., Pechy, Camp. ° “toenter;” ἐμβῆναι. So (Εἰ. V.) ch.4:1; 8:10. Luke 5:3. Kend., Dick. » “and go before.” Wesley, Sharpe, Dick., Campbell, “ and pass ;” Thom., “and cross.” As this verb is coupled by and to “enter,” which is an infinitive, the sign “to” should not be used, as there is no emphasis. 4 “him.” The supplement “him” is taken from the parallel, Matt. 14 : 22, προάγειν αὐτὸν (Εἰ. V.,“ go before him”). The sentence is unnecessarily transposed here, in the E. V., by separat- ing προ (“before”) from the verb to which it clearly belongs. Rob. (in verbo) : “The signification of the preposition and verb intransitive is combined into one idea. If ‘ precede’ had not too much of the ‘modern air,’ it would be appropriate, from its coin- cidence with the Greek verb. The rendering then would be, ‘ precede him.’” r “And when he had dismissed ;” ἀποταξάμενοις. Pechy, Rob. (in loco.) Bretsch., “ ex adjuncto, valedicendo dimitto ; di- mitto, Mare. 6 : 46.” It is proper to distinguish between this word, and ἀπολύσῃ, v.45. This has been done in S. Fr., Beza, Castal., Belg., De Wette, and Heb. N. T. * “the mountain ;” τὸ ὄρος. Kend., Pechy, Wakef., Sharpe, Thom., Rheims. De Wette, “auf den Berg ;” Belg., “ op den berg ;” S. Fr., “sur la montagne ;” Spanish and Iberian, “al monte ;” Ital., “sul monte.” See ch. 3 : 13, note. See ch. 1 : 32, note. Kendrick, Pechy. t “evening haying come.” 5 “harassed ;”” Beza, βασανιξομένους. 44 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VI. eee KING JAMES’ VERSION. rowing; for the wind was con- trary unto them: and about the fourth watch of the night he cometh unto them, walking upon the sea, and would have passed by them. 49 But when they saw him walking upon the sea, they sup- posed it had been a spirit, and cried out. 50 (For they all saw him, and were troubled.) And immediately he talked with them, and saith unto them, Be of good cheer: it is I; be not afraid. 51 And he went up unto them into the ship; and the wind ceas- ed: and they were sore amazed in themselves beyond measure, and wondered. 52 For they considered not the miracle of the loaves; for their heart was hardened. GREEK TEXT. δύων, ΄, > \ eee) τῷ ἐλαύνειν. ἣν yap ὁ ἄνεμος ΄σ ΄ ἐναντίος αὐτοῖς: καὶ περὶ τετάρ- \ lod Ν Ε τὴν φυλακὴν τῆς νυκτὸς ἔρχεται Ἂν \ fod -“ πρὸς αὐτοὺς, περιπατῶν ἐπὶ τῆς "A 7 ΄ θαλάσσης" καὶ ἤθελε παρελθεῖν > / 49 ε δ ΤΑ ΝΙΝ Ores αὐτους. οἱ δὲ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν cal 5 fol / περιπατοῦντα ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης. wy ΄ 5 ΥΤΎΑ ἔδοξαν φάντασμα εἶναι, καὶ ave κραξαν: °° πάντες γὰρ αὐτὸν εἶ- δον, καὶ ἐταράχθησαν. καὶ εὐ- vA > ΄ a Jews ἐλάλησε μετ᾽ αὐτῶν, καὶ iA 5 lal 4 λέγει αὐτοῖς, τρῶν ἐξ ἐγώ εἰ- Ἂν zt te μι μὴ φοβεῖσθε. πνοαὶ ἀνέβη πρὸς αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, καὶ ἐκόπασεν ὁ ἄνεμος: καὶ λίαν ἐκ ΄σ e Lal 3 περισσοῦ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἐξίσταντο, Aas , 52 > \ = καὶ ἐθαύμαζον. οὐ γὰρ συνῆ- ΄ ν 53 \ Ἑ καν ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις: ἢν γὰρ ἡ a / καρδία αὐτῶν πεπωρωμένη. “vexatos ;” Castalio and Fritzsche, “verari;” S. Fr., “ qu’ils se tourmentaient.” The word indicates the effect of over exer- De Wette, “ geplagt waren” (“were harassed”). tion. Y “against ;” ἐναντίος. Camp. to “be cheerful.” See Webster (“cheer”). REVISED VERSION. ed in rowing, for the wind was ‘against them: and about the fourth watch of the night he cometh “towards them, walking on the sea, and would have pass- ed by them. But when they saw 49 him walking on the sea, they supposed *it was an apparition and they cried out ; for they all saw himand«were terrified. And 50 immediately "he spoke with them, and saith to them, “Take courage: it is 1; “fear not. And he went 51 up to them into the ship, and the wind ceased : and they were eexceedingly amazed in them- selves, beyond measure, and wondered. For ‘they did not 52 understand "by means of the loaves, for their heart "was stu- Liddell, “ to be of ~ “towards them ;” πρὸς αὐτοὺς. Sharpe. S. Fr., “envers eux.” x “it was;” εἶναι. Sharpe, Kend., Pechy, Camp., Thomson. S. Fr., “ c’était ;” Span., Iber., “ era ;” Belg., “ het—was.” y “an apparition ;” φάντασμα. Wesley, Wakef., Campbell, Sharpe, Thom. De Wette, “ein Gespenst ;” Belg., “ een spook- zel ;” S. Fr., “un fantome ;” Iberian, “ una seen Syriac, ho Ἰόμὰ ( (“a false appearance, spectre”). * “they cried out ;” ἀνέκραξαν. perspicuity. The nom. is expressed, for * “were terrified ;” ἐταράχϑησαν. Kend., Campbell, Thom. De Wette, “erschraken.” Rob., Bretsch. Liddell, “ usually, to treuble the mind, confound, alarm, frighten.” “Trouble” (in present usage) is mostly restricted to cases where the emotion is one of grief. By placing the semicolon (as in the Greek Text) after “ out,” no parenthesis is necessary in the next sentence. So Sharpe. > “he spoke ;” ἐλάλησε. Wakef., Kend., Wesley, Campbell, Thom., Wiclif. So (E. V.) ch4:33; 5:35; 7 : 35, ete. “ “Take courage ;" Θαρσεῖτε. Wesley, Campbell, Thomson, Kend., Wakef. The phrase, “ Be of good cheer,” is obsolete But were it not so, it would not be accurate, as it is equivalent good courage.” Rob. a “fear not;” μὴ φοβεῖσϑε. Kendrick. So (H. V.) Matt. Kendrick, Wakefield, Sharpe, Dick.,|10 : 28, 31. Luke 2:10; 12:7, ete. © “exceedingly ;” λίαν. Pechy, Rob., Liddell. “Sore” is Rob., Greenfield, Liddell, | obsolete. f “they did not understand ;” οὐ---συνῆκαν. So always in H. V., Kendrick, Wakef., Rob., and Liddell (in verbo). 8. Fr., “ils n’avaient pas compris ;” De Wette, “sie hatten nichts begriffen ;” Vulg., “non intellexerunt ;” Beza and Erasmus, “non intel- lexerant.” E “py ;” ἐπὶ (τοῖς agrots). Bloomf. The preposition has the sense of per, “ by,” denoting the efficient cause, as in Matt. 4:4, Οὔκ ἐπ ἄρτῳ μόνῳ ζήσεται 6 ἄνϑρωσπος. Blooms. (N. T.), Trollope (Analecta), Kendrick. Trollope, “ by means of.” Although the sentence is elliptical for τῷ ϑαύματε τοῖς ἄρτοῖς γενομένῳ, it is not deemed necessary to retain the supplement “the miracle,’ as this readily suggests itself to the reader’s mind. So Thomson has, “ they had not come to a right understanding by the loayes.” Fritzsche furnishes this paraphrase, “ per occa- sionem prioris miraculi, quo Jesus quinque panibus permultos homines satiassed, v. 38 sq.” As an alternative rendering that of Sharpe, “ for they thought not of the loaves.” h “ was stupid ;” ἦν πεπωρωμένη. Kendrick, Campbell, and Dick., “ stupefied ;” Beza, “stupidum erat.” In the N. T., πω- ρόω has not only the signification “to harden,” but also “to .| make dull or stupid,” in the pass., “to be hardened, dull, stupid.” The last idea is obviously the appropriate one here. See Rok THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 53 And when they had passed over, they came into the land of Gennesaret, and drew to the shore. 54 And when they were come out of the ship, straightway they knew him. 55 And ran through that whole region round about, and began to earry about in beds those that were sick, where they heard he was. 56 And whithersoever he en- tered, into villages, or cities, or country, they laid the sick in the streets, and besought him that | they might touch, if it were but the border of his garment: and as many as touched him, were made | whole. CHAP. VII. THEN came together unto him the Pharisees, and certain of the scribes, which came from Jerusa- lem. 2 And when they saw some of his disciples eat bread with defiled (that is to say, with unwashen) hands, they found fault. 45 GREEK TEXT. 33 KAT διαπεράσαντες ἦλθον ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ΓΕεννησαρὲτ, καὶ προσωρμίσθησαν. ὅ καὶ ἐξελ- θόντων αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ πλοίου, εὐ- θέως ἐπιγνόντες αὐτὸν, 5 rept δραμόντες ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον ἐκείνην, ἤρξαντο. ἐπὶ τοῖς κραβ- βάτοις τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας περι- φέρειν, ὅπου ἤκουον ὅτι ἐκεῖ ἐστι. δ καὶ ὕπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο εἰς κώμας ἢ πόλεις ἢ ἀγροὺς, ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς ἐτίθουν τοὺς ἀσθενοῦν- τας, καὶ παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν, ἵνα x» a / a Ἔ |KQaVY TOU κρασπέδου του ἱματίου 5» a τῇ Sy it a o αὐτου ἁψωνται" καὶ OOOL ἂν ἣπ- | 2 - 3 ΄, TOVTO QUTOU, ἐσώζοντο. CHAP. VII. -τ ΄ Ν Ν KAT συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι, καί τινες τῶν γραμ- / » / SEIN ε ματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Lepoco- , 2 Sn \ “- λύμων: “ καὶ ἰδόντες τινὰς τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ κοιναῖς χερσὶ, a? 32᾿ 5 τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν ἀνίπτοις, ἐσθίοντας yy 2 4 3 ε ‘ ἄρτους, ἐμέμψαντο" “ (οἱ yap Da- (ὧν verbo). In English “a hard heart” thought of simple obtuseness of mind, but, does not conyey the of moral insensibility to have the force of the possessive pronoun here. REVISED VERSION. pid. And when they had passed 53 over, they came 'to the land of Gennesaret, and drew to the shore. And when !they came 54 out of the ship, immediately they knew him, and ran through 55 that whole ‘surrounding region, and began to carry about on their couches, those who were sick, where they heard he was. And wherever he entered, into 56 villages, or cities, or country, they laid the sick in the streets, and besought him that they “might but touch the fringe of his garment; and as many as touched him Pwere healed. CHAP. VII. *Anp the Pharisees and 1 csome of the scribes ¢who had come from Jerusalem, came to- gether to him. And when they 2 saw some of his disciples teat- ing ‘bread with defiled, ‘that is, with "unwashed hands, they 3 Kiihner See ch. 2 : 4, note. to moral truth or duty. The charge against the disciples is, that they were insensible to the proof as to the Saviour’s character, which was furnished by the miracle of the loaves. Castalio gives an accurate rendering, “utpote qui torpentibus animis.” Fritz., “sensus hic est: non enim, quum panes distribuerentur, quid-quam intellexerant ; nam erant callo obduct& mente, h. 6. talz, ut nihil omnino assequi possent.” Bloomf. (Recensio), “ It here denotes dullness and stupidity of mind.” The perf. part. in this construction with ἦν has nearly the nature of an adjective. Rob., eiut, 11. : 6. 1 “to;” ἐπὲ (cum accus.) Wesley, Wakef., Camp., Thomson, Sharpe. Span. and Iber., “a.” Rob. (ἐπὶ), “to, toward any place.” So (HE. V.) Matt. 3: 7,13; 5:23; 13:48. Mark 11:13. ) “they came out ;” ἐξελϑόντων οὐτῶν. Kend. The auxili- ary “were” is not employed here by Wakef., Camp., Dick., Pe- chy, or Thom. See ch. 1 : 38, note. See ch. 1 : 28, note. 1 “their couches ;” τοῖς xoaSParors. * “snrrounding region.” The article is deemed (Gram.), 2244, 4. Crosby (Gram.), 3482. m «“ wherever.” “ Wheresoever ” is obsolete.” » “micht but touch ;” κἂν---ἅψονται. Kend. ° “the fringe ;” τοῦ κρασπέδου. Kend., Rob. Vulg., Eras- mus, Beza, “fimbria.” This word is equivalent to the Hebrew megsg (mxsy) the fringe or (as some suppose) tassel, worn by the Jews on the corners of their garments. Numb. 15 : 38, 39. See Gesen. (Lex.), mow. Pp “were healed ;” ἐσώξοντο. Kend., Dick., Camp., Sharpe. So (E. V.) ch. 5:23. Luke 8:36. Acts14:9. Rob. (σώξω.) a «And;” Kai. Dick., Wakef., Tyndale, Cranmer, Pechy. There is no necessity for abandoning the usual signification of καὶ, which is retained by the Belg., De Wette, Iber. » “the Pharisees,” ete. This is the simple and natural order. So Pechy, Kend., Wakef., Dick., Camp., Thom. ¢ “some ;” twee. Sharpe, Kend., Wakef., Camp, Thom., Rob. 4 “who had come;” ἐλϑοντες. Wakef. The aorist in narra- tion can often be properly rendered by the pluperf. Buttmann, 2137, 3. Goodrich (Tenses), p. 54. Kiihner, 3256, 2. Rem. 1. * “eating ;” ἐσθίοντες. Wakef., Pechy, Camp., Thom. 46 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. GREEK TEXT. REVISED VERSION. 3 For the Pharisees, and all the ρισαῖοι καὶ πάντες οἱ ‘Jovdaior,|found fault, for the Pharisees Jews, except they wash their hands|éay μὴ πυγμῇ νίψωνται τὰς xei-|and all the Jews, except they oft, eat not, holding the tradition| pas, οὐκ ἐσθίουσι, κρατοῦντες wash their hands ‘with the fist, of the elders. τὴν παράδοσιν 4 And when they come from the pov: 4 καὶ ἀπὸ market, except they wash, they eat not. And many other things there be, which they have received to hold, as the washing of cups, and pots, and brazen vessels, and tables. 5 Then the Pharisees and scribes asked him, Why walk not thy disciples according to the tra- βαπτίσωνται, οὐκ ἐσθίουσι: καὶ ἄλλα πολλά ἐστιν ἃ παρέλαβον κρατεῖν, βαπτισμοὺς ποτηρίων other things which they have καὶ &eo TOV καὶ χαλκίων καὶ KAt-| received to hold, tsuch as ™im- νῶν") ° ἔπειτα ἐπερωτῶσιν avTov|mersions of cups, and pots, and οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς, | brazen vessels, and table-seats. Atari οἱ μαθηταί σου ov περιπα- Then the Pharisees and scribes 5 a \ \ ΄ A TOVOL KATH Τὴν παράδοσιν TOV eat not, holding the tradition o. the elders. And when they 4 come from the market, Jexcept they immerse themselves, they eat not. And there ‘are many ΄ ve τῶν πρεσβυτέ- a 3. \ ἀγορᾶς, ἐὰν μὴ asked him, °Why do not thy disciples walk according to the dition of the elders, but eat bread πρεσβυτέρων, ἀλλὰ ἀνίπτοις χερ- tradition of the elders, but eat with unwashen hands? Ν δ΄ «ε \ σὶν ἐσθίουσι τὸν ἄρτον; “Ὁ δὲ bread with Punwashed hands? > Ν 95 > - σ 6 He answered and said unto ἀποκριθεὶς Sere BUCO, Or Και Ὶ And he answered and said to 6 them, Well hath Esaias prophe-|A@s προεφήτευσεν Hoaias περὶ them, Well sdid Isaiah prophesy ' «with the fist ;” πυγμῇ. So marg. of E. V., Pechy (note), Q., Thom. While most commentators agree that this is the literal rendering of the verse, interpretations are numerous. Bloomfield sums up a brief synopsis of these interpretations with the following remark: “The most probable view is that of Beza and Fritzsche, who render, ‘ unless they have first washed their hands, rubbing them with the fist.” In cases where we can not arrive at a satisfactory interpretation, a literal rendering is preferable. The “oft” of the ἘΠ. V. (copied from Tyndale) originated in a mistake of πυκνά (neuter, which is used by Homer for much, often) for πυγμῇ. This appeared in the Vulgate in the rendering “ crebro.” ) “except they immerse themselves ;” 47) βαπτίσωνται. Ther., “sin sumergirse.“ The verb is rendered “ they dip” by Wakef. ; Pechy, “dip or baptize ;” Thom. and Camp., “ dipping ;” S. Fr., c’étre baptisés.” Wakef., Thom., and Campbell make “ hands” the object of the verb, though, as I think, without good authori- ty. The middle form of the verb determines the object as reflex- ive, “themselves.” Fritz. says, “ Pharissi, inquit Marcus, secun- dum τῆς παραδόσεως preecepta non edunt panem, nisi, ete. (v. 3.) Kt a foro quando venerint, plus etiam faciunt. Nempe, nisi cor- pus laverit, cibum non capiunt.” In his note on the entire pas- sage, he says, “ Nudum illud ἐὰν μὴ βαπτέσωνταιε non aliter potest, quam sic exponi: nisi se immerserint 1. q. corpus laverint.” The washing of the “ hands” is noticed in the third verse, hence, to make “hands” the object of this verb, is a tautology. The literal rendering of this verb is deemed appropriate for this rea- son, viz., though cleansing or purifying may be the result, it is not the action indicated by the verb. Bathe, wash, or cleanse, point at an effect produced by βαπτίσωνται, not to the very act from which the effect proceeds. See ch.1:5, note. Trollope (Ana- lecta) says, “The baptism or immersion of the whole body was, for the most part, a religious rite.” k “are.” ‘Wesley, Kend., Pechy. “ Be” is ungrammatical. 1 “such as.’ This is the usual phrase instead of “ as,” in con- structions like the present. So Thom. m “jmmersions ;” βαπτισμοὺς. Campbell, Kend., “the im- mersing ;” Pechy, “ dippings or baptisms ;” Thomson, “ the dip- pings;” Rob. (in verbo), “a dipping, immersion; ” Bretschneider, “immersio ;” Iberian, “las immersiones.” As the noun is an arthrous, no article is inserted in rendering it into Nnglish. 2 “tableseats;” xduwar. See ch. 4:21, note. Fritzsche, “ Lecti dicuntur non ii, quo eas cubitum, sed triclinares, ut supra, 4:21.” ° «Why do not,” ete. with present usage. P “unwashed.” See v. 2, note. 2 Kend., Thom., Pechy. This accords 4 “ did—prophesy ;” προφήτευσεν. Kend. So the parallel, Matt. 15:7. The aorist has its usual force here. f “bread.” The rendering of the E. V. is retained here on the ground that the true reading of the text is ἄρτου. This is adopted and defended by Fritzsche. So in Matt. 15:2, ἄρτον ἐσθίωσιν. Mark 3:20, ἄρτον φαγεῖν. Luke 14:1, φαγεῖν ἄρτον. Idem 14:15, ὃς φάγεται ἄρτον. So Syriac, Ἰζδαςς, 4 If the reading of the Text. Recept. is retained, then the rendering should be “ loaves.” Rob. (ἄρτος.) = “that is;” τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν. Wesley, Pechy, Kend., Campbell, Thom., Wakef., Sharpe. Vulg., Eras., Beza, Castal., “ id est.” h “ ynwashed ;” ἀνίπτοις. Pechy, Dick. “ Unwashen” is obsolete. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. sied of you hypocrites, as it is written, This people honoureth me with ¢heir lips, but their heart is far from me. 7 Howbeit, in vain do they worship me, teaching for doctrines the commandments of men. 8 For, laying aside the com- mandment of God, ye hold the tradition of men, as the washing of pots and cups: and many other such like things ye do. 9 And he said unto them, Full well ye reject the commandment of God, that ye may keep your own tradition. 10 For Moses said, Honour thy father and thy mother; and, Whoso curseth father or mother, let him die the death: 11 But ye say, If a man shall say to his father or mother, I¢ is Corban, that is to say, a gift, by whatsoever thou mightest be pro- fited by me; he shall be free. 12 And ye suffer him no more 41 GREEK TEXT. ὑμῶν τῶν ὑποκριτῶν, ὡς γέγρα- Ὁ ε \ 5 ΄ , TTL; Οὗτος ὁ λαὸς τοῖς χείλεσί με τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόῤ- ῥω ἀπέχει ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ. μάτην δὲ σέβονταί με, διδάσκοντες διδα- / 5 7 ΕΣ / σκαλίας, ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων. δ᾿ ᾿Αφέντες γὰρ τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ, κρατεῖτε τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, βαπτισμοὺς ἕεσ- τῶν καὶ ποτηρίων, καὶ ἄλλα παρόμοια τοιαῦτα πολλὰ ποιεῖτε. 9 Kai ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς, Καλῶς ἀθε- ΄ \ NX - a 4 τεῖτε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε. δὰ Moons γὰρ εἶπε, Tipo. τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα σου" καὶ, O κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μη- ΄ ν 4 1 ε rad τέρα θανάτῳ τελευάτω" Ὑμεῖς \ 4 > N 3, δὲ λέγετε, “Hav εἴπῃ ἄνθρωπος fe NN ex \ a a τῷ πατρὶ ἢ TH μητρὶ, Κορβᾶν, σ ᾽ Led ἃ aN 3 5 fo (6 ἐστι, Awpov,) ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ » “-“ 12 Ν > / > / ὠφεληθῇς: ““ καὶ οὐκέτι ἀφίετε τ “concerning you;” περὶ ὑμῶν. Thom. So often, in N. T. (E. V.) Pechy, Kend., Wakefield, REVISED VERSION. reconcerning you, "hypocrites, as it is written, This people honor- eth me with their lips, ‘but their heart isfar from me. “Butin 7 vain do they worship me, teach- ing for doctrines the command- mentsof men. For layingaside 8 the commandment of God, ye hold the tradition of men, ‘such as ~immersions of pots and cups; and many other such like things ye do. And he said to 9 them, Full well tye set aside the commandment of God, that ye may keep your own tradition. For Moses said Honor thy father and thy mother; and yHe who curseth father or mother *shall surely be put to death. But ye say, If a man shall say to his father or his mother, *Be *that Corban, ‘that is a gift, by which thou ‘might est have been profited by me; he shall be free. And ye suffer 12 (Sept. 16), where the Sept. has τελευτήσεε ϑανάτῳ, or Levit. * In conformity with our present rules of punctuation, a comma is placed before “ hypocrites,” as it serves to define “you.” So Wesley, Cranmer, L. Tomson, S. Fr. t “but;” δὲ. Wesley, Wakefield, Dick, Campbell, Thomson, Sharpe. 2 But’; ? Ze. field, Kend. v “ such as.” So in parallel, Matt. 15:9. Wesley, Wake- See vy. 4, note. w “immersions.” See v. 4, note. = “ye set aside ;” ἀϑετεῖτε. Kendrick, Pechy. Liddell (in verbo), “to set aside.” This is literal. We use “set aside” metaphorically, for abrogating a law or a legal instrument, as a will, contract, ete. y “He who curseth;” Ὁ κακολογῶν. The article is joined to adjectives and participles, when used as substantives. In many such cases, the participle is rendered by “he who,” “ they who,” ate., equivalent to 7s qui. Kiihner, 3244. 8. As the verb has also the signification “ to reproach,” I place “ or reproacheth” in the margin. * “shall surely be put to death;” ϑανάτῳ τελευτάτω. This is an imitation of the emphatic construction of the Hebrew, when the infinitive absolute is used with a finite verb, as man nin “he shall surely die.” The quotation is taken from Exod. 21:17 -“Βαπτισμοὺς is anarthrous. 20 : 9, where the Hebrew is the same, but the Sept. reads Pava- τῳ ϑανατοῦσϑω. A more literal translation is, “let him surely be put to death.” This phrase, however, does not accord well with our usus loguendi. In short, its accuracy would be merely that of a grammatical form. a “Be.” This supplement is used corresponding to ἔστω, which is understood, rather than ἐστὶ. So Bloomf. De Wette, “sei ;” Thom. and Dick., “ Let that be.” b “that.” This demonstrative is introduced as a supplement, though, strictly speaking, it is not such. An antecedent is ne- cessarily implied before 6. The harshness and obscurity of the rendering of the E. V. must strike any reader. Those, who pre- pared that version, have, in this instance, deferred too much to literality. ‘Later Eng. translators have usually deviated from the language of that version, more or less, to avoid its faults. Hay- ing employed “that” for the antecedent, I haye deemed it ad- visable to make “which” the relative. The sense of 6 (joined with ἐὰν) “ whatever” is thus preserved, and the sentence is free from the objectionable phrase “ by whatever.” Ὃ is regarded by most translators, as used for the dative, by attraction, hence, “ by which” is employed as its equivalent. eC that 15." 4 “mightest have been profited ; ΤῊ S. Fr. “tu pourrais étre assiste.” See y. 2, note. ” ὠφεληϑῇς. Bloomf. (N. 48 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. to do aught for his father or his mother ; 13 Making the word of God of none effect through your tradition, which ye have delivered: and many such like things do ye. 14 And when he had called all the people unto him, he said unto them, Hearken unto me every one of you, and understand. 15 There is nothing from with- out a man, that entering into him, can defile him: but the things which come out of him, those are they that defile the man. 16 If any man haye ears to hear, let him hear. 17 And when he was entered into the house from the people, his disciples asked him concerning the parable. 18 And he saith unto them, Are ye so without understanding also? Do ye not perceive, that whatsoever thing from without entereth into the man, ἐξ cannot defile him: 19 Because it entereth not into GREEK TEXT. ϑ «Ἃς 2Q\ “ tal ἊΣ αὐτὸν οὐδὲν ποιῆσαι τῷ πατρὶ > a KN . = 3 αὐτοῦ ἢ τῇ μητρὶ αὐτοῦ, | ἀκυ- fal Ν 4 ΄σ col lal ροῦντες Tov λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ παραδόσει ὑμῶν ἢ παρεδώκατε:" καὶ παρόμοια τοιαῦτα πολλὰ ποι- εἴτε. Καὶ προσκαλεσάμενος ΄ \ BA ay > “ πάντα τὸν ὄχλον, ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς, > 7 / 4 , Akoveré μου πάντες, καὶ συνί- 5 > / > “΄ a ετε. οὐδέν ἐστιν ἔξωθεν τοῦ » ΄ » , ᾽ ἀνθρώπου εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς αὖ- \ δ ΄ σοὺ IN a TOV, ὃ δύναται αὐτὸν κοινῶσαι" > \ A 5 / 5 > > cas ἄλλα τὰ ἐκπορευόμενα AT αὐτοῦ, 5 ΟΣ 5 Ν col Ν Ya ἐκεῖνα ἐστι TH κοινοῦντα TOV ἄν- θρωπον. '° εἴτις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκού- / ew, ἀκουέτω. “ Kat ὅτε εἰσῆλ- 3) > Ν - 7 3 θεν εἰς οἶκον ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου, ἐπη- ΄, SEX © > ΄ ρώτων αὐτὸν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ΄σ ΄σ ῷ Ν ᾽ὔ περὶ τῆς παραβολῆς. 1° καὶ λέ- Lal - ΝΣ “ / yet αὐτοῖς, Οὕτω καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνε- to og cal Ν τοί ἐστε; οὐ νοεῖτε ὅτι πᾶν τὸ ” / \ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν yy > , yaw ἄνθρωπον ov δύναται αὐτὸν κοι- ὁ “any thing ;" οὐδὲν (with preceding negative). Wakef., Dick., Thom., Pechy. f “making void ;” ἀκυροῦντες. Pechy. Beza, “ irritum facientes.” .® “yedo;” ποιεῖτε. Kend., Wakef., Wesley. 4 “to him.” See ch. 3 : 13, note. ' « Hear me;” Axoderé nov. “ Aught” is obsolete. Sharpe, Wakef., Kendrick, Sharpe, Kend., Camp., Pechy. REVISED VERSION. him no more to do ‘anything for his father or his mother ; ‘making yoid the word of God 2 by your tradition, which ye have delivered : and many such like things ὅγε do. And when he had called all the crowd "to him, he said, ‘Hear me all of you, and understand. There is 15 nothing from without ‘the man, which entering into him, can defile him; but the things, which come out of him, Jare those that defile the man. ™If 16 any one hath ears to hear, let him hear. And when the enter- ed into °the house from the crowd, his disciples asked him concerning the parable. And he saith to them, Are ye also so Pyoid of understanding? Do ye not perceive, that snothing from without, ‘which entereth into the man *can defile him: because it entereth not into his 19 14 17 fol “ 4 VOOQAL , " OTL οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται Tyndale, alguno.” Ὁ «he entered ; OM που as a supplement. ” εἰσῆλϑεν. 24:38. Mark 2: 1; of the aorist by the Eng. imperfect is appropriate. As οἶκον is anarthrous, “the” should be ztalzcized, The “house” seems to have been that one at Belg., “ Zoo iemand ;” De Wette, “ Wenn jemand ;” Iber., “ Si Kend. So (E. V.) Matt. 12:4; 3:1; 11:11,ete. The usual rendering 8. Fr., “ écoutez-moi;” Span., “oidme;” De Wette, “ Horet mich ;” Vulg., Eras., Beza, Castal., “ Audite me.” ) “all;” πάντες. Kendrick, Pechy, Thomson, Sharpe, Dick., Wakef. Belg., “alle;” De Wette, “alle;” S. Fr. “tous;” Vulg., Beza, “ omnes.” k “the man;” τοῦ ἀνϑρώπου. Pechy, Campbell, Sharpe. Belg., “den mensche;” De Wette, “des Menschen;” 9. Fr., “Vhomme.” The article should be retained here, as it properly is, in y. 18 (E. V.), τὸν ἄνϑρωπο», and y. 20, τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. The noun is definite ; the thought being, “There is nothing from without the man, who eateth,” etc. 1 “are those that defile ;” Thom., Dick. m “Tf any one;” Hizs. Sharpe, Thomson, Kendrick, Dick. Erasmus, Vulg., Beza, Castalio, “si quis ;” S. Fr., “ quelqu’un ;” ἐκεῖνά ἐστι TH κοινοῦντα. Wakef., Capernaum, to which Christ resorted from time to time, hence, the insertion of a supplementary article is proper. See ch. 9 : 33, Kai ἤλϑεν εἰς Καπερναούμ" καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκέᾳ yevouevos, x. τ. A. Fritzsche reads, εἰς τὸν οἶκον. See also Matt. 17 : 24, 25, “And when they were come to Capernaum—And when he was come into the house,” Kal ove εἰσῆλϑεν εἰς τὴν oixiar. P “void of understanding ; ἀσύνετοι. Thomson, Campbell, Liddell. 4 “nothing from without ;” οὐ---σιᾶν ἔξωϑεν. Sharpe, Pechy Thom. x “which entereth ;” τὸ--εἰσπορευόμενον. Thom., Sharpe “that entereth.” The relative with a finite verb, is the more perspicuous rendering. Castalio, “ quod—intrat ;” Belg., “ wat ingaat ;” Kend., “ which—entereth.” 5 “can defile.” Kend. In translating, οὐ must be connected with wa. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VII. 49 KING JAMES’ VERSION. his heart, but into the belly, and goeth out into the draught, purg- ing all meats? 20 And he said, That which cometh out of the man, that defil- eth the man. 21 For from within, out of the heart of men, proceed evil thoughts, adulteries, fornications, murders, 22 Thefts, covetousness, wick- edness, deceit, lasciviousness, an evil eye, blasphemy, pride, foolish- ness ; 23 All these evil things come from within, and defile the man. 24 And from thence he arose, and went into the borders of Tyre and Sidon, and entered into an house, and would have no man know if: but he could not be hid. 25 For a certain woman, whose young daughter had an unclean spirit, heard of him, and came and fell at his feet: GREEK TEXT. ~ \ > αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, ἀλλ᾽ εἰς Ν , x > Ν > a τὴν κοιλίαν" καὶ εἰς τὸν ἀφεδρῶ- , ᾽ὔ να ἐκπορεύεται, καθαρίζον πάντα \ 3, Ν τὰ βρώματα. *° “Edeye δὲ, “ A ΄ / > Ort τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπο- ͵ = Bias’ " ρευόμενον, ἐκεῖνο κοινοῖ τὸν ἄν- Ν 3 fal θρωπον. 7 ἔσωθεν yap ἐκ τῆς “ = » / € καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων ot διαλο- , γισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ ἐκπορεύονται, a r / μοιχεῖαι, πορνεῖαι, φόνοι, 22 κλο- Άν “ / / Tat, πλεονεξίαι, πονηρίαι, δόλος, ᾽ a > Ν Ν ἀσέλγεια, ὀφθαλμὸς πονηρὸς, βλασφημία, ,ὑπερηφανία, ἀφρο- σύνη. ὅ πάντα ταῦτα τὰ πονη- ρὰ ἔσωθεν ἐκπορεύεται, καὶ κοι- inven ᾿ vot τὸν ἄνθρωπον. ΄σ Ἂν a 4 Καὶ ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς ἀπὴλ- \ ΄ , θεν εἰς τὰ μεθόρια Τύρου καὶ “ δὰ Ν Σιδῶνος. καὶ εἰσελθὼν εἰς τὴν Ε » ᾽ , ΒΩ a οἰκίαν, οὐδένα ἤθελε γνῶναι, Kat a ἴδ οὐκ ἠδυνήθη λαθεῖν. “5. ἀκού- σασα γὰρ γυνὴ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ἧς εἶχε τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον, ἐλθοῦσα προσεπεσε Ν \ / fol 3 Δ πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ: “ ἦν δὲ REVISED VERSION. heart, but into tthe stomach, and goeth out into "the sink, veleansing wall the food. And 20 he said, That which cometh out of the man, that defileth the man. For from within, out of 21 the heart of men, *come forth evil thoughts, adulteries, forni- cations, murders, thefts, covet- 22 ousness, ’malice, deceit, lascivi- ousness, an evil eye, 'reviling, pride, foolishness, all these evil 23 things *come forth from within, And he 24 arose *from thence and swent and defile the man. away into the borders of Tyre and Zidon, and entered into a \| house, and would have ‘no one know ἐξ and yet he could not be ‘hidden. For a whose young daughter had an Ewoman, 25 unclean spirit, heard of him, and came and fell at his feet: t “the stomach ;” τὴν» κοιλίαν. ac ” Dick. Rob. (κοιλέα), “ often as in English Ὁ." λίαν αὐτοῦ , A. Camp., “ his stom- , for the stomach, either in men or animals, Mark 7:19. Luke 15 : 16, γεμέσαε τὴ» κοι- Literally, the word signifies “a hollow” y “malice.” of any Rob., Kendrick, Thom. Bretsch., “ nocendi aliis cupiditas, malignitas, malitia. « “reyiling.” Rob. (in verbo.) See ch. 3 : 28, note. 4:31 (E. V.), “evil speaking.” In Eph. In 1 Tim. 6 : 4, “ railings.” kind, “a cavity,” cavum. Bretsch., “ venter quum superior tum inferior.” As an anatomical term, it is applied to any ventricle or chamber, as κοιλέα ἐγκεφάλου, καρδίας, ete. Liddell. So the Latin venter is the cavity containing the stomach and intes- tines. Leverett (Lat. Dict.) a “the sink ;” τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα. Kend., Thom., Campbell, Pe- chy. Johnson and Webster give “ jakes” (Jatrina) as one defini- tion of “sink.” Common readers do not understand “ draught” in this sense. The above term furnishes a euphemism. " “cleansing ;” καϑαρίξζον. Kend. Belg., “ reinigende;” De Wette, “ was—reiniget.” ~ “all the food ;” πάντα τὰ βρώματα. food ;” S. Fr., “tous les alimens ;” Vule., Heb. N. T., ἘΞ 8:55. = “come forth ;” ἐχπορεύονται. Rob. (in verbo.) So this verb is rendered in v. 20. “Forth” is substituted for “ out,” which occurs before “heart,” in the BE. V. Wakef., Eras., Dick., “all Beza, “ escas.” “ Reviling” is an appropriate rendering, in all cases. * “come forth.” Pechy. See v. 21, note. » “from thence.” This is the natural arrangement in English. Sharpe. ὁ “went away ;” ἀπῆλθεν. Rob. So (KE. V.) Matt. 19:22; 26:42. Mark 10:22. John 10:40. Vulg., Erasmus, Beza, « abiit ;” S. Fr., “ il partit.” 4 “no one;” οὐδένα. Kend., Pechy, Sharpe. ὁ “and yet;” καὶ. This is a case where the conjunction is apparently adversative ; the antithesis being obvious without an adversative particle. See Rob, καὶ, 1. f. Bretsch. regards this as a Hebraism. f “hidden.” Pechy. This is the past. part. of “to hide.” Webster's Dict. Ε « certain,” which occurs here in the E. V. as a supplement, is unnecessary. It was first introduced by Tyndale. Omitted by Wesley, Wakef., Thom., Sharpe, Dick., Camp., Pechy. ” 50 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 26 (The woman was a Greek, a Syrophenician by nation,) and she besought him that he would cast forth the devil out of her daugh- ter. 27 But Jesus said unto her, Let the children first be filled: for it is not meet to take the children’s bread, and to cast ἐξ unto the dogs. 28 And she answered and said unto him, Yes, Lord: yet the dogs under the table eat of the chil- dren’s crumbs. 29 And he said unto her, For this saying, go thy way; the devil is gone out of thy daughter. 30 And when she was come to her house, she found the devil gone out, and her daughter laid upon the bed. 31 And again, departing from the coasts of Tyre and Sidon, he came unto the sea of Galilee, through the midst of the coasts of Decapolis. 32 And they bring unto him one that was deaf, and had an im- pediment in his speech ; and they beseech him to put his hand upon him. 33 And he took him aside from the multitude, and put his fingers into his ears, and he spit, and touched his tongue: 4 “to cast ;” ὥνα---ἐκβάλλῃ. is, as in many similar cases—where a preposition in composition is followed by the same preposition before the object of a verb— The infinitive is often used in the E. V. in place of the subjunctive, in constructions like the present. without any particular force. GREEK TEXT. Ν ΄ ἡ γυνὴ ᾿Ελληνὶς, Συροφοίνισσα cal \ τῷ γένει: καὶ ἠρώτα αὐτὸν iva Ἂς , » > lol τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐκβάλλῃ ἐκ τῆς θυ- Ay col + a J cal yar pos αὐτῆς. ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῇ, "Ades πρῶτον χορ- τασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα: οὐ γὰρ κα- λόν ἐστι λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν / lol ΄σ τέκνων, καὶ βαλεῖν τοῖς κυναρί- « Ν ow. * Ἢ δὲ ἀπεκρίθη καὶ λέ- Ε) tal Ν / Ν Ν γει αὐτῷ, Nai, κύριε: καὶ γὰρ Ν ip ΄ rn τὰ κυνάρια ὑποκράτω τῆς τραπέ- Ν fal 5 Gs ἐσθίει ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν ,ὔ 29 ΕΝ π᾿ Sees παιδίων. Kai εἰπεν αὐτῇ, Ν col XN / Mia τοῦτον τὸν λόγον ὕπαγε: Ν » cal ἐξελήλυθε τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐκ τῆς / θυγατρός cov. *° Kat ἀπελ- a Ν 53 cod - θοῦσα εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτῆς, εὗρε Ν / 3 Ν Ἂν τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐξεληλυθὸς, καὶ τὴν 3 cal θυγατέρα βεβλημένην ἐπὶ τῆς κλίνης. ’ὕ Ἂς an Ἵ KAT πάλιν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῶν ’ a > ὁρίων Τύρου καὶ Σιδῶνος, ἦλθε Ν Ν ΄ rn πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν τῆς Tade- , TA / “-“ εὖ Aaias, ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὁρίων Ae- / 32 Ν / > καπόλεως. καὶ φέρουσιν av- tal Ν ’ὔ ἣν τῷ κωφὸν μογιλάλον, καὶ παρα- “ Ἂν cal “ καλοῦσιν αὐτὸν ἵνα ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ Ν lal 33 ee » τὴν χεῖρα. καὶ ἀπολαβόμενος ΙΓ, ἸΈΡΩΝ, “,ῃ΄» 5.» 7 αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου κατ᾽ ἰδίαν, yy, A / > lol > ἔβαλε τοὺς δακτύλους αὐτοῦ εἰς A 5 col , rf τὰ ὦτα αὐτοῦ, Kal πτύσας ἦψα- THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VII. REVISED VERSION. (the woman was a Greek, a 26 Syrophenician by nation,) and she besought him *to cast ‘the demon out of her daughter. But Jesus said to her, Let the 27 children first ‘be satisfied ; for it is not «right to take the chil- dren’s bread and cast i to the dogs. And she answered and 28 said, Yes, Lord: yet the dogs under the table eat of the chil- dren’s crumbs. And he said to 29 her, For this saying, 1g0; ™the demon "hath gone out of thy daughter. And she 30 came Pinto her house, she found the demon gone out, and her daughter laid on the bed. And 31 again, departing from ‘the borders of Tyre and Zidon, he came to the sea of Galilee, through the midst of the bor- ders of Decapolis. And they 32 bring to him one deaf, "having an impediment in his speech; and they beseech him to put his hand on him. And he took him 33 aside from ‘the crowd, and put his fingers into his ears, and he ewhen ° “when she came ; P “into her house ; το τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ, 5: καὶ spit, and he touched his tongue : The preposition é in this verb| 1 “Go;” Ὕπαγε. Wesley. See ch. 1 : 44, note. πὶ «the demon.” See ch. 1 : 34. Ὁ “hath gone out;” ἐξελήλυϑε. See ch. 1 : 38, note. ” See ch. 1 : 38, note. Sharpe. Mont., ἀπελϑοῦσα. ” els τὸν οἶκον αὐτῆς. It is more concise, and more in accordance with our usus loquendi, | Eras, “in domum suam ;” S. Fr., “ dans sa maison.” while it is equally accurate as to sense. Pechy. 1 « the demon.” } “pe satisfied.” See ch. 1 : 34, note. See ch. 6 : 42, note. k “yioht +” καλόν. So Wesley, Wakefield, Rob., Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe. 4 “the borders.” note. So Matt. 4:13 (E. V.) See ch. 5:1%, r “haying an impediment in his speech ;” μογιλάλον. The participial construction is adopted as concise, and more in accord- ance with present usage. *» “the crowd.” See ch. 2 : 4, note. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VIII. 1 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 34 And looking up to heaven, he sighed, and saith unto him, Ephphatha, that is, Be opened. 35 And straightway his ears were opened, and the string of his tongue was loosed, and he spake plain. 36 And he charged them that they should tell no man: but the} more he charged them, so much the more a great deal they pub- lished ἐξ; 37 And were beyond measure astonished, saying, He hath done all things well; he maketh both the deaf to hear, and the dumb to speak. CHAP. VIII. In those days the multitude being very great, and having nothing to eat, Jesus called his disciples unto him, and saith unto them, 21 have compassion on the multitude, because they have now been with me three days, and have nothing to eat: 3 And if I send them away fasting to their own houses, they will faint by the way: for divers of them came from far. 4 And his disciples answered GREEK TEXT. / Ν ἊΝ / ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, ἐστέ- 7. ΄ Ν ναξε, καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, ᾿Εφφαθαὰ, “ἤ 5 ὅ ἐστι, Διανοίχθητι. Καὶ ’ / ty > ~ « εὐθέως διηνοίχθησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ » ,ὔ XN » if € Ἂν a ἀκοαί: καὶ ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς ’ > cal ῳ 5 , > yAwoons αὑτοῦ, καὶ ἐλάλει ὁρ- “ 30 Ν , > lal θώς. καὶ διεστείλατο αὑτοῖς 5 “ v ἵνα μηδενὶ εἴπωσιν: ὅσον δὲ αὐ- τὸς αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, μᾶλλον περισσότερον ἐκήρυσσον. “ καὶ ’ὔ ὑπερπερισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο, λέ- ΄ , yovres, Καλῶς πάντα πεποίηκε: \ A a ,ὔ καὶ τοὺς κωφοὺς ποιεῖ ἀκούειν, Ν ’ὔ a καὶ τοὺς ἀλάλους λαλεῖν. CHAP. VIII. "EN ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις, παμπόλλου ὄχλου ὄντος, καὶ μὴ ἐχόντων τί φάγωσι, προσκαλε- σάμενος ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ λέγει αὐτοῖς, * Σπλαγχνί- BEN \ ᾿, σ΄ 4 Coma ἐπὶ Tov ὄχλον: ὅτι ἤδη ε , ΄σ ΄ ἡμέρας τρεῖς προσμένουσί μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσι τί payoor 3 καὶ ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται ἐν nm ε “ Ν \ fod / τῇ ὁδῷ: τινὲς γὰρ αὐτῶν μακρό- Ga 4 Se 5 , θεν ἥκασι. «Καὶ ἀπεκρίθησαν t “he groaned ;” ἐστέναξε. cept James ὃ : 9 (“grudge”). gemisco.” Syr., ui22}. π-στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις. ἃ “the Βοπᾶ :" 6 δεσμὸς. Castal., “ vinculum ;” S. Fr., “le lien.” So in all other cases in Εἰ. V., ex- Kendriek, Wesley, Dick. Vule., Bras., Beza, Castalio, Fritz., “ingemuit ;” Bretsch., Comp. Rom. 8 : Kend., Pechy. VWulg., Beza, Eras., REVISED VERSION. and looking up to heayen, the 34 groaned, and saith to him Eph- phatha, that is, Be opened. And immediately his ears were 35 opened, and "the bond of his tongue was loosed and he spoke ‘plainly. And he charged them 36 that they should tell no one; but the more he charged them, so much the more va great deal they published ἐξ; and were 37 beyond measure astonished, say- ing, He hath done all things well; he maketh both the deaf to hear, and the dumb to speak. CHAP. VIII. ΙΝ those days the crowd being 1 very great, and having nothing to eat, *he called his disciples ‘to him, and saith to them, I 2 have compassion on the crowd, because they shave now remain- ed with me three days, and have nothing to eat: and if I 3 send them away ‘to their homes fasting, they will faint by the way; for tsome of them ‘have come from far. And his dis- 4 “ gemo, in- 26, ὑπερεντυγχάνει 2.50, obs. 5. 4 «to their homes ;” ing by the present tense violates our idiom. The present tense in the N. T. is often used in narrating past transactions, and this too where there is no attempt at graphic description. continued state is described, the present includes in itself the zdea of the perfect or imperfect. ‘When 8 Kihner, 3255 (Rem. 1). Trollope, εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν. Kendrick, Sharpe, Υ “ plainly.” Kend., Pechy. w As an alternative rendering, “ the more abundantly.” * “he.” In the Text. Recept. 6 Ἰησοῦς is the nominative. This is rejected by Griesb., Scholz, Knapp, Tittmann, Tischend., Lachmann, Fritz., Rob. (Harmony.) It is not recognized by the Syriac or Vulgate. It is dropped by Wesley, Sharpe, and A. Campbell. It was introduced into the text from the parallel, Matt. 15 : 32. ® “to him;” προσκαλεσάμενος. See ch. 3 : 13. * “have remained ;” προσμένουσε. Rob. A literal render- This is the proper orthography of the adverb. Belg., “naa haar huis.” “Own” is omitted here, because Bagster has αὐτῶν. Different editions of the Text. Recept. differ as to the spiritus. Mont. and Wilson agree with Bagster, while Eras- mus and the Polymicrian haye αὑτῶν. So Rob. (Harmony), Scholz, Knapp, and Tittmann have αὑτῶν. The E. V. has fol- lowed Tyndale. There is no emphasis or antithesis which de- mands αὑτῶν. I insert this marginal note, ov, according to some copies, “ their own.” De Wette, “ nach Hause.” © “some ;” τινὲς. Kend., Sharpe, Campbell, Thom., Wakef. “ Divers ” is obsolete. f “have come.” Thom. Instead of the reading of Bagster 52 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VIII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. him, From whence can a man satisfy these men with bread here in the wilderness? 5 And he asked them, How many loaves have ye? And they said, Seven. 6 And he commanded the peo- ple to sit down on the ground: and he took the seven loaves, and gave thanks, and brake, and gave to his disciples to set before them; and they did set them before the people. 7 And they had a few small fishes: and be blessed, and com- manded to set them also before them. 8 So they did eat, and were filled: and they took up of the broken meat that was left, seven baskets. 9 And they that had eaten were about four thousand: and he sent them away. 10 And straightway he entered into a ship with his disciples, and came into the parts of Dalmanu- tha. 11 And the Pharisees came forth, and began to question with him, seeking of him a sign from heaven, tempting him. GREEK TEXT. cal a / αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, Loder ΄ ΄ e τούτους δυνήσεταί τις ὧδε χορ- ΄ ΕΣ Seti / 5 Ν τάσαι ἄρτων ἐπ᾿ ἐρημίας; “ Καὶ 2 , 2 Ν / 2, ἐπερώτα αὐτοὺς, ITocous ἔχετε \ 5 c ΄ ἄρτους; Οἱ δὲ εἶπον, ᾿πτα. θ Ν ΄ “ιν » Kai παρήγγειλε τῷ ὄχλῳ ἄνα- πεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς καὶ λαβὼν Ν ε Ν Μ > / TOUS ἑπτὰ ἄρτους, εὐχαριστήσας 32 Ν as cal -“ ἔκλασε καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα παραθῶσι: καὶ παρέ- θ tal ” λ 7 Ν 3. ηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ. καὶ εἶχον > / 3 / Ἂς > / ἰχθύδια ὀλίγα: Kat evdoynoas “5 “ Ν > ΄ ὃ» εἶπε παραθεῖναι καὶ αὐτά. “ ἔφα- \ > 4 γον δὲ, καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν: καὶ > vA 4 ἦραν περισσεύματα κλασμάτων, Ἃ 53 \ ε ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας. *° ἦσαν δὲ οἱ , φαγόντες ὡς τετρακισχίλιοι" καὶ 4, ἀπέλυσεν αὐτούς. / 3 Ν Ν 0 Καὶ εὐθέως ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ a Ν fal an a πλοῖον μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, SS / ἦλθεν εἰς Ta μέρη Aadpavovba. Τ καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ Φαρισαῖοι, καὶ wv ΄σ΄ » ἴω Lal ἡρξαντο συζητεῖν αὐτῷ, ζητοῦν- > ΄“- lal Ἂν a τες TAP αὐτοῦ σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ REVISED VERSION. ciples answered him, * Whence can ®"any one satisfy these men with bread here in *a desert? And he asked them, How many loaves have ye? And they said, Seven. And he commanded the crowd ‘to lie down on the eround: and he took the seven loaves, and gaye thanks, and broke }them, and gave to his dis- ciples to set before them; and they «set them before the crowd. And they had a few small fishes : and he blessed and commanded to set them also before them. So tthey ate and ™were satis- fied; and "they took up seven baskets eof the fragments which were left. And »those, who ate, were about four thousand : and he sent them away. And immediately he entered into athe ship with his disciples, and came into "the region of Dal- manutha. And the Pharisees came forth, and began to ques- tion with him, seeking of him a 11 ἥκασι, Scholz, Knapp, Titt., Lach., and Tischendorf have ἥκουσε, which is probably the true reading. As this verb belongs to the preteritive class, which with the form of the present have the signification of preterites, no change would be made in rendering, whichever reading is adopted. & «Whence ;” Πόϑεν. Wesley, Wakef., Campbell, Kend., Thom., Sharpe. S. Fr., “ d’ou.” ΞΕ “any one;” qs. Robinson, Sharpe. Beza, “ quispiam ;” Castal., “ quisquam ;” De Wette, “ jemand ;” S. Fr., “ on.” h “a desert ;” ἐπ᾽ ἐρημίας. No article should be inserted in the Revision. None employed by Wakef., Thom., Sharpe. In the parallel, Matt. 15 : 33, ἐρημίᾳ is anarthrous. See ch. 1 : 4, note. 1 “to lie down;” ἀνασέσειν. Sharpe. Vulg., Eras., Mont., Castal., “ discumbere ;” Beza, “ut discumberent.” See ch. 6 : 40, note. 1 “them.” Wesley, Kend., Pechy, Sharpe, Campbell, Wakef., Dick. 8. Fr., “les.” The sentence is imperfect and harsh with- out this supplement. k “set.” “Did” is superfluous, as there is no emphasis. 1 “they ate; ἔφαγον. Sharpe, Kend., Pechy. See ch. 6 : 42, note. m “were satisfied ;” ἐχορτάσϑησαν. Wakef., Kend., Wesley, Thom., Camp., Dick., Rob. See ch. 6 : 42, note. » “they took up seven baskets.” Thom, ‘This is the natural order, in our language. So in the text, 6 : 43, ἦραν κλασμάτων δώδεκα κοφίνους, and the parallel, Matt. 15 : 37, ἦραν τὸ περισ- σεῦον τῶν κλασμάτων, ἕπτα σπυρίδας πλήρεις. ° “of fragments ;” χλασμάτων. Wesley, Thom., Wakefield, Dick., Sharpe, Campbell, Rob. So in all instances in Εἰ. V., ex- cept this, and Matt. 15 : 37. ? P “those, who ate;” οὗ φαγόντες. Sharpe, Kendrick. ‘This aorist is most appropriately rendered by the imperfect. The pluperfect of the E. V. originated in the manducaverant of the Vulg. In ch. 6:44, of φαγόντες is rendered in the H. V., “ they that did eat.” a “the ship;” τὸ πλοῖον. The definite article is employed by Wesley, Sharpe, Wakef., Thom., Kend., Pechy, De Wette, Belg., S. Fr., Iber. See ch. 4 : 1, note. r “the region ;” τὰ μέρη. Rob., Bretsch., Kend., Campbell. Thomson, “ district ;” S. Fr., “le territoire ;” Luther and De Wette, “die Gegend ;” Iberian, “al distrito ;” Castalio, “ trac- tus.” THK GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VIII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 12 And he sighed deeply in his spirit, and saith, Why doth this generation seek after a sign? Verily, I say wato you, There shall no sign be given unto this genera- tion. 13 And he left them, and enter- ing into the ship again, departed to the other side. 14 Now the disciples had for- gotten to take bread, neither had they in the ship with them more than one loaf. GREEK TEXT. ΤΣ ἢ οὐρανοῦ, πειράζοντες αὐτόν. καὶ ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ λέγει, Τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη σημεῖον ἐπιζητει; ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ on- 13 3 μεῖον. Kai ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς, ἐμ- Ν , > Ν al > a Bas πάλιν εἰς TO πλοῖον, ἀπὴλ- \ θεν εἰς TO πέραν. γ a » 14 Kat ἐπελάθοντο λαβεῖν ap- : 3 τους, καὶ εἰ μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον οὐκ εἶ- xov pel’ ἑαυτῶν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ. 53 REVISED VERSION. sign from heayen, trying him. And the groaned deeply in 12 his spirit, and saith, Why doth this generation "seek a sign? YTruly I say to you, There shall no sign be given to this genera- tion. And he left them and entering into the ship again, departed to the other side. wAnd the disciples had forgotten to take =bread, neither had they μι 9 15 And he charged them, say- τ ing, Take heed, beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, and of the leaven of Herod. 16 And they reasoned among themselves, saying, It is because we haye no bread. 17 And when Jesus knew it, he saith unto them, Why reason ye, because ye have no bread? perceive ye not yet, neither under- stand? have ye your heart yet hardened? 18 Having eyes, see ye not? and haying ears, hear ye not? and do ye not remember? “Ἡρώδου. ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς λέγει € ΄ ν ὑμῶν; "2 βλέπετε; 4 ἀκούετε; καὶ διεστέλλετο αὐτοῖς, λέγων, “Ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς 16 Καὶ διελογίζοντο πρὺς ἀλλήλους, λέγοντες, ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχομεν. a Ya λογίζεσθε, ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε; y lal > \ οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε; / + \ πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε THY καρδίαν 8 » Ν Ε > ὀφθαλμοὺς ἐχοντες ov 53 a καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες οὐκ fe καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε; ybut one loaf with them tin the ship. And he charged them, saying, Take heed, beware of the leaven of the Pharisees and sof the leaven of Herod. And they reasoned among them- selves, saying, If is because we have no bread. And Jesus ’knowing ἐξ, saith to them, Why do ye reason ‘that ἐξ 7s because ye have no bread? do ye not yet perceive ‘nor understand? have ye your heart ‘still ‘stupe- fied? haying eyes, see ye not? and haying ears, hear ye not? ζύμης {4 Or 1 Καὶ γνοὺς αὐτοῖς, Τί δια- x €TL 18 * “trying ;” πειράζοντες. See ch. 1:13, note. Kend., Q., Pechy, Wakef., “ to try ;” Thom., “ with a view to try.” ” t “he groaned deeply ;” ἀναστανάξας. Bretsehneider, “inge- misco ;” Liddell (in verbo), “ to groan aloud ;” Kend., “ groaning deeply ;” Campbell, “with a deep groan.” Ἀνά is mtensive. See ch. 7 ἃ “seek a sign.” “ After” is dropped as superfluous. Dick., Wakef., Thom. have omitted it. νυ “Truly ;” See ch. 3 : 28, note. w «And;” Kat. Sharpe, Pechy. Iber., “1 “et;” De Wette, “ und.” * “bread ;” ἄρτους. While “loayes” would be more literal (here and νυ. 16,17), the exigentia loci demands that the render- ing of the ἘΠ. V. should be retained. The rendering, “had for- gotten to take loaves, and had but one loaf with them,” is not in harmony with our mode of speaking. Wesley, ;” Vulg., Eras., Υ “but” (one loaf); εἰ μὴ (ἕνα ἄρτον). Dick., Pechy. S. Fr., “qu'un seul pain ;” Bretsch., “ preter ;” De Wette, “denn nur ;” Belg., “ dan.” * “in the ship.” This position of these words is according to the text. The whole sentence is thus in harmony with our usus oquendi. So Sharpe, Thom., Campbell, Wakef., Dick., S. Fr., De Wette, Belg., Vulg., Beza, Hras., Iber. The inverted order of the E. V. originated with Tyndale. @ “of.” This preposition which marks the genitive of τῆς Cv. ns, is not a supplement, and is improperly italicized in the E. V. It corresponds in all respects to the “ of” immediately preceding («of the Pharisees”), which is also the sign of the genitive. > “Inowing ;” γνοὺς. Wesley, Kendrick, Dickinson, Shazpe, Campbell, and Thomson have the participial construction. The expression “when Jesus knew,” leaves the common reader to infer that Jesus learned the fact from information subsequently given. S. Fr., “ connaissant ;” Belg., “ bekenende.” © “that it is.’ In the sixteenth verse where the text is, ὅτε ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχομεν, ὃν supplement is obviously required. Ὅτε indicates that something is necessary, before it, to complete the sentence. In the case now before us, the sentence is similar, and ὅτε has the same force. The thought is, “Why do ye reason that I spoke thus, because ye haye no bread?” Liddell (ὅτε.) Hoogeyen (ὅτε,) 1Π|., p. 138. 4 “por;” οὐδὲ Rob. After the negative “not,” “nor” should be med instead of “neither.” Webster, on “Neither.” So Kend., Wakef., Pechy. © “still:” ἔτ. Pechy, Rob. So (E. V.) Rey. 22: 11. £ «stupefied ;” πεπωρωμένην. Kend. See ch. 6 : 52, note. ” δ4 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING ΤῸ MARK.—CHAP. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 19 When I brake the five loaves among five thousand, how many baskets full of fragments took ye up? They say unto him, Twelve. 20 And when the seven among four thousand, how many baskets full of fragments took ye up? And they said, Seven. 21 And he said unto them, How is it that ye do not under- stand ὃ 22 And he cometh to Beth- saida; and they bring a blind man unto him, and besought him to touch him. 23 And he took the blind man by the hand, and led him out of the town; and when he had spit on his eyes, and put his hands upon him, he asked him if he saw aught. 24 And he looked up, and said, I see men as trees walking. 25 After that, he put his hands again upon his eyes, and made him look up: and he was restor- ed, and saw every man clearly. 26 And he sent him away to his iouse, saying, Neither go into the GREEK TEXT. 19 Ὁ \ / » x OTE τοὺς πέντε APTOVS ἐκλασα Ν Δι εἰς τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους, ποσους κοφίνους πλήρεις κλασμάτων ἤρατε; ΓΙ τον αὐτῳ, “ώ- δεκα. Ὅτε δὲ τοὺς ἑπτὰ Ν / εἰς τοὺς SL nN a πόσων / "2 7 σπυρίδων πληρώματα κλασμά- "΄ ε Nisa ε ΄ των ἤρατε; Οἱ δὲ εἴπον, ᾿ βίπτά. 2 a > - “ Ἵ Kat ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς, Πῶς οὐ συνίετε; 25 , - Kat ἔρχεται εἰς BnyOcai- 4 Ss lal \ δάν: καὶ φέρουσιν αὐτῷ τυφλὸν, Ν “ EON “ > καὶ παρακαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν ἵνα av- no » / TOU ἅψηται. "Ὁ καὶ ἐπιλαβόμε- νος τῆς χειρὸς τοῦ τυφλοῦ, ἐξή- γαγεν αὐτὸν ἔξω τῆς κώμης" καὶ πτύσας εἰς τὰ ὄμματα αὐτοῦ, ἐπι- Ν Ν - > ° » ΄ θεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῴ, ἐπηρώτα 35.Ν " ΄, 24 No αὐτὸν εἴ τι βλέπει. καὶ ἀνα- / 7 Ν βλέψας ἔλεγε, Βλέπω τοὺς ἀν- “2 τὰ c sf € ca θρώπους, ὅτι ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περι- ᾿Ξ 5 5 ΄ > + πατοῦντας. Hira πάλιν ἐπέ- Ν la BEN \ > Onke Tas χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλ- Ἂν ro Ἂν μοὺς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐποίησεν αὐτὸν / 7 ἀναβλέψαι: καὶ ἀποκατεστάθη, Ny sale) fal “ καὶ ἐνέβλεψε τηλαυγῶς ἁπαντας. Ἢ Ε 4 Ἂν; Ν "ὁ καὶ ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν 9 “ / \ οἶκον αὐτοῦ, λέγων, Μηδὲ εἰς ὙΠ: REVISED VERSION. and do ye not remember? When 19 I broke the five loaves among ‘the five thousand, how many baskets full of fragments took ye up? They say to him, Twelve. And when the seven 20 among "the four thousand, how many baskets full of fragments took ye up? And they said, Seven. And he said to them, 21 How is it that ye do not understand? And he cometh to 22 Bethsaida; and they bring a blind man to him and ‘beseech him to touch him. And he 23 took the blind man by the hand, and led him out Jof the village ; and when he had spit on his eyes: he put his hands on him and asked him if he saw ‘any thing? And he looked up, and 24 said, I see men Jike ™trees, walking. "Then he put his hands 25 on his eyes again, and made him look up: and he was restored, and saw every man clearly. And he sent him away 26 to his house, saying, Neither go 5 «“the;” τοὺς. Camphell. “die.” is definite. h “the ;” τοὺς. last note. ' “beseech ;” παρακαλοῦσιν. Eras., “ obsecrant ;” De Wette, “ bitten.” E. V. originated in that of the Vulgate, “ adducunt—et roga- bant.” ) “of the village ;” τῆς κώμης. ‘village, hamlet, country-town.” Sharpe, Dick., Pechy, Kendrick, Thomson, S. Fr., “les;” Iber., “los;” Belg., “de;” De Wetite, | the Εἰ V. The article should by all means be retained, as the noun Compare ch. 6 : 41, and 8 : 6. Sharpe, Dick., G@. Camp., Thom., Kend. S. Fr., “les;” Iber., “los ;” Belg., “de; ” De Wette, “die.” See} John ἢ : 46. ” k “any thing ;” τι. times in the N. T., and is rendered “ village” seventeen times in Sharpe, Kend., Dick., Wakef., Thomson. “ Aught” is obsolete. 1 “like;” ὡς. Robinson. So (EK. V.} Matt. 6 : 29; 28:3. Acts 8:32. In constructions like the present, “like” is much more frequently employed than “as,” both in con- Wesley, Pechy, Wakef. The yersation and writing. verb is rendered in the present by Thom. and Sharpe also. It should be put in the same tense with the equivalent of φέρουσιν. m As “trees” (δένδρα) is joined with “men,” not with “walking” (περισατοῦντας), a comma is placed after it. Bloom- The rendering of the | field remarks, “I see men as trees, walking,” i. e., “ I distinguish men from trees only by their walking.” So Campbell’s render- ing is, “men, whom I distinguish from trees only by their walk- Kend., Sharpe, Pechy, Wake- | ‘28"” feld. Vulg., Mont., Eras. Beza, “vicum;” Rob. (in verbo), The word occurs twenty-seven | Liddell. » “then ;” εἶτα. Kend., Sharpe, Wesley, Wakefield, Rob. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VIII. 55 KING JAMES’ VERSION. town, nor tell ἐξ to any in the town. 27 And Jesus went out, and his disciples, into the towns of Ce- sarea Philippi: and by the way he asked his disciples, saying unto them, Whom do men say that I am? 28 And they answered, John the Baptist: but some say, Elias; and others, One of the prophets. 29 And he said unto them, But whom say ye that lam? And Pe- ter answereth and saith unto him, Thou art the Christ. 30 And he charged them that they should tell no man of him. 31 And he began to teach them, that the Son of man must suffer many things, and be rejected of the elders, and of the chief priests, and scribes, and be killed, and after three days rise again. GREEK TEXT. THY κώμην εἰσέλθῃς, μηδὲ εἴτῃς τινὶ ἐν τῇ κώμῃ. 7 Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰς κώμας Καισαρείας τῆς Φιλίππου: καὶ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ἐπηρώτα τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ, λέγων αὐτοῖς, Tiva pe λέγουσιν οἱ ἀνθρωποι εἶναι; 8 Οἱ δὲ ἀπεκρίθησαν, ᾿]ωάννην τὸν Βαπτιστήν: καὶ ἄλλοι ᾿Ηλί- αν: ἄλλοι δὲ ἕνα τῶν προφητῶν. 29 Καὶ αὐτὸς λέγει αὐτοῖς, ᾿ Ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι; ᾿Α4πο- κριθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος λέγει αὐτῷ, Σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός. ὋὋ Καὶ ἐπετί- μησεν αὐτοῖς, ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσι περὶ αὐτοῦ. 1 Kai ἤρξατο διδάσκειν αὐ- τοὺς, ὅτι δεῖ τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώ- που πολλὰ παθεῖν, καὶ ἀποδοκι- μασθῆναι ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ ἀρχιερέων καὶ γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς REVISED VERSION. into °the village, nor tell ἐξ ?to And 27 ‘Jesus and his disciples went any one in %the village. out into *the villages of Cesarea Philippi: and, ton the way, he asked his disciples, saying to them, "Who do men say that I am? And they answered, John 28 ‘the Immerser; wand *others, Elijah; but others, one of the And he saith to 29 them, But »who say ye that I prophets. am? And Peter answering saith to him, Thou art :the Anointed. And he charged them that they 30 should tell sno one **concerning him. And he began to teach 31 them, that the Son of man must suffer many things, and be re- jected *by the elders, and ‘the chief priests and scribes, and 4he put to death, and after three ° “the village.” See v. 23, note. Ρ “to any one;” zt. Wakef., Sharpe, Thom., Dickinson. “ Any,” when used alone (as it is here by the E. V.), conveys the idea of plurality, and is understood by English readers as equiva- lent to “ any persons” (or “ things”). 4 “the village.” See v. 23, note. r “Jesus and his disciples went out.” Pechy. This change from the more literal phraseology of the E. V. is made in accord- ance with our usus loquendi. The same phraseology occurs in De Wette, “Jesus und seine Jiinger gingen hinweg.” Dick., “ Jesus and his disciples went out.” As an alternative rendering, “Jesus went out with his disciples.” So 'Thom., G. Camp., Wake- field. Span., “ Y salid Jesus con sus discipulos.” * “the villages ;” τὰς κώμας. See ν. 23, note. t “on the way ;” ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ. Kend., Pechy, Wakef., “on the road.” This idiomatic phrase presents the thought, and is in harmony with our mode of speaking. *“Who;” Τίνα. Kend., Thom., Pechy, Camp. “ Whom” is ungrammatical. * “the Immerser ;” τὸν Βαπτιστήν. A. Camp. See ch. 6:14, note. Iber., “el Sumergidor ;” Luther, De Wette, “der Taufer ;” Belg., “de Dooper.” * “and;” zai. Kend., Thom., Sharpe. Hras., Beza, “et ;” S. Fr. “et;” De Wette, “und;” Belg., “ende;” Iber., “i;” Ital., " ed.” =x “others;” ἄλλοι. Wiclif, Sharpe, Kend. S. Fr., “d’au- tres;” De Wette, “andere ;” Span. and Iber., “ otros ;” Ital., “altri.” y “ who.” * “the Anointed ;” 6 Χριστός. This word is here evidently an appellative, like the Hebrew mvj. It should, therefore, be translated, not transferred. This is its use generally, zn the Evangelists. In the Epistles, on the contrary, it is generally a proper name. To substitute the Hebrew “ Messiah” for “ Christ,” is to introduce a less familiar word, without affording the reader any light from etymology. Rob., “the Anointed ;” Bretsch., “ unctus a Deo.” See Ps. 2 : 2, Ἵν (BE. V.) “his Anointed ;” Sept., τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ. Acts 10 : 38, Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲτ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὃ Θεὸς Πνεύματε Ἁγίῳ καὶ See y. 27, note. δυνάμει. * “no one;” μηδενὶ. Sharpe, Thom., Kendrick, Pechy, Rob. Mont., “ nemini ;” Beza, “ nulli;” De Wette, “niemandem.” κα “concerning ;” περὶ. Camp., Kend., Wakef. Often in E. V. > “by ;” ἀπὸ (cum genit.) Wesley, Wakef., Dick., Kend., Pechy, Thom. ¢ There is no necessity for the supplementary “ of,” in the H. V. It is not employed by Sharpe, Wesley, Kend., Thomson, or Pechy. 4 «he put to death ;” ἀποκτανϑῆναι. Robinson (in loco, 56 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 32 And he spake that saying openly. And Peter took him, and began to rebuke him. 33 But when he had turned about, and looked on his disciples, he rebuked Peter, saying, Get thee behind me, Satan: for thou savourest not the things that be of God, but the things that be of men. 34 And when he had called the people unto him with his disciples also, he said unto them, Whoso- ever will come after me, let him deny himself, and take up his cross, and follow me. 35 For whosoever will save his life, shall lose it; but whosoever shall lose his life for my sake and the gospel’s, the same shall save it. 36 For what shall it profit a ἀποκτείνω.) So (KH. V.) Matt. 14 : 5. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. VIII. GREEK TEXT. ε 7 > ΄ 32 Ἂν > ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι" καὶ παῤ- Ν / ΄ Ἂς ῥησίᾳ τὸν λόγον ἐλάλει. Καὶ ἴ / aN ε a προσλαβόμενος αὐτὸν ὃ Ilérpos a a « \ ἤρξατο ἐπιτιμᾷᾶν αὐτῷ. “ἢ ὁ δὲ > Ν Na iN \ ἐπιστραφεὶς, καὶ ἰδὼν τοὺς μα- ΄σ cal , θητὰς αὐτοῦ, ἐπετίμησε τῷ LTe€- ? 3 t ΄, “ > / TPO, λέγων, γπαγε ὀπίσω μου, 5 ο » ΄σ At cal Σατανᾶ: ore ov φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ - \ XN o ΄ Θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων. 3 4 Ν ὅ: Kat προσκαλεσάμενος τὸν Ν ΄σ cal ΄ ὄχλον σὺν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, 3 > cr σ / > / εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ᾿ στις θέλει ὀπίσω ΄σ ΄ὔ μου ἐλθεῖν, ἀπαρνησάσθω ἕαυ- ΑΞ Wy ὡς ἊΝ τὸν, καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν av- “ See t 35 8 τοῦ, Kai ἀκολουθείτω μοι. ὃς \ ΩΝ ΄ Ν Ν > fal yap av θέλῃ THY ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ~ ΄ ΄ a σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν. ὃς δ᾽ Ἀ » ΄, \ \ > a av ἀπολέσῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, - ΄ » , Β \ οὗτος σώσει αὐτήν. “ὃ τί yap > An y 6 aN én ὠφελήσει ἄνθρωπον, ἐὰν Kepdnon Mark 14:1. Luke REVISED VERSION. days rise again. And he spoke 32 tthe saying ‘plainly. And Peter took him Saside, and be- gan to rebuke him. But when he had turned round and look- ed on his disciples, he rebuked Peter, saying, 'Get behind me, Satan: for thou !favyorest not kthe things of God, but ‘the things of men. And when he had called the crowd 'to him with his disciples, ™he said to them, Whoever will come after me, let him deny himself, and take up his cross, and follow me. For "whoever would save his life, ewill lose it; but who- ever shall lose his life for my sake and the gospel’s, Phe swill save it. For what will it pro- fit a man "if he should gain the 36 i “Get behind me ;” Ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου. Kendrick. Vulg., 15: 89... Jobnet) ἢ: 3h8) 1. e “the saying.” Pechy. Some Grammarians have said that it is allowable to render the article by the demonstrative, for the sake of perspicuzty. Such cases, however, are rare, and can be justified only when there is an emphasis. There is no necessity in this instance for departing from the usual rendering. The translation of Beza, “eum sermonem,” influenced the early Eng. interpreters. ’ f “plainly ;” παῤῥησίᾳ. Rob. (in loco.) Pechy, Newcome, Wakef., and Dick., “with great plainness.” Zaééyota is not employed here in the sense of “ openly” as contrasted to “secret- ly,” but to signify “ free from obscurity, distinctly, clearly,” as in John 10 : 24, “ If thou be the Christ tell us plainly ᾿ς παῤῥησίᾳ. So John 16:29. Bloomf. (N. T.), “plainly,” “without any figure of speech ;” Iber., “ con claridad.” & “aside.” Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva, Wakefield, Kendrick, Campbell, Thom. S. Fr., “a part.” Rob., on προσλαμβάνω, says: “ With ace. of persons, to take to oneself, to take by the hand and draw aside.” Hence, De Wette, “nahm ihn Petrus bei der Hand.” Belg., “ Petrus hem het zich genomen hebbende.” Bloomf. (on parallel, Matt. 16 : 22), “ taking him aside, q. d., by the hand, an action naturally accompanying advice, remonstrance, or censure.” h “turned round;” ἐπιστραφεὶς. So ch. 5 : 30. % Round” is more harmonious than “ about.” Sharpe. “vade retro me ;” Belg., “ Gaat henen achter mij ;” De Wette, “ Weiche von mir.” Heb. N.T., "ony 3x ad. “Get” is no longer used as a reflexive verb. : } “favorest ;” φρονεῖς. Rob. (in loco, φρονέω), “to favor, to set the mind and affections upon.” “To sayor” has nearly the same sense (or, more strictly, “ to relish”), but it is obsolete. As an alternative, “ thou regardest.” kk “the things of God—the things of men ;” τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ-- τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων. Wesley, Wakef., Pechy, Campbell, Thom.. Kend. “That” and “ be,” after “ things,” are superfluous. 1 “to him.” See ch. 3 : 13, note. m« Also” is an unnecessary supplement, in the H. V. It has been dropped by Sharpe, Pechy, Dick. It was borrowed from Tyndale, and was probably derived from the rendering of Beza, “ quum ad se vocasset turmam una cum discipulis suis. ” n “ whoever would ;” ὃς---ἂν ϑέλῃ. Pechy, Dick. ° “will lose;” ἀπολέσει. Sharpe. P “he;” οὗτος. The force of this demonstrative may often be properly presented by “ he,” pronounced with emphasis. It is rendered by “he,” “she,” etc. (EH. V.) Matt. 13 : 22,23. Luke 1:32; 20:28. John 4:47. Acts 3:10, ete. 4 “will save ;” σώσει. This language is regarded as a simple declaration of that which is to take place in the future. Henee, “ will” is substituted for “shall.” So Sharpe, Dick. τ “ will it profit ;” ὠφελήσει. Wakef., Thom, Sharpe * “if he should gain ;” ἐὰ Dick. ἐὰν κερδήσῃ. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IX. 57 KING JAMES’ VERSION. man, if he shall gain the whole world, and lose his own soul? 37 Or what shall a man give in exchange for his soul? 38 Whosoever therefore shall be ashamed of me, and of my words, in this adulterous and sin- ful generation ; of him also shall the Son of man be ashamed, when he cometh in the glory of his Father with the holy angels. CHAP. IX. AND he said unto them, Verily, I say unto you, That there be some of them that stand here which shall not taste of death, till they have seen the kingdom of God come with power. 2 And after six days, Jesus taketh with him Peter, and James, and John, and leadeth them up into an high mountain apart by themselves; and he was trans- figured before them. 3 And his raiment became shin- ing, exceeding white as snow; so as no fuller on earth can white them. t “his ;” αὐτοῦ. um soul 53” ψυχὴν. which it has in v. 35. Pechy, Sharpe, Dick., Kendrick and some others render ψυχή by “ life,” here and in y. 37, thus giving the word the same force, Although I believe the E. V. is accurate, GREEK TEXT. τὸν κόσμον ὅλον, καὶ vine θῇ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ; *" ἢ τί δώσει ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ; *° ὃς γὰρ ἂν ἐπαι- σχυνθῇ με καὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ τῇ μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ, καὶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐπαισχυνθήσεται αὐ- τὸν, ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν ἁγίων. CHAP. IX. Kai ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς, ᾿Α μὴν λέ- γω ὑμῖν, ὅτι εἰσὶ τινὲς τῶν ὧδε ἑστηκότων, οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύ- σωνται θανάτου, ἕως ἂν ἴδωσι τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυ- θυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει. 5 Kai μεθ᾽ ἡμέρας ἐξ παρα- λαμβάνει ὁ Incovs τὸν Πέτρον καὶ τὸν ᾿]άκωβον καὶ τὸν ᾿Ϊ]ωάν- νην, καὶ ἀναφέρει αὐτοὺς εἰς ὄρος ὑψηλὸν κατ᾽ ἰδίαν μόνους: καὶ μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν, 3 καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο στίλβοντα, λευκὰ λίαν ὡς χιὼν, οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύ- REVISED VERSION. whole world, and lose this “soul? or what will a man give 87 as a ‘ransom for his "soul. For 38 whoever shall be ashamed of me, and of my words, in this adulterous and sinful genera- tion; of him also »will the Son of man be ashamed, when he cometh in the glory of his Father with the holy angels. CHAP. IX. AND he said to them, *Truly 1 I say to you, That there are some of *those standing here, who ‘will not taste of death, till they have seen the kingdom of God come with power. And 2 after six days, Jesus taketh Iwith him Peter, and James, and John, and leadeth them up into a high mountain apart by themselves; and he was trans- figured before them. And his 3 ‘earments became shining, ex- ceedingly white, ‘like snow; Ssuch as no fuller on earth can Camp., Wakef. a « Truly.” > “those standing ;” Pechy. ᾿ still I place “or life” in the margin of νυν. 36 and 37. y. 38. John 12 : 25. auxiliary. τ “ransom ;” ἀντάλλαγμα. Bloomfield (Annotat.), Thomson,| * “ with him.” Campbell. De Wette, “ Losegeld.” Geo. this word: “We ransom what by law, war, or accident is forfeited | ® ἃ supplement. ¢ “will not taste ;” Compare | Dick. As this is the langnage of prediction, “ will” is the proper See ch. 3 : 28, note. τῶν ἐστηκότων. Kend., Thom., Camp., ov μὴ γεύσωνται. Sharpe, Wakefield, As παρὰ in composition conveys the idea of Campbell remarks on |“ With” or “ to,” the equivalent of παρὰ should not be ztalicized ’ Compare ch. 3 : 13, note. and in the power of another, though we may still be in posses- sion; but we always exchange what we have for what we have not. Ifa man’s life be actually taken, it is too late for barter- ing.” Bretsch. (ἀντάλλαγμα, in loco), “ Locutio deprompta est ex redemtione servorum, et dvréddayue est pretium redemtionis, liberationis a morte.” Tyndale, Cran., Genevan, “ to redeem his soul again.” ~ “will—be ashamed ;” ἐπαισχυνϑήσεται. Camp. Sharpe, Wakef. Kend., Dickinson, © “garments ;” τὰ ἱμάτεα. Wesley, Kend., Campbell, Dick., Pechy, Rheims, Rob. So (BH. V.) Matt. 21:8; 23:5; 27 : 35. Mark 11 : 7, ete. f “like ;” ὡς. Kend., Wakef., Dick. See ch. 8 : 24, note. ® “such as;” ofa. Wesley, Dick. Kend., Rob. Bretsch., “ qualis ;” S. Fr., “tels que ;” Span. and Iber., “ cuales ;” Ital., “tali;” Wulg., Mont., Beza, “ qualia.” As οἷα is elliptical for ota ἱμάτεα, the addition of “them” at the end of the verse is unnecessary. 58 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IX. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 4 And there appeared unto them Elias, with Moses: and they were talking with Jesus. ὅ And Peter answered and said to Jesus, Master, it is good for us to be here: and let us make three tabernacles ; one for thee, and one for Moses, and one for Elias. 6 For he wist not what to say: for they were sore afraid. 7 And there was a cloud that overshadowed them: and a voice came out of the cloud, saying, This is my beloved Son: hear him. 8 And suddenly, when they had looked round about, they saw no man any more, save Jesus only with themselves. 9 And as they came down from the mountain, he charged them that they should tell no man what things they had seen, till the Son of man were risen from the dead. 10 And they kept that saying GREEK TEXT. varat λευκᾶναι. * καὶ ὠφθὴ αὐτοῖς ᾿Πλίας σὺν Macet, καὶ ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες τῷ ᾿Ϊ]ησοῦ. > καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος λέγει τῷ ᾿Τησοῦ, Poppi, καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι: καὶ ποιήσωμεν σκηνὰς τρεῖς, σοὶ μίαν, καὶ ate σεῖ μίαν, καὶ ᾿Πλίᾳ μίαν. "Οὐ yap Oe τί λαλήσῃ: ἦσαν γὰρ ἔκφοβοι. καὶ ἐγένετο νεφέλη ἐπισκιάζουσα αὐτοῖς: καὶ ἦλθε φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης, λέγουσα, Οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ υἱὸς μου ὁ ἀγα- πητός" αὐτοῦ ἀκούετε. ὃ Καὶ ἐξάπινα περιβλεψάμενοι, οὐκέτι οὐδένα εἶδον, ἀλλὰ τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν μόνον μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν. ° Καταβαι- νόντων δὲ αὐτῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄρους, διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ διηγήσωνται ἃ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ ὅταν ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκ νεκρῶν ’ o 10 Ν Ν δ / > ΄ αναστΉ - καὶ τὸν AOYOV εκρα- REVISED VERSION. “whiten. And there appeared 4 to them Elijah, with Moses: and they were talking with Je- sus. And Peter ‘answering, 5 saith to Jesus, ‘Rabbi, it is good for us !to remain here: jand let us make three ™booths; one for thee, and one for Moses, and one for Elijah. For he 6 "knew not what to say: for they were cgreatly terrified. And there came a cloud which 7 overshadowed them; and a voice came out of the cloud, saying, This is my beloved Son: hear him. And suddenly, :on 8 looking round, "they no longer saw any one, ‘except Jesus alone with themselves. And as 9 they came down from the moun- tain, he charged them that they tshould relate "to no one ‘what they had seen, till the Son of man should have risen from the dead. And they kept that 10 h “ whiten ;” λευκᾶναι. Sharpe. Pechy, Kendrick, Wesley, ‘Thomson, “ White ” is no longer used as a verb. terrified.” “terrore perculsus.” Ἔκ is intensive. Campbell has “ so terrified.” “Sore” is obsolete. Bretschneider, ”» i “ answering ;” ἀποκριϑεὶς. Kend., Wesley. S. F'r., “ pre- nant la parole ;” Span., Iber., “ tomando la palabra.” ) “saith ;” λέγει. Kend. k “Rabbi.” This Hebrew title (literally, “ Great One”) has no proper equivalent in our language. Rob. remarks: “In Matt. 28 : 8, it is explained by καϑηγητής---ἰῃ John 1 : 38, by δεδάσκα- Aos—in reference to its use as a title, rather than to signification.” It is deemed best, in conformity to the general usage in the E. V., to transfer this word. The Apostles were charged not to receive this title, Matt. 28 : 7,8. So Pechy, Camp., Sharpe. 1 “to remain;” εἶναι. Bloomfield on Matt. 17 Dick., Wakef., ‘ to abide ;” Campbell, “ to stay.” m “)ooths ;” σχηνὰς. Bloomfield on Matt. 17 : 4, “ Booths composed of branches of trees, such as were hastily raised for temporary purposes by travelers, and such as were raised at the feast of tabernacles. Campbell, Dickinson. “Booths” occurs in (E.V.) Gen. 33:17. Levit. 23:42, 43. Neh. 8:14, 16. In all these cases, the Sept. has σκηνή. Rob., “ Booths, as built of green boughs and the like, a booth.” Kend., Wesley, Sharpe, Wakef. 24 (N..T.) = “knew ;” 70ee. τ ΠΕ, is obsolete. ° “sreatly terrified ;” ἔκφοβοι. Rob., Thom., “ exceedingly p “there came ;” ἐγένετο. Wesley, Kend., Thom., Campbell. This is a common rendering of this verb (in the E. V.) where it has the sense of fierz, “to come into existence,” “to become any thing.” See Rob. Luther, “es kam ;” Belg., “daar kwaam ;” Vulg., Eras., “ facta est ;” Iber., “ vino (una nube).” 4 “on looking round ;” περιβλεψάμενοι. Pechy, Kend. * “they no longer saw any one ;” οὐκέτε οὐδένα εἶδον. Kend., Dick. S. Fr., “ils ne virent plus personne ;” Beza, Eras., “non amplius viderunt quemquam.” * “except ;” ἀλλὰ. This particle is used for ἀλλ 7, “ other than,” “except.” Bloomf. (N. T.) Rob. (ἀλλ᾽ 7.) Kendrick, “but ;” S. Fr., “ que ;” Iber., “sino ;” De Wette, “sondern.” t “should relate ;” Pie ee Kend., Dick., “ to relate.” As this verb has the sense of narrating, declaring in detail, “ re- late” is an appropriate rendering. It is thus distinguished from other verbs, which are translated “ to tell” in the E. V. Vulg., Beza, Castal., “ narrarent ;” S. Fr., “ raconter.” « “to no one; Kendrick, Pechy, Wakef., Sharpe. Beza, “nemini;” Vulg., “ (ne) cuiquam ;” Castal., “ (ne) cui;” Iber., “ nadie ;” S. Fr., “ ne—a personne.” y “what ;” ἃ. Kend., Campbell, Dick., Sharpe, Thomson, Wakef. 5S. Fr., “ce que.” w “should have risen ;” "μηδενὶ. The aorist subj. (ὅτα»)--- ἀναστῇ. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. ΙΧ. 59 KING JAMES’ VERSION. with themselves, questioning one with another what the rising from the dead should mean. 11 And they asked him, saying, Why say the scribes that Elias must first come? 12 And he answered and told them, Elias verily cometh first, and restoreth all things; and how it is written of the Son of man, that he must suffer many things, and be set at nought. 13 But I say unto you, That Elias is indeed come, and they have done unto him whatsoever they listed, as it is written of him. 14 And when he came to his disciples, he saw a great multitude about them, and the scribes ques- tioning with them. 15 And straightway all the people, when they beheld him, were greatly amazed, and running to him, saluted him. τας αὐτοῖς. GREEK TEXT. ἣν Ἂν - τησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς, συζητοῦντες Νὴ ’ ΄ a Tl ἐστι TO, EK νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι. 1L 7m Ne ΄ BIEN ie Kai ἐπηρώτων avtoyv, λέγον- 7 ΄ ε τες, Ore λέγουσιν οἱ γραμμα- τεῖς, ὅτι ᾿Πλίαν δεῖ ἐλθεῖν πρῶ- ε Ν 5 τον; | Ὃ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς, εἶπεν cr \ Ν ΄ αὐτοῖς, ᾿Πλίας μὲν ἐλθὼν πρῶ- Lad / Lal TOV, ἀποκαθιστᾷ πάντα: καὶ πῶς Δ Ν eX n” γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀν- Ν ye θρώπου,. ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ’ : ὍΣ 3 oe > ‘\ « cal ἐξουδενωθῇ. ' ἀλλὰ λέγω ὑμῖν, / > / ὅτι καὶ ᾿Πλίας ἐλήλυθε, Kai ἐποί- ΕΝ ee » / Ν ησαν αὐτῳ ὅσα ἠθέλησαν, καθὼς tg a / γέγραπται ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν. ἊΣ Ν \ 14 Καὶ ἐλθὼν πρὸς τοὺς μαθη- \ 53 », Ν Ν > Tas, εἰδεν ὄχλον πολὺν περὶ av- Ν lal a TOUS, καὶ γραμματεῖς συζητοῦν- 5 Ν nf “ ε ° καὶ εὐθέως πᾶς ὁ 4 » \ Ν᾽; = v7 ὄχλος ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, ἐξεθαμβήθη, ? καὶ προστρέχοντες ἠσπάζοντο REVISED VERSION. saying *to themselves, question- ing with one another what that meant, To rise from the dead. And they asked him, saying, yWhy say the geribes, that Eli- jah must first come? And he answered and ‘said to them, Elijah sindeed cometh first, and restoreth all things, and how it is written of the Son of man, that he must suffer many things, and *be despised. But I say to you, that Elijah chath “both come and ‘that they have done to him whatever ‘they would, as it is written of him. And when he came to ‘his disciples, he saw a great crowd about them, and the scribes question- ing with them. And *imme- diately all the crowd, when they beheld him, were greatly amazed, and ‘running to him, with ὅταν» is equivalent to our second fut. or the futwrum ez- actum of the Latin. Buttm., 3139 (m.16). Winer, 235 (8. ὁ. 2). As an alternative reading (though less exact), “ had risen.” * “to themselves ;” πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς. The idiom of our language demands “to” in this case, after “kept.” So Rob. (zn loco), χρατέω, “ what that meant, To rise from the dead,” τέ ἐστε τὸ, Pechy. The question with the Apostle was, What did the language of Jesus signify, when he spoke of his own resurrection from the dead? What did he mean by the saying, “To rise from the dead?” ‘Lore has here the sense of “ to mean” or “ signify,” and may be properly rendered by the imperfect tense. Rob. (ἐστ) To is elliptical for τὸ ῥῆμα. Bloomfield (in loco) says, “ what Jesus meant by rising from the dead,’—* they (i. 6. the Apostles) did not question the general resurrection, which all but the Saddu- cees believed.” Vulg., “ quid esset : Cum a mortuis resurrexerit.” Mont., “ quid est, Ex mortuis resurgere?” Eras., “ quid esset hoc quid dixerat, E mortuis resurgere.” Tber., “ qué seria eso de resuscitar de entre los muertos.” De Wette, “ Was heisst das: Von den Todten auferstehen ?” y¥“Why;” Ὅτι. The difficulty presented by this particle has long attracted the attention of critics and interpreters. Numerous conjectural readings founded on the supposed incuria scribarum, have been suggested and rejected. No satisfactory result has yet been reached. Under these circumstances, I do not disturb the rendering of the Τὴ. V. I believe, however, that tlis is a case when ὅτε is elliptical, and that some short phrase is understood before ὅτε, so that the thought is substantially, ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι. “Why is it that the scribes say,” etc. See Hoogeven, ὅτε, III. p- 138. This must be regarded as another conjecture, Ex. gr. τέ ἐστι ὅτι. 1 “said;” εἶπεν. Wakef., Thom., Sharpe, Dick. This is the usual rendering of the verb in the E. V. * “indeed ;” μὲν. Kendrick, Pechy, Wakef., Dick., Sharpe, Thom. Mont., Beza, Eras., Castal., “ quidem.” > “he despised ;” ἐξουδενωϑῇ. Rob. Campbell, “be con- temned.” “To set at nought” is obsolete. © «hath come ;” ἐλήλυϑε. Thom. There is no necessity for departing from the usual signification of the perfect. Beza, Eras., “ venisse.” See ch. 1 : 38, note. 4 « hoth—and ;” xat—xai. Rob. (xat.) Wakefield, Pechy. Many later Eng. translators overlook the first καὶ. © « that.” Wakef. Our idiom demands this supplement. S. Fr., “ et quwils lui ont fait,” ete. £ “they would ;” ἠϑέλησαν. This is a common reading of some past tenses of the verb, in the E. V. “To list” is obsolete, in the sense demanded here. As an alternative rendering, “ they desired.” So Pechy, and E. V., Mark 9:35. Luke 8 : 20; 10:24. John 16 : 19, etc. & «his.” ods, the article, is used here in the sense of a pos- sessiye pronoun ; or, to speak more accurately, it may be properly rendered by a possessive in English. Hence, it should not be printed as a supplement. Kiihner, 2244. 4. 2302. I. h “immediately.” See ch. 1 : 10, note. ᾿ς “yunning to him ;” προστρέχοντες. As “to” is the equiva lent of πρὸς, it should not be italicized. See ch. 3 : 13, note. 60 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IX. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 16 And he asked the scribes, What question ye with them? 17 And one of the multitude answered and said, Master, I have brought unto thee my son, which hath a dumb spirit ; 18 And wheresoever he taketh him, he teareth him; and he foameth and gnasheth with his teeth, and pineth away; and I spake to thy disciples that they should cast him out, and they could not. 19 He answereth him, and saith, O faithless generation, how long shall I be with you? how long shall I suffer you? Bring him unto me. 20 And they brought him unto him: and when he saw him, straightway the spirit tare him; and he fell on the ground, and wallowed, foaming. 21 And he asked his father, How long is it ago since this came GREEK TEXT. ΤᾺΝ Νὴ 16 Ν > ΄ Ν auTov. και ἐπρωΤησε TOVS to o Ν γραμματεῖς, Ti συζητεῖτε πρὸς » ΄ ve Ν » Ν e αὐτούς; Kai ἀποκριθεὶς εἷς ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, εἶπε, Ζιδάσκαλε, ἤνεγκα τὸν υἱὸν μου πρός σε, ἔχοντα πνεῦμα ἄλαλον. ὃ καὶ “ x wa ΄ gp GTiOU ACU EUTOY, καταλάβῃ, ρήσσει 2 / αὐτόν" al ἀφρίζει, καὶ τρίζει τοὺς 3} τὸ αὐτοῦ, καὶ Enpaive- ται" καὶ εἶπον τοῖς μαθηταῖς σου “ pass 3 ΄’ὔ Ν ’ 3) ἵνα αὑτὸ ἐκβάλωσι, καὶ οὐκ ἰσχυ- cav. ΤΟ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ, / λέγει, Ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος, ἕως / Ἐ πότε. πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι; ἕως / ϑυ « fal / 3 πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν; φέρετε αὐ- δ ὔ 0 ΟΝ “ τὸν πρὸς με. Kai ἤνεγκαν ταίρι Ν Saat Ἂς 99h > αὐτὸν πρὸς αὑτὸν" καὶ ἰδὼν av- Ν ᾽ ΄ Ν col / TOV, εὐθέως TO πνεῦμα ἐσπάραξεν » / Ν ΄σ - αὐτὸν: καὶ πεσὼν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, 9 ἐκυλίετο ἀφρίζων. Ἵ Kat ἐπη- ρώτησε, τὸν πατέρα, αὐτοῦ, “Πό- REVISED VERSION. saluted him. And he asked the scribes, What ‘are ye ques- tioning with them? And one of the crowd answered and said, «Teacher, I have brought to thee my son, who hath a dumb spirit; and wherever he taketh him, he 'dasheth him down, and he foameth and ™grindeth his teeth, and pineth away; and 1 spoke to thy disciples "to cast him out, and they could not. And he answereth °to them, and saith, O Punbelieving genera- tion, how long shall I be with you? how long sshall I bear with you? Bring him to me. And they brought him to him; and when he saw him, immedi- ately the spirit "convulsed him ; and he fell on the ground, and ‘rolled, foaming. And he asked 16 17 unto him? And he said, Of a child. 9. an yovey αὐτῷ; aos Xpovos ἐστὶν, ὡς τοῦτο ye Ὃ δὲ εἶπε, Har- his father, How long tis it since this "came on him? And he } “are ye questioning ;” συζητεῖτε. Thomson. Present con- tinued action is represented here. Hence this rendering, which is agreeable to our idiom. Compare συζητοῦντας, v.14. Walkef. has also used the “ progressive form” here, “ What are ye disput- Dick., “ What are you contending ?” k “Teacher ;” “Ζιδάσκαλε. Wakef., Thom., Pechy, Kendrick, Dick. De Wette, “ Lehrer ;” S. Fr., “ Docteur.” See ch. 4 : 38, note. 1 “dasheth him down ;” ῥήσσει. Thomson, Kend., “ dasheth him to the ground ;” Campbell, “dashes him on the ground ;” Rob., “to dash to the ground ;” Vulg., “allidit eum ;” Iber., “Je tira al suelo ;” De Wette, “ wirft er ihn nieder.” Huthymius (quoted by Fritzsche), τὸ μὲν οὖν δήσσει arti τοῦ καταβάλλει εἰς γῆν. Bloomf. (N.T.), “ The true sense is that of the ancient versions and commentators, and most modern ones, ‘dashes him on the ground.’ ” ing?” m “osrindeth ;” τρίζει. Thom., Dickinson, Bloomf. (N. T), Campbell, “ grinding.” ΒΒρύχω is the proper word for “ gnash,” and is rendered “ gnash”’ in all cases, in the N.T. Any one, who has witnessed the symptoms of spasm, will see the correctness of “ prindeth.” » “to cast him out;” ἕνα αὐτὸ ἐκβάλωσι. ‘The infinitive con- struction is usually the best rendering of the subjunctive with wa. It is more concise and familiar in our language. So Wes- ley, Wakef., Thom., Dick., Camp. S. Fr., “ de—chasser.” ° “to them.” Instead of αὐτῷ (Text. Recept.), Griesbach, Scholz, Knapp, Lach., Tittmann, Tisch., Rob. (Harmony), have This is the reading followed by the Vulg. It is probably It is adopted by Wesley, Pechy, Sharpe. P “unbelieving ;” ἄπιστος. Sharpe, Newcome, Pechy, Camp- bell. Iber., “sin fé;” De Wette, “ unglaubiges ;” Belg., “ on- geloovig.” “ Faithless” is ambiguous, as it ππθῦς destitute of fidelity, as well as destitute of faith. 4 “shall I bear with you?” ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν; Rob. (ὧν loco, ἀνέχω.) 3 αὑτοῖς. the true one. Kend., Pechy, τ “ conyulsed ;” ἐσπάραξεν. See ch. 1 : 26, note. 5 “rolled ;” ἐκυλέετο. Kend., Campbell, Wakef., Dick. De Wette, “ walzete sich ;” Belg., “ weltende zich;” S. Fr., “il se roulait ;” Vulg., “ volutabatur ;” Beza, “ volutabat,” ete.; Rob., “to roll oneself (in Mid.) ;” Bretsch., “ Medium; volvo me.” In present usage, “ to wallow” signifies to roll in something liquid. So (E. V.) 2 Sam. 20:12. 2 Pet. 2 : 22. t “ago” (of the E. V.) is superfluous. It is omitted by Wes- ley, Wakef., Camp., Dick., Thom. It was first employed by Tyndale. « “came on him;” “On” is substituted for Sais γέγονεν αὐτῷ. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IX. 61 KING JAMES’ VERSION. GREEK TEXT. REVISED VERSION. 22 And oft-times it hath cast) διόύθεν. 7% καὶ πολλάκις avrov|said, From childhood. And 22 him into the fire, and into the waters to destroy him: but if thou canst do any thing, have compas- sion on us, and help us. 23 Jesus said unto him, If thou canst believe, all things are pos- sible to him that believeth. 24 And straightway the father of the child cried out, and said with tears, Lord, I believe; help thou mine unbelief. 25 When Jesus saw that the people came running together, he rebuked the foul spirit, saying unto him, Thou dumb and deaf spirit, I charge thee, come out of him, and enter no more into him. 26 And the spirit cried, and rent him sore, and came out of him: and he was as one dead; \ ᾿ - yy, XN > [τς καὶ εἰς πῦρ ἐβαλε καὶ εἰς ὕδατα, “ > ΄ Df > > ” iva ἀπολέσῃ avtov: ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τι / , « Lal δύνασαι, βοήθησον ἡμῖν, σπλαγ- χνισθεὶς ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς. “5 Ὃ δὲ ᾽7η- = 5 Ses \ > , gous εἶπεν αὐτῷ, To, εἰ δύνασαι ~ ΄ \ om πιστεῦσαι, πάντα δυνατὰ TO πι- ΄ 24 aN »Δ4΄’ OTEVOVTL. Kai εὐθέως κράξας « \ col , ὁ πατὴρ τοῦ παιδίου, μετὰ δα- / wy. / σ΄ κρύων ἔλεγε, Πιστεύω, Κύριε, ΄ ΚΕ) ΄ 25 > \ Bonde μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ. ͵δων \ c > a A > de ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς ὅτι ἐπισυντρέχει oA > / ΄σ ὄχλος, ἐπετίμησε τῷ πνεύματι oN 2 ΄ 3, cad τῷ ἀκαθάρθῳ, λέγων αὐτῷ, To 7 Ν Ε Ν ἢ Ν πνεῦμα τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ κωφὸν, » ’ὔ ’ 4 ~ ’ ἐγώ σοι ἐπιτάσσω, ἔξελθε ἐξ > ~ , ’ > αὐτοῦ, Kat μηκέτι εἰσέλθῃς εἰς sein Sin ee ΄ αὐτὸν. *° Καὶ κράξαν, καὶ πολ- Ν ’ Ἂ lol ha σπαράξαν. αὐτὸν, ἐξῆλθε: often “he hath cast him *into fire and into waters to destroy him; but if thou canst do any thing, have compassion on us, and help us. »And Jesus said to him, If thou canst believe— all things are possible for him who believeth. And *immedi- ately the father of the child cried out, and said, with tears, Lord, I believe; help ** mine unbe- lief. When Jesus saw that cthe crowd “was running toge- ther, he rebuked the ‘unclean spirit saying to him, ‘Dumb and deaf spirit, 1 command thee, come out of him, and enter into him "no more. And the spirit ‘eried out, and Jeonvulsed him xviolently, and came out of him ; 24 “to” or “ unto,” in accordance with our usus loquendz. If “ to” is employed, the verb must be rendered “ happened.” I dislike this rendering, because “ happen” conyeys the thought that some- thing oceurred by chance. As an alternative rendering I suggest, “befell him.” So Campbell. S. Fr., “lui arrivé;” G. Fr., “ lui est arrivé.” y “from childhood ;” παεδεόϑεν. Rob., Kend., Thom., Pe- chy. Vulg., Mont., “ab infantia;” Iber., “ Desde la ninez ;” Belg., “ yan kindsheid af.” Heb. N. T., ἼΜΠΗ ΣΕ. ~ “he.” The pronoun is put in the masculine, as in γ. 18. In v. 28 we have αὐτὸν, which is properly rendered “ him” in the E. V. Although πνεῦμα, as to its grammatical form, is neuter, still, from its reference to a personal being, it should be treated as a masculine. ” x “into fire;” εἰς wie— into waters ;” εἰς ὕδατα. As these nouns are anarthrous, it is unnecessary to insert articles in Eng- lish. I am not satisfied that there is sufficient evidence for intro- ducing the article before zig, as has been done by Scholz. Gr., Titt., Lach., Theile, Tisch.—as Bagster. y “And ;” 24é. Castal., “ et ;” De Wette, “ und ;” Msp Ὁ 1.» * A dash is placed after “ believe ” (πεστεῦσαι), in conformity with the Greek text of Bloomfield. This is his note on the diffi- culty in this verse, which is produced by the article τὸ (εἶπεν “The only satisfactory solution of the difficulty is to suppose that after πεστεῦσαε is to be supplied, θοηϑήσω aoe, or ev ἔχει, q. d., my power to heal depends on thy power to believe.” * “for him who believeth ;” τῷ πιστεύοντι. Campbell. De Wette, “fiir den Glaubigen ;” S. Fr., “pour celui qui croit.” Sharpe. αὐτῷ, To) : Trollope (Analecta,) paraphrases this sentence, “ for the good of him that believeth.” This is a case of the datzvus commodi. > “immediately.” See ch. 1 : 10, note. bb See note f, for omission of “ thou.” ¢ “the crowd.” Although ὄχλος is anarthrous, yet its refer- ence to ὄχλον πολὺν, vy. 14, is obvious. Hence it is really def- inite. For the sake of greater exactness, the English article is italicized. 4 “was running together.” The English progressive form of the imperfect is adopted, as the most accurate rendering of ἐπες- S. Fr., “ accourait ;” Kend., “ came running.” So in all other cases in N. Τὶ, συντρέχει. © “unclean ;” ἀκαϑάρτῳ. except Rey. 18 : 2. f “Dumb and deaf spirit.” The supplementary “Thou” of the E. V. is superfluous. It is omitted by A. Camp. and Dick. No- thing equivalent to it is found in De Wette, S. Fr., Ital., Span., or Iber. The supplement was introduced by Tyndale, who fol- lowed Beza, “Tu spiritus mute et surde.” 5 «JT command ;” ἐγώ---ἐπιτάσσω. Wesley, Thom., Camp., Dick., Pechy. In eight of the ten instances, in which this word occurs in the N. T., it is translated by “ command” in the E. V. It should be so rendered in all cases. Bretsch., “ jubeo, mando ;” S. Fr., “ je—le commande ;” Iber., “ yo—mando.” h “no more.” This is the proper order in English. Wakef., Thom., Dick. τ « eried out ;” κράξαν. Pechy. See ch. 1 : 26, note. } “eonvulsed.” Camp., Thom. See ch. 1 : 26, note. k “violently ;” πολλὰ. Kend., Dick. “ Violently” is often equivalent to “ vehemently.” See Webster. 62 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IX. KING JAMES’ VERSION. insomuch that many said, He is dead. 21 But Jesus took him by the| 27 hand, and lifted him up; and he arose. 28 And when he was come into the house, his disciples asked him privately, Why could not we cast him out? 29 And he said unto them, This kind can come forth by nothing, but by prayer and fasting. 30 And they departed thence, and passed through Galilee; and he would not that any man should know if. 31 For he taught his disciples, and said unto them, The Son of “1 man is delivered into the hands of men, and they shall kill him; and after that he is killed, he shall rise the third day. 32 But they understood that saying, ask him. 33 And he came to Capernaum: and being in the house, he asked them, What was it that ye dis- puted among yourselves by the way? 34 But they held their peace: for by the way they had disputed not and were afraid to GREEK TEXT. Ν ΒΜ, ε Ν Ν a καὶ ἐγένετο ὡσεὶ νεκρὸς, ὥστε \ ip σ΄ » 4 πολλοὺς λέγειν ὅτι ἀπέθανεν. na / XN ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς κρατήσας αὐτὸν oe NY 7 > / τῆς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν: καὶ / ἀνέστῃ. : 5. Καὶ εἰσελθόντα αὐτὸν εἰς οἶκον, οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπηρώ- Ἂν ὦ “ ΄σ των αὐτὸν Kar ἰδίαν, “Ore ἡμεῖς > 5 y 3 U ’ / οὐκ ἠδυνήθημεν ἐκβάλειν αὐτο; 9 = 5 a a \ 9. Kai εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Τοῦτο ro 3 vA ΄σ γένος -ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν, > \ a εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ. 2 x a , °° KALI ἐκεῖθεν ἐξελθόντες 7 ἊΝ fal παρεπορεύοντο διὰ τῆς L'adtAat- ας" καὶ οὐκ ἤθελεν ἵνα τὶς γνῷ. 5.7 N \ \ ἐδίδασκε yap τοὺς μαθητὰς G “- νν » tad 7 « αὑτοῦ, καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς, Ort ὁ eX fol 7 υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται Co / 5 εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ἀπο- καὶ ἀποκταν- Ν Lal / e / » / θεὶς, τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἀναστήσε- 32 . \ » ,ὔ Ν en ται. Οἱ δὲ ἡγνόουν τὸ ῥῆμα, ΄σ » Ν col Kal ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτὸν ἐπερωτῆσαι. 33 Kat Bev εἰς Καπερναούμ: καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ γενόμενος, em ρώτα αὐτοὺς, Ti ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ πρὸς ἊΝ ε \ ἑαυτοὺς διελογίζεσθε; ** Οἱ δὲ A > / \ πρὸς αλληλους yap ΄σ > i, κτενουσιν αὐὑτον" » ΄ E€OLWTT WY" REVISED VERSION. and the became like one dead ; "so that many said, He is dead. But Jesus took him by the hand, and lifted him up; and he rose. And ewhen he came Pinto a house, his disciples asked him privately, Why could we not cast him out? And he said to them, This kind can come forth by nothing, ‘except by prayer and fasting. And they departed thence and passed through Ga- lilee ; and the did not wish that any one should know 7. For he taught his disciples and said to them, The Son of man "15 de- livered up into the hands of men, and they ‘will put him to death; and after he hath been put to death, he will rise the third day. But they sdid not understand ythe saying, and were afraid to ask him. And he came to Capernaum; and being in the house, he asked them, What did ye dispute about among yourselves by the way? But they *were silent, for they had disputed among them- 28 29 31 32 33 1 “he became ;” ἐγένετο. Sharpe, Ke “devint ;” Belg., “ wierd ;” Vulg., est. m “like ;” woe. Thom., Dick. quently employed in constructions of this kind than “ as.” principle of ewphony has led to its adoption. as one of the definitions of this particle. n “so that;” wore. Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, Rob. ° “when he came;” εἰσελϑόντα «αὐτὸ» ch. 6:22. Matt.22:11. Luke 1 : 28; P “into a house ;” εἰς οἶκον. Thom., Sharpe. Κ΄. Fr., 4 “except ;” εἰ a7. Dick. See ch. 5 τ “he did not wish;” od ἤϑελεν. Bretsch. (in verbo), cupio.” The verb Kendrick. Mont., Eras., Beza, “ factus “ Like” is much more fre- Wesley, Pechy, Wakef., Dick., “ dans une maison.” ndrick, Pechy. S. Fr., The Liddell gives “like” Kend., Pechy, Thom.,| * “ the saying.” ». Kend. 8: 51, ete. So (E. V.) : 37, of this Revision. Sharpe. Rob. (ϑέλω.) is rendered “ wish” by See ch. 3 : 4, note. κ΄ “is delivered up ;” t “will put—to death.” Thom. is substituted for “shall,” because this is not the language of determination, but of prediction. Wesley, Wakef., Dick., Sharpe, Thom., Camp. « τ did not understand.” Sharpe, Pechy, Wesley, “the word.” The article, when emphatic, may for the sake of persprcuzty be occa- sionally rendered by a demonstrative ; it is not so here, however, and should have its usual equivalent in translation. w “What did ye dispute about?” ΖΤέ --διεελογίξεσϑε. structions like this, our verb “ dispute” preposition is necessary before the objective case. tion is used by Kend., Pechy, Thom., Wakef. Pechy, Camp., Kendrick, Dien. x “were silent ;” ἐσιώπων». See ch. 1 : 14, note. παραδίδοται. See ch. 8 : 31, note. This is the natural order. Walle “Will” is used by Kendrick, In con- is intransitive, hence, a The preposi- THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. ΙΧ. 63 KING JAMES’ VERSION. among themselves, who ‘should be the greatest. 35 And he sat down, and called the twelve, and saith unto them, If any man desire to be first, the same shall be last of all, and ser- yant of all. 36 And he took a child, and set him in the midst of them: and when he had taken him in his arms, he said unto them, 37 Whosoever shall receive one of such children in my naine, receiveth me: and whosoever shall receive me, receiveth not me, but him that sent me. 388 And John answered him, saying, Master, we saw one cast- ing out devils in thy name, and he followeth not us; and we forbade him, because he followeth not us. 39 But Jesus said, Forbid him not: for there is no man which shall do a miracle in my name, that can lightly speak evil of me. GREEK TEXT. / 3 cal « fal , , διελέχθησαν ἐν TH ὁδῷ, Tis μεί- 35, 18 , 2p Cov. kat καθίσας ἐφώνησε Ν , Ν ia » va) τοὺς δώδεκα, Kat λέγει αὐτοῖς, δ / a 53 yx Ei τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται , y Ν ΄ ΄ πάντων ἔσχατος; καὶ πάντων διά- 5 Ν Ν , κονος. ἢ Kat λαβὼν παιδίον, y Oks 3 / » n ἔστησεν αὐτὸ ἐν. μέσῳ αὐτῶν" 7 SN 53 καὶ ἐναγκαλισάμενος αὐτὸ, εἶπεν > > 37 ἃ ᾽ν A fel / αὐτοῖς, Os ἐὰν ἕν τῶν τοιού- 2 , SEX: eS, , Tov παιδίων δέξηται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνό- ΄ > \ ΄ ἃ ματί μου, ἐμὲ δέχεται: καὶ ὃς aN ’ \ t fe » 3 \ ’ ἐὰν ἐμὲ δέξηται, οὐκ ἐμε δέχεται, > Ν Ν » , / ἄλλα τον ἀποστείλαντα με. 3 ΄ \ SE ees ΄ 38° 4πεκρίθη δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ϊ]ωάν- , ΄ , 4 uns, λέγων, Διδάσκαλε, εἴδομέν tal > / / ua fi, τινα τῷ ὀνοματί σου ἐκβάλλοντα / a ’ > eh ex δαιμόνια, ὃς οὐκ ἀκολουθεῖ ἡμῖν: 3 , > ἊΝ 7 > καὶ ἐκωλύσαμεν αὐτὸν, OTL οὐκ -“ « 5 € \ > ἀκολουθεῖ ἡμῖν. ὁ Ὃ δὲ ᾿7η- - ” 7 \ ΄ my 2 gous etme, My κωλύετε αὐτον" > \ ΄’ὔ ᾽ A Ἁ , οὐδεὶς yap ἐστιν ὃς ποιήσει δύ- 3 La > / Ud Ν ναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, καὶ , ὃν “ 7) δυνήσεται ταχὺ κακολογῆσαί με. REVISED VERSION. selves, by the way, who would be *greatest. And he sat down, 35 and called the twelve, and saith to them, If zany one *de- sireth to be first, "Re «will be last of all, and servant of all. And he took ‘a little child, and set ‘it in the midst of them; and when he had taken ‘it in his arms, he saith to them, Who- ever shall receive one of such ‘little children in my name, re- ceiveth me: and whoever re- ceiveth me, receiveth not me, but him, who sent me. And John answered him, saying, "Teacher, we saw one casting out ‘demons in thy name, who doth not follow ‘us, and we for- bade him, ‘because he doth not follow us. But Jesus said, For- bid him not: for there is ‘no one, who ™will do a miracle in my name, "and °be able Preadi- ly to speak evil of me. For he 40 36 37 38 39 y “greatest ;” μεέξων. As the adjective is anarthrous, the English adjective should correspond with it, especially as the omission of the article does not violate our idiom. So the article is omitted in y. 35 in the E. V. (as well as in the text) before “first” (πρῶτος), “last” (ἔσχατος), and “ seryant” (διάκονος). The article is not used by Wakef., Thom., Camp. * “any one;” zs. Kend., Sharpe, Wakef. « “desireth ;” ϑέλει. In the present tense, where the sentence is conditional, the indicative form of the verb is appropriate, as it is in Greek. The usage of our language in the present age may be regarded as settled in favor of this. See ch. 3 : 24, note. “Desireth” is one of the definitions of ϑέλω. See Rob. > “he.” This is the proper nominative. Kendrick, Pechy, Camp. : ¢ “will be;” ἔσται. Sharpe. See vy. 31, note. a “4 little child ;” παεδίον. Wesley, Pechy, Wakef., Thom., Dick., Rob. So (E. V.) Matt.18:2; 19:13. Mark 10:15. Beza, “ Puerulum ;” S. Fr., “un petit enfant.” ὁ “it;” αὐτὸς Kend., Pechy. Our idiom agrees with that of the Greek here. We speak of a child, when the sex is un- known, as neuter. 4 Orie © “Jittle children.” See note d on this verse. See last note. See ch. 4 : 38, note. See ch. 1 : 34, note. ? h “Teacher.” τ « demons.” } “who doth not follow us ;’ This arrangement, with the insertion of “doth,” gives the rendering accuracy, while the language is in harmony with our usus loquen- di. Thom., “who doth not accompany us;” 8S. Fr., “ qui ne nous suit pas ;” Iber., “el cual no nos sigue ;” De Wette, “ der uns nicht folget.” ὃς οὐκ ἀκολουϑεῖ ἡμῖν. k “because he doth not follow us.” See last note. Pechy, Kend., Wesley, Wakef. Sce 1 “no one;” οὐϑ εἰς. ch..2 : 21, note. m “will do ;” ποιήσει. Although the force of this indie. fut. - approaches nearly to that of a subjunctive, still, as the ordinary rendering is the most simple, and affords a good sense, it is pre- ferred. So Wakef. » “and ;” zat. Sharpe, Wakef. Vulg., Beza, “et;” S. Fr., “et;” De Wette, “ und.” ° “be able;” δυνήσεται. Thomson. S. Fr., “ qui puisse ;” Ther., “ que pueda ;” Beza, “et possit.” So Vulg., Mont. De Wette, “ und—kann.” P “readily ;” ταχὺ. Wesley, Campbell, Wakef., Rob. As an alternative rendering, “ quickly.” So Vulg., Erasmus, Beza, “cito;” Iber., “luego ;” S. Fr., “ aussitét.” 64 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 40 For he that is not against us, is on our part. 41 For whosoever shall give you a cup of water to drink in my name, because ye belong to Christ, verily I say unto you, he shall not lose his reward. 42 And whosoever shall offend one of these little ones that believe in me, it is better for him that a millstone were hanged about his neck, and he were cast into the sea. 43 And if thy hand offend thee, cut it off: it is better for thee to enter into life maimed, than hav- ing two hands to go into hell, into the fire that never shall be quenched : 44 Where their worm dieth not, and the fire is not quenched. 45 And if thy foot offend thee, GREEK TEXT. 4y ἃ \ > ὟΣ 5. are ΩΝ ὃς γὰρ οὐκ ἔστι καθ᾽ ὑμῶν, δ c fot aA x a ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐστιν. “| ὃς yap ἂν a , ΄“ » ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ποτήριον ὕδατος ἐν lol > if / “ les τῷ ὀνόματί μου, OTL Χριστοῦ ob be \ τ 2 rae ρ > ἊΝ ἐστε, ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ μὴ Ν « ΄σ ἀπολέσῃ μισθὸν αὑτοῦ. 42) ἼΣΩΝ ἃ x , “ Kai ὃς ἂν σκανδαλίσῃ ἕνα n a “ , τῶν μικρῶν τῶν πιστευόντων εἰς λῆς / » 2 -“ cot ἐμὲ, καλὸν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον, > / SA εἰ περίκειται λίθος μυλικὸς περὶ ‘\ ’ > ΄ Ν , Tov τράχηλον αὐτοῦ, Kat βεβλη- > ἣν ’ὔ . ται εἰς THY θάλασσαν. * Kai aN / e , ἐὰν σκανδαλίζῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου, > / > , , 5 τ ἀπόκοψον αὐτὴν" καλον σοι ἐστὶ Ν ’ \ \ 5 κυλλὸν εἰς THY ζωὴν εἰσελθεῖν, ΕΝ \ ΄ a 7 » s ἢ τὰς δύο χεῖρας ἔχοντα ἀπελ- a > \ / Ν a θεῖν εἰς τὴν γέενναν, εἰς TO πῦρ Ν ΕΣ 44 “ ε OX. To ἄσβεστον, ~~ ὅπου 0 σκῶ ηξ > ΄ > Lal Ν “ » αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ, καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ 5 aN ΄σ σβέννυται. “ἢ καὶ ἐὰν ὃ ποῦς [2 σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἀπόκοψον \ TOV THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. IX. REVISED VERSION. who is not ‘against us, is for us. For whoever shall give you a cup of water to drink in my name, because ye belong to Christ, ‘truly I say to you, he shall by no means lose his re- ward. And whoever ‘shall cause one "of the little ones, who believe in me, to sin, ‘it would be better for him wif a millstone *should be hung about his neck, and he *should be cast into the sea. And if thy hand 43 ‘shall cause thee to sin, cut it off: it is better for thee to enter into life maimed, than having two hands *to go away into hell, ‘into the unquenchable fire; where their worm dieth not, 44 and the fire is not quenched. And if thy, foot scauseth thee 45 42 4 “against us, is for us;” ΤῸ ΚΕΡῚ ΩΣ Ἐς ΟΥΤΩΣ > καϑ' υὉμῶν, στυσπερ υκῶν é0TL). note. understand it as equivalent to “ making angry.” See ch. 4 : 17, With this reading of the Text. Recept., agree the Editions of | Wilson, Montanus, and Mill (in the Polymicrian Gr. Test.) But Erasmus, Bloomf., Rob. (Harmony), read za ἡκῶν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστε. Griesb., Scholz, Knapp, and Lachm. agree with Bagster, while Fritzsche, Tittmann are with Erasmus. The Vulg., Mont. (Latin), Beza, and Castalio have “nos—nobis.” Tyndale, “ Who- soever is not against you, is on your part.” Cranmer and Geneva as KH. V. S. Fr., “nous—nous ;” Jber., “ contra vosotros—a fa- for vosotros es;” De Wette, “ wider uns ist, der ist fir uns.” Amidst the difficulties which this passage presents, I deem it best to retain the rendering of the E. V., and to place this note in the margin, “or, according to some Editions of the text, against you, is for you.” r “truly.” See ch. 3 : 28, note. * “by no means;” οὐ μὴ. Rob. So (E. V.) Matt. ὃ : 26. This double negative is intensitive. The E. V. often renders it by “in no wise.” So in parallel, Matt. 10 : 42. Beza, “ nequa- quam.” ᾽ t “shall cause—to sin;” σκανδαλίσῃ. Sharpe, “ make—to sin;” Wakef., “ shall lead into sin.” Σκχανδαλίξζω sometimes has the force of the Hiphil conj. in Hebrew. Thus Rob., “ causative, to cause to offend, to lead astray, to lead into sin.” Bretsch. “ [di- citur] de iis, per quos, aliquo modo accidit, ut alter judicando erret agendove peccet.” If a literal rendering is deemed prefera- ble, we might say, “shall cause—to stumble.” So Thom. In the case before us, “offend” misleads common readers, who « “of the little ones ;” τῶν μικρῶν. Wesley, Pechy, Camp. S. Fr., “des petits;” Iber., “de los pequenuelos;” De Wette, “der Kleinen.” ¥ “it would be better ;” καλόν zorw. From the force of the conditional σκανδαλίσῃ at the commencement of the sentence, it is necessary to render égovev in a conditional form. “ Would be” is now the -usual phrase instead of “were.” Beza, “ bonum esset ;” Eras., “ melius foret ;” S. Fr., “ il serait mieux.” w “if et Wakel, eechy. De Wetter senna aeviules Eras.. Beza, “ si.” = “should be hung about ;” περίκειται. Beza, “si circum- poneretur ;” Eras., “ si circundaretur.” ~ See last note. y “should be cast ;” βέβληται. “ abjiceretur ;” Beza, “ projiceretur.” z «shall cause thee to sin»” σκανδαλίζῃ. See notes, chs. 4:17; 9 : 35,42. The subj. has future signification here. 2 “to go away;” ἀπελθεῖν. Rob. (ἀπέρχομιαι.) Dick., “ to depart.” So (E. V.) Matt. 8:31; 19:22. In Matt. 25 : 46, we haye, “ these shall go away (ἀπελεύσονται) into everlasting punishment.” Compare Matt. 25 : 41, “ Depart from me (Πορεύ- εσϑὲ ἀπὶ ἐμοῦ) into the everlasting fire,” ete. > “into the unquenchable fire;” εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἄσβεστον. Rob., Sharpe, Pechy, Camp. S. Fr. “ dans le feu inextingible ;” De Wette, “in das unausloschliche Feuer.” © “causeth thee to sin.” See vy. 42, note. Vulg., “ mitteretur ;” Eras., See note v on this verse. ‘ The indicative form THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. X. KING JAMES’ VERSION. cut it off: it is better for thee to enter halt into life, than having two feet to be cast into hell, into the fire that never shall be quench- ed: 46 Where their worm dieth not, and the fire is not quenched. 47 And if thine eye offend thee, pluck it out: it is better for thee to enter into the kingdom of God with one eye, than having two eyes, to be cast into hell-fire: 48 Where their worm dieth not, and the fire is not quenched. 49 For every one shall be salt- ed with fire,.and every sacrifice shall be salted with salt. 50 Salt 2s good: but if the salt have lost his saltness, wherewith will ye season it? Have salt in yourselves, and have peace one with another. CHAP. X. Awnp he arose from thence, and cometh into the coasts of Judea, by the farther side of Jordan: and the people resort unto him again; is now used where a verb, which is conditional, is in the present tense. See chs. 3 : 24, and 9 : 35, notes. 4 “the unquenchable fire.” © “causeth thee to sin.” “into the Gehenna of fire.” 4 « oy » 2 Syriac, 13.5.19 = -Ξ. ia See y. 43, note Ὁ. See v. 42, note. f “into hellfire ;” εἰς τὴν γέενναν τοῦ πυρὸς. S. Fr., “dans la gehenna du feu ;” As the genitive is often used in place GREEK TEXT. > , , 3 , > ΄ αὐτον: καλον ἐστί σοι εἰσελθεῖν > Ν Ν ἊΣ ΕΣ ‘ , εἰς THY ζωὴν χωλὸν, ἢ τοὺς δύο / yy > > \ πόδας ἔχοντα βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Ν cal Xx ΒΩ γέενναν, εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἄσβεστον, 40 7 € s » τ δὲ ᾽ ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τε- ΄ Ν a > , λευτᾷ, καὶ TO πῦρ ov σβέννυται. 47 < aN Ce! ΄ καὶ ἐαν ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς σου σκαν- », , ,ὔ δαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτὸν: καλόν / , ΄σ σοι ἐστὲ μονοφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν > Ἂ, 7 - D ~ ΩΣ εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ΄ Ν “ “ δύο ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντα βληθῆναι Ν , a Ν 48 7 εἰς τὴν γέενναν τοῦ πυρὸς, ** ὕπου ε 7, Chain? > an ne ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ, Kal Ν ΄“ ’ ΄ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται. “ Πᾶς Ν / a yap πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται, καὶ πᾶσα 7 > ιν Ψ 5 ἂν θυσία adi ἁλισθήσεται. °° καλὸν ν “ 5" \ Ν a 3 το ἅλας: ἐὰν δε τὸ ἅλας ἀναλον , \ / γένηται, ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε; Br Wises: 5 ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλας, Kal εἰρη- / i vevete ἐν ἀλλήλοις. CHAP. X. = . \ » KAKEIOEN ἀναστὰς ἔρ- ‘ σ co > ΄ χεται εἰς τὰ ὕρια τῆς Lovdaias, Ν > ~ ’ / διὰ τοῦ πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ϊορδάνου" Ψ / + καὶ συμπορεύονται πάλιν ὄχλοι REVISED VERSION. to sin, cut it off; it is better for thee to enter into life lame, than having two feet to be cast. into hell, into ‘the unqvenchable fire: where their worm dieth not, and the fire is not quenched. And if thine eye ‘causeth thee to sin, pluck it out: it is better for thee to enter into the king- dom of God, with one eye, than having two eyes, to be cast ‘into hell fire: where their worm dieth not, and the fire is not quenched. For every one shall be salted with fire, and every sacrifice shall be salted withsalt. Salt is good: butif the salt ®becometh "tasteless, ‘how will ye ‘‘restore its saltness? Have salt in yourselves, and !be at peace with “one another. CHAP. X. Anp he ‘rose from thence, and cometh into >the borders of Judea, through ‘the region beyond the Jordan: and ‘the crowd ‘come together to him Literally, | | peace ? « “ one another τ᾿ it “ restore—saltness ;” ἀρτύσετε. | does not give the thought, which is that of restoring that quality | (saltness), which had been lost. } “he at peace ;” εἰρηνεύετε. Wakef., Sharpe, Rob. S. Fr., |“soyez en paix;” De Wette, “seid friedfertic.” ” is a common phrase in the ΕἸ. V., Job ὃ : 28; 22: PS. δ. τ 20.5 rove. Gre ἢ: ἀλλήλοις. “To be Rob. So often in EB. V. 46 48 50 “ Season,” though literal, at 21. of an adjective, it will in this place qualify γέενναν, so that the sentence may be rendered, “ into the fiery Gehenna ;” or, if we render yéevvav by “ hell ”—* into the fiery hell.” So De Wette, “Feuer-Holle.” These renderings are suggested for consideration. Ε΄ “becometh ;” γένηται. Campbell, Dick., Thomson, Pechy. 8. Fr., “ devenait ;” Montanus, Castalio, “fiat ;” Belg., “ zout— wordt.” For the use of the Eng. indicative here, see chs. 3 : 24, and 9 : 35, notes. h “tasteless ;” ἄναλον. Rob.,“ insipid.” Dick., Camp., Thom. 8. Fr., “ insipide ;” Bretsch., “ tropice, insipidus, fatuus.” i “how;” ἐν civ. Dick. “ Wherewith” is now restricted to legal phraseology. As an alternative rendering, “ with what.” So Thom. This orthography is adopted, as most common. See ch. 5 : 17, note. ¢ “the region ;” διὰ τοῦ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου. Pechy, Wes- ley, “ the country ;” Campbell, “ through the country upon the Jordan ;” Eras., “ per regionem que est ultra Jordanem ;” Beza, “per oram Jordanis ;” Castalio, “per transjordaninum agrum.” Robinson (πέραν), “ with neuter article τὸ, that beyond, i. e., the region beyond.” So Mark 10 : 1 of this Revision. 4 “the crowds.” See ch.2:4, note. WVulg., Eras., “ turba ;” Castal., “ vulgus hominum.” s ¢ “come together ;” συφστορεύονται. Wakef, Pechy, Rob. Vulg., Eras., “ conveniunt.” « “rose.” » “the borders ;” τὰ dgca. 66 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. X. KING JAMES’ VERSION. and, as he was wont, he taught them again. 2 And the Pharisees came to him, and asked him, Is it lawful for a man to put away his wife? tempting him. 3 And he answered and said unto them, What did Moses com- mand you? 4 And they said, Moses suffered to write a bill of divorcement, and to put her away. 5 And Jesus answered and said unto them, For the hardness of your heart he wrote you this pre- cept: 6 But from the beginning of the creation, God made them male “ and female. 7 For this cause shall a man leave his father and mother, and cleave to his wife ; 8 And they twain shall be one flesh: so then they are no more twain, but one flesh. 9 What, therefore, God hath joined together, let not man put asunder. 10 And in the house his dis- ciples asked him again of the same matter. 11 And he saith unto them, Whosoever shall put away his GREEK TEXT. NS SE wh Nes as ΄ πρὸς αὐτον" καὶ ws εἰώθει, πάλιν 2 / ἐδίδασκεν αὐτούς. 2 Kat mpoo- ΄ ε r / ελθοντες οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἐπηρωτη- ΕΝ > ἜΡ 3 Ν σαν αὐτὸν, εἰ ἔξεστιν ἀνδρὶ γυ- ΄- - 7 > vatka ἀπολῦσαι, πειράζοντες αὐ- / 8 ε ἥν. Ν S > Tov. “ ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν av- lal “ 3 a τοῖς, Ti ὑμῖν ἐνετείλατο Moons ; ΄ x 5 “ 3 i“ * Oi δὲ εἶπον, Μωσῆς ἐπέτρεψε / > PA “ τὴς βιβλίον ἀποστασίου γράψαι, καὶ ἀπολῦσαι. ὅ Καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ᾽ a a > a Ν \ Inaovs εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Προς τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν ἔγραψεν ὑμῖν τὴν ἐντολὴν ταύτην" δ ἀπὸ δὲ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, ἄρσεν καὶ θῆ- > , ᾽ Ν © , λυ ἐποίησεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Oeos. 1 a / ΄ y+ ἕνεκεν τούτου καταλείψει av- Ν ΄ὔ > fal θρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ \ if Ἂς / THY μητέρα: καὶ προσκολληθη- Ν δ > > - σεται πρὸς τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, 3, « , ΄ ὃ καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα σ ’ ’ , μίαν. ὥστε ovKETL εἰσὶ δύο, \ / A > Ν ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ. ὃ οὖν ὁ Θεὸς , ,΄ Ν συνέζευξεν, ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωρι- er 0 NT 2 o ey / ΄ ζέτω. Kat ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ πάλιν 6 3 Lal Lal > ~ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ ’ὔ ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτόν. 1 καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, Ος ἐὰν ἀπολύσῃ τὴν REVISED VERSION. again; and as he ‘was accus- tomed, he taught them again. And the Pharisees came to ®him, and asked him, Is it law- ful for a man to put away his wife? *trying him. And he answered and said to them, What did Moses command you? And they said, Moses ‘permitted jus to write a bill κοῦ divorce, and to put her away. And Jesus answered and said to them, For ‘your stubbornness of heart, he wrote you this "commandment: but from the beginning of "creation, God made them male and female. For this cause a man shall leave his father and his mother and cleaye to his wife; and *the two shall be one flesh: ?so that they are sno longer two, but one flesh. What therefore God hath joined together, let not man put asunder. And in the house, his disciples asked him again "concerning the same matter. And he saith to them, Whoever shall put away his f “was accustomed ;” εὐώϑει. Rob., Dick. ὦ To be wont” 10 horically, signifies contumacia, pervicax inobedientia, Bretsch. ; Ρ Y, SIS P ῃ is obsolete. » 5 “him.” The pronoun αὐτῷ is understood after προσελϑό»- τες. For the sake of exactness, “him,” its equivalent, is ztali- cized. Sce Matt. 4 :3,5:1,15:30; Mark 6 : 35, where αὐτῷ is expressed after the verb or participle. Pechy, Kendrick. See ch. 1 : 13, “trying ;” πειράζοντες. note. ' “permitted ;” ἐπέτρεψε. Pechy, Kend., Thom., “hath per- mitted.” Rob. Iberian, “ permitid.” So (E. V.) Acts 26:1. 1 Cor. 14 : 34. 1 “us.” Wakefield, Campbell. Every reader feels that the English sentence is incomplete without some word to express the object. This supplement is inserted exigentia loci. It corre- sponds with duz, in he preceding verse. * “ of divorce.” “ Divorcement” is obsolete. 1 “your stubbornness of heart ;” τὴ» oxdnooxapdiay ὑμῶν. Kend., Thom., “ your stubborn disposition.” Σκχληρότης, meta- and σκληροκαρδία, animi contumacia, Bretsch. Xxdnods has the metaphorical signification, harsh, obstinate. Liddell. “ Hardness of heart” is ambiguous. Campbell, “ your untractable disposi- tion ;” Thom., “ your stubborn disposition.” m “commandment ;” ἐντολὴν. Pechy. This word occurs seventy-one times in the N. T., and is rendered “ commandment ” in all instances, except the present and Heb. 9:19. “ Precept” originated in the preceptum of the Vulg., which was followed by Tyndale. “creation.” As ἀρχῆς is anarthrous, and our idiom corre- sponds with that of the Greek, in this construction; no article is necessary in the rendering. So Pechy. ° “the two;” of δύο. Sharpe, Pechy, Wakef. Fr., “les deux ;” Iber., “ los dos.” P “so that ;” wate. Rob., Kend., Wakef. 4 “no longer ;” οὐκέτι. Kend., Dick., Campbeli, Rob. So (E. V.) Gal. 3 : 25. τ “concerning ;” περὶ (cum genit.) Kend., Camp., Pechy. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.-—CHAP. X. 67 KING JAMES’ VERSION. wife, and marry another, com-| mitteth adultery against her. 12 And if a woman shall put away her husband, and be mar- ried to another, she committcth adultery. 13 And they brought young children to him, that he should touch them; and Ais disciples re- buked those that brought them. 14 But when Jesus saw ἐξ, he was much displeased, and said) unto them, Suffer the little chil- dren to come unto me, and forbid them not: for of such is the king- dom of God. 15 Verily I say unto you, Who- soever shall not receive the king- dom of God as a little child, he shall not enter therein. 16 And he took them up in his arms, put Ais hands upon them, and blessed them. 17 And when he was gone forth into the way, there came one running, and kneeled to him, and asked him, Good Master, what shall I do that I may inherit eternal life? 18 And Jesus said unto hin, Why callest thou me good? there is none good, but one, that is God: 5. “little children ;” παεδία. S. Fr., “de petits enfants.” Kend., Thom., Camp. = “ran up;” u «Truly.” See ch. 3 : 28. up.” v “like:" oe. See ch. 8 : 24. S. Fr., “ étant accouru.” w “by no means;” οὐ μὴ. See ch. 9:41. Beza, “ nequa- 2 : ” πρός, “ran to him.” quam. τ . ary ΄ . . b « = ” x “enter into it;” εἐσέλϑῃ εἰς αὐτήν. “Therein” is obsolete,| Ὁ kneeling ; unless in the language of jurisprudence. As an alternative ren- Dick., Thom. © “Teacher.” dering, “ enter it.” So Camp. DB? GREEK TEXT. ΄σ Ε ~ εν Ἃ 3, γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ καὶ γαμήσῃ ἀλ- ΄ > r Any, μοιχᾶται ἐπ᾽ αὐτήν: ™ καὶ 2X Ν > ys Ν ΄ > ἐὰν γυνὴ ἀπολύσῃ τὸν ἄνδρα av- ΄ cal JA ΄ τῆς καὶ γαμηθῇ ἄλλῳ, μοιχᾶται. 19 Καὶ 4 Mises αἱ προσέφερον αὐτῷ παι- a ΄ Ω δία, ἵνα ἅψηται αὐτῶν: οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ ἐπετίμων τοῖς προσφέ- A \ c ᾽ ΄ ρουσιν. 1 ἰδὼν δὲ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς » 2 3 ΄- ἠγανάκτησε, καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, “Agere τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά: τῶν "γὰρ τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία a - 5 > \ ΄ τοῦ Θεοῦ: © ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, a 2 ἣν id ἊΝ γ ὃς ἐὰν μὴ δέξηται τὴν βασιλείαν a a ε ᾽ Ν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὡς παιδίον, οὐ μὴ > Α » 5 eR ὁ 6 No ΤΑ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτὴν. Kai ἐναγ- Ν ΄σ καλισάμενος avTa, τιθεὶς τὰς χεῖ- ϑ Ὁ Ν / pas ἐπ᾽ αὐτὰ, ηὐλόγει αὐτά. 17 Ki Ν ᾿ fe ’ a αἱ ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ ens κ᾿ - εἰς ὁδον, προσδραμὼν εἷς καὶ / BIN fal γονυπετήσας αὐτὸν ἐπηρῶτα av- Ἂν ΄ \ tov, Ζιδάσκαλε ἀγαθὲ, τί ποιή- “ \ ΄ σω ἵνα ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομή- ey A 8 ΄ Ὁ aw; 1 Ὃ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν αὐ- cal , ,ὔ ᾽ / τῷ, Ti pe λέγεις ἀγαθόν; οὐδεὶς 19 Pechy, Wakef., Rob. See ch. 9 : 36, note. t “that he might touch ;" fa ἅψηται. > ᾿ς > Natit =e U Ν ἀγαθος, εἰ μὴ εἷς; ὁ Θεὸς. τας So v.14. “comme il sortait.” Wesley, Wakefield, προσδραμὼν. So Rob. (in loco), προστρέχω. yovumetnaas. REVISED VERSION. wife, and marry another, com- mitteth adultery against her. And if a woman shall put away her husband, and be married to another, she committeth adultery. And they brought ‘little children to him, tthat he might touch them; and his dis- ciples rebuked those who brought them. But when Jesus saw it, he was much displeased, and said to them, Suffer the little children to come to me, and forbid them not: for of such is the kingdom of God. “Truly I say to you, Whoever shall not receive the kingdom of God, ‘like a little child, he will “by no means *enter into it. And he »took them in his arms, put Ais hands on them, and blessed them. And ‘as he was going forth into the way, one ‘ran up, and *kneeling to him, asked him, Good “Teacher, what shall I do ‘to inherit eternal life? And Jesus said to him, Why callest thou me good? eno one is good, ‘except Sone, that is God. Thou know- 19 μ᾿ 3 responds exactly with this rendering) is employed in the 8. Fr., Wesley, “as he was going out ;” Wakef., “as he was going forward.” Kend., Wakef., Sharpe, “ running De Wette, “ lief—herbei ;” This might be rendered in conformity with the usage of the E. V., where verbs are compounded with Still, this would not be more accurate. Wesley, Kend., Sharpe, Camp., See ch. 4 : 38, note. y “took—in his arms ;” ἐναγκαλισάμενος. Kendrick, Dick., “ taking—in his arms.” So (Εἰ. V.) ch. 9 : 86. Beza, “ accepis- set eos in ulnas;” Iber., “habiéndolos tomado en brazos;” S. Fr., “ les entourant de ses bras.” . τ “as he was going forth ;” ὀστορευομένου αὐτοῦ. Sharpe, Pechy. The participial construction is adopted, not only as literal, but exact, in presenting the thought of continued action. During the time, when the Saviour “ was going forth,” the inci- dent occurred. .So the imperfect tense of the verb (which cor- 4 “to inherit ;” ἕνα---κληρονομήσω. Wakef., Campbell. S. Fr., “pour hériter.” See ch. 3:12, note. So in parallel, Luke 18 :18 © «no one;” οὐδεὶς. See ch. 2:21, note. Rob. (οὐδεὶς), “ Absol. as subst. no one.” Webster (“no one”), “As a substi- tute, none has a plural signification.” Present usage employs “no one,” when the idea is, “ not a single individual.” f “except;” εἰ μὴ. Rob. See ch. 5 : 37, note. © «one, that is God;” (et a7) εἷς 6 Θεός. Wesley, Kendrick. 68 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 19 Thou knowest the com- mandments, Do not commit adul- tery, Do not kill, Do not steal, Do not bear false witness, Defraud not, Honour thy father and mother. 20 And he answered and said unto him, Master, all these have I observed from my youth. 21 Then Jesus beholding him loved him, and said into him, One thing thou lackest: go thy way, sell whatsoever thou hast, and give to the poor, and thou shalt have treasure in heaven; and come, take up the cross, and follow me. 22 And he was sad at that say- ing, and went away grieved: for he had great possessions. 23 And Jesus looked round about, and saith unto his disciples, How hardly shall they that have riches enter into the kingdom of God! 24 And the disciples were astonished at his words. But Jesus answereth again, and saith unto them, Children, how hard is it for them that trust in riches to enter into the kingdom of God! The rendering of some translators, “ except God only,” would re- quire that there should be no comma after eis, as in Mark 2 : 7, where the reading is, ez uy ets 6 Θεός... V., “ but God only.” A similar punctuation with that in the passage before us is found Matt. 23:8, εἷς γάρ ἐστι» ὑμῶν ὃ καϑηγητὴς, ὁ Χριστός. ΤΟΥ], “for one is our Master, even Christ.” »“ / ταῦτα πάντα ἐφυλαξάμην ἐκ νεό- f oy} c sy > - τητὸς μου. O δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς 3 7 2 a) fe 2. κὰδ ἐμβλέψας αὐτῷ ἠγάπησεν αὐτὸν, 4, n a a καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Ev σοι ὑστερεῖ: “ (A ὕπαγε, ὅσα ἔχεις πώλησον, καὶ δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς, καὶ ae θη- σαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανῷ" ὶ δεῦρο, ἀκολούθει μοι, ἄρας τὸν σταυ- / 22 c ‘ / aban, pov. O δε στυγνάσας ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ ἀπῆλθε λυπούμενος" ἦν γὰρ ἔχων κτήματα πολλά. * Καὶ περιβλεψάμενος ὁ ᾿Τ7η- ΄σ / a ΄σ ΄ σοῦς λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, a / © \ / - ITas δυσκόλως ot Ta χρήματα , Ν a ἔχοντες εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ - 4 c Θεοῦ εἰσελεύσονται. ** Οἱ δὲ ΝΥ 3 cal 3. δ, ΄σ μαθηταὶ ἐθαμβοῦντο ἐπὶ τοῖς Vg a ε Ν fal λόγοις αὐτοῦ. “O δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς Ψ, 3 \ / > ΄σ πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει “αὐτοῖς, fod ΄ / Ν Τέκνα, πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστι τοὺς , 3 cal , πεποιθότας ἐπὶ τοῖς χρήμασιν > \ a A εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. X. REVISED VERSION. est the commandments, Do not commit adultery, Do not kill, Do not steal, "Do not bear false testimony, Defraud not, Honor thy father and mother. And he answered and said to him, Teacher, all these things Jhave I kept from my youth. *And Jesus ‘looking on him, loved him, and said to him, One thing thou lackest; ™go, sell what- ever thou hast, and give to the poor, and thou shalt have trea- sure.in heaven; and come, take up the cross and follow me. And he was sad "at the saying 22 and went away grieved; for he had great possessions. And 23 Jesus looked eround, and saith to his disciples, PWith what difficulty swill those who have riches, enter into the kingdom of God! And the disciples were astonished at his words. But Jesus answereth again, and saith to them, Children, "how difficult it is for those who trust in riches, to enter into the kingdom of God! It is 25 20 21 Luke 22 : mS ᾽ς 61. ” ὕπαγε. 1 : 44, note. " “at the saying 3” ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ. Wesley, Campbell, Rob. So vy. 21 (E. V.), ἐμβλέψας αὐτοῖς is rendered “looking upon them.” John 1 : 36. Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, Campbell, Kend., Thom., Pechy. So (E. V.) the parallel, Matt. 19 : 21. See also (HE. V.) Mark 14 : 67. See ch. There is no emphasis, Wakef., Dick., Campbell have “false testimony.” ‘This is the proper rendering, as “witness” is now used for him who gives testimony. In the six instances where this verb occurs in the N. T., “testimony” should be substituted for “witness.” So “testify ” for “ witness,” as a verb. See ch. 14 : 55, 56, 57. 1 “Teacher.” See ch. 4 : 38, note. ) “have I kept;” ἐφυλαξάμην. Wesley, Pechy, Sharpe, Wakef. So H. V. in the parallels, Matt, 19:20. Luke 18:21. k “And;” Kad. Kend., Sharpe, Dick. §. Fr., “et.” 1 “looking on him;” ἐμβλέψας αὐτῷ. Sharpe, Kend., Pechy, which renders it ea to depart from a literal rendering of the article. See ch. 8 : 32, note. The reading of Beza, “ hune sermonem,” gaye rise to that of the KE. V. ° “round.” Pechy, Kend., Wesley, Sharpe. See ch. 3:5, note. Ρ “ With what difficulty ;” Πῶς δυσκόλως. Thomson, Dick. Rob. (δυσκόλως.) “ How hardly” is a violation of the English idiom. As an alternative rendering, “How hard it is.” The Geneva is nearly the same, “ What a hard thing is it.” 4 “will.” Present usage demands “ will,” rather than “ shall.” τ “how difficult ;” πῶς δύσκολόν. Camp., Dick. See note p. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. X. 69 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 25 It is easier for a camel to go through the eye of a needle, than for a rich man to enter into the kingdom of God. 26 And they were astonished out of measure, saying among themselves, Who then can be saved ? 27 And Jesus looking upon them, saith, With men ἐξ ἐς im- possible, but not with God: for with God all things are possible. 28 Then Peter began to say unto him, Lo, we have left all, and have followed thee. 29 And Jesus answered and|? said, Verily, I say unto you, There is no man that hath left house, or brethren, or sisters, or father, or mother, or wife, or children, or lands, for my sake, and the gos- pel’s, 30 But he shall receive an hun- dred-fold now in this time, houses, and brethren, and sisters, and mothers, and children, and lands, with persecutions; and in the world to come, eternal life. 31 But many that are first shall be last; and the last first. 32 And they were in the way, going up to Jerusalem; and Jesus went before them: and they were amazed; and as they followed, they were afraid. And he took again the twelve, and began to GREEK TEXT. > - 5 > ΄ ΄ 2 εἰσελθεῖν. εὐκοπώτερον ἐστι 7. ᾿ cal a col κάμηλον διὰ τῆς τρυμαλιᾶς τῆς - ἊΣ ῥαφίδος εἰσελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον > Ν / a a εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ΄- \ fol εἰσελθεῖν. 7° Οἱ δὲ περισσῶς , / δ. Ν ἐξεπλήσσοντο, λέγοντες πρὸς ε ‘\ Ν ,ὔ / “ ἑαυτοὺς, Καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆ- ,΄ \ “ εἶ ᾿Εμβλέψας δὲ αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς λέγει, Παρὰ ἀνθρώποις ἀδύνατον, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ: πάντα γὰρ δυνατά ἐστι παρὰ a a 98 ws» c , τῷ Θεῷ. Καὶ ἤρξατο ὁ Πέ- ,ὔ > o ᾽ \ ε 5 Tpos λέγειν avt@, Ldov, ἡμεῖς > , ΄ x 9 , ἀφήκαμεν πάντα, Kat ἠκολουθη- ΄,΄ > \ σαμέν σοι. * Aroxpibels δὲ ὁ ὟΣ = 3 >A \ λέ ePudes ησοῦς εἶπεν, Apny λέγω ὑμῖν, > s > a > “ Spe ih x οὐδείς ἐστιν, ὃς ἀφῆκεν οἰκίαν, ἢ ἀδελφοὺς, ἢ ἢ ἀδελφὰς, ἢ ἢ πατέρα, ἢ μητέρα, ἢ γυναῖκα, ἢ Τέκνα, ἢ ἀργοὺς, ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐ- 80 2 ayyeXiov, ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ ἐκα- τονταπλασίονα νῦν ἐν τῷ καιρῷ ΄ δ᾽ δ Skye \ Ν τούτῳ, οἰκίας καὶ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ > \ Ν ἊΝ Ν / ἀδελῴας καὶ μητέρας Kal τέκνα Ν ‘ a καὶ ἀγροὺς, μετὰ διωγμῶν, καὶ > “ a: “-“ > , Ν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ ζωὴν 2 31 x saath αἰώνιον. πολλοὶ δὲ ἔσονται “- vv πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, Kal ol ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι. ο Ff A “ a 2° ἼΣΑ Ν δὲ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ava- J) c / βαίνοντες εἰς ᾿]εροσόλυμα: καὶ τς ΄ \ a ἦν προάγων αὐτοὺς ὁ ᾿Ϊησοῦς, Ἂν > - Ν 3 col καὶ ἐθαμβοῦντο, Kai ἀκολουθοῦν- ΄- ‘\ τες ἐφοβοῦντο. καὶ παραλαβὼν ΄ὔ Ν , ᾿΄ > πάλιν τοὺς δώδεκα, ἤρξατο av- vat; REVISED VERSION. easier for a camel to go through the eye of a needle, than for a rich man to enter into the king- dom of God. And they were exceedingly astonished, saying among themselves, Who then can be saved? And Jesus looking on them, saith, With men, ἐξ is impossible, but not with God; for with God all Then Peter began to say to him, *Be- hold, tfollowed thee. And Jesus an- swered and said, "Truly I say to you, There is ‘no one, who hath left house or brethren, or sis- ters, or father, or mother, or wife, or children, or lands, for my sake, and the gospel’s, who shall not receive a hundred-fold now in this time, houses, and brethren, and sisters, and mothers, and children, and lands, with persecutions, and in the world to come, eternal life. But many who are first, *will be last; and the last, first. And they were Yon the way, going up to Jerusalem; and Jesus went before them: and they were amazed; and as they followed, they were afraid. And *again he took the twelve things are possible. we have left all, and ‘baside, and began to tell them 30 * “Behold;” Ydov. Wakefield, Dick. Pechy. This is the usual rendering of this particle in the E. V. t “followed ;” ἠκολουϑήσαμέν. So in the parallels, Matt. 19:27. Luke 18:28. The auxiliary “ have” is superfluous. » Truly.” See ch. 3 : 28, note. Y “no one;” οὐδείς. Sharpe, Pechy, Dick., Rob. y w “ who shall not receive ;” ἐὰν a7 λάβῃ. Wakef., Campbell, Dick., “ who will not receive;” S. Fr., “qui ne regoive;” De Wette, “ welcher nicht—erhalt.” Sharpe, Wakef., Dick., Kend. ¥ “on the way;” ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ. Sharpe, Wakefield, Campbell, Kend. This is our usual idiomatic phrase. © “again ;” πάλιν. Perspicuity demands this position for the adverb. So Kend. and Sharpe. > “aside.” This supplement is necessary to complete the sense. It is taken from the parallel, Matt. 20:17, παρέλαβε τοὺς δώδεκα μαϑητὰς κατ᾿ ἰδίαν--ἘΠ V., “ took the twelve dis- ciples apart.” The thought is really conveyed by παρέλαβε, “ he x “will be ;” ἔσονται. ” 70 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. X. KING JAMES’ VERSION. tell them what things should hap- pen unto him, 33 Saying, Behold, we go up to Jerusalem; and the Son of man shall be delivered unto the chief priests, and unto the scribes; and they shall condemn him to death, and shall deliver him to the Gen- tiles ; 34 And they shall mock him, and shall scourge him, and shall spit upon him, and shall kill him: and the third day he shall rise again. 35 And James and John, the sons of Zebedee, come unto him, saying, Master, we would that thou shouldest do for us whatso- ever we shall desire. 36 And he ‘said unto them, What would ye that I should do for you? 37 They said unto him, Grant unto us that we may sit, one on thy right hand, and the other on thy left hand, in thy glory. 38 But Jesus said unto them, Ye know not what ye ask: can ye drink of the cup that I drink GREEK TEXT. “ iA A / > cad τοῖς λέγειν Ta μέλλοντα αὐτῷ ,ὔ σ > ᾽ν ᾽ συμβαίνειν: Ort, ἰδου, ἀνα- ΄ Dale. / “eer βαίνομεν εἰς LepoooAvpa, καὶ ὁ eX - 7 , υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδοθη- σεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσι καὶ τοῖς γραμματεῦσι, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ, καὶ παραδώσου- σιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσι, 34 καὶ ἐμ- "2 maigovow αὐτῷ, καὶ μαστιγώ- Ν > σουσιν αὐτὸν, καὶ ἐμπτύσουσιν > “ - / αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτὸν" Ν ° ΄ ec ΄΄ » / καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἀναστήσε- ται. F nN , a °° Kal προσπορεύονται αὐτῷ > ΄ 4 © © TaxwBos καὶ "Iwavyns οἱ υἱοὶ Ze- / v. Bedaiov, λέγοντες, Adackare, ra “ a“ aN , / θέλομεν ἵνα ὃ ἐὰν αἰτήσωμεν, ΄ eon 36 ¢ \ 9 ποιήσῃς ἡμῖν. O δὲ εἶπεν ᾽ nm rr ΄, a ΄ αὐτοῖς, Τί θέλετε ποιῆσαί με a ΄ \ 3 a ὑμῖν; Οἱ δὲ εἶπον αὐτῷ, \ ann «“ πον α ΡΥ τ Aos ἡμῖν, ἵνα εἷς ἐκ δεξιῶν σου Ὁ » ΄ καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνύμων σου καθίσω- » a / ε \ μεν ev τῇ δόξῃ σου. *‘O δὲ ᾽ a πὶ > 7 ᾽ By Πησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Οὐκ οἴδατε tal / ΄σ Ν τί αἰτεῖσθε. δύναστε πιεῖν τὸ took to himself,” equivalent to “he took aside.” —pris avee lui ;” Iber., “ tomo a (si) ;” De Wette, “ nahm er— “de twaalye—tot hem nemende ;” Campbell, “ taking—aside ;” Wakef., “ he took—aside.” die Zwolfe zu sich;” Belg., © “would befall ;” Greenf. (ovuBaive.) Pechy, Thom. ἃ “we are going ;” Sharpe, Thom. ” ciples were now “ on the way. ¢ “will be delivered up ;” παραδοθήσεται. Wakef. See ch. 1 : 14, note. f «will condemn ;” xataxocvodow. Pechy, Kend., Wesley, Wakef., Campbell, Sharpe, Thom. ® « will deliver—up.” Wakef., Pechy. h «will mock ;” gusraiEovow. Kend., Pechy, Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe. 111 « scourge—spit—put to death.” No auxiliary is necessary μέλλοντα---συμβαίνειν. See Butt. (μέλλω), 2137, note 11. Rob. SuuBaivew is rendered “ befall” by Wesley, Wakef, Campbell, S. Fr., “ qui—devaient arriver.” ἀναβαίνομεν. Pechy, Wakef., Campbell, The progressive form of the verb indicating present continued action, is exact, as the Saviour and his dis- death.” J “ Teacher.” Dick. Rob. and 2 “ye wish ;” Mont., “ facere.” Sharpe, Pechy, ante k “we wish ;” ϑέλομεν. De Wette, “ wir wiinschen ;” Iber., “ queremos.” 1 “that thou wouldest do ;” ἕνα---στοεήσῃς. m “we shall ask ;” usual rendering of this verb, in the Εἰ. V. ϑέλετε. ° “to do;” ποιῆσαί. —“ at ;” ἐκ--ἐκ. more common phraseology at present. “On” is ambiguous, although its connection with other words in REVISED VERSION. what things ‘would befall him, saying, Behold, ‘we are going 33 up to Jerusalem, and the Son of man ‘will be delivered up to the chief priests, and to the seribes ; and they ‘will condemn him to death, and #will deliver him up to the Gentiles; and mock him, and 34 ‘scourge him, and ‘spit on him, and ‘put him to death: and the third day he will rise again. And James and John, the sons 35 of Zebedee, come to him, say- ing, !Teacher, ‘we wish ‘that thou wouldst do for us whatever =we shall ask. And he said to 36 them, What do "ye wish me °to do for you? And they said to 37 him, Grant to us that we may sit, one Pat thy right hand, and the other Pat thy left hand, in thy glory. But Jesus said to 38 them, Ye know not what ye ask: sare ye able "to drink the they *will S. Fr., “ayant | with these verbs, as they are closely connected with “ will mock.” So Wesley, Kend., Wakef. Rob. (ἀποκτεινοῦσι»), “ will put—to See ch. 8 : 31, note. See ch. 4 : 38, note. Sharpe, Kend., Dick. Rob. (ϑέλω.) Sharpe, Thom. αἰτήσωμεν. Rob. (aivéw.) The most See vy. 35, note k. Thom., Wakef., Sharpe, Dick. Eras., «ΑἹ the right (or left) hand” is the So Tyndale, Campbell. a phrase may prevent mistake. See ch. 1 : 14, note. 10328; 19: 12. 4 “are ye able;” δύνασϑε. 20.: 22. This verb is rendered by “to be able,” Matt. 9 : 28; Mark 4:33. Luke 1 : 20, ete. τ “to drink the cup;” met» τὸ ποτήριον. “Of” is super- So in parallel (Εἰ. V.) Matt. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. X. 71 KING JAMES’ VERSION. of? and be baptized with the bap- tism that I am baptized with? 39 And they said unto him, We ean. And Jesus said unto them, Ye shall indeed drink of the cup that I drink of; and with the bap- tism that I am baptized withal shall ye be baptized : 40 But to sit on my right hand and on my left hand, is not mine to give; but ἐξ shall be given to them for whom it is prepared. 41 And when the ten heard τί, they began to be much displeased with James and John. 42 But Jesus called them ¢éo}> him, and saith unto them, Ye know that they which are ac- counted to rule over the Gentiles, exercise lordship over them; and βαπτισθῆναι; Ἷ σθήσεσθε: * € / ητοίμασται. GREEK TEXT. ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, ὅθ Oj αὐτῷ, “υνάμεθα. εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Τὸ μὲν ποτήριον 0 ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε: καὶ τὸ βάπ- i) δι ΄ τισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτι- Ν Ν τὸ δὲ καθίσαι ἐκ A ἃ 9 > , δεξιῶν μου καὶ ἐξ εὐωνύμων μου, 2 »΄ SN > 3 ? ς- οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι, ἀλλ᾽ οἷς 41 Καὶ ἀ 4 αἱ ἀκούσαντες © / ” ᾽ ~ Ν οἱ δέκα ἡρξαντο ἀγανακτεῖν περὶ > ΄ ror ΄ ]ακώβου καὶ ᾿ΪΙωάννου. - 7, \ ]ησοῦς προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ra > ° vv a ΄ λέγει αὐτοῖς, Οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ δο- = y = ᾽ n κοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν κατα- / ΄“ « A κυριεύουσιν αὐτῶν: καὶ οἱ μεγά- REVISED VERSION. cup which I drink? and sto be immersed twith the immersion with which "I am immersed? And they said to him, We are 39 able. And Jesus said to them, ye will indeed ‘drink the cup, which I drink and ~be immers- ed with «the immersion, with which Σ] am immersed. But to 40 sit 7at my right hand and ταῦ my left, is not mine to give; sexcept to those for whom it is prepared. And when the ten 41 heard ἐξ, they began to be much displeased with James and John. But Jesus ‘called them 42 to him, and saith to them, Ye know that those who are ac- counted ‘rulers of the nations, ‘Jord it ‘over them; and their \ \ Kat TO δὲ εἶπον : ο δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς 2 6 be fluous after the verb. So Kend., Sharpe, Wakef., Campbell, Dick., Thom. §. Fr., “ boire la coupe ;” De Wette, “ den Kelch trinken;” Belg., “den drinkbeker drinken ;” Mont., Erasmus, Beza, “ bibere poculum ;” Vulgate, “ bibere calicem ;” Iberian, “beber el caliz.” So in the next verse. Kend., Q. See ch. 1:5, ” - * “to be immersed ;” βαπτισϑῆναι. note. Belg., “ gedoopt werden ;” De Wette, “ getauft werden. Tber., “ experimentar la inmersion.” t “with the immersion;” τὸ βάπτισμα. Kend., Q., Camp., “an immersion ;” Iberian, “ experimentar la inmersion ;” Belg., “met den doope;” De Wette, “mit der Taufe.” See ch. 1 : 5, note. « “Tam immersed ;” ἐγὼ βαπτίζομκαι. See note s on this verse, ¥ “drink the cup.” w “be immersed.” See vy. 38, note. See ch. 1 : 5, note. See ch. 1 : 5, note. 7 “JT am immersed.” See ch. 1 : 5, note. zz “at”—“at.” See v. 37, note. 5 “except to those for whom it is prepared ;” ἀλλ᾽ ols ἧτοί- μασται. Kend. Pechy, Thom., Dick., Tyndale, “ but to them for whom it is prepared ;” S. Fr., “ qu’A ceux auxquels cela a été préparé ;” Iber., “sino [& aquellos] para quienes esta pre- parado.” According to the reading of the E. V. and the opinion of some translators and critics, there is here an ellipsis of the verb δοϑήσεται (from the preceding dotvvac). Trollope (Ana- lecta) remarks: “There is no ellipsis whatever in the passage ; for the conjunction ἀλλὰ, when, as in this place, it is not followed by a yerb, but by a noun or pronoun, is equivalent with εἰ μὴ, except. Compare Matt. 17 : 8, with Mark 9:8.” The language x “the immersion.” in Luke 22 : 29 strongly favors the above rendering. “And I appoint unto you a kingdom, as my Father has appointed unto me; that ye may eat and drink at my table in my kingdom,” etc. Bloomf. on Matt. 20 : 23 takes substantially the same view with Trollope. So Macknight, Campbell. This interpretation is sanctioned by the Syriac. The. Arabic, Persic, and A®thiopic (according to Bloomf.) coincide with the Syriac. On the other hand, Rob. (Lex.) on Matt. 20 : 23, Fritzsche and others defend the hypothesis that the passage is elliptical. So the Versions of Eras. and Beza. Without enlarging this note, I suggest as a marginal reading, “or, but it will be given to those for whom it is prepared.” I have retained the rendering of the verb by the present tense, although in strictness “hath been prepared” is more accurate. The change would be unimportant. ” προσκαλεσάμενος. Tyndale, Geneva, Wake-_ field, “ called—up.” Kend., Q. Rob. (προσκαλέω.) Bretsch., “adyoco ad me.” “To” should not be italicized. See ch. 8 : 18, note. As the aorist participle is usually a preterite in sense, it is appropriately rendered here by the imperfect. b « called—to; ¢ “rulers of the nations;” ἄρχειν τῶν ἐϑνῶν. De Wette, “die Regenten der Volker ;” Wakef., “rulers of the Gentiles ;” Campbell, “the princes of the nations.” The idiom of the English will not allow a literal rendering of the infinitive, “to rule.” In this case, while the thought is presented, we render the infinitive by its cognate noun. So Kendrick, “rulers of the na- tions.” Εϑνῶν» does not refer to Gentile nations in distinction from the Jews, but to all nations. S. Fr., “les nations ;” De Sacy, “peuples ;” Belg., “ der volkeren.” 4 “Jord it over;” κατακυρεεύουσιν. Wesley, Sharpe. Vulg., Montanus, “ dominantur ;” S. Fr., “ dominent ;” Luther, “ herr- schen ;” Rob. (in verbo), “to lord it against or over any one.” -1 ιῷ KING JAMES’ VERSION. their great ones exercise authority upon them. 43 But so shall it not be among you: but whosoever will be great among you, shall be your minis- ter: 44 And whosoever of you will be the chiefest, shall be servant of all. 45 For even the Son of man came not to be ministered unto, but to minister, and to give his life a ransom for many. 46 And they came to Jericho: and as he went out of Jericho with his disciples, and a great|« number of people, blind Bartimeus, the son of Timeus, sat by the high- way side begging. 47 And when he heard that it was Jesus of Nazareth, he began to cry out, and say, Jesus, thow son of David, have mercy on me. 48 And many charged him that he should hold his peace: but he cried the more a great deal, Thou son of David, have mercy on me. 49 And Jesus stood still, and commanded him to be called: and they call the blind man, saying unto him, Be of good comfort, rise; he calleth thee. 50 And he, casting away his GREEK TEXT. “ ’ὔ λοι αὐτῶν κατεξουσιάζουσιν αὐ- “ 43 > “ NW 2 TOV. οὐχ οὕτω δὲ ἔσται ἐν ὑμῖν" ἀλλ᾽ ὃς ἐὰν θέλῃ γενέσθαι 7 μέγας ἐν ὑμῖν, ἔσται διάκονος ὑμῶν: “Ὃ καὶ ὃς ἂν θέλῃ ὑμῶν γενέσθαι πρῶτος, ἔσται πάντων ὃ a 45 ἊΝ Ν « eX 7 3? ovAos καὶ yap O VLOS TOU αν- , 3 “ θρώπου οὐκ ἦλθε διακονηθῆναι, > Ν lod Ν a A ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι, Kai δοῦναι τὴν Ν » lol , > Ν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολ- λών. το a. ἔρχονται εἰς “]εριχώ' καὶ ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ Τεριχὼ, καὶ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, « a es καὶ ὄχλου ἱκανοῦ, υἱὸς Τιμαίου Βαρτίμαιος ὁ τυφλὸς. ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν προσαιτῶν. MT καὶ ἀκούσας ὅτι ᾿Ϊησοῦς ὁ Ναζω- af 5, 4 paios ἐστιν, ἤρξατο κράζειν καὶ «ε eX cal λέγειν, “Ὁ υἱὸς AaBid, ᾿]ησοῦ, ᾽ / , 48 rN 3 / ἐλέησον με. Kat ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ πολλοὶ, ἵνα σιωπήσῃ: ὃ \ Lo] cal A -\ δὲ πολλῴ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν, Yie ; \ Aais, ἐλέησόν με. “ὃ Καὶ στὰς ὃ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτὸν φωνηθῆ- ναι: καὶ φωνοῦσι τὸν τυφλὸν, “ / Yd λέγοντες αὐτῷ, Θάρσει: ἔγειραι, ΄σ 5 ec A Ν φωνεῖ ce. δ᾽ Ὁ δὲ ἀποβαλὼν Webster (“Τὸ lord”), in the manner of a transitive verb.” τ." Pechy, Wakef., Dick. ” a SHOVE £ “so ;” οὕτω. according to our wsws loquendi. © «would ;” ϑέλῃ. h “become ;” Belg., “ worden.” γενέσϑαι. 1 “would.” See v. 43, note g. See y. 43, note ἢ. x “ first ;” πρῶτος. Wette, “der erste ;” Belg.; Ther., “ primero.” J “ become.” 1“ great crowd;” ὄχλου ἱκανοῦ. uote. “To domineer, to rule with arbitrary or despotic sway, sometimes followed by over and sometimes by i, This is the proper place for the particle, So Kend. Sharpe, Camp., Dick., Thom. Kendrick. De Wette, “ werden ;” “de eerste ;” 5. Fr., “le premier ;” ’ ᾽ Pechy. «See ch: 2.: 4, lel, Matt. 20 : 30. 5 “Thou” is dropped, as superfluous. Pechy, Dick., Thom., 5. Fr., Span., Tber., Ital., De Wette. ° “to be silent ;” iva σιωπήσῃ. usage (as well as that of the E. V. in many cases) demands the infinitive, rather than the subjunctive. See ch. 3 : 4, note. field, Sharpe, Pechy. ” P “much more ; mas. ” 4 “stopped ;” στὰς. Kend., Wakef., Sharpe, Thomson. De ping ;” S. Fr., “s’étant arréte ;” Iber., “ pardse (Jesus).” Rob. (in verbo), “ in the aorist, ἔστην» and ἐστάϑην, to stop.” τ “Take courage ;” Kend., Thom. In the Septuagint, Gen. 35 : 17, Exod. 14 : 13, m “by the way-side ;’ Thom. So (EH. V.) ch.4:15. Matt.13:4. Luke 8:5. Paral- πολλῷ κᾶλλον. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING ΤῸ MARK.—CHAP. X. REVISED VEBSION. great ones exercise authority over them. But it shall not be 43 ‘so among you: but whoever ‘would "become great among you, shall be your minister: and whoever of you ‘would 44 Jbecome *first, shall be servant of all. For even the Son of 45 man came not to be ministered to, but to minister, and to give his life a ransom for many. And they came to Jericho: and 46 as he went out of Jericho with his disciples, and Ja great crowd, blind Bartimeus, the son of Timeus, sat ™by the way-side begging. And when 47 he heard that it was Jesus of Nazareth, he began to cry out, and say, Jesus, "Son of David, have mercy on me! And many 48 charged him cto be silent: but he cried out Pmuch more, Son of David, have mercy on me! And Jesus sstopped, and com- 49 manded him to be called: and they call the blind man, saying, "Take courage, rise; he calleth thee. And he, casting away his 50 : STi helen παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν. Kend., Pechy, Q., So Tyndale, Kendrick, Kend., Campbell. Present So Wesley, Dick., Wake- Kendrick. Iber., “ mucho Kend. Thomson and Campbell, “ stop- Θάρσει. Wesley, Wakefield, Campbell, Zeph. 3 : 16, it is the rendering of sn preceded by bx. THE coe ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XI. 73 KING JAMES’ VERSION. garment, rose, and came to Je- sus. 51 And Jesus answered and said unto him, What wilt thou that I should do unto thee? The blind man said unto him, Lord, that 1 might receive my sight. 52 And Jesus said unto him, Go thy way; thy faith hath made thee whole. And immediately he received his sivht, and followed Jesus in the way. CHAP. X ΧΙ. AnD when they came nigh to Jerusalem, unto Bethphage, and Bethany, at the mount of Olives, he sendeth forth two of his dis- ciples, 2 And saith unto them, your way into the village over against you: and as soon as ye be entered into it, ye shall find a colt tied, whereon never man sat ; loose. him, and bring Aim. 3 And if any man say unto you, Why do ye this? say ye that the Lord hath need of him; and straightway he will send him hither. 4 And they went their way, Gol. GREEK TEXT. IPE > ap τ x or TO ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ ἀναστὰς ἦλθε Ν Ν » - 51 XN ᾿ > πρὸς tov Inoovr: καὶ ἀπο- ve > cal lal κριθεὶς λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ Inaods, Ti ἴω LA , « \ θέλεις ποιήσω σοί; “O δὲ τυ- Ν 9. cal « . φλὸς εἶπεν αὐτῷ, ᾿Ῥαββονὶ, ἵνα » Ye 5 ε Ν » ΄σ ἀναβλέψνω. O δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς 5 a τὰ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, “Ὑπαγε; ἡ πίστις a ἢ 4 PON > , gov σέσωκέ oe. Kai εὐθέως 3 ΄ cal ἀνέβλεψε, καὶ ἠκολούθει τῷ ᾿]η- σοῦ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ. CHAP. XI. “ ΄- KAT ὅτε ἐγγίζουσιν εἰς 1ε- ρουσαλὴμ, εἰς Βηθφαγὴ καὶ Βη- θανίαν πρὸς τὸ ὄρος τῶν ᾿ἔλαι- ὧν, ἀποστέλλει δύο τῶν μαθη- a a 9 id r τῶν αὐτοῦ, ~ καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, ve e cad Ν » ¢ » ἔναντι ὑμῶν: καὶ εὐθέως εἰσπο- , > Shan ig pevomevor εἰς αὐτὴν εὑρήσετε a 7 oy aN ᾿ πῶλον δεδεμένον, ἐφ᾽ ὃν οὐδεὶς 2 4 / f ἀνθρώπων κεκάθικε' λύσαντες Ν ᾽ / 37 αὐτὸν ἀγάγετε. 5 καὶ ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, Re ποιεῖτε τοῦτο; εἰ- mare, “Ort ὃ κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει: καὶ εὐθέως αὐτὸν ἀποστε- λεῖ woe. ᾿Απῆλθον δὲ, καὶ ΡΟΣ ἐς > \ ΄ \ Ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν κώμην THY κατ-᾿ REVISED VERSION. garment, rose and came to Je- sus. And Jesus answered and 51 said to him, What wilt thou that 1 should do ‘for thee? And the blind man said to him, Lord, that ‘I may receive my sight. And Jesus said to him, "Go; 52 thy faith hath made thee whole. | And immediately he received his sight, and followed Jesus in the way. CHAP. XI. AND when "they drew near 1 to Jerusalem, to Bethphage, and Bethany, at the mount of Olives, he sendeth forth two of his disciples, and saith to them, 2 ‘Go into the village over against you, and ‘immediately eon entering it, ‘ye will find a colt tied, ἔθη which no man shath ever sat; loose him, and ‘lead him ‘io me. And if any 3 one should say to you, Why do ye this? say ye, *Che Lord hath need of him; and immediately he will send him hither. And 4 "they went away, and found 8 «for thee ;” σοί. Thom. t 1 may receive τὴν sight ;” ἀναβλέψω. sf y Sear; α ©Go;” Ὕπαγε. Kend., Campbell. « “they drew near;” ἐγγίξουσιν. Matt. 21 : 1, “ drew nigh.” ΠΡ τ 5.21.0 8. 22473) 24 215. Rob: near.” Pee Gers Ὑπάγετε. See ch. 1 : 44, note. ἃ “immediately.” ” © “on entering it; Sharpe, Wesley, Dick., Wakef., Camp., See ch. 1 : 44, note. In the parallel (Εἰ. V.), So, drew near, Matt. 21 : 34. Luke Wesley, Kend., Sharpe, Thomson, Camp. See ch. 1 : 10, note. εἰσπορευόμενοι εἰς αὐτὴν. ” Ther. «s'est assis ;’ adhuc” Kend., Wesley. i “Jead him,” (ὧν verbo), “to draw 18:28: .. Acts 8k 82. 1 “to me.” , “se ha sentado.” unauthorized by the text. ἀγάχγατε. to a person or place ;” Liddell, “to lead ;” Vulg., Mont., Hras., Beza, “adducite ;” S. Fr., (E. V.) Mark 13 :11. Luke 4: 1,293; 22:54; 23:1, 32. John “ Never,” in the ἘΠ V,, is It originated in the “nemo hominum of the Vulgate, which influenced the version of Tyndale in this instance, so that he rendered, “ whereon never man sat.” Rob. (iv verbo), “to lead or bring Bretsch., “duco ;” “Vamenez.” So This supplement, which is necessary to complete the SUSE) is taken from the parallel, Matt. 21 : 2, where the text is ἀγάγετέ μοι. Pechy, Ken- κ “that” (in the E. V.) is omitted on the ground that its drick. equivalent, ézz, is used to indicate the quotation of the words τ “ye will find;” εὑρήσετε. Sharpe, Kend., Pechy, Wakef.,| of Christ without change. See Rob. (ὅτι.) Trollope (Gram.), Camp., Thom., Dick. p- 191. It is omitted in the parallel, Matt. 21 : 3, and by Wes- 5 «on which;” ἐφ᾽ ὃν. Kend., Wakef., Dick., Thom. » “hath—sat;” κεκάϑεκε, Sharpe, Pechy, Bloomf. (N. Τὴ De Wette, “gesessen hat; Belgic, “ gezeten heeft ;” S. Fr., ley, Wakef., Thom., Campbell, De Wette, Ital., Iber. See ch. 1 : 10, note. Rob. So (E. V.) Matt. 1 “ immediately.” ™ “they went away ;” ἀπῆλϑον. 14 KING JAMES’ VERSION. and found the colt tied by the door without, in a place where two ways met; and they loose him. 5 And certain of them that stood there said unto them, What do ye, loosing the colt? 6 And they said unto them even as Jesus had commanded: and they let them go. 7 And they brought the colt to Jesus, and cast their garments on him; and he sat upon him. 8 And many spread their gar- ments in the way; and others cut down branches off the trees, and strewed them in the way. 9 And they that went before, and they that followed, cried, say- ing, Hosanna: Blessed is he that cometh in the name of the Lord. 10 Blessed be the kingdom of our father David, that cometh in the name of the Lord: Hosanna in the highest. 11 And Jesus entered into Jerusalem, and into the temple: and when he had looked round about upon all things, and now the eyen-tide was come, he went GREEK TEXT. @ Ν a ΄ \ εὗρον Tov πῶλον δεδεμένον πρὸς Ν ΄ + UN a) , τὴν θύραν ἔξω ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀμφόδου, ΄ / καὶ λύουσιν αὐτόν. ° καί τινες 7 3 > / le ' > τῶν ἐκεῖ ἑστηκότων ἔλεγον av- ΄ ΄σ ’ ἊΝ fol τοῖς, Ti ποιεῖτε λύοντες τὸν TO- Η mid \ 3 > Lal \ ὁ Οἱ δὲ εἶπον αὐτοῖς καθὼς Ν » a καὶ adn- > ΄ 7 Ν » Ν Kav αὐτούς. καὶ ἤγαγον τὸν “ \ Ν᾽; ’ - πῶλον πρὸς τὸν ᾿Ϊησοῦν, καὶ > / > cal δ ‘© ΄ 5 ΄σ ἐπέβαλον αὐτῷ Ta ἱματια αὐτῶν, Nees, 3 > fal 8 καὶ ἐκαθισεν ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ. πολ- Ν \ \ © “a > a a yy Aot δὲ Ta ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἐστρω- Ν «ε / la \ σαν εἰς THY ὁδον" ἄλλοι δὲ στοι- a A > lol , Badas ἔκοπτον ἐκ τῶν δένδρων, λον; 25 x ἐνετείλατο ὁ ᾿Ϊ]ησοῦς" Ν > ΄ > Ν « / και EOTPWVVVOVY ELS Τὴν ὁδὸν. Ν Ὁ ’΄ © > 5 καὶ οἱ προάγοντες καὶ οἱ ἀκο- λουθοῦντες ἔκραζον, λέγοντες, “Qoavva: εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχό- μενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου. 10 ey λογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία ἐν ὀνόματι Αυρίου, τοῦ πατρὺς ἡμῶν AaBid: “Qaavva ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις. | Καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς “Th Δ «ε TV - Ν » ἐροσόλυμα ὁ ᾿Ϊησοῦς, καὶ εἰς Nein ie ΄ Ν ΄' τὸ ἱερὸν. καὶ περιβλεψάμενος πάντα, ὀψίας ἤδη οὔσης τῆς; THE GOSPEL ACCORDING ΤῸ MARK.—CHAP. XI. _ REVISED VERSION. the colt tied at the door with- out, °in the street; and they loose him. And Psome of those who stood there, said to them, aWhat are ye doing, loosing‘the colt? And they said to them ras Jesus had commanded: and they let them go. And they led the colt to Jesus, and cast their garments on him; and he sat on him. And many spread their garments in the way: and others teut branches from the trees, and strewed them in the way. And those who went be- fore, and those who followed, cried out, saying, Hosanna, blessed “Se he, who cometh in the name of the Lord. Blessed be ‘the coming kingdom of our father David: Hosanna in the highest. And Jesus entered into Jerusalem, and into the temple: and when he had “looked round on all things xthe time being now late, he σι 26:42. Mark10:22; 14:39. John10:40; 20:10. “To go one’s way” is obsolete. n “ot the door ;” πρὸς τὴν ϑύραν. “@ la puerta ; ee : Thire.” So (Ἐ- upon, but also to, unto.” ° “jin the street ;” Bloomf. (N. T.) a place, especially a street—eéyvea.” ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀμφόδου. semel in Ν. T., Mare. 11 : 4. P “some ; Wakef. a“ What are ye doing?” J ποιεῖτε; of continued action in the present is appropriately expressed by the progressive form of the verb. r“as;” καϑὼς. Wesley, “junto a la puerta ;” V.) Mark 1:33 (πρὸς τὴν ϑύρα»). 16 : 20. Rob. (πρὸς), “ after verbs implying motion to a place and a subsequent remaining there, where in English we use at, Wesley, Kend., Pechy, Liddell (% verbo), “any road that leads round Rob., schneider, “in versionibus Grecis N. Τ᾽, platea urbis, vicus—sic ἢ cwes. Kend., Pechy, Sharpe, Wesley, Campbell, Kend., Dick., Campbell, Sharpe, Thomson. So, in at least, two thirds of the cases in BE. V. s “they led.” t “eut branches from ;” Dick., Thom., “cut sprigs from ;”” Mont., Beza, “ frondes czede- “ fyondes incidebant ex.” Thom. De Wette, “ Span., an die Luke Eras., bant ex ;” down” trees. u «“ be.” “a street.” Bret- is superfluous in this instance. term with “cut,” when the object is “ trees.” used, it should be “ off.” This is the proper supplement. the beginning of y. 10. * “the coming kingdom ;” Pechy. Ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου of the Text. Recept. is rejected by See vy. 2, note. στοιβάδας ἔκοπτον ἐκ. S. Fr., “ béni sovt eclui.” ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία. Wakefield, The adverb “ down” Usage makes it a qualifying If any adverb is We “cut off” branches, and “ cut Tber., “ cortaban ramos.” Tt is used (E. V.) at Sharpe, Griesbach, Scholz, Knapp, Tittmann, Tisch., Lachm., Fritzsche. in defending it. Pechy. The idea | tion. ch. 3 : 5, note. It is not recognized by the Syriac. w “looked round ;” περιβλεψάμενος. x “the time being now late ; Wette, “als es schon spat an der Zeit war.” Tok aes a ὀψίας ἤδη τῆς ὥρας. Bloomf. stands almost alone It is, beyond any reasonable doubt, an interpola- “Sharpe, Pechy. See De Ὀψίας (adj.) is THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XI. 75 —— -- τ KING JAMES’ VERSION. GREEK TEXT. REVISED VERSION. . ow I> ’ , . out unto Bethany, with the] pas, ἐξῆλθεν εἰς δηθανίαν με- went out to Bethany, with the twelve. τὰ τῶν δώδεκα. twelve. And *the next day, 12 12 And on the morrow, when they were come from Bethany, he was hungry. 13 And seeing a fig-tree afar off, having leaves, he came, if haply he might find any thing thereon: and when he came to it, he found nothing but leaves: for the time of figs was not yet. 1: 14 And Jesus answered and said unto it, No man eat fruit of thee hereafter for ever. And his disciples heard 7¢. 15 And they come to Jeru- salem: and Jesus went into the temple, and began to cast out them that sold and bought in the temple, and overthrew the tables of the money-changers, and the seats of them that sold doves; 16 And would not suffer that any man should carry any vessel through the temple. vace ἢ" 2 > 3 ΄ » , © Καὶ τῇ ἐπαύριον ἐξελθόν- » ΄ A Ν if > , Tov αὐτῶν ἀπὸ ByOavias, ἐπεί- » \ cod , Kal ἰδὼν συκὴν μακρό- la i? x , θεν, ἔχουσαν φύλλα, ἦλθεν εἰ yy ε / 5 » - ἊΝ; ἄρα εὑρήσει τὶ ἐν αὐτῇ: καὶ ἐλ- θὰ Sa; > \ ἠδὲ Ὁ > \ ὧν € αὐτὴν, οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ , > \ 5 x , φύλλα: ov yap ἣν καιρὸς σύκων. Ν > cad 3 καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν aN > > ‘\ 5: αὐτῇ, ηκέτι ἐκ σοῦ εἰς τὸν ai- ~ Ν 7, ava μηδεὶς καρπὸν φαγοι. » « Ν > > 15 7 ἤκουον οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ. ~° Kai » » «ς 7 ἔρχονται εἰς “]εροσολυμα: καὶ > \ εὖ ΒΕ. = > ὡς ΄ Ν εἰσελθὼν ὁ ]ησοῦς εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν ΄ὔ ἊΝ > ἤρξατο ἐκβάλλειν τοὺς πωλοῦν- τον 7% > 7 e a τας καὶ ἀγοράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ" Ν \ / - καὶ τὰς τραπέζας τῶν κολλυβι- an Xi / a στῶν, καὶ Tas καθέδρας τῶν πω- \ δὰ Ἢ λούντων τὰς περιστερὰς κατέ- 16 ‘ > yA “ ἣν στρεψε: “" καὶ οὐκ ἤφιεν ἵνα τὶς a ἂν =~ ca - διενέγκῃ σκεῦος διὰ τοῦ ἱεροῦ. ‘when they were coming from Bethany, he was hungry. And seeing a fig-tree “far off, having 13 leaves, "he went ‘fo see ‘whether he might perhaps find anything on it: and when he came to it, he found nothing but leaves: ‘for it was not the time for figs. And ‘he answered and said to it, “Let "no one eat fruit of thee hereafter for ever. And his dis- ciples heard it. And they come to Jerusalem: and Jesus went into the temple, and began ‘to’ drive out those who sold and bought in the temple, and Joyer- turned the tables of the money- changers and the seats of those who sold doves ; and would not suffer ‘any one !to carry ™an article through the temple. 14 Kai 6 defined by Rob. “late.” Bretsch., “ serotinus.” He renders this passage, “ quum serotina esset diei hora.” y¥ “the next day;” τῇ ἐπαύριον. Dick. So (EH. V.) Matt. Mins ΟΝ onn ts 298 90; ΠΣ ἰὼ. Acts [ἡ "20; 2 : ὃ: τΑὉ- cording to our idiom, no preposition is necessary before “ day.” Rob. (ἡ ἐπαύρεον), “ the next day.” “ Morrow” is obsolete. ” ἐξελϑόντων αὐτῶν. The pro- The So * “when they were coming ; gressive form of the verb is employed, as most accurate. miracle occurred while “they were coming” from Bethany. Wesley. Dick. uses this form, “ as they were proceeding.” = “far off ;" μακρόϑεν. “ Afar” is now restricted to poetry. > «he went;” ἤλϑεν. Tyndale, Geneva Pechy, Dickinson, Campbell, Thom. S. Fr., “il alla ;” Iber. < fue.” © “to see.” Tyndale, Cranmer, Gera, Thom. Beza, “ visu- rus ;” S. Fr., “ voir ;” Iber., “a ver.’ A supplement is neces- sary. 4 “ whether—perhaps ;” σὲ ἄρα. Rob. (εἰ) ef dea, “ whether perhaps ;” Bretsch. (in 1.20) “ num fortasse.” © “for it was not the time for figs ;” οὐ yao ἣν καιρὸς σύκων. Kend., Pechy. Vulg., Mont., Eras., “non erat tempus ficoram ;” 8. Fr., “car ce n’était pas la saison des figues ;” Iber., “ porque no era tiempo de higos;” De Wette, “ denn es war nicht Feigen- Zeit.” As zacgds is anarthrous, “ the” is italicized. f “he.” Ὁ Ἰησοῦς, which is found in the Text. Recept., is dropped by Griesbach, Scholz, Knapp, Titt., Lachmann, Tisch., Fritz. It is not recognized by the Syr. or Vulg. The versions of Sharpe, A. Camp., Pechy, and De Wette omit it. Tt is an interpolation. 5 «TLet—eat ;” φάγοι. Kendrick, Wakefield, Sharpe, Thom., Pechy. h “no one;’ “nadie.” ; κηδεὶς. Rob., Thom., Sharpe, Pechy. ΤΌΟΙ.» i «to drive out;” ἐκβάλλειν. Wesley, Pechy, Campbell, Rob. So (E. V.) John 2:15. De Wette, “ auszutreiben ;” S. Fr., “ ἃ chassera ;” Belg., “ uit te drijven.” } © overturned” κατέστρεψε. Kend., Campbell, Rob. This word, according to present usage, is the appropriate one, to de- scribe the action indicated by the text. Rob., Sharpe, Dick., Pechy. Thomson, Pechy, Sharpe, ? k “any one ;”” tis. 1 “to carry ; ἕνα (τὶς) δεενέγκῃ. Dick., Camp. See ch. ὃ : 12, note. πὶ “an article ;” σκεῦος. Q. Like the Hebrew “b», this word is generic, signifying “ any utensil, vessel, article of furniture, im- « Article” is the most appropriate ren- dering, in this instance. Bloomfield (in loco) remarks that this mates in a general sense, denotes any article whether for use or traffic.” Trollope (Analecta) presents substantially the same plement, or instrament.” THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XI. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 17 And he taught, saying unto |!’ them, Is it not written, My house shall be called, of all nations, the house of prayer? but ye have made it a den of thieves. 18 And the scribes and chief priests heard if, and sought how . they might destroy him: for they feared ἐπε because all the people | was astonished at his doctrine. 19 And when even was come, he went out of the city. 20 And in the morning, as they | passed by, they saw the fig-tree | dried up from the roots. 21 And Peter calling to re- membrance, saith unto him, Mas- ter, beheld, the fig-tree which thou} cursedst is withered away. 22 And Jesus answering, saith unto them, Haye faith in God. 23 For verily I say unto you, That whosoever shall say unto} this mountain, Be thou removed, and be thou cast into the sea ; and shall not doubt in his heart, but shall believe that those things) which he saith shall come to pass; Ov γέγραπται, σι τοῖς ἔθνεσιν: | ὄρει τούτῳ, GREEK TEXT. ae καὶ ἐδίδασκε. λέγων αὑτοῖς, of 5 ah, Ort ὃ οἶκος μου οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶ- σατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν. 18. Καὶ ἤκουσαν οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς, καὶ ἐζήτουν πῶς αὐτὸν ἀπολέσουσιν: γὰρ αὐτὸν, ὅτι πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἐξε- , oe sae eee em τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ. Kai ore owe εγένετο, ἐξε- πορεύετο ἔξω τῆς πόλεως. πρωὶ παραπορευόμενοι, εἶδον τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν. Ἵ καὶ ἀναμνησθεὶς ὁ “Πέτρος λέ- γει αὐτῷ, “PaBpi, ἴδε, ἡ συκῆ ἣν κατηράσω ἐξήρανται. ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς λέγει αὐ- τοῖς, "Ἐχετεπίστιν Θεοῦ. γὰρ λέγω ὑ ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ "ApOnrt, καὶ βλή- 'θητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλ- λὰ πιστεύσῃ ὅτι ἃ λέγει γίνεται" REVISED VERSION. And he taught, saying to them, 17 Is it not written, My house shall be called "a house of prayer efor all nations? but ye have made it a den °*of robbers. And the scribes and chief priests heard i, and sought how they might destroy him; for they feared ~ him, because all Pthe crowd was astonished at his doctrine. And when ‘evening came, he went out of the city. And in 20 the morning, as they passed by, © they saw the fie-tree dried up from the roots. And Peter ‘re- membering, saith to him, *Rab- bi, behold, the fie-tree, which thou tdidst curse, “is dried up. And Jesus answering, saith to them, Have faith in God. For ‘truly I say to you, that who- ever shall say to this mountain, Be thou removed, and be thou cast into the sea; and shall not - doubt in his heart, but shall be- lieve that “what he saith =will come to pass; he shall have ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιή- ἐφοβοῦντο 2 LRG, 99 Saitou OES OS μη, thought. The Syriac renders σχεῦος by (iss (plur.)- Bux- torf (Lex., Chal. et Syr.) defines this’ word vas, mstrumentum, nomen generale. Murdock (Trans. Syr.), “ goods.” n “9 house;” οἶκος. Kend., Pechy, Wesley, Dick., Walkef., Campbell, Sharpe, Thom. 8. Fr., “une maison ;” Belg., “ een huis;” De Wette, oe Bethaus.” There is no article in the Heb. or Sept., Isa. 56 : 7, which is here quoted. ” ° “for all nations?” πᾶσε τοῖς ἔϑνεσιν; Dick., Kendrick, Wakef., Campbell, Sharpe, Pechy, Q. De Wette, “fiir alle Vol- ker ;” S. Fr.,“ pour toutes les nations.” This passage is quoted ad verbum, from the Sept. of Isa. 56 : 7, where the Hebrew is pwayn->=> (for all peoples), ΒΕ). V., “for all people.” Wiclif, “to all folks ;” Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva, “unto all nations.” Trollope (Analecta). The H. V. renders this passage as if the words had been ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν ἔϑνων, and this is more re- markable, as in the translation of Isa. 56 : 7 it is correctly ren- dered “ for all people.” oo “of robbers;” ληστῶν. Wesley, Wakef., Dick., Campbell, Kend., Thom. 8. Fr., “de brigands;” De Wette, “ ciner Rau- berhohle ;” Iberian, “de ladrones.” So (HE. V.) John 10:1, 8; 18:40. 2 Cor. 11:26. The rendering of this word by “thief” is entirely incorrect. See ch. 2 4 “evening came” (“it became evening”). necessary. See ch. 1 : 32, note. r “yemembering ;” ἀναμνησϑ εὶς. “remembered.” So (E. V.) 2 Cor. 7 Liddell on this word. s “Rabbi.” See ch. 9 : 5, note. t “didst curse ;” χατηράσω. Thom. The intolerable haste ness of “ cursedst ” is a sufficient reason for this change. . « “is dried up;” ἐξήρανται. So in ν. 20. The rendering in both cases should be alike. So 5. Fr., v. 20, “devenue sec dés Jes racines—y. 21, a séché ;” Iber., v. 20, “se habia secado desde la raiz—y. 21, se ha secado ;” De Wette, v. 20, “ verdorret von der Wurzel aus—y. 21, ist verdorret.” The reason for retaining “is dried up” (when the text is in the perfect) may be seen in ch. 10 : 40, note. " ἀμὴν. See ch. 3 : 28, note. Kend., Dick., Wakef., Campbell, Pechy. x «will come to pass ;” γένεται. Dick., Pechy. “ Frequently the present is used of the futwre; more especially when some future event is represented in prophetic language, as certain, P “the crowd.” : 4, note. “Was” is un- Wesley, Sharpe, Wakef., :15. See Robinson and av “truly ; w what; ἃ | | : nt Te NER DS σευ» THE GOSPEL ACCORDING ΤῸ MARK.—CHAP. ΧΙ. 77 KING JAMES’ VERSION. he shall saith. 24 Therefore I say unto you, What things soever ye desire when ye pray, believe that ye receive them, and ye shall have them. 25 And when ye stand praying, forgive, if ye have aught against any: that*your Father also which is in heaven may forgive you your trespasses. 26 But if ye do not forgive, neither will your Father which is in heaven forgive your tres: passes. 27 And they come again to Jerusalem: and as he was walk- ing in the temple, there come to him the chief priests, and the scribes, and the elders, 28 And say unto him, By what authority doest thou these things? and who gave thee this authority to do these things? 29 And Jesus answered and said unto them, I will also ask of you one question, and answer me, and I will tell you by what author- ity I do these things. 30 The baptism of John, was it from heaven, or of men? answer me. 81 And they reasoned with have whatsoever he GREEK TEXT. 9 \ 74 διὰ cal / ca ΄σ' , “ ΕΝ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν, Ilavra ὅσα ἂν , » -“ / προσευχομενοι αἰτεῖσθε, πιστεύ- a 7 Ν + ere ὅτι λαμβάνετε, Kal ἔσται econ 25 “πες / ὑμῖν. Kai TNKNTE / ᾽ / ΕἸΣ vw προσευχόμενοι, ἀφίετε εἴτι ἔχετε 4 “ \ κατὰ τινος" ἵνα καὶ ὁ πατὴρ ε Lal c ’ cod > > -“ ὑμῶν ὃ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ἀφῇ » Sree NOTIN ” εσται αὐτῷ O ἐαν €(77)). ΄“ OTQAV ΄σ Ἂν 2 5 ὑμῖν τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν. 26 > Wo “ » > ΄ alice εἰ δὲ ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀφίετε, οὐδὲ ὁ δὴ nq « 5 a > ΄σ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς / \ ,ὔ δἰ a ἀφήσει τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν. Ω τσ ᾿ , Ὁ “ KAT ἔρχονται πάλιν. εἰς e / Ν » ΄ ΄ a LepoooAvpa Kal ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ, ἔρχονται Ν ΘΕ» Ἂς ΄ > cot ΄ πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ - © / γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, 28 Ν , > cal ᾽ Τὰ καὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, Hy ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς; καὶ τίς Ν 3 / lA σοι THY ἐξουσίαν ταύτην ἔδωκεν, a a n 9 ε yam iva ταῦτα ποιῇς; 7° Ὃ δὲ ᾽7η- σοῦς ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, > / « ΄σ > \ aS 4 Erepwrnow ὑμᾶς κἀγὼ ἕνα λο- Τὰ 3 ΄σ γον, καὶ ἀποκρίθητέ μοι, καὶ ἐρῶ β : Pie Η ὑμῖν ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ. 3 Ν ΄ ΄ Σ Ὁ Τὸ βάπτισμα ᾿Ϊωάννου ἐξ οὐ- a 3 x3 ΄ὔ ρανοῦ ἦν, ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ; ἀπο- ΄, » , κρίθητέ μοι. *' Καὶ ἐλογίζοντο REVISED VERSION. Therefore 24 I say to you, »Whatever things ye ask, when ye pray, believe that ye will receive, and ye shall have them. And when ye 25 stand praying, forgive, if ye have *any thing against *any whatever he saith. one; that your Father also, who is in ‘the heavens, may for- give you your trespasses. But 26 if ye do not forgive, neither will your Father, who is in ¢the heavens, forgive your trespass- es. And they come again to 27 Jerusalem : and as he was walk- ing in the temple, there come to him the chief priests, and the seribes, and the elders, and say to him, By what authority doest thou these things? and who gave thee this authority to do these things? And Jesus an- 29 swered and said to them, ‘I also will ask ¢you one question, and answer me, and I will tell you by what authority I do these things. "The immersion of John, 30 was if from heaven, or ‘from men? answer me. And they 31 τῷ co as if already present.” Trollope, Gr. N. T., p. 131, 250. The “Jes cieux ;” Span. and Iber., “los cielos ;” Ital., “ ne’ cieli ;” progressive form of the English present tense affords an expres- sion, which is submitted as an alternative rendering, viz., “is coming to pass.” This refers to future time—and yet, in form, it coincides with the text. So Wakef. ¥ “whatever things.” This is adopted in lieu of the antiquated phrase of the E. V., “ what things soever.” So Sharpe. 2 “ye will receive ;” λαμβάνετε. Pechy, Wakef. This verb is rendered in the future by Tyndale, Wesley, Span., Iber., Ital. See νυ. 23, note. ® “any thing ;” το. Pechy, Dick. “Ausht” is obsolete. Ὁ “any one;” zevos. Kendrick, Pechy, Sharpe, Wakefield, Thom. © “the heavens ;” τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. The literal rendering ac- cords with our idiom, and is preferable, for the sake of exactness. So (E. V.) Luke 12 :.38. " Heb. 4:14; 8:1; 9:23. S. Fr, Belg., “ de Hemelen.” 4 “the heavens.” See last note. f «JT also;” κἀγὼ. Pechy. As the conjunction properly qualifies the word or sentence, which immediately precedes it, it should be placed (in English) directly after the pronoun. 5 « Of,” before “you,” is superfluous. By our idiom, verbs of asking and teaching omit the preposition. h «The immersion.” De Wette, “die Taufe;” Belgic, “de Doop ;” Iber., “1a inmersion.” See ch. 1 : 4, 5, notes. τ “from men?” ἐξ ἀνθρώπων; The preposition should be rendered as in the prior member of the sentence, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ. So Kendrick, Wesley, Pechy, Sharpe, Campbell, Wakefield, Dickinson, De Wette, Iberian, Span., Ital., Belg., Syriac, Heb. INGE. KING JAMES’ VERSION. themselves, saying, If we shall say, From heaven; he will say, Why then did ye not believe him? 32 But if we shall say, Of men; they feared the people: for all men counted John, that he was a prophet indeed. 33 And they answered and said unto Jesus, We cannot tell. And Jesus answering saith unto them, Neither do I tell you by what authority I do these things. CHAP. XII. Anp he began to speak unto them by parables. x πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς, “λέγοντες, “αν εἴπωμεν, ES οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, Al- om οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ; 2 ἀλλ᾽ ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ᾿Εξ ἀνδρῶ. ’ lol ἂν / a TOV, eposouvro Tov Aaov: ἅπαν- τες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην, 6 ὅτι ὄντως προφήτης ἦν. * καὶ ἀπο- κριθέντες λέγουσι. τῷ ᾿[Πησοῦ, ΠΥ Ὁ ” A τς « » - Οὐκ οἴδαμεν. Kat ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς f > lat \ ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς, Οὐδὲ 3 NS / e ΄σ 5 , 5» y? ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα TOLO. CHAP. XII. KAT ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παρα- βολαῖς λέγειν, ᾿Αμπελῶνα ἐφύ- τευσεν ἄνθρωπος, καὶ περιέθηκε φραγμὸν, καὶ ὠρυξεν ὑπολήνιον, καὶ φκοδόμησε πύργον, καὶ ἐξέ- Soro αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς, καὶ ἀπεδή- ν᾿ μησε. πρὸς τοὺς γεωργοὺς τῷ καιρῷ δοῦλον, ἵνα παρὰ τῶν γεωργῶν λάβῃ ἀπὸ τοῦ καρποῦ τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος" Ν 5 ’ὔ καὶ ἀπέστειλε οἱ THE GOSPEL ACCORDING ΤῸ MARK.—CHAP. XII. REVISED VERSION. reasoned Jamong themselves, saying, If we shall say, From heaven; he will say, Why then did ye not believe him? But if 32 we shall say, ¥From men, 1-- they feared the people; for all held John "to be really a pro- phet. And they answered and said to Jesus, >We do net know. And Jesus answering, saith to them, Neither do I tell you by what authority I do these things. CHAP. XII. Anp he began to speak to them by parables. "ΑΔ man planted a vineyard, and set a hedge about if, and *dug ‘a wine-vat, and built a tower, and let 10 out to husbandmen, and ¢went abroad. And at the season, he sent a servant to the husbandmen, that he might re- ceive from the husbandmen esome of the fruit of the vine- 33 ” x TWOOS 1 “among peo: τᾷ Campbell, Pechy. So (E. V.) W'S 7( Ge AUS Se ae 20314. S. Fr. “entre si.” ” See I follow the pun « «From men ;” ἐξ ἀνθρώπων». 1 “_they feared.” ἀνϑροώπων,---ἐφοβοῦντο. ἑαυτοὺς. Mark 1": He remarks : modern alike, stumble at this construction. an anacoluthon, by which the Hyangelist passes from the very Wesley, Dickinson, Hie O Rese Ay eee entre: eux 377 Vulg., J Iberian, “ Nous ne sayons.’ vy. 30, note. ctuation of Bloomfield, “ Critics, ancient and We have here merely RAVE ane ment. Heb. N. T., of Beza. Tber. ° “We do not know ;” οὐκ οἴδαμεν. Mont., Eras., Beza, es nicht ;” BoE «Wij en weten’t niet ;” Syriac, ἄνθρωπος. Campbell, Sharpe, Dick. susp ἢ. “ Certain” Sharpe, Dick., Thom. “nescimus ;”” De Wette, “ Wir wissen G. Fr. and 8. Fr., Heb. N. T., sys nd. “ We can not tell” was copied ‘from Ty ndale. : Kend., Wakefield, Pechy, Wesley, is an unnecessary supple- No supplement in S. Fr., Luther, De Wette, Belg., Syr., This supplement originated in the “ quidam” words of the persons spoken of, to a narrative of what was said.” S. Fr., “ des hommes ils craignaient le peuple.” m “held ;” εἶχον. So parallel, Matt. 21 : K. V. Pechy, Kend. 26, ἔχουσι, “ hold,” » “to be really a prophet ;” (Ἰωάννην) ὅτε ὄντως προφήτης jv. Kend., “ (John) to be truly a prophet.” So Wakef. has the infinitive “to be.” The rendering of the Εἰ. V. introduces a Greek idiom, which is not in accordance with our usus loquendi. 8. Fr., “Jean pour avoir été reelment prophéte.” Ὄντως is ren- dered by “really,” as most accurately expressing its signification, although it is not found in the E. V. So Rob., Liddell. As an alternative rendering of this passage, “that John was really a prophet.” So Dick. > “due.” This is uniformly employed as the imperfect and perf. part. of “ to dig,” at the present time. So Wakef., Camp., Thom., Kend., Murdock (in Trans. of Syr.) ὑπολήνιον. Wakef., Wesley, Sharpe. De Wette, “ einen ἘΠῚ ΤΕ Bele, “eenen wijnpersbak ;” Rob., “the under-vat of a wine-press.” The orthography has long been changed from “ wine-fat ” to “ wine-vat.” ἃ “went abroad ;” ἀπεδήμησε. Rob., Liddell, Kend., Camm Thom. Bretsch., “ peregre proficiscor, abeo.” © “some of the fruit ;” ἀπὸ τοῦ καρποῦ. Thom., “some of the product ;” De Wette, “einen Theil—von den Friichten.” After verbs of receiving, etc., azo, before a genitive, conveys the © ἐφ wine-vat ;” THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. and away 3 And they caught him, beat him, and sent him empty. 4 And again he sent unto them another servant: and at him they cast stones, and wounded him in the head, and sent him away shamefully handled. 5 And again he sent another ; and him they killed, and many others ; beating some, and killing some. 6 Having yet therefore one son, his well-beloved, he sent him also last unto them, saying, They will reverence my son. 7 But those husbandmen said among themselves, This is the heir ; come, Iet us kill him, and the inheritance shall be ours. 8 And they took him, and killed him, and cast him out of the vineyard. 9 What shall therefore the lord of the vineyard do? He will come and destroy the husbandmen, and will give the vineyard unto others. GREEK TEXT. \ , aN ” N δὲ λαβοντες αὐτὸν ἔδειραν, καὶ δ, bey? , 4 ιν ΄ ἀπέστειλαν κενον. καὶ πᾶλιν ’ fy ἊΝ » A yA ἀπέστειλε πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἄλλον a ΄- 7 δοῦλον: κἀκεῖνον λιθοβολῆσαν- ‘ > 4 Tes ἐκεφαλαίωσαν, καὶ ἀπέστει- καὶ » , 4 λαν ητιμωμένον. πάλιν » > 72 5 ΄σ' » i) ἄλλον ἀπέστειλε: κἀκεῖνον ἀπέ- Ν Ν + κτειναν" καὶ πολλοὺς ἄλλους, τοὺς μὲν δέροντες, τοὺς δὲ ἀπο- κτείνοντες. δ ἔτι οὖν ἕνα υἱὸν ἔχων ἀγαπητὸν αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλε καὶ αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἔσχατον, λέγων, “Ore ἐντραπτσονται τον Τ ἐκεῖνοι δὲ οἱ yewpyor “Ὅτι οὗτός δεῦτε, ἀπο- τόν υἱον μου. 3 \ © Ν εἶπον πρὸς ἑαυτοῦς, 3 ε / ἐστιν ὁ KAnpovopos* Δ > Ν Ν « > δ΄ κτείνωμεν QUTOV, και ἡμῶν εσται ε ,ὔ ἊΝ / 7 κληρονομία. καὶ λαβόντες » ἣν » / x xfs αὑτὸν ἀπέκτειναν, καὶ ἐξέβαλον Sige? ἔξω τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος. τί ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος; ἐλεύσεται καὶ ἀπολέσει τοὺς γε- Ν ,’ὔ Ν » “ ὠργοὺς, καὶ δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα οὖν REVISED VERSION. yard. And ‘they took him, and beat him, and sent him away empty. And again he sent to them another servant: and at him they cast stones, and wounded Aim in the head, and sent him away shamefully hand- led. And again he sent another, and him they killed; ‘and many others; "of whom they beat and killed some. ‘Therefore haying yet one son, his beloved, he sent him also to them last, saying, They will reyerence my son. But those husbandmen said among them- selves, This is the heir, come let us kill him, and the inherit- ance ‘will be ours. And they took him and killed him, and cast him out of the vineyard. What therefore twill the lord of the vineyard do? He will come and destroy the husband- men, “and give the vineyard to some 79 σι ios} idea that a part of τὸ thing is received ; understood. Butt., 2132, 5. ¢. money, but 27 τ produce, for the use of the land. The λαβεῖν τοὺς καρποὺς αὐτοῦ, should be rendered, “ to receive his So Wakef., Matt. 21:34. See Bloomf. (N.'., ἐν loco.) fruits.” Such phrases as “to take of,” “to receive by means of the E. V., are nevertheless violations of our idiom, and have never been so “ naturalized,” as to acquire any currency in conversation, or writing. In all such tion” should be placed after the verb. ” £ “they took ;” λαβόντες. Sharpe, Pechy. De Wette, “ nahmen.” the seryant had attempted to escape. δ A semicolon is placed after “ killed,” in conformity with the So Wesley, Sharpe, Campbell. E. Y. of 1611 places a colon after “ killed.” text, xaxetvoy ἀπέκτειναν" mer, Geneva, Rheims, Wakef. h “of whom they beat some and killed some ;’ gortes, τοὺς δὲ ἀποκτείνοντες. verbs. In the Hast, rent is not paid in The proprietor receives a portion of the So v. 8. Grammatical propriety demands this supplement and the rendering of the participles by finite Wakef., “ of many others, some they beat, and some they slew ;” Camp., “and of many more that le sent, some they beat, tig or τὲ accusat. being parallel, Matt. 21 : 34, tuerent les autres. of,” though familiarized | i «Therefore ; cases “ part,” or “ por- J “his beloved ;” Wesley, Wakefield, | Mont, Bras, Beza, “ “ Caught” implies that xe ‘ the “ carissimum ” k “will be;” The chy, Thom. So Tyndale, Cran- ee tin ἡ βὰς ss τοὺς κὲν δέ- do?” m “and give.” | uns, et tuerent les autres.’ sloegen, ende sommige dooden.” ” Οὗν. This is the natural arrangement of the sentence. ἀγαπητὸν dilectum suum.” rendered thus in the EH. of the Vulg. ἔσται. 1 “ will—do :" ποιήσει. Sharpe, Thomson, Dick., Pechy. presents an idea which is not found in the text,—* what can he As “give” Comp. Matt. 21 : 34-36. So Sharpe. Wakefield, Waket., Cp, αὐτου, Υ. and some they killed ;” Thom., “some of them they beat, and some of them they killed.” Iber. has this supplement, “ [de los cuales] & unos dieron de golpes, i 4 otros mataron.” “de plusieurs qui lewr envoya ensuite, ils hatterent les uns, et 8. Fr., “dont ils déchirérent de verges les Belg., “ [waar van] zij de sommige De Sacy, “ Moreover.” Pechy, Rob. This adjective is usually The early Eng. translators followed Wesley, Campbell, Wakef., Sharpe, Pe “ Shall,” as an auxiliary, h Pechy. Kend., Wesley, Wakef., Campbell, ere is coupled to “ will destroy,” the auxiliary should not be repeated; there being no emphasis. Kend., Wakef., Camp., Se 80) THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 10 And have ye not read this scripture; The stone which the builders rejected is become the head of the corner : 11 This was the Lord’s doing, and it is marvellous in our eyes? 12 And they sought to lay hold on him, but feared the people; for they knew that he had spoken the parable against them: and they left him, and went their way. 13 And they send unto him certain of the Pharisees, and of the Herodians, to catch him in his words. 14 And when they were come, they say unto him, Master, we know that thou art true, and carest for no man: for thou re- gardest not the person of men, but teachest the way of God in truth: Is it lawful to give tribute to Ce- sar, or not? 15 Shall we give, or shall we not give? But he, knowing their hypocrisy, said unto them, Why tempt ye me? bring me a penny, that I may see γέ. 16 And they brought 7. And GREEK TEXT. Ψ \ X ἂν ἄλλοις. 1 Οὐδὲ τὴν γραφὴν Δ 72 δ ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε; ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, e > / > \ οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν yo- vias. | Ὡ AS yy \ 3 αὕτη. καὶ ἔστι θαυμαστὴ ἐν a con 5 oa » "7 ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν. 15 Καὶ ἐζή- ἊΝ cad 7 τοὺν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι, καὶ ἐφοβη- Ν Ε 2 Ν θησαν τὸν oxAov: ἐγνωσαν yap ὩΣ Ν > ἂν \ \ OTL πρὸς αὐτοὺς THY παραβολὴν Ὁ; Noe / SHEN , ΟΝ εἶπε: καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν ἀπὴλ- θον. ΄ Ν 15 Kat ἀποστέλλουσι πρὸς αὐ- , ΄“ a τὸν τινας τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῶν « ΄- Ὁ Pia > / “Πρωδιανῶν, wa αὐτὸν aypevow- / σι λογῳ. δάσκεις. a » A cape δοῦναι ἢ οὖ; REVISED VERSION. and it is ;wonderful in our eyes? 10 others. "Have ye “ποὺ even Aifov, ov|read this scripture: The stone, which the builders rejected, vhath become “the chief corner- παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο. stone; this was the Lord’s doing 11 And they sought to *lay hold of 12 him, but feared the crowd; for they knew that he had spoken the parable against them; and they left him and twent away. And they send to him "some of 13 the Pharisees, and of the Hero- dians, to catch him vby talk. πα « And” is unauthorized. Not employed by Campbell, Vulg., Eras., Beza, Castal., Iber., 5. Fr., De Wette. ° “not even ;’ Rob. (in verbo), Wesley. De Wette, | “nicht einmal ;” Bretsch., “ne quidem, maxime si in medio ora- | tione ponitur.” So (H. V.) 1 Cor. 11 : 14. See ch. 1 > οὐδὲ. P “hath become ;” ἐγενήη. : 38, note. ? a “the chief corner-stone ;’ Rob. (ἀκρο- yovavots), “ Κεφαλὴν (= wx Ps. 118 : 22) refers not to the highest point or coping, but to the head or junction of the two walls of a building.” The supplement “ stone” is taken from the ἘΠῚ: of Ps. 118 : 22. r “wonderful ;” ϑαυμαστὴ. Thom. * “Jay hold of.” κεφαλὴν γωνίας. Kend., Pechy, Wakef., Sharpe, “ Marvelous” is obsolete. See ch. 3 : 21, note. | t “went away;” ἀπῆλθον. Wakef., Sharpe, Wesley. See ch. 11 : 4, note. = “some ;” teas. Wakef., Sharpe, Dick. So often in N.T. And vwhen they came, they say 14 14 οἱ δὲ ἐλθόντες λέ- : ι : : ; 5 ὦ to him, *Teacher, we know that YONI αὐτῷ, Adarane, οἴδα- thou art true, and carest for [se ὅτι ἀληθὴς Sto EEE OR, (Boe: yno one, for thou regardest not σοί Περὶ οὐδενὸς" elo βλέπεις the person of men, but teachest EIS EP OT TOR ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ ἐπ | the way of God in truth: Is it > / « ft a ke ἀληθείας τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ δι- lawful to give tribute to Cesar, a es ΣΝ . ἔξεστι κῆνσον Καί- ον not? Shall we give or shall 15 15 yn 5 i : δῶμεν, ἢ we not give? But he, knowing \ lod en δ sat > ΄σ μὴ δώμεν; O δὲ εἰδὼς αὐτῶν {πεῖν hypocrisy, said to them, \ © / 3 » ΄ ,ὔ A τὴν υποκρισιν εἰπεν QAUTOLS, Tt >Why do ye try me? bring me a ΄ ͵ ΄ ΄ . με πειράζετε; φέρετέ μοι Onva-| penny, that I may see it. And 16 o 15 16 Οἱ δὲ ", 7 Ὲ 5 - Β ριον, Wa Low. ι 0€ ἡνεγκαν. ᾿ they brought if. And he saith v «by talk;” λόγῳ. This dative is instrumental. In the parallel, Matt. 22 :15, ἐν λόγῳ is rendered (HW. V.) “in Ais talk.” See Rob. (Adyos.) No supplements are necessary with this word, in the passage before us. Fritzsche remarks: “Beza optio- nem fecit explicandi aut ut eam suo insidiantium sermone venaren- tur ant ut eum ipsius (i. 6. Jesu) responso circumvenirent. At tertia interpretatio unice vera est: ut eum citcumyenirent collo- quio.” w “when they came ;” ἐλϑόντες. Thomson. See ch. 1 : 38, note. This word is rendered either by a participle or an active intransitive verb, in the versions of Kend., Wesley, Wakefield, Campbell, De Wette, Belg. The Vulg. has “ veniéntes ;” Hras. and Beza, “ venissent.” See ch. 4 : 38, note. - See ch. 2 x “ Teacher.” y “no one;” οὐδενός. : 22, note. : « Why do ye try me?” Τί μὲ πειράξετε; See ch.1: 13, note. Wakef., “Why are ye trying me?” So Thom THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XII. 81 KING JAMES’ VERSION. he saith unto them, Whose is this image and superscription? And they said unto him, Cesar’s. 17 And Jesus answering, said unto them, Render to Cesar the things that are Cesar’s, and to God the things that are God’s. And they maryelled at him. 18 Then come unto him the Sadducees, which say there is no resurrection ; and they asked him, saying, 19 Master, Moses wrote unto us, If a man’s brother die, and leave his wife behind him, and leave no children, that his brother should take his wife, and raise up seed unto his brother. 20 Now, there were seven brethren: and the first took a wife, and dying left no seed. 21 And the second took her, τοῖς, ᾿Απόδοτε a ss ia YUVALKa GUTOV, 20 θνήσκων οὐκ 21 GREEK TEXT. a Ν Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, Tivos ἡ εἰκὼν Ψ Ὁ εὐ» , SKN st αὕτη καὶ ἡ ἐπιγραφὴ; Οἱ de ec-| πον avt@, Καίσαρος. \ Cat a 3 > ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Inaovs εἶπεν av- Ἂν col - a Καίσαρι, καὶ ta τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ a - AS 7, ss ὅτ ἕνῃ Θεῷ. Kai ἐθαύμασαν ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ. a wv - 'S Καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι Ν Ν φ / ᾽’ὔ πρὸς αὐτὸν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνά- ὍΝ στασιν μὴ εἶναι" καὶ ἐπηρώτησαν ἊΝ IZ / αὐτὸν, λέγοντες, |? Διδάσκαλε, Led wy « ΄σ “ 37 Moons ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐὰν > \ > ΄ Ὦ τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ, καὶ κατα- ΄ γι, \ a λίπῃ γυναίκα, καὶ τέκνα μὴ ἀφῇ, “ « » > ~ Ν ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελῴος αὐτοῦ τὴν , re 9: a > a on σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελῴῳ αὐτοῦ" ε ἊΝ 3) Ν 9 Ν « ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἦσαν: καὶ ὁ ΄ Δ, “ Ν > πρῶτος ἐλαβε γυναῖκα, καὶ απο- , yw x καὶ o δεύτερος ἔλαβεν αὐτὴν, REVISED VERSION. to them, *Whose scription is this? to him, Cesar’s. swering, said to image and in- And they said And Jesus an- them, Render to Cesar the things which are Cesar’s, and to God the things which are God’s. And they wondered at him. And there come to him ‘Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection ; and they asked him, saying, ‘Teacher, ‘Moses wrote this for us, If a man’s brother ‘should die, and leave "a wife behind him, and leave no children, that his brother should take his wife and raise up offspring ‘for his brother. ‘There were seven brethren; and the first took a wife, and dying left no ‘off- spring. And the second took 21 MW Kat| - T \ ta Καίσαρος, - 8 Nie 3 ΄ και ἐξαναστή- ἀφῆκε σπέρμα: κ᾿ « Whose image and inscription 7s this?” This is the natural order of the words in our language. So Thomson. Ἐπιγραφή is rendered “ inscription,” as signifying words engraved, stamped, or written on any substance. Webster. So Kendrick, Wesley, Wakef., Campbell, Sharpe, Dick., Thom., Pechy, Rob. > “they wondered ;” étavuacav. Kend., Wakef., Campbell. See ch. 5 : 20, note. , ¢ “ Sadducees ;” Σαδδουκαῖοι. The article of the E. V. is superfluous. It is not used by Pechy, Sharpe, Campbell, Thom. No article in De Wette. ἃ « Teacher.” See ch. 4 : 38, note. © “Moses wrote this for us;” ωσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν. sentence is elliptical. This In ch. 10 : 5, the ellipsis is supplied, (IZw- ons—) ἔγραψεν ὑμῖν τὴν ἐντολὴν ταύτην. Rob. (γράφω) re- marks : “ Todgew ἐντολήν ru, to write a commandment to or for any one—with ἐντολή» implied Mark 12 : 19, Luke 20 : 28.” Bretschneider, “literis precipio, prescribo tui.” The pronoun this has been employed as the supplement, instead of the entire phrase “ this commandment,” as the reader's mind naturally refers it to the language of the precept, which follows. If is desirable to aim at conciseness, whenever a supplement is employed. ‘Huty is the dativus commodi, and is properly rendered by “ for us.” So Thom. Τ “should die.” This form of the verb accords with our present usus loquendi. _ © “a wife ;” γυναῖκα. There is no good reason for deviating from the text and inserting “his.” Pechy, Kendrick, Wakef., Sharpe, Campbell, Dick., Thom., all have “a wife.” De Wette, “ein Weib;” S. Fr., “une femme;” Belg., “cen wijf;” Iber., “ (dejare) muger.” 4 ἐς offspring ; ” Kend. Castalio, “ prolem ;” S. Fr., | postéerité ;” Rob., “by metonomy children, offspring ;” Bret- | schneider, “ proles.” “ Offspring” is employed in the E. V., 6. g., Job 21:8. Isa. 44:3; 61:9. i “for his brother ;” τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ. Thomson. These children were regarded as the offspring of the deceased brother. It is a dativus commodi. “For” is more accurate than “to.” See Deut. 25 : 5-10. σπέρμα. } “ Now,” which occurs in the E. V., is dropped as superfluous. There being nothing in the text, nor any exzgentia loci, which de- |mands it. The parallel, Matt. 22 : 25, has δὲ, and Luke 20 : 29, οὖν, which may be represented by “now,” as a continuative. But we are not warranted in giving to the Evangelists an appearance of greater harmony than that presented by the inspired text. Tyndale and Cranmer, “There were,” ete. The Geneva intro- duced the supplément “therefore,” which was taken from the “ergo” of the Vulgate. Erasmus, Castal., “Septem fratres fue- runt ;” Mont., “ Septem fratres erant ;” Iber, “ Habia siete her- manos,” ete. The reading of the Elzevir, ἑπτὰ οὖν, which is of no authority, may explain the rendering quoted from the Vulgate. See Tischend. (ὧν loco) ‘“ Now” is dropped by Wesley, Sharpe, Pechy. « offspring.” See v. 19, note. 82 KING JAMES’ VERSION. and died, neither left he any seed: καὶ and the third likewise. 22 And the seven had her, and left no seed : last of all the woman died also. 23 In the resurrection there- carey 22 @OQUTWS* 7 4 ἐσχάτη πάντων GREEK TEXT. 3 / ἊΝ ἀπέθανε, καὶ > A“ / ἀφῆκε σπέρμα: Ἂς ΕΣ » \ kat ἐλαβον αὐτὴν © c Ἂν. Ν > 3 “ , οἱ ἑπτὰ, καὶ οὐκ ἀφῆκαν σπέρμα. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XII. REVISED VERSION. her, and died, neither left he any ‘offspring: and the third likewise. And the seven took her, and left no offspring: last of all, the woman died also. In > \ ΤῚ Ν οὐδὲ αὐτὸς \ « , καὶ O Τριτος 3 4 Ν «ς ἀπέθανε και ἢ , 92 9 Ἐξ 5 , > ay, 7 ~ fore, when they shall rise, whose | γυνή. 23. ἐν τῇ οὖν ἀναστάσει, the resurrection therefore, a . ω a ΡΞ > n Ε wife shall she be of them? for the ὅταν ἀναστῶσι, τίνος αὐτῶν they rise, *to which of them seven had her to wife. 24 And Jesus answering, said | unto them, Do ye not therefore err, because ye know not the) scriptures, neither the power of | God? 25 For when they shall rise from the dead, they neither mar- ry, nor are given in marriage; but are as the angels which are in heaven. 26 And as touching the dead, that they rise; have ye not read | in the book of Moses, how in the | bush God spake unto him, saying, I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob? » δι a αὐτὴν γυναικα. τοῦ Θεοῦ; vois. 7° 2, la - X e Ν “4 ἔσται γυνή; οἱ γὰρ ἑπτὰ ἔσχον 3 a 5 col θεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Ov Ν a a Ν » / διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες \ Ν \ ἊΝ / Tas γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν 5 ͵ Ν ° OTav γὰρ ἐκ νε- κρῶν ἀναστῶσιν, οὔτε γαμοῦ- 3, > > σιν, οὔτε γαμίσκονται, ἀλλ᾽ εἰ- σὶν ὡς ἄγγελοι οἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρα- \ “ a περὶ δὲ TMV, νεκρῶν, od Z OTL ἐγείρονται, οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν a ) , 3 a ΄ τῇ βίβλῳ οσέως, ἐπὶ τῆς βά- a « iS 2 ne Ν ΄ τοῦ, ws εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ Θεὸς, λέ- \ Ν > Ni 'yov, Hyw ὃ Θεὸς ABpaap, καὶ Ss \ Ἂς ᾿ὁ Θεὸς ᾿]Ισαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ᾿]α- will she be a wife? for the seven had her sfor a wife. And Jesus answering, said to them, Do ye not therefore err, because ye know not the scriptures, nor the power of God? For when they shall rise from the dead, they neither marry, nor are given in marriage; but are Plike the angels, who are ‘in the heavens. But as to the dead, that they rise; have ye not read in the book of Moses— tat the bush—how God spoke to him, saying, I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob? He is 27 24 Kat ἀποκρι- 25 26 See v. 19, note. m“took;” ἔλαβον. So in y. 19, 20, 21. Sharpe. S. Fr., “les sept la prirent ;” De Wette, “es nahmen 1“ offspring.” sie die sieben;” Belg., “de zeven namen dezelve ;” Iber., “ los} siete la tuvieron.” “ Had” originated with Tyndale. = “to which of them will she be a wife?” τένος αὐτῶν ἔσται γυνή; The E. V. here is a solecism. Our idiom requires the above rendering. It presents the thought of the text. As an alternative rendering, “of which of them will she be wife?” Still, I regard this as harsh. It is the reading of S. Fr., De Sacy, and De Wette. Montanus, Beza, Castal., “ cujus eorum uxor?” Span. and Iber., “de cual ellos sera muger?” Syriac, 1223], jong σιν LL) (literally, “ of which of them will she be wile ?”). ° “for a wife ;” γυναῖκα. S. Fr., pour femme ;” Span., “ por muger ;” De Wette, “zum Weibe.” “For” is adopted rather than “as” (Kend.), as familiar and more ewphonous. P “jike ;” ὡς. Rob. So (E. V.) Matt. 6:29; 28:3. Mark 4:31. Acts 8:32, etc. By using “like,” we are freed from that hissing sound, which occurs so frequently in our language. 4 “angels.” As the Greek noun is anarthrous, the article of E. V. is ztalicized, as a supplement. So Wakef. τ “in the heavens.” See ch. 1:11, note. Vulg., Hras., Beza, Wesley, Pechy, | Castalio, “in ceelis;” S. Fr., “dans les cieux ;” Iber., “los cie- los ;” Belg., “ Hemelen.” * “« _at the bush—.” All later critics regard the phrase ἐπὲ ths βάτου as a reference to the section, Hxad. 3 : 2, etc., where the appearance of the Lord is related. Rob. (ἐπὶ), “on or m the section of the bush.” Fritz., “ Est enim ἐστὶ sic pervagato usu de loco dictum bey dem Dornbusche, quo loco de rubro exponit, et citandi formula vite communis negligentize consentanea.” A similar mode of citation is found in Rom. 11 : 2, ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλίᾳ τί λέγει ἡ γραφή; Bloomf., (Annotat.) : “ The sense is this; have ye not read in the book of Moses, in that place, which contains the history of the bush, that God said,” ete. De Wette, “in der Geschichte yom Dornbusche ;” Iberian, “en el libro de Moises [donde escribe] de Ja zarza.” This mode of citation was common among the Hebrews and Arabs. Some leading word of a section or chapter gives a name to the passage. See 2 Sam. 1:18, where “the bow” is the title of the lamentation of David over Saul and Jonathan (comp. v. 22, “the bow”). Thus the chapters of the Koran are named from some word or phrase, which they contain. Should it be thought that the above ren- dering will not be sufficiently perspicuous to common readers, then a supplement may be employed thus; “in the book of Moses at the place concerning the bush.” The supplement “at the place” is taken from Luke 4:17, εὗρε τόν τόπον οὗ ἣν γεγραμμένον. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 27 He is not the God of the dead, but the God of the living: ye therefore do greatly err. 28 And one of the scribes came, and having heard them reasoning together, and perceiving that he had answered them well, asked him, Which is the first command- ment of all? 29 And Jesus answered him, The first of all the commandments is, Hear, O Israel; The Lord our God is one Lord: 30 And thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and with all thy mind, and with all thy strength: this zs the first com- mandment. 31 And the second is like, namely this, Thou shalt love thy | neighbour as thyself: there is none other commandment greater than these. 32 And the scribe said unto him, Well, Master, thou hast said the truth: for there is one God; and there is none other but he: 33 And to love him with all the heart, and with all the under- standing, and with all the soul, and with all the strength, and to love his neighbour as himself, is more than all whole burnt-ofier- ings and sacrifices. KoB; 3 , ἐντολὴ; > €OTL. au σου. 99 GREEK TEXT. > Μ ‘\ "7 Οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ Θεὸς ve- “ > δ Ν os ΄ κρῶν, ἀλλὰ Θεὸς ζώντων: ὑμεῖς, τὴ Ν Ss οὖν πολυ πλανᾶσθε. 5 \ - ΡΞ “8. Καὶ προσελθὼν εἷς τῶν. / » 7 > Lol γραμματέων, ἀκούσας αὐτῶν συ- / > \ ἣν an ζητούντων, εἰδὼς ὅτι καλῶς av- ΄ > , > / τοῖς ἀπεκρίθη, ἐπηρώτησεν av- Ν i? 3 / ΄σ τὸν, Iloia ἐστὶ πρώτη πασῶν » « \ > col 29 “Ὃ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς ane , ᾽ ΄ ov ΄ > κρίθη αὐτῷ, Ore πρώτη πασῶν “ ᾽ fod 5 » ΄ τῶν ἐντολῶν, ἄκουε, ᾿]σραήλ: σι « Ν ε “ ΄ ἵν Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς / , καὶ ἀγαπήσεις Κύριον ἊΝ / If -“ An τὸν Θεὸν σου ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρ- , “ “ ΄- δίας σου καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς Ν » “ Lod / σου, καὶ ἐξ ὕλης τῆς διανοίας » “ - > ἢ σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος 4 / ’ Δ αὕτη πρωτὴ ἐντολὴ. ΄, « o / δευτέρα ὁμοία αὕτη, Ayarnoes ἊΝ « / τὸν πλησίον σου ws σεαυτόν. ΄ fo \ MeiGov τούτων ἄλλη ἐντολὴ οὐκ y ὍΣ Pa “5. BNR ΤΕ ἐστι. ~ Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ γραμ- \ "πὶ a Γ) ᾽ patevs, Καλῶς, διδάσκαλε, ἐπ᾽ » vs 5 “ 3) Ν ἀληθείας εἴπας, ὅτι εἷς ἐστι Θεὸς, Ν ’ wy yy N > ~ καὶ οὐκ ἐστιν ἄλλος πλὴν αὐτοῦ. Ὗ Ἄν» = IN > “ καὶ τὸ ἀγαπᾷν αὐτὸν ἐξ ὅλης > , c Ν » σφ “ τῆς καρδίας, καὶ ἐξ ὕλης τῆς ΄ Ν » “ “-“ συνέσεως, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυ- a Qua “ es ΄ ‘ Xs, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος, Kal ὟΝ > a Ν ,ὔ τὸ ἀγαπᾷν τὸν πλησίον ὡς ἑαυ- Ν «΄ > 4 ΄ Tov, πλεῖον ἐστι πάντων τῶν 80 REVISED VERSION. not the God of the dead tbut of the living: ye therefore do And one of the scribes came, and haying heard them reasoning together, and perceiving that he had an- |swered them well, asked him, Which is the first command- ment of all? And Jesus an- swered him, The first of all the commandments is, Hear, Ὁ Israel; The Lord our God is one Lord: and thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and with all thy mind, and with all thy strength: this zs the first commandment. And “the second, like it, zs this, Thou shalt love thy neighbor as thy- self: there is no other command- ment greater than these. And the scribe said to him, Well, Teacher, ‘thou hast spoken “truly, for xthere is One; and there is yno other besides him: and to love him with all the heart, and with all the under- standing, and with all the soul, and with all the strength, and to love ‘one’s neighbor as tone- self, is more than all the whole τῷ Co greatly err. ; 31 Ἵ καὶ 33 t “but of the living ;” ἀλλὰ ξώντων. Θεὸς is canceled by Griesb., Scholz, Fritz., Lachmann, Knapp, Tischendorf, Robinson (Harmony), and bracketed by Tittmann. It is not recognized by the Syriac or Vulgate. It is disregarded in the Versions of Sharpe, A. Camp., Thom., Dick., and Pechy. It is spurious. « “the second, like it, ἐς this;” δευτέρα ὁμοία αὕτη. Pechy. Our idiom demands an objective after “like.” Instead of αὕτη, Gr., Schott, Lachm., Knapp, Fritzsche read airy. I deem this the probable reading. In Matt. 22 : 39, we have ὁμοία αὐτῇ, which is properly rendered “like it.” Iber., “ segundo sémejante [a, el es] este ;” Beza, “secundum ili simile, hoc est.” Bloomf. (N. T.) * “truly ;” ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας. This is a periphrasis for ἀληϑῶς. Castal., “ profectd.” Rob. (ἐπὶ) Y “thou hast spoken ;” εἶπας. Sharpe. ” x “There is One.” Θεὸς (Text. Recept.) is rejected by Gries- bach, Scholz, Lachmann, Tischend., Knapp, Titt., Fritz., Bloomf. It is not recognized by Syriac. Omitted by Wesley, A. Camp., Sharpe. Noted as spurious by De Wette. Υ “no other;” ἄλλος---οὐκ. Wesley, Pechy, Wakef., Sharpe, Dick., Thom. “ None other” is obsolete. Sharpe, Pechy, Camp- * “one’s neighbor ;” τὸν “πλησίον. bell. a “ oneself ;” ἑαυτὸν. Sharpe, Campbell, Pechy. ” » “all the whole burnt-offerings ;” πάντων τῶν ὁλοκαυτωμά- των. The article should not be omitted. So Wakef., Thomson. 5. Fr., “tous les,” οἷς. ; Iberian, “ todas las,” etc.; Belg., “alle de,” etc. 84 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. GREEK TEXT. REVISED VERSION. 34 And when Jesus saw that he ὁλοκαυτωμάτων καὶ Tov θυσιῶν. | burnt-offerings and ‘the sacri- answered discreetly, he said unto |** Kal 6 J; ησοῦς ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, ὅτι fices. And when Jesus saw that 34 him, Thou art not far from the! νουνεχῶς ἀπεκρίθη, εἶπεν αὐτῷ, | he answered discreetly, he said kingdom of God. And no man Οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλείας to him, Thou art not far from after that durst ask him any ques-| τοῦ Θεοῦ. 35 And Jesus answered and temple, How say the scribes that Christ is the son of David? 36 For David himself said by | the Holy Ghost, The Lorp said | unto my Lord, Sit thou on my} right hand, till I make thine} enemies thy footstool. 37 David therefore himself, 81 calleth him Lord, and whence is | he then his son? And the common. 5 people heard him gladly. 38 And he said unto them in| his doctrine, Beware of the. scribes, which love to go in long | Ν κύριον: καὶ > - € Υ, αὐτοῦ ἡδέως. δαχῃ αὐτοῦ, “Χριστὸς υἱός ἐστι AaBid; “Ὁ αὐ- \ 53 ἴω / τὸς yap AaBie εἶπεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύ- ee , 53 ε σι, ματι τῷ Αγίῳ, Hirev ὁ Κύριος τῷ κυρίῳ μου, Κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν ἰῇ ρ τ ἐξ τ Ν > 2 / pov, €ws av θῶ τοὺς ἐχθροὺς 'σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου. «Αὐτὸς οὖν Δαβὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν πόθεν υἱὸς αὐτοῦ €OTL; Kai ὁ πολὺς ὄχλος ἤκουεν Lord, and *how ‘then is he his °S Kal ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ev τῇ δι- heard him gladly. ᾽ Ν ΄“ . . - Βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν ἰο them *inhis teaching, Beware Καὶ οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι the kingdom of God. And ¢no tion. ᾿ἐτόλμα αὐτὸν ἐπερωτῆσαι. lau! Gar: ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ‘Inaovs said, while he taught in the! ἔλεγε, διδάσκων ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, Πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς, ὅτι ὁ one durst ‘question him ‘any further. And Jesus answered 35 and said, while he taught in the temple, How say the scribes, that the Anointed is the son of David? For David himself said 36 by the *Holy Spirit, The Lord said to my Lord, Sit thou at my right hand, till I make thine David 37 therefore himself calleth him 36 enemies thy footstool. son? And the great ‘crowd And he said 38 clothing, and dove salutations in| "γραμματέων, τῶν θελόντων ἐν of the scribes, who love ‘to walk the market-places, 39 And the chief seats in the! ᾿μοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς, στολαῖς περιπατεῖν, καὶ ἀσπασ- about "ἴῃ long robes, and dove 3 nile " καὶ 7 βώ- salutations in the market-places, synagogues, and the uppermost roxabedplas ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς, and "the “ἢγβύ seats in the syna- 39 rooms at feasts : ᾿καὶ 7 πρωτοκλισίας ἐν τοῖς δεί- gogues, and Pthe “first places in © “the sacrifices ;" τῶν ϑυσιῶν. Wakef., Thomson. 5. Fr., “toutes les victimes ;” Iber., “ [todos] los sacrificios;” Belg., “de slagt-offeren.” See last note. 4 “no one;” οὐδεὶς. Pechy, Kend., Sharpe, Dick., Wakef. © “question ;” ἐπερωτῆσαι. Kend., Sharpe, Thomson. So (E. V.) Luke 23:9. S. Fr., “interroger.” Liddell, Greenf. f “any further ;” οὐκέτι. Pechy. Fritz., “amplius.” Lid- dell, Rob. The thought in the text is:—that no one, on that occa- sion, ventured to question him further. But “ after that” in the BE. V. is ambiguous, as it may signify “at any future time.” This, however, would be contrary to fact. Luke 23 : 9, Exnoora (i.e. Ἡρώδης) αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς. & « Holy Spirit.” See ch. 1 : 8, note. δ “how ;” πόϑεν. Wesley, Campbell, Dick., Wakef., Thom. Rob. (so der.) ' “then.” This is the proper place for this word. So Thom., Campbell. } “crowd.” See ch. 2 : 4, note. « “in his teaching ;” ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ. Wesley, Kendrick, Pechy, Sharpe, Campbell, “in teaching ;” Wakef., “as he was teaching ;” Castalio, “inter docendum ;” 5. Fr., dans son en- seignement ;” Iber., “en su ensenanza ;” De Wette, “in seiner Lehre.” Rob. (in loco), διδαχή. See ch. 4:2, note. As an alternative, “ when he was teaching.” 1 “to walk about ;” περιπατεῖν. Sharpe, Dickinson, Wakef. De Wette, “ welche—umherwandeln.” Rob. (in verbo.) So (E. V.) 1 Pet. 5:8. m “in long robes;” ἐν στολαῖς. Wesley, Wakefield, Sharpe, Dick., Thomson. So in the parallel, Luke 20:46. This word oecurs eight times in the N. T., and is rendered by “robes” in six instances, in the HE. V. See Rob. 2 “the. As πρωτοκαϑεδρίας is anarthrous, “the” is itali- cized for the sake of greater accuracy. Our idiom demands the article here. ° “first seats ;” πρωτοκαϑεδρίας. Sharpe, Kend., Rob. De Wette, “erste Stuhle;” S. Fr., “ premiers siéges ;” Campbell, “principal seats.” P “the.” The reason for italicizing “the” may be seen in note n on this verse. a “first places ;” πρωτοκλισίας. Kend. G.Fr., 5. Fr., De i a, THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIII. KING JAMES’ 40 Which devour houses, and for a pretence make long prayers: these shall receive greater damnation. 41 And Jesus sat over against the treasury, and beheld how the people cast money into the trea- sury: and many that were rich cast in much. 42 And there came a certain poor widow, and she threw in two mites, which make a farthing. 43 And he called wnto him his disciples, and saith unto them, Verily I say unto you, That this poor widow hath cast more in, than all they which have cast into the treasury. 44 Wor all they did cast in of their abundance: but she of her want did cast in all that she had, even all her living. VERSION. CHAP. XIII. Anp as he went out of the temple, one of his disciples saith unto him, Master, see what man- ner of stones, and what buildings are here! widows’ GREEK TEXT. 40 ΄ , ‘ mous οἱ κατεσθίοντες Tas οἰκίας τῶν χηρών, καὶ προφάσει μακρὰ προσευχόμενοι" οὗτοι λή- ψονται περισσότερον κρίμα. > a l Kat καθίσας ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς κατ- ’ὔ ΄- ’, » / έναντι τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου ἐθεώρει ΄“ yy 4 Ν πῶς ὁ ὄχλος βάλλει χαλκὸν εἰς Ν 4 τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον. καὶ πολλοὶ / ΄ 42 πλούσιοι ἔβαλλον πολλά: “ὦ > - , / Ne αν ἐλθοῦσα μία χήρα πτωχὴ ἔβαλε Ν 7 © λεπτὰ δύο, 6 ἐστι κοδράντης. » ΄ὔ Ν S καὶ προσκαλεσάμενος τοὺς μα- Ν fol , 5 Ν θητὰς αὐτοῦ, λέγει αὐτοῖς, ᾿Α μὴν , ee “ « (4 a ε λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ x lal ig / πτωχὴ πλεῖον πάντων βέβληκε a / X ’ὔ τῶν βαλόντων εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλά- / Ν co) κιον. ** πᾶντες yap ἐκ τοῦ πε- , > ΄“ yy, “ ρισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον: αὕτη A ΄ , “ ’ δὲ ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς πάν- ΄“ 53 ΝΜ “ Ν Ta ὅσα εἶχεν ἐβαλεν, ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς. \ και CHAP. XIII. KAT ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, λέγει αὐτῷ εἷς τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, Ζιδάσκαλε, ἴδε, ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκο- Sacy, “les premiéres places ;” De Wette, “ erste Platze.” word refers to the middle place in the triclintum or table-seat. See Rob. τ “ will receive.” * “greater condemnation ; So (E. V.) Luke 23 : 40. Sharpe, Wakef. ” punishment. Rob. (κρέμα.) phrase, “a heavier judgment.” t “the crowd.” See ch. 2 ot an.” : 4, note. y “a poor widow;” μέα χήρα. Thomson. Matt. 21:19, συκῆν μίαν. Jas. 4:13. περισσότερον κρέμα. Cor Adr34e ΟΠ τ 9 62, «che word obviously signifies a sentence which is to be followed by As an alternative, the idiomatic This word is really a supplement, and should be itali- eized. So in the next member of the sentence. are elliptical; εἰς τὸ γαδόφυλακίον being understood. Wickif, Wesley, Campbell, Eis sometimes has the force of our article a, an, as certain one.’ w she cast;” ἔβαλε. and ἔβαλλον». Kend., Q. S. Fr., Iber. = “out of ;” ὃν. y “whole living ; ” these cases, as it is in Wakef., Eras., Castal., See v. 41, note. Wakef., Sharpe, Campbell, Rob. ὅλον τὸν βίον. The more exact REVISED VERSION. the feasts: who devour widows’ houses, and for a pretense make these ‘will re- condemnation. And Jesus sat over against the treasury, and beheld how tthe crowd cast into the treasury : and many who were rich, cast “2 much. And there came ‘a poor widow, and ¥she cast ἐπ two mites, which make a farthing. And he called his disciples to Aim, and saith to them, Truly I say to you, that this poor widow hath cast in more than all those, who have cast into the treasury. For they all cast in *out of their abundance: but she out of her poverty cast in all that she had, even her »whole living. long prayers; ceive ‘greater money CHAP. XIII. AND as he went out of the temple, one of his disciples saith to him, Teacher, see,*what stones, and what buildings! Pechy, Wesley. Pechy. 85 42 44 This | sometimes omitted, and then εἷς may still have the force of “a ’ Stuart’s Gram. (2nd Ed.), 289, note 1. So in v.41, βάλλεε The rendering of the verb should be uniform in Belg., De Wette, rendering of ὅλο» is appropriate here, especially as πάντα (“all”) precedes it. —totam.” ὅλος. 2 “ what stones ; These passages ” In this respect, it is ποταποὶ λέϑοι. Dick., Wakef., Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva. Steine ;” Iber., “ qué piedras.” next clause is rendered “ what buildings !”—In constructions like So Vule., Beza, “ omnia—totum ;” Hras., “ omnia See Liddell, Rob., and Bretsch., articles πᾶς and Often rendered “ whole” in E. V. Kendrick, Pechy, Sharpe, De Wette, “ welche So ποταπαὶ oizodouai in the like the Hebrew snx. The Syriac Ἰξω ssi) is rendered by Murdock, “a poor “widow.” The appropriate form for “a cer- tain,” would be μέα τις. Thus, in Mark 14:51, εἷς τις νεανί- oxos, “a certain young man.” However, the pronoun τὰς is this (in English), “ what” is equivalent to “ what kind of,” “ what sort of.” “What” has thus the force of qualis. Thus, Numb. 13:18, “See the land what it zs,” i.e., “what kind of land there is.” Ὁ “buildings ;” ofxodouai. The sentence is exclamatory. No 86 KING JAMES’ VERSION. 2 And Jesus answering, said unto him, Seest thou these great buildings? there shall not be left one stone upon another, that shall not be thrown down. 3 And as he sat upon the mount of Olives, over against the temple, Peter, and James, and John, and Andrew, asked him privately, 4 Tell us, when shall these things be? and what shall be the sign when all these things shall be fulfilled? 5 And Jesus answering them, began to say, Take heed lest any man deceive you: 6 For many shall come in my | name, saying, 1 am Christ; and shall deceive many. 7 And when ye shall hear of . wars, and rumours of wars, be ye not troubled: for such things must needs be; but the end shall not be yet. 8 For nation shall rise against nation, and kingdom against king- GREEK TEXT. δομαί. * Καὶ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς ἀποκρι- \ ΄ > ΄ 2 xv] Tas μεγάλας oikodopas; ov μὴ, 3 > / AN UG a 2 \ ἢ ἀφεθῇ λίθος ἐπὶ λίθῳ, ὃς ov μὴ. ἀρ ora καταλυθῇ. “ Καὶ καθημένου av- “- > KX Ε ΄σ » an Tov εἰς TO ὅρος τῶν ᾿᾿βλαιῶν KaT- | / a c - 3 / > ἔναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ἐπηρώτων αὐ- ἊΝ >> »9/ , Wed ee tov Kat ἰδίαν Π]έτρος καὶ ᾿]άκω- ened) ΄ Nees , Bos καὶ Iwavyns καὶ Avdpeas, | ΝΣ ΧΕ ΝΥ ͵ a Ε | * ξἰπὲ ἡμῖν, wore ταῦτα ἔσται; Ν ΄ Ν im Ψ Σ | Kal TL TO σημεῖον ὁταν μέλλῃ 4 a ΄σ 5 c πάντα ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι; ° O Vo? ~~ > Ν » “ 5᾽ | δὲ Inaovs ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς np- | ΄ ΄ , | ξατο λέγειν, Βλέπετε μή τις c fod 7. 6 X x ὑμᾶς πλανὴησῃ. πολλοὶ yap ἰὼν ΄ BEN cence 12 ΄ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνοματί μου, ΄ “ Larner » λέγοντες, Orr ἐγώ εἰμι: καὶ | \ , Time, | 'πολλοὺς πλανὴησουσιν. ὅταν δὲ > / / Se? Ν | (O€ ἀκούσητε πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς. / \ ΄σ lal Ν πολέμων, μὴ θροεῖσθε: δεῖ γὰρ | ΄ > > " Ν ΄ὔ γενέσθαι: ἀλλ οὔπω TO τέλος. 29 , \ ” IN Oe Σ᾿ ιγερθήσεται yap ἔθνος ἐπὶ €0- Ν 3 » to 72 / ] θεὶς εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Βλέπεις ταύτας THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIII. REVISED VERSION. And Jesus answering said to him, Seest thou these great buildings? there «will not be left one stone on another, | which will not be thrown down. And as he sat on the mount of Olives, over against the temple, Peter, and James, and John, and Andrew asked him privately, Tell us, when will these things be? and what “οὐ be the sign when all these things are tabout to be fulfilled? And Jesus an- swering them began to say, Take heed lest ‘any one ‘should deceive you. For many "will come in my name, saying, ‘I am ‘ihe, and will deceive many. And when ye shall hear of |wars, and rumors of wars, *be not troubled, for hese things |™must come to pass; but the end “is not yet. For nation will rise against nation, and 2 , vos, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν: kingdom against kingdom: and supplement is necessary. Kend., Wesley, Vulg., Hras., Castal., S. Fr., Iber., Ital. this by “are here.” ¢ « will.” So Pechy, Kend., Sharpe, The supplement of the Τὰ. V. originated in that of Beza, “%sta sznt.” Sharpe, Thom., Wiclif, Wakef. ' «Tam he;” ἐγώ Vulg., 3 Iber., “ Yo soi;” De Tyndale rendered Wakef., Dick. Camp- So Kendrick, Wesley, Campbell, Dickinson, Thomson, Sharpe, εἶμι. Wette, “Ich bin es.” Kend., Pechy, Sharpe, Wakefield. Mont., “Ego sum;” S. Fr., “ C’est moi qui le suis ;” So (in language bell. a “will be.” Campbell, Dick., Thom., Sharpe. demands “ will” rather than “ shall.” Present usage ° “about to be fulfilled?” μέλλῃ--- συντελεῖσθαι; Although in many cases μέλλω, with the infinitive of another verb, gives that verb the sense of the simple future; it seems here to have its radical signification, “about to do” or “be.” So Kendrick. Rob., μέλλω. Beza, “ quando futurum est ut hee omnia finem habeant ;” Castalio, “ quod signum significabit hee perficienda omnia?” Iber., “cuando todas ellas van a cumplisse?” The colloquial phrase, “are going to be fulfilled,” expresses the thought exactly. ” f “any one;” zs. Rob., Kend., Sharpe. πλανήσῃ. This is more appropriate than ” ® “should deceive ; the present subjunctive. h «will come ;” ἐλεύσονται. Where the language is predic- tive, rather than authoritative, “ will” is the proper auxiliary. This principle is adopted through the residue of this chapter. which refers to Christ) E. V., John 8 : 24, 28; 13:19. Though the reference is obvious, still “he” is most exact as a supple- ment. } “ will deceive.” See v. 6, note. : k “)e not troubled.” The nominative “ye” is omitted, in conformity with our usus loquendi. So Kend., Wesley, Dick., Thom. 1 “ these things.” Sharpe, Pechy, Thom. This supplement is authorized by Luke 21:9, det γὰρ ταῦτα γενέσθαι (HK. V., “these things.”) Wulg., “ hee ;” Castalio, “ ea.” ™ “must come to pass ;” δεῖ---γενέσϑιαι. So parallels (E. V.) Matt. 24: 6, and Luke 21:9. Pechy. Vulg., Erasmus, Beza, Mont., Castal., “ oportet fieri ;” Belg., “moet geschieden ;” De Wette, “ muss geschehen.” 2 «7s not yet;” οὔπω (τό τέλος). So (Εἰ. V.) Matt. 24 : 6. Wesley, Sharpe, Wakef., Kend., Pechy, Camp., Thom. Vulg., Eras., Mont., Oastal., “nondum finis;” Belg., “nog en is het einde niet ;” De Wette, “noch ist nicht das Ende ;” Iber., “ no [es] aun el fin.” THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIII. 87 KING JAMES’ VERSION. dom: and there shall be earth- quakes in divers places, and there shall be famines, and troubles:|. these are the beginnings of sor- rows. 9 But take heed to yourselves: for they shall deliver you up to councils; and in the synagogues ye shall be beaten: and ye shall be brought before rulers and kings for my sake, for a testimony against them. 10 And the gospel must first be published among all nations. 11 But when they shall lead you, and deliver you up, take no thought beforehand what ye shall speak, neither do ye premeditate : but whatsoever shall be given you in that hour, that speak ye: for it is not ye that speak, but the Holy Ghost. 12 Now, the brother shall be- tray the brother to death, and the father the son: and children shall GREEK TEXT. lA A ΤᾺ καὶ ἔσονται σεισμοὶ κατὰ τόπους, καὶ ἔσονται λιμοὶ καὶ ταραχαί. 9 > το fol , ἀρχαὶ ὠδίνων ταῦτα. Βλέπετε Toe, lod 7 ΄΄ δὲ ὑμεῖς ἑαυτοὺς. παραδώσουσι \ . / . yap ὑμᾶς εἰς συνέδρια, καὶ εἰς \ , δὴν SEs συναγωγὰς δαρήσεσθε, καὶ ἐπὶ « / Ἂν ’,ὔ /, ἡγεμόνων Kat βασιλέων σταθη- y > “- > ΄ σεσθε ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ, εἰς μαρτύριον ΄ ΄ Ν ἐδ αὐτοῖς" | καὶ εἰς πάντα τὰ ἐθνὴ a ᾿ς tol Ν δεῖ πρῶτον κηρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγ- ΄ Js, \ > ΄ γέλιον. ὅταν δὲ ἀγάγωσιν ΄σ / \ ὑμᾶς παραδιδόντες, μὴ προμε- a / i \ ριμνᾶτε Ti λαλήσητε, μηδὲ μελε- ΄σ ’ > A 3X = e > δι τᾶτε: ἀλλ᾽ ὃ ἐὰν δοθῃ ὑμῖν ἐν > , = tA - cad exe τῇ Ὡρᾷ, τοῦτο λαλεῖτε: : eee ΚΣ i ov yap ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, Ν Ν - Ν “ ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ᾿ἁγιον. 9 us \ S 12 παραδώσει δὲ ἀδελφὸς ἀδελ- Ν 4 \ ΄ φὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκ- / ,ὔ νον" καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ° “various places; κατὰ τόπους. is now used only in legal phraseology. P “ commotions tumult.” Eras., “ Fritzsche, “ purturbationes ;” Iber. Kend., ;” tagazai. Campbell, Pechy, Kend. Rob. (in loco), “'Tropically of popular excitement, or sti, commotion, turbationes ;” Mont., Castal., Beza, “ turbe ;” , “ tumultos.” REVISED VERSION. there will be earthquakes in various places, and there will be famines, and rcommotions: these are the beginnings of sor- rows. But take heed to your- selves, for they will deliver you up to councils, and ye will be beaten in the synagogues: and ‘ye will stand before rovernors and kings for my sake, ‘for a testimony to them. And the gospel must first be published among all tthe na- tions. But when they shall lead you, and deliver you up, “be not anxious beforehand as to what ye shall speak, ‘nor vdo ye meditate: but whatever shall be given you in that hour, that *speak ; for it is not ye, who speak, but the »Holy Spirit. Now the brother will deliver up the brother to death, and the father the child: and 10 12 Dick. “ Divers” | 6 : 11, note. talio, “ sit eis testimonio ;” Sharpe, “ in testimony to them.” ” t “the nations ; naciones ;”” I should prefer τὰ ἔϑνη. Belg., “ de volken.” « “be not anxious beforehand ;” Pechy, Thomson. Iber., “ x = MeN προμεριμνᾶτε. The v Vulg., Mont., Eras., “in testimonium illis ;” Cas- las erb “tumults” here, but for the fact, that it is the rendering of ϑορύ- Bos, Matt. 27:24, Mark 5 : 38, Acts 21 : 34, and of azara- στασίαι, 2 Cor. 6:5, and 12:20. In more modern phrase- ology, “ insurrections” would be a proper rendering of ταραχαΐ. a “ye will stand ;” σταϑήσεσϑε. “The pass. 180 fut. of ἔστημε is intransitive, and is used as the middle (Rob., in verbo), hence its signification ‘to stand.’” Bretsh., after noticing the tenses used intransitively (among which is the one before us), gives this definition, “ colloco me, i. e., sto.” Vulgate, “ stabitis. So Matt. 12 : 26, οὐ σταϑήσεται, E. V., “ shall not stand ;” Luke 11 :18 In the parallel, Matt. 10 : 18, “ ye shall be brought” is the ren- dering of ἀχϑήσεσϑε (properly, “ ye shall be led.”) So in νυ. 11 of this chapter, ἀγάγωσεν is rendered (Εἰ. V.) “ they shall lead.” τ “ governors ;” ἡγεκόνων. The usual rendering in the E. V. So in parallel (E. V.) Matt.10:18. Pechy, Campbell, Wakef., Dick. * “for a testimony to them ;” εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς. Wesley, Pechy, Thomson, Q. S. Fr., “ pour leur étre en témoignage ;” Ther., “ para [ἀπὸ les deis] testimonio 4 ellos.” So this phrase is rendered (E. V.) ch.1:44. Matt.8:4. Luke 5:14. See ch. κερεμνάω is defined by Rob. and Liddell “to be anxious,” “ to take anxious thought,” “to be anxious about.” Bretsch. (προ- ueoruvaw) in loco, “ne antea solliciti sitis ;” Campbell, “ have no anxiety beforehand ;” Thom., “ be not solicitous beforehand.” The phrase, “ take no thought beforehand,” fails to present the thought in the text, with exactness, especially to common readers. Beza, “ne solliciti estote ;” S. Fr., “ne vous inquietez pas d’ad- vance.” ” Y “nor;” μηδὲ. Kend., Pechy. Webster remarks: “In the last member of a negative sentence, nezther is improperly used for -| nor; for not, in the first clause, refers only to that clause, and the second negative refers only to the second clause.” ~ “ (nor) do ye meditate ;” (μηδὲ) μελετᾶτε. Eras., Fritzsche, “neque meditemini;” S. Fr., “ne le meditez point ;” Iber., “ ni [lo] mediteis.” “ Premeditate ” is the proper rendering, not of μελετᾶτε, but of προμελετᾶν (E. V., “ to medi- tate before”) in the parallel Luke 21 : 14. The E. V. confounds these verbs. Pechy, Rob. x “speak.” The nominative “ye” Sharpe. y “ Holy Spirit.” is superfluous. Kendrick, See ch. 1 : 8, note. 88 KING JAMES’ VERSION. rise up against their parents, and shall cause them to be put to death. 13 And ye shall be hated of all men for my name’s sake: but he that shall endure unto the end, the same shall be saved. 14 But when ye shall see the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet, standing where it ought not, (let him that readeth understand,) then let them that be in Judea flee to the moun- tains: 15 And let him that is on the house-top not go down into the house, neither enter therein, to take anything out of his house: 16 And let him that is in the field not turn back again for to take up his garment. 17 But wo to them that are with child, and to them that give suck in those da ys! 18 And pray ye that your flight be not in the winter. 19 For in those days shall be affliction, such as was not from GREEK TEXT. ἐπὶ γονεῖς, Kat θανατώσουσιν av- tous: 15 καὶ ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου: ὁ δὲ ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται. 14" Oray δὲ ἴδητε τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως, τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ Δανιὴλ τοῦ προφήτου, ἑστὸς ὅπου οὐ δεῖ: (ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτο") τότε οἱ ἐν τῇ ᾿Πουδαίᾳ φευγέτωσαν εἰς τὰ ὄρη: “ὃ ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος μὴ καταβάτω εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν, μηδὲ εἰσελθέτω dapat τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ: 16 kal ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν ὧν μὴ ἐπι- στρεψάτω͵ εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, ἄραι τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ. | οὐαὶ δὲ ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις καὶ ταῖς θη- λαζούσαις ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέ- pas. 8 προσεύχεσθε δὲ ἵνα μὴ γένηται ἡ φυγὴ ὑμῶν χειμῶνος. 9 ἔσονται γὰρ αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι θλίψις, οἵα οὐ γέγονε τοιαύτη * “against parents ;” ἐπὲ γονεῖς. (from Tyndale) is superfluous. Sharpe, Pechy. a» - VO τϑσισι 5] (parentes suos). 4 » “cause them to be put to death ;” ϑανατώσουσιν. verb is connected to (ἐπαναστήσονται) Wesley, Wakef. b « by a © “alls” πάντων. cba στο. Belg., “alle ;” De Wette, “ von allen.” 4 “he will be saved ;” οὗτος σωϑήσεται. Wesley. Οὗτος is frequently rendered by “he” in the ΕἸ. V., as in Matt. 13: etc. obsolete. 22, 295. Luke 1 : 32; 20: ¢ “that readeth.” This verb, with its relative, standing in the middle of a sentence, should be separated from the sentence by commas. So Wakef., Dick. f “those in Judea ;” Camp. “That be” is superfluous. Ε «let not him that is,” etc. The supplement “ thez” No supplement in Wakefield, “Their” seems to have originated in the Syriac} « “will rise up against,” | in. the auxiliary “ will” should not be repeated. Kend., Pechy, Dick., Sharpe, Thom. Sharpe, Pechy, Kend., Thom., Dickinson, Wakef. G. Fr. and S. Fr., “tous ;” Span. and Iber., “ todos ;” It corresponds with present usage, while “the same” is οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ. Kendrick, Pechy, This order, which accords with THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIII. REVISED VERSION. children will rise up ‘against parents, and ‘cause them to be put to death. And ye will be hated »by call for my name’s sake: but he, who shall endure to the end, “he will be saved. But when ye shall see the abomination of desolation, spok- en of by Daniel, the prophet, standing where it ought not (let him, ‘that readeth, under- stand,) then let ‘those in Judea flee to the mountains: and let 15 not him, that is on the house- top, go down into the house, ‘nor enter ! to take any thing out of this house: and let not him, that is in the field, return back *to take his garment. But woe to those who are with child, and to those who suckle in those days! But "pray that 18 your flight be not in the winter.. For in those days there will be 19 affliction, such as chath not 17 Dick. nor. our usual usus loquend?, is that of Sharpe, Wesley, Thomson, ” See v. 11, note. i “therein,” the supplement of the E. V., is useless after As this | “ enter.” a clause. S. Fr., Iber., Eras., So Sharpe, Pechy, Kendrick, Sharpe, 28, 30. John 4:47,} 1. “who suckle ;” suckle,” “ give suck.” obsolete. = Βαΐ ;” dé ’ n “ pray’ with the text. ) “Jet not him that is,” ete. k “to take 5” ἄραέ. (E. V.) in the first clause of this passage. formly, in both instances, by De Wette, S. Fr., Vulg., Erasmus, Beza, Castal., Belg., Ital., Span., Iber. lation of grammatical propriety. tats ϑηλαζούσαις. So Liddell. προσεύχεσϑε. Dick. De Wette, “ Betet.” Our usage is like that of the Greek, with an imperative where there is no emphasis. ° “hath not been ;” This verb is the exact equivalent of εἰσελϑέτω, “ go The mind readily supplies “ No supplement employed by Beza. house,” from the preceding Wakefield, Dick., Pechy, Pechy, Thom. See ν. 15, note. Kend., Pechy. So this verb is rendered It is rendered uni- “For to take” is a vio- Robinson, ϑηλάξω, “ to “To, give suck” is entirely So parallel, Matt 24 : 20. Kend., Pechy, Camp., Wakefield, “Ye” is omitted, in conformity Pechy, Sharpe, Kendrick, οὐ γέγονε. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. the beginning of the creation which God created unto this time, neither shall be. 20 And except that the Lord had shortened those days, no flesh should be saved: but for the elect’s sake, whom he hath chosen, he hath shortened the days. 21 And then, if any man shall say to you, Lo, here is Christ; or lo, he is there; believe him not. 22 For false Christs, and false prophets shall rise, and shall shew signs and wonders, to seduce, if it were possible, even the elect. 23 But take ye heed: behold, Ι haye foretold you all things. 24 But in those days, after that tribulation, the sun shall be dark- ened, and the moon shall not give her light, 25 And the stars of heaven shall fall, and the powers that are in heaven shall be shaken. 26 And then shall they see the 89 GREEK TEXT. > “ / 6. » ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως ἧς ἔκτισεν ὁ X o -“ fal Ν Θεὺς, ἕως τοῦ νῦν, καὶ οὐ μὴ Ye 20 Ἂ » \ ras » νηται. καὶ εἰ μὴ Κύριος ἐκο- ro Ν € / ? Ἂ » ’ oBwae τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώ- a , > Ν a A θη πᾶσα σάρξ: ἀλλὰ διὰ τοὺς 3 Ν A 3 / 3 / ἐκλεκτοὺς ods ἐξελέξατο, ἐκολό- \ ἘΠῚ ΤΡ Ὁ FN / βωσε Tas ἡμέρας. Kai rote 37 Cia ” > \ - ε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, Ιδοὺ, ὧδε ὁ XG Ν Xx ἰδ Ν 3 - Ν ριστὸς, ἢ ἰδοὺ, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πι- 2° ΄ \ στεύσητε. “2 ἐγερθήσονται yap , Ὗ A ψευδόχριστοι καὶ ψευδοπροφῆ- / r ται, καὶ δώσουσι σημεῖα καὶ τέ- Ν Ν “ para, πρὸς τὸ ἀποπλανᾷν, εἰ Ν Ν 4 δυνατὸν, καὶ τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς. .)} € - Ἂ; , Ἁ “Ὁ ὑμεῖς δὲ βλέπετε: ἰδοὺ, προεί- “ ’ pyka ὑμῖν πάντα. “ ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐν > / ΄σ ε , \ A ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις, μετὰ τὴν θλίψιν ἐκείνην, ὃ TAL - ἣν, ὃ ἥλιος σκοτι ’ « , 3 , στήσεται, καὶ ἡ σελήνη οὐ do- Ν ΄ “ - σει τὸ φέγγος αὐτῆς, “ καὶ οἱ , - 3 -ζΓ ΝΜ ἀστέρες τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἔσονται ἐκ- ’ πίπτοντες, καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ 3 cot ΄“ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσονται. 20 Ν / »” Ν XN ΄ καὶ τότε ὄψονται τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ REVISED VERSION. been from the beginning of the creation, which God created, Ptill now, ¢nor ever will be. And ‘except the Lord had 20 shortened ‘the days, no flesh twould be saved: but for the sake of the elect, whom he hath chosen, he hath shortened the days. And then if “any one 21 shall say to you, ‘Behold, here is “the Anointed, or, Behold, he is there: believe «it not. For 22 yfalse anointed ones, and false prophets will rise, ‘and show signs and wonders, to seduce, *if possible, even the elect. But 23 take ye heed: behold, I have foretold you all things. But in 24 those days, after that *affliction, the sun will be darkened, and the moon will not give her light, and the stars of heaven 25 will fall, and the powers that are ‘in the heavens will be shaken. And then they will 26 Wakef., Campbell. 8. Fr., “il n’y en a point eu.” The perfect should have its usual force here. ” ἃ “any one ; τες. Wakef., Kend., Dick. Sharpe. Vulg. Eras., Beza, Castal., “ (si) quis.” P “till now ;” ἕως τοῦ νῦν. Sharpe, Pechy. Belg.,“ nu toe ;” De Wette, “bis jetzt;” Iber., “hasta ahora;” Dan., “ indtil nu.” 4 “nor ever ;” καὶ od μὴ. Wakefield. In the parallel, Matt. 24 : 21, οὐδ᾽ οὐ μὴ is rendered in Εἰ. V., “no, nor ever.” In the passage before us, καὶ is properly translated as a negative con- nective (see Rob., καὶ), while od μὴ following it, has the em- phatic force of “at all,” “by any means,” or “ever.” De Wette, “und ferner nicht seyn wird.” “ Neither” does not present the emphatic negative of the text. Dick., “nor will ever occur ;” Campbell, “ nor—ever.” τ “that,” after “ except,” is superfluous. Omitted by Wesley, Kend., Sharpe. s “the days;” τὰς ἡμέρας. The article is unnecessarily changed to a pronoun in the E. V. It should be retained, and rendered “ the,” as at the end of the verse, where τὰς ἡμέρας is repeated. So Pechy, Sharpe. De Wette, “die Tage;” Belg., “de dagen ;” Iber., “los dias.” There are very few instances where the article can be translated by the demonstrative ; and nothing but perspicuity will permit this license. t “would be saved ;” ἄν ἐσώϑη. Kend., Sharpe, Pechy. v “ Behold ;” Ἰδοὺ. restricted to poetry. ¥ “the Anointed.” See ch. 8 : 29, note. x “it” This is the supplement in parallel, Matt. 24 : 23. So Wesley, Pechy, Campbell, Dick. y “false anointed ones;” φευδόχριστοι. See ch. 8 : 29, note The phrase “ anointed ones” occurs (EH. V.) Zech. 4 : 14. = “and show.” As “show” is coupled to “ will arise,” it is unnecessary to repeat the auxiliary. The cases where, in these constructions, the auxiliary is demanded, are emphatic. Pechy and Thom. omit the auxiliary. Rob., Dickinson, Pechy. “Lo” is now ® “if possible ;” εἰ δυνατὸν. Campbell. Ὁ ὡ affliction ;” ϑλέψω. So (KE. V.) ch.4:17; 13:19. Acts 7:10, etc. Wakef., Kend., Campbell. “ Tribulation” is, to say the least, obsolescent. ¢ “in the heavens;” ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. Wesley, Thomson, Pechy, Sharpe. G. Fr. and 8. Fr., “dans les cieux ;” Iber., “en los cielos.” See ch. 1 : 11, note. Wesley, Kend., Dick., Sharpe, 90 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. Son of man coming in the clouds with great power and glory. 27 And then shall he send his angels, and shall gather together his elect from the four winds, from the uttermost part of the earth to the uttermost part of heaven. 28 Now learn a parable of the fig-tree: When her branch is yet tender, and putteth forth leaves, ye know that summer is near: 29 So ye in like manner, when ye shall see these things come to pass, know that it is nigh, even at the doors. 30 Verily I say unto you, that this generation shall not pass, till all these things be done. 31 Heaven and earth shall pass away: but my words shall not pass away. 92 But of that day and that GREEK TEXT. 7ὔ , ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἐν νεφέλαις κ , = RRs μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης. 9 ΄ a \ ΄ Ἵ καὶ τότε ἀποστελεῖ τοὺς ἀγγέ- - 4 \ λους αὐτοῦ, Kal ἐπισυνάξει τοὺς \ a a ΄ ἐκλεκτοὺς αὐτοῦ ἐκ τῶν τεσσά- / > + = oc ρων ἀνέμων, amr ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ. Ν \ lo “ , 8° Amo δὲ τῆς συκῆς μάθετε Ν in a 3. Ὁ A by τὴν παραβολὴν: ὅταν αὐτῆς ἤδη A ΄ ε N ΄ \ ὁ κλάδος ἁπαλὸς γένηται, καὶ ἐκφυῇ τὰ φύλλα, γινώσκετε ὅτι ἐγγὺς τὸ θέρος ἐστίν: 39 καὶ ὑμεῖς, ὅταν ταῦτα ἴδητε γινό- ΄ 7 , μενα, γινώσκετε OTL ἐγγύς ἐστιν Sans / 0» X Ἑ econ ἐπὶ θύραις. «μὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, va > X ΄ « Ν iA OTL οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη, e Vs a / μέχρις οὗ πάντα ταῦτα γένηται. s \ ΄ a Ἵ δ᾽ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῇ παρελεύ- ε \ / > \ οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου ov μὴ , παρέλθωσι. ag Ν col / 5. Περὶ δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης οὕτω σονται" REVISED VERSION. see the Son of man coming ‘in clouds with great power and glory. And then he will send forth his angels, and gather to- gether his elect from the four winds, ‘from the end of earth ‘to the end of heaven. Now learn ‘the parable of the fig- tree: When *its branch ‘now Jbecometh tender, and *putteth forth 1the leayes, ye know that ™the summer is near: so also, when ye shall see these things "coming to pass, know that Phe is snear rat the doors. *Truly I say to you, that this generation will not pass away, till all these things tshall have come to pass. Heaven and earth 31 will pass away: but my words will not pass away. But *con- 32 28 29 30 ” 4 “jn clouds ;” ἐν νεφέλαις. Wette, “in Wolken.” by the text. ° “from the end of the earth ;” az’ ἄκρου γῆς. Pechy, Rob. “ Uttermost” is obsolete. “from the extremity,” etc. Kend. 7 “to the end of heaven ;” ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ. “the extremity,” ete. Sharpe, Pechy, Thomson. The article of the E. V. is not authorized Alternative rendering, De| Matt. 24 : 32. folia.” 1 “the ;” τὰ. Wakefield, | De Wette, “ die.” ” m «the summer ; Alternative, “Veéte.” See Rob., ἐκφύω. Wakef., Sharpe, Pechy. Alternative rendering, “ its.” often being = the possessive pronoun. τὸ ϑέρος. Wakef. De Wette, “der Sommer ; Beza, “ germinat folia ;’’ Erasmus, “ produxerit Liddell. Buttm., 2114, pia. Tber., “ las (hojas) ;” The article Pechy, Campbell, Thomson, ” Tber., “el estio;” S. Fr., = “the parable ;” τὴ» παραβολὴν. Sharpe. De Wette, “das Gleichniss ;” 5. Fr., “cette parabole;” Belgic, “deze gelijk- nisse ;” Wakef., “the comparison.” The article should not be omitted, as has been done in the E. V._ Iber., “ el simil.” h “its;” αὐτῆς. Pechy, Kend., Wesley, Camp., Dick., Thom. Our usus loquendi demands the neuter gender. ἤδη. So (H. V.) Matt. 3:10. Mark 4 : 37; Kend., Wesley, Wakef., Wiclif, Geneva, Liddell, { « now a 11 1 etc. Rob. } “becometh ;” γένηται. Campbell, Thom., Pechy. S. Fr., “ses rameaux deviennent.” The radical sense of the verb (fieri,) is appropriate. x “putteth forth.” “Exvjj in the Text. Recept. is 2nd aorist subj. In this tense, the verb is intransitive, so that the rendering would be, “ the leaves put forth.” I do not change the rendering of the ἘΠ. V., because the true reading is ἐχφύῃ, present subj., in which the verb is transitive. So Scholz, Knapp, Tittm., Lach., Tisch., Theile, Rob. (Harmony) read ἐκφύῃ. So Text. Recept., » “coming to pass;” γενόμενα. Wakefield, Pechy, Thom., Scholef. The participial construction is also adopted by Sharpe. P “he.” Wesley, Kend., Pechy, Wakef., Campbell. Beza, “alum ;” Tber., “ οἱ Hyo del Hombre.” 'That this is the proper supplement, seems clear from vy. 21, 26. 4 “near ;” ἐγγύς. Sov. 28. Parallel, Matt. 24 : 33. Pechy, Kend., Campbell. This word is preferable—euphonie gratia. τ The supplement “ even” is unnecessary. It has been omitted by Kend., Pechy. Nothing corresponding to it is found in De Wette, Belg., Iber., S. Fr., Span., Mi Eras. “ Eyen” was introduced bp Tyndale. 2 “Truly.” See ch. 3 : 28, note. t “shall have come to pass; "γένηται. Scholef., Green (Gr), p- 318. This verb is used in the sense of “take place,” “ occur.” Beza, “ factee sunt ;” Castal., “ fient ;” S. Fr., “arrivent.” “Come to pass” is an ordinary rendering of this verb, in the Τῇ. V. “Shall haye” is inserted, as the reference to the future is obvious. ἃ “concerning ;” περὶ (with genit.) Kend., Thom. Rob. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIII. KING JAMES’ VERSION. hour knoweth no man, no, not the angels which are in heaven, neither the Son, but the Father. 33 Take ye heed, watch and pray: for ye know not when the time is. 34 For the Son of man is asa man taking a far journey, who left his house, and gave authority to his servants, and to every man his work; and commanded the porter to watch. 35 Watch ye therefore: for ye know not when the master of the house cometh, at even, or at mid- night, or at the cock-crowing, or in the morning: 36 Lest coming suddenly, he find you sleeping. 37 And what I say unto you, I say unto all, Watch. 33 Βλέπετε, / προσεύχεσθε: ἢ PARE as vias, ἢ πρωΐ: 7 ρηγορεῖτε. GREEK TEXT. Ν = “ > Ν 3 yor καὶ τῆς Wpas, οὐδεὶς οἰδεν, οὐδὲ οἱ «ἄγγελοι οἱ ἐν οὐρανῷ, οὐδὲ ὁ υἱὸς, εἰ μὴ ὁ πατήρ. > 7 \ οὐκ οἴδατε yap ,ὔ « / 5 ποτε ὁ καιρὸς ἐστιν. ᾽ / 2 Ν ἣν ? Opwros ἀπόδημος ἀφεὶς τὴν οἱ- - \ 5 / κίαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ δοὺς Tots δούλοις ᾿ ΄ x 7 αὐτοῦ τὴν ἐξουσίαν, Kal ἑκάστῳ Ν 4 ~ cal r TO ἔργον αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῷ θυρωρῷ ἐνετείλατο ἵνα γρηγορῇ. Ν γορεῖτε οὖν: οὐκ οἴδατε γὰρ πότε ὁ κύριος τῆς. οἰκίας ἔρχεται, ὀψὲ, duns εὕρη ὑμᾶς καθεύδοντας. TER \ ε΄ “ο- , > / a δὲ ὑμῖν λέγω, πᾶσι λέγω, 91 REVISED VERSION. cerning that day ‘or hour knoweth *no one, ynot even the angels, who are in heaven, ‘nor the Son, sbut the Father only. *Take heed, watch and pray: for ye know not when the time is. cAs a man ‘going abroad, who left his house, and gave authority to his servants, and ‘to each his work; and com- manded the porter to watch. ‘Watch therefore: for ye know not when the master of the house cometh, at evening, or at midnight, or ‘at cock-crowing, or in the morning: lest coming suddenly, he "should find you sleeping. And what I say to 37 you, I say to all, Watch. “ N ἀγρυπνεῖτε και Bt Os a= ” γρη- ἢ ᾿ἀλεκτοροφω- ὃ μὴ ἐλθὼν ἐξαί- * περὶ (cum genit.), “ περὲ cum genit. is used only tropically, about, concerning, respecting.” τ “or.” Instead of καὶ of the Text. Recept., Knapp, Tittm., Lachm., Scholz, Tischendorf, Rob. (Harmony), Fritz., Bloom- field (N. T.) have 7. Bloomfield says: “ This (for the common reading καὶ) is found in the most ancient MSS., Versions, and Fathers, and is received by almost every Editor, from Wetstein to Scholz. Compare Acts 1 : 7, Οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστε γνῶναι χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς. Wesley, Sharpe, Dick., Campbell have “ or.” Vulg., “vel; De Wette, “ oder.” w “hour.” The supplement “that” is unnecessary before “hour.” It has been dropped by Wakef., Sharpe, Pechy, Cran., Geneva. Nothing corresponding to it is found in Iber., Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castalio. x “no one;” οὐδεὶς. Wesley, Kend., Wakef., Dick., Sharpe. Tberian, “nadie ;” S. Fr., “nul;” Belgic, “ niemand ;” Italian, “niuno ;” Dan., “ Ingen.” ” 7 y “not even;” οὐδὲ. Wakef., Dickinson, Kend. -Iber., “ne aun;” De Wette, “auch nicht ;” Erasmus, Beza, Castal., “ ne— quidam.” Rob., οὐδὲ, “ specially, not even, not so much as.” τ “nor, οὐδὲ. Robinson, “ In a continued negative, at the be- ginning of a subsequent clause, “nor.” So Sharpe, Pechy, Thom., Kend., Wakef. See v. 11, note. * “but the Father only ;” εἰ μὴ ὃ πατήρ. The supplement “only” is taken from Matt. 24 : 37, ef μὴ ὁ πατήρ μου μόνος. The sentence is incomplete and harsh, without it. So Wakef., Tyndale, Cran., Geneva. De Wette, “sondern nur der Vater ;” Luther, “ sondern allein der Vater ;” Castalio, “sed tantim Pa- ter ;” Eras., “sed solus Pater ;” S. Fr., “mais le Pére seul ;” G. Fr., “ mais mon Pére seul ;” Iber., “ sino el Padre [solo].” b «ake heed ;” Βλέπετε. The nominative is unnecessarily expressed in the H. V. We write it, as the Greeks did, only for the sake of emphasis. Omitted by Kend., Wesley, Pechy, Dick., Wakef., Camp., Thom., Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneya. ¢ “As a man,” ete. The large supplement, “For the Son of man is,” does not seem to be necessary. The mind of the reader supplies the thought from the context, i. e., “ the departure of the Son of man, the duties enjoined on his servants, and his return at an unexpected time, are like the departure and return of the master of a family,” ete. No supplement is employed by Pechy, Kend., Sharpe, Camp., Belg., Luther, De Wette, Span., 5. Fr., Tyndale, Cranmer. The supplement was copied by the E. V. from Tyndale. It originated with Beza, “ Nam filius hominis ita est ut,” ete. Eras. and Castalio have no supplement. Should it be deemed important to insert any thing, I suggest, “It zs as when a man,” ete. “It is” would be seine referred to all the circumstances noticed by the Saviour. ἃ «going abroad ;” ἀπόδημος. Kend., Rob., Liddell. This idiomatic phrase corresponds accurately with ἀστόδημος. Bret- schneider, “ peregre abiturus ;” G. Fr., “ allant dehors ;” Syriac, — (who went abroad); Heb. N. T., 202 "% (who went forth). ; e “to 680} ;" ἑκάστῳ. Kendrick, Pechy, Wesley, Wakefield, Dick. τ « Watch.” For thé omission of “ ye,” see v, 33, note. ” ahextopopwrias, As this word is Our usus loquend: de- ξ “at cock-crowing ; anarthrous, I do not insert an article. mands one before “ morning,” h “ should find ;” “ Should” is inserted in conformity with our usus loquendi. Ui εὕρῃ. KING JAMES’ VERSION. CHAP. XIV. AFTER two days was the feast of the passover, and of unleayened bread: and the chief priests, and the scribes, sought how they might take him by craft, and put him to death. 2 But they said, Not on the feast-day, lest there be an uproar of the people. 3 And being in Bethany, in the house of Simon the leper, as he sat at meat, there came a woman haying an alabaster-box of oint- ment of spikenard, very precious; and she brake the box, and poured it on his head. 4 And there were some that| 1 had indignation within them- selves, and said, Why was this waste of the ointment made? 5 For it might have been sold for more than three hundred pence, and have been given to the poor. And they murmured against her. GREEK TEXT. CHAP. XIV. 3. Ν ΄ \ “HN δὲ τὸ πάσχα καὶ τὰ y \ , « s ἀζμα μετὰ δύο ἡμέρας" 3 / € ° ε ἐζήτουν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμ- ao lod ‘\ / ματεῖς, πῶς αὐτὸν ἐν δόλῳ Kpa- τήσαντες ἀποκτείνωσιν: “ ἔλε- Ν Ng “ε lal , γον δὲ, Mn ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, μήποτε , 4 fol fa θόρυβος ἔσται τοῦ λαοῦ. ὃ Kat + ᾽ “5 , Ω σι ὄντος αὐτοῦ ἐν ByOavia, ἐν τῇ [4 “- fol οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ, κατα- κειμένου αὐτοῦ, ἦλθε γυνὴ ἔχου- σα ἀλάβαστρον μύρου νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς: καὶ συν- , Ν > ia la τρίψασα το ἄλάβαστρον, κατέ- xeev αὐτοῦ κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς. ἦσαν. δέ τινες ἀγανακτοῦν- Ν , τες πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς, καὶ λέγοντες, Εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύ- , > ΄ Ν ρου γέγονεν; ° ἠδύνατο γὰρ ΄ ΄“ / τοῦτο πραθῆναι ἐπάνω τριακο- σίων δηναρίων, καὶ δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς" καὶ ἐνεβριμῶντο αὐτῇ. δὉ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν, "A dere \ και THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. REVISED VERSION. CHAP. XIV. “Now after two days, was the passover and ‘the feast of unleavened bread: and the chief priests and the scribes sought how they might take him by craft, and put him to death. But they said, Not ‘during ‘the feast, lest there should be an uproar of the people. fAnd when he was in Bethany, in the house of Simon the leper, fas he re- clined at table, there came a woman having an alabaster-box of ointment of spikenard, "pure ‘and very costly ; and she broke the box, and poured 7 on his head. And there were some, who ‘were much displeased ramong themselves, and said, Why was this waste of the oint- ment made? For 'this ointment might have been sold for more than three hundred pence, and mgiven to the poor. And they murmured against her. "But Jesus said, Let her alone; i “and yery costly ; ” σζολυτελοῦς. Rob. (in verbo), Wakef., 6 And Jesus said, Let her * “Now;” 4%. Pechy, Sharpe, Wakef., Dick. (De Wette, “Und.”) > “the passover ;” τὸ πάσχα. No supplement such as “ the feast” is used by Sharpe, Kend., Dick., Thom., Vulg., Eras., Beza, Castal., S. Fr., Span., Ital., Belg., De Wette. © “the feast of.” Pechy. This supplement is taken from Luke 22:1, ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν ἀζύμων. So Span., “la fiesta de los azimos ;” Belg., “ [het feest] der ongehevelde ;” De Wette, “das Fest des Ungesauerten.” 4 “during ;” ἐν (τῇ ἑορτῇ). Rob., ἐν. Trollope (ἐν), “It in- dicates the period at, in, during, or within which any thing is done.” So Wakef., Campbell, Dick., Sharpe. S. Fr., “ pendant (la fete) ;” Tber., “ durant (la fiesta).” * “the feast.” The supplement “day” is unnecessary. So Campbell, Kend., Wesley, Sharpe. τ «And when he was;” Καὶ ὄντος αὐτοῦ. As the pronoun should not be omitted, the change of the participial construction to that of the finite verb is most proper. δ “as he reclined.” See ch. 2:15, note. Vulg., “recum- beret ;” Iber., “ recostado ;” Syriac, pasa (Part. Peil, incwm- bens). h “pure ;” πιστικῆς. Rob. (in verbo), Pechy, Trollope (Ana- lecta), Tyndale, Cran., Coverdale, Geneya. De Wette, “ achter ;” Belg., onvervalschte ;” Iber., “ puro ;” Dan., “ uforfalsket.” Campbell, Thom. De Wette, kdstlicher ;” Belg., “ van grooten prijs ;” Iber., “de mucho precio.” The position of the adverb “very,” before “ costly,” renders the supplement “and” necessary. When adjectives are asyndata in English, they must have the same form as simple, or modified either by comparison, or by adverbs. As πολυτελοῦς belongs to νάρδου, the propriety of em- ploying “and” is obvious. Fritz., “ σσολυτελοῦς cum v. νάρδου coheerere puto.” } “were much displeased ;” ἀγανακτοῦντες. Pechy, Rob. So (E. V.) ch. 10 : 14, 41. k “among themselves, and said ;” πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς, καὶ λέγοντες. The preposition has the same force as in chs. 1:27, 9:33, (E. V.), “among themselves.” Rob. (in loco), πρὸς. Alternative render- ing, “they were much displeased, and said among themselves.” Τοῦτο τὸ μύρον is the reading of Griesb., Τὸ has 1 “this ointment.” Scholz, Lachm., Tischend., Tittm., Knapp, and Fritzsche. been adopted by Wesley, Sharpe, A. Camp., Pechy. m “given;” δοθῆναι. The repetition “have been” is un- necessary. Ξ 5 « But;” Js Kend. Wesley, Dick., Campbell, Wakefield. S. Fr., “ mais ;” Belg., “maar ;” De Wette, “aber ;” Span. and Iber., “ mas ;” Ital., “ma;” Dan., “ men.” THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. 93 KING JAMES’ VERSION. alone; why trouble ye her? she hath wrought a good work on me. 7 For ye have the poor with you always, and whensoever ye will ye may do them good: but me ye have not always. 8 She hath done what she could: she is come aforehand to anoint my body to the burying. 9 Verily I say unto you, Where- soever this gospel shall be preach- ed throughout the whole world, this also that she hath done shall be spoken of, for a memorial of her. τ 10 And Judas Iscariot, one of the twelve, went unto the chief priests, to betray him unto them. 11 And when they heard τέ, they were glad, and promised to give him money. And he sought how he might conyeniently betray him. 12 And the first day of unleay- ened bread, when they killed the passover, his disciples said unto him, Where wilt thou that we go and prepare, that thou mayest eat the passover? 13 And he sendeth forth two of his disciples, and saith unto them, Go ye into the city, and GREEK TEXT. Sis he , De / , αὐτήν" τί αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε: καλὸν" ἔργον εἰργάσατο εἰς ἐμέ. ' πάντοτε γὰρ τοὺς πτωχοὺς ἔχε- τε μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, καὶ ὅταν θέλητε, Ν 3. “ FN δύνασθε αὐτοὺς εὖ ποιῆσαι" ἐμε \ 3 é yx 8 ἃ a δὲ οὐ πάντοτε EXETE. ὃ εἶχεν / αὕτη: ἐποίησε: προέλαβε μυρί- σαι μου τὸ hae εἰς τὸν ἐντα- φιασμόν. 5 ἀμὴν “λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅπου ἂν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦτο εἰς ὅλον τὸν κόσμον, καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη, λαληθήσεται εἰς ‘ lol « μνημόσυνον αὐτῆς. 1° Καὶ ὁ > , chin? ΄ - -- ]Ιούδας ὁ ᾿Ισκαριώτης, εἷς τῶν ἐν σας Ν \ > δώδεκα, ἀπῆλθε πρὸς τοὺς ἀρχ- ΄σ , - ’ Ν a ιερεῖς, ἵνα παραδῷ αὐτὸν αὐτοῖς. ll « \ > / > 4 Οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες ἐχαρησαν, ἴω > / καὶ ἐπηγγείλαντο αὐτῷ ἀργύριον - Ν Λ cal δοῦναι: καὶ ἐζήτει πῶς εὐκαίρως A δ τ παραδῷ. > KAT rH πρώτῃ ἡμέρα τῶν Wires ὅτε TO πάσχα ἔθυον, λέγουσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, = te 2 / € ΄ “Ποῦ θέλεις ἀπελθοντες ετοιμά- ε ΄ \ , σωμεν ἵνα φάγῃς τὸ πάσχα; ΓΔ ro 13 Kat ἀποστέλλει δύο τῶν μα- ΄σ ΄- Lg > o θητῶν αὐτοῦ, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, ε ΄ » Ν f x Ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν πολιν: Kat REVISED VERSION. *why doyetroubleher? shehath wrought a good work Pfor me. For ye have the poor with you 7 always, and swhenever ye will, rye can do them good, but me ye have not always. She hath 8 done what she could: ‘she hath anointed my body beforehand for the ‘burial. *Truly I say 9 to you, Wherever this gospel shall be preached throughout the whole world, ‘what she hath done, shall also be spoken of, for a memorial of her. And 10 Judas Iscariot, one of the twelve, went to the chief priests vto deliver him up to them. And when they heard τέ, they were glad, and promised to cive him money. And he sought how he *might con- yeniently deliver him up. And 12 the first day of the feast of un- leavened bread, when they killed the passover, his dis- ciples ysay to him, Where wilt thou that we shall go and pre- pare, that thou mayest eat the passover? And he sendeth 13 forth two of his disciples, and saith to them, το into the i 1 ° “why do ye trouble her?” τέ αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε; anticipate the time of doing.” He renders this passage, “ she This arrangement involves no greater departure from the order of the text than that of the E. V. So Pechy, Thom., Campbell, Dick., Wakef. It accords with ordinary usage. P “for me.’ Thomson, Dick. Ἐν zoé instead of εἰς ἐμέ, is adopted on the authority of Griesb., Scholz, Knapp, Tittmann, Lachm., and Tisch. Rob. (ἐν), “So after verbs implying to do any thing in the case of any one, i.e.,to or for him, where the accusative or dative might stand.” Dan., “ imod mig.” 4 “whenever ;” ὅταν. “ Whensoever” is obsolete. τ “ye can;” δύνασθε. Pechy, Wakef., Sharpe, Campbell, Thomson. This yerb is not a declaration of permission, but of ability. * “She hath anointed—beforehand ;” προέλαβε μυρίσαι. Wakef., Pechy. De Wette, “sie salbte zum Voraus;” Iber., “se ha anticipado 4 ungir.” “Προλαμβάνω (says Rob.) before an infin. (signifies), to take up beforehand, to do before the time, to hath anointed my body by anticipation against my burying.” The phrase, “is come beforehand” (of the 1. V.) is taken from the Vulgate, “ pravenit ungere.” t “burial.” * Sharpe, Pechy. “ Burying” is now used only as a participle. x “Truly.” See ch. 3 : 28, note. v “what;” 6. Sharpe, Wesley, Pechy, Wakefield. Vulgate, “quod.” The rendering should agree with that of the same pro- noun in vy. 8. ¥ “to deliver—up.” See ch. 1 : 14, note. * “ might—deliver—up. See ch. 1 : 14, note. y “say ;” λέγουσι». Wesley, Pechy, Wakef., Sharpe. Vulg., Eras., Beza, Castalio, “dicunt;” De Wette, “sagen;” Span., “ dicen.” 2 “G@o;” Ὑπάγετε. The pronoun is omitted in the text, as 94 KING JAMES’ VERSION. there shall meet you a man bear- ing a pitcher of water: follow hin. 14 And wheresoever he shall go in, say ye to the good-man of the house, The Master saith, Where is the guest-chamber, where I shall eat the passover with my disciples? 15 And he will shew you a large upper room furnished and prepared: there make ready for us. 16 And his disciples went forth, and came into the city, and found as he had said unto them: and they made ready the pass- over. 17 And in the evening he com- eth with the twelve. 18 And as they sat, and did eat, Jesus said, Verily I say unto you, One of you which eateth with me, shall betray me. 19 And they began to be sor- rowful, and to say unto him one GREEK TEXT. > / econ 27 ΄ αἁπαντήσει ὑμῖν ἀνθρωπος κερά- “ 4 τ μιον ὕδατος βαστάζων: ἀκολου- Κι a 7 \ θήσατε αὐτῷ, ™ καὶ ὅπου ἐὰν εἰσέλθῃ, εἴπατε τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, "Or ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, “Ποῦ ἐστι τὸ κατάλυμα, OTOV τὸ πάσχα Ν ~ rn ΄ μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω; 15 Ν δ, « a , a) ΄, καὶ αὐτὸς ὑμῖν δείξει ἀνώγεον ΄΄ ΄ μέγα ἐστρωμένον ἕτοιμον" ΄ ΄- 3 a ἑτοιμάσατε ἡμῖν. ‘© Kat ἐξῆλ- θον οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἦλθον > \ / Ν fe. \ εἰς τὴν πόλιν, καὶ εὗρον καθὼς 53 > ΄ « ΄, Ν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἡτοίμασαν τὸ 4 2: " Kai ὀψίας γενομένης ἔρχε- ται μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα: καὶ 3 ἀνακειμένων αὐτῶν καὶ ἐσθιόν- 5 > a > Ἄν, / Tov, εἶπεν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς, Apny λέ- eon “ - ᾽ Cees yo ὑμῖν, ὅτι εἷς ἐξ ὑμῶν παρα- δώσει με, 0 ἐσθίων μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ. ἢ ips . \ ΄ “ Ν 19 Οἱ δὲ ἤρξαντο λυπεῖσθαι, καὶ , eam - , λέγειν αὐτῷ εἷς καθ᾽ εἷς, My τι 3 ΄σ εκει THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. REVISED VERSION. city, and “ἃ man bearing a pitcher of water will meet you: follow him. And *wherever he shall enter, ‘say ‘to the master of the house, The «Teacher saith, Where is the guest-chamber, where I shall eat the passover with my dis- ciples? And he will show you a large upper room furnished and prepared: there ‘prepare for us. And his disciples went forth, and came into the city and found "things even as he had said to them, and ‘they prepared the passover. And Jeyening having come, he com- eth with the twelve. And ‘as they reclined at table, and were eating, Jesus said, "Truly I say to you, One of you, who eateth with me, "will deliver meup. And they began to be sorrowful, and to say to him, 14 1 18 19 there is no emphasis, and the version should correspond. So the ἘΠ, V. of the parallel, Matt. 26 : 18, Ὑπάγετε, “Go.” So Kend., “Pechy, Campbell, Wakef., Dick. In this verse, ἀκολουϑήσατε is properly rendered in the E. V. simply “ follow.” * “4 man, bearing a pitcher of water, will meet you;” ἄπαν- This simple and natural arrangement of the sentence is that of Wiclif. “a man berynge a galoun of whater shall mete you.” That of the E. V. originated with Tyndale. S. Fr., “un homme portant une cruche d’eau viendra au devant de yous.” τήσει duty ἄνϑρωπος κεράμιον ὕδατος βαστάζων. > “wherever.” “ Wheresoever” is obsolete. Sharpe, Ken- drick. ° “say ;” εἴπατε. Kend., Pechy, Campbell, Wakef., Thom. properly omit “ye.” So parallel (HE. V.) Matt. 26:18. See y. 13, note. ἃ “to the master of the house ;” τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ. Wakef., Pechy, Kend., Dick., Sharpe, Thomson, Campbell. Matt. 10:25. Luke 13:25; 14:21. e “Teacher.” See ch. 4 : 38, note. f “prepare ;” ἑτοιμάσατε. So in y.12. Dickinson, Sharpe, Campbell, Pechy. S. Fr., “ preparerez;” Vulg., Eras., Beza, “arate.” ‘Thus the E. V. in a majority of the instances, where this word occurs, in the text. So (E. V.) = “things.” This supplement is inserted because the sentence is imperfect if “found” has no object. In writing or conversa- tion, we never omit the object of this verb. The thought pre- sented by the text is that the disciples found all, which Christ had declared would occur, to be as he had said—they found “ the man,” “the guest-chamber,” etc. Beza has introduced a supple- ment here, “ invenerunt omnia prout dixerat eis;” S. Fr., “ils trouverent les choses comme il leur avait dit.” h “even as;” καϑὼς. Pechy. So (E. V.) ch. 11:6. Luke 1:2; 19:32. John 12:50; 15:10... Rom. 1: 28, ete. This particle is used for the classic καϑιὰ (xa# a), defined by Liddell “ according as,” “just as.” See y. 15, note. } “evening having come.” See chs. 1 : 32 and 6 : 21, notes. k “ag they reclined.” Robinson (ἦν verbo), “to recline at table ;” Bretsch., “ accwmbo (intellige: ad mensam) ;” Liddell, later (i. e., by later Greek writers), “to lve at table ;” Lat. “accum- bere.” So Kend., Dick. Iber., “estando ellos recostados ;” De Wette, “da sie zu Tische lagen;” Vulg., Castal., “ discumben- tibus eis ;” Eras., “ quum accumberent ;” Beza, “ Quumque dis- ! «they prepared.” cubuissent ;” Syriac, enna (incumbentibus). See ch. 2:15, note. 1 “were eating ;” ἐσθιόντων. Dick. This form, termed the “progressive imperfect,” representing continued action, presents the thought of the text with exactness. m «Truly ;” See ch. 3 : 28, note. n « will deliver—up.” See ch, 1 : 14, note. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. 95 KING JAMES’ VERSION. by one, [5 it 1? and another said, Is it 1? 20 And he answered and said unto them, J¢ 7s one of the twelve that dippeth with me in the dish. 21 The Son of man indeed goeth, as it is written of him: but wo to that man by whom the Son of man is betrayed! good were it for that man if he had never been born. 22 And as they did eat, Jesus took bread, and blessed, and brake it, and gave to them, and said, Take, eat: this is my body. 23 And he took the cup, and when he had given thanks, he gave i to them: and they all drank of it. 24 And he said unto them, This is my blood of the new testa- ment, which is shed for many. 25 Verily, I say unto you, I will drink no more of the fruit of the vine, until that day that 1 drink it new in the kingdom of God. 26 And when they had sung an hymn, they went out into the mount of Olives. 27 And Jesus saith unto them, GREEK TEXT. » ᾽ὔ la ΄ > / eyo; Kat ἄλλος, Μη τι eyo; 5 \ 5 an 20 “Ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, - a ͵΄ E πες! τ Εἷς ἐκ τῶν δώδεκα, 0 ἐμβαπτο- > 9 - \ , μενος [LET ἐμοῦ εἰς TO τρυβλίον. 21 « Ν XN col > ,ὔ ec » ὁ μὲν υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ὑπα- Ν 7 » γει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐ- “- » \ “ / 2 , τοῦ" oval de τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ, » Φ eX ΄ , δι οὗ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου Tapa- Ἂς 3 > “ > » δίδοται: καλὸν ἢν αὐτῷ, εἰ οὐκ ’ / . la 3 -“ ἐγεννήθη 6 ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος. 99 ’ fs a 2 Καὶ ἐσθιόντων αὐτῶν, λα- A Le a 27 ᾿ , βὼν ὃ Incovs ἄρτον εὐλογῆσας » lA > cal Ἂς ἔκλασε, καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ 5 ΄ ΄ αν τ ἢ εἶπε, αβετε, φάγετε. τοῦτο ἊΝ ΄σ Ἂ ie ἐστι TO σῶμά pov. * Καὶ Aa- x Ν , > / Bwv τὸ ποτήριον εὐχαριστῆσας » - », ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς: καὶ ἔπιον ἐξ αὐ- a , 9 3 r τοῦ πάντες: “ἱκαὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Si \ ae. \ Be Τοῦτο ἐστι TO αἷμα pov, TO τῆς ΄ ΄΄ \ Ν καινῆς διαθήκης. τὸ περὶ πολ- Xr “ 3 / 25 5 ἊΝ x ΄ ὧν ἐκχυνόμενον. ““ ἀμὴν λέγω - fal “ > / ΕΣ / 3 a ὑμῖν, OTL οὐκέτι οὐ μὴ πίω EK TOU / “ / av lod γεννήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου, ἕως τῆς « ’ 5 , a ΣΝ a ἡμέρας ἐκείνης, ὅταν αὐτὸ πίνω ΦΟΥΘΝ, 2 mn , a A κἀινὸν ἐν TH βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ. Y Mee Δ / In > "ὁ Καὶ ὑμνήσαντες ἐξῆλθον εἰς ἊΣ »” πο - \ ΄ τὸ ὄρος τῶν ᾿λαιῶν. “ καὶ λέ- REVISED VERSION. one by one, Is it I? and another said, Is it 17 And he answered 20 and said to them, Jé is one of the twelve, who dippeth with me in the dish. The Son of 21 man indeed edeparteth, as it is written Pconcerning him: but awoe to that man, ‘through whom the Son of man ‘is de- livered up, ‘It had been good for that man, “if he had not been born. And vas they were 22 eating, Jesus took bread, and blessed and broke if, and gave to them, and said, “Take: this is my body. And he took the 23 cup, and when he had given thanks, he gaye τέ to them: and they all drank of it. And he 24 said to them, This is my blood, xthat τοῦ the new covenant, which is shed for many. *Truly 25 I say to you, I -7shall drink no more of the fruit of the vine, till that day, *when 1 drink it new in the kingdom of God. And when they had sung a 26 hymn, they went out into the mount of Olives. And Jesus 27 ° “departeth ;” ὑπάγει. Campbell, Dick. Robinson, ὑπάγω. v “as they were eating ; ” ἐσθιόντων αὐτῶν. Wakef., Dick., “To depart” (in the sense of “departing from this world” or| Sharpe. 5S. vy. 18, note. “Jife”) is common in our language to express the thought of dying. The full expression was employed by Christ, John 7 : 33, w Tale.” Payere of the Text. Recept. (“eat”) is rejected ὑπάγω πρὸς TOY πέμψαντά με. P“ concerning him;” περὶ αὐτοῦ. Dick. Present usage gives this word the preference, rather than “ of.” a “woe.” The present orthography of the word. Webster. τ “through whom ;” δὲ ov. Rob., dea. I deem it desirable to mit “by,” as far as practicable, to cases where the znstru- mental dative occurs. * “is delivered up.” See ch. 1 : 14. t “Tt had been good;” καλὸν ἦν. Wesley, Pechy, Sharpe. 8. Fr., “il eat été.” The imperfect is here used for the pluper- fect. Trollope, Gram., 350, obs. 5 (5). « “if he had not been born;” εἰ οὐκ ἐγεννήϑη. Sharpe, Wesley, Wakef. by Griesbach, Scholz, Lachmann, Tittmann, Knapp, Fritz., Rob. (Harmony), Tisch. Not recognized by Syriac or Vulgate. It is spurious. x «that;” τὸς Wakef., Kend., Thom., Sharpe. De Wette, “das;” S. Fr. “celui;” Belg., “het (bloed).” This article is obviously emphatic, and has the force of a demonstrative. See Rob. (Lex., 6), “ the article is sometimes repeated (that is, before a genitive with its article) for the sake of emphasis.” y “of the—covenant ;” τῆς-- διαϑῆκης. Sharpe, Kendrick, Pechy, Wakef., Campbell, Thomson, Dick. De Wette, “des— Bundes ;” Iber., “del—pacto ;” Beza and Castalio, “ foederis.” Rob. (in verbo). = “Truly.” See ch. 3 : 28, note. zz Kend. tr. Luke 22:18. a “when;” ὅταν. Kend., Wakef., Sharpe, Dick., Thomson. Ther., “cuando;” S. Fr. “ou;” De Wette, “wenn;” Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, “ cam.” 96 KING JAMES’ VERSION. All ye shall be offended because of me this night: for it is written, I will smite the shepherd, and the sheep shall be scattered. 28 But after that I am risen, I will go before you into Galilee. 29 But Peter said unto him, Although all shall be offended, yet will not I. 30 And Jesus saith unto him, Verily I say unto thee, That this day, even in this night, before the cock crow twice, thou shalt deny me thrice. 31 But he spake the more vehemently, If I should die with thee, I will not deny thee in any wise. Likewise also said they all. 32 And they came to a place which was named Gethsemane: and he saith to his disciples, Sit ye here, while I shall pray. 33 And he taketh with him GREEK TEXT. - 7 A ΄, yet αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς, Ore πὰν- τες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε ἐ ἐν ἐμοὶ ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ταύτῃ" ὅτι γέγραπται, Πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα, καὶ δια- Ν σκορπισθήσεται τὰ πρόβατα. Ν Ν a 28° AdAa μετὰ TO ἐγερθῆναί pe, ε a Ἂς προάξω ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν [ςαλιλαίαν. 9 δ yy tal 9 *O δὲ Πέτρος ἔφη αὐτῷ, Kai ’ὔ’ / εἰ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται, / ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐγώ. ὃ Kai λέγει av- ΡΥ ΓΚ) “ 3 ‘ , τῷ ὁ Inoovs, Αμην λέγω σοι, tA > “ ΄ ὅτι σήμερον ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ταύτῃ, Ν Xx x 3 ,ὔ col πρὶν ἢ δὶς ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι, Ν > id 31 ε x 5 τρὶς ἀπαρνησῃ με. O δὲ ἐκ col 7, col > ΄ περισσοῦ ἔλεγε μᾶλλον, Hav ΄ ΄, με δέῃ συναποθανεῖν σοι, οὐ μή > : 7 ε ΄ \ σε ἀπαρνήσομαι. “()σαύτως δὲ 4 2, = πάντες ἔλεγον. τ τς ἔρχονται εἰς χωρίον, οὗ τὸ ὄνομα Τ ἐεθσημανῆ: καὶ λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, Ka- ἐδ (/ θίσατε ὧδε, ἕως προσεύζξωμαι. °3 Kat παραλαμβάνει τὸν ITe- THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. REVISED VERSION. saith to them, »Ye will all de- sert me this night: for it is written, I will smite the shep- herd and the sheep ‘will be scattered. But ¢after * Ihave risen, I will go before you into Galilee. But Peter said to him, ‘Though all should desert thee, yet ΕἼ will not. And Jesus saith to him, “Truly, I say to 30 thee, That ‘ thou, ‘to-day, even in this night, before the cock shall crow twice, wilt deny me thrice. But he spake the more 31 vehemently, «If I must die with thee, I will by no means deny thee. 1And so also said they all. And they came to a place ™named Gethsemane: and he saith to his disciples, "Sit here, *till I shall pray. And he 33 taketh with him Peter, and > “Ye will all desert me;” πάντες ἐμοὶ. See ch. 4 : 17, note. σκανδαλισϑήσεσϑε ἐν Castal., “ vos me omnes deseretis ;” Beco yen? See ch. 3 : 28, note. Kend., “ ye will all forsake me.” The thought presented here is expressed in y. 50 thus, Καὶ ἀφέντες adroyv—H. V., “ And they all forsook him.” TI have used “ desert,” as appropriate in some instances, where this verb in question occurs; and as it will not be the representative of any other Greek verb in this book. Rob. gives this definition of the passive σχανδαλίζεσθαι ἔν τινε, “to be offended in or at any one, to take offense at His character, word, conduct, so as to desert and reject him.” “ Offend” is in- appropriate, as the text does not present the idea that the dis- pleasure of the apostles would be excited toward the Saviour. For the use of the auxiliary “will” see ch. 13 : 6, note. © “will.” See ch. 13 : 6, note. ἃ “after I have risen;” μετὰ τὸ ἐγερϑῆναι. In conformity with present usage, “have” is substituted for “am.” See ch. 1 : 88, note. © “that.” This word is superfluous. ley, Wakef., Kend., Sharpe. f «Though all should desert thee ;” Kat εἰ πάντες σκανδαλε- σϑήσονται. See v.27, note. Tyndale, Geneva, Pechy, Thom., Dick., Camp. δ “T will not.” This is the natural order for English readers. Not employed by Wes- ' “thou ;” od. This pronoun is inserted after ὅτε by Griesb., Scholz, Lachmann, Knapp, Tischendorf, Rob. (Harmony) It is recognized by Syr., Vulg., and Mont. It belongs to the text. It is obviously emphatic, being equivalent to “even thou.” So Wesley, Dick. De Wette, “ dass du.” } “to-day ;” σήμερον. Kendrick, Pechy, Wesley, Campbell. Vulg., Hras., Beza, Castalio, “ hodié ;” S. Fr., “ aujourd’hui ;” Iber., “ hoi ;” Dan., “i Dag.” k “Tf T must die with thee ;” “ay we δέῃ συναποϑανεῖν σοι. Wesley, Kend., Walsef., Sharpe, Pechy. Belg., “Al moest ik met u sterven.” De Wette, “ Wenn ich mit dir sterben miisste.” S. Fr., “ Lors méme qu’il me faudrait mourir avec toi.” Iber., “ Aunque me sea necesario el morir contigo.” 1 “And so alsg;” Ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ. Kend. m “named ;” ov τὸ ὄνομα. Kend., Sharpe, Camp., Wesley, Wakef. π « Sit here ;” Καϑέσατε ὧδε. “Ye” is dropped here. It is unnecessarily inserted in the EH. V. See v.13, note. Omitted by Wesley, Wakef., Kend., Dick., Thom., Pechy. © «till I shall pray.” The literal rendering presents the thought accurately, though our idiom would perhaps incline in favor of the second future, “ till I shall have pray THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. 97 KING JAMES’ VERSION. | Peter, and James, and John, and} began to be sore amazed, and to be very heavy ; 34 And saith unto them, My| soul is exceeding sorrowful unto) , death: tarry ye here, and watch. 35 And he went forward a little, and fell on the ground, and prayed that, if it were possible, | the hour might pass from him. 36‘And he said, Abba, Father, all things are possible unto thee; take away this cup from me: nevertheless, not what I will, but} what thou wilt. 37 And he cometh, and findeth them sleeping, and saith ‘unto Peter, Simon, sleepest thou? couldest not thou watch one hour? 38 Watch ye and pray, lest ye enter into temptation. The spirit) truly zs ready, but the flesh is weak. 39 And again he went away and prayed, and spake the same words. 40 And when he returned, [6] 5 found them asleep again, (for their eyes were heavy;) neither wist they what to answer him. 41 And he cometh the third i} GREEK TEXT. Ν > Le > Tpov καὶ τὸν ᾿ακωβον καὶ ᾿]ω- ΄ 3: 8 - ΡΠ ΣΑΣ 4 ᾿ἄννην μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ. Kai np&a- ᾽ a err) = To ἐκθαμβεῖσθαι καὶ ἀδημονεῖν. 8 ΄,ὔ > a ͵ Ἵ καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, Περίλυπὸς ἐστιν 7 ψυχή. μου ἕως θανά- | Tov: pen ὧδε καὶ γρηγορεῖ- 35 cs Kai προελθὼν μικρὸν, “ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς: καὶ προσηύ- 'χέτο, ἵνα, εἰ δυνατόν ἐστι, παρ- ἔλθῃ ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα: 26 4 ἔλεγεν, ᾿Α ββᾶ, 0 πατὴρ, πάντα ΄ὔ / Ἂς δυνατά σοι. παρένεγκε τὸ ποτή- » > 5 cal ΄ 3 > ploy am ἐμοῦ τοῦτο: ἀλλ᾽ οὐ τί » \ / Ν / 2 ἐγὼ θέλω, ἀλλὰ τί σύ. “ἴ Καὶ ᾿ e Ν ἔρχεται καὶ εὑρίσκει αὐτοὺς καθ- 7 ἊΝ ,ὔ ΄“ / evdovtas, καὶ λέγει τῷ Πέτρῳ,. L L Si «αθεύδ Σίμων, καθεύδεις; \ και οὐκ ἴσχυσας μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι; * γρη- ᾿γορεῖτε καὶ προσεύχεσθε, ἵ ἵνα μὴ εἰσέλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν. τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἀσθενής. ™ Kai πάλιν ἀπελ- θὼν προσηύξατο, τὸν αὐτὸν λό- “you εἰπών. “ἢ καὶ ὑποστρέψας εὗρεν αὐτοὺς πάλιν καθεύδοντας: ἦσαν γὰρ οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν αὐτῷ ἀποκριθῶσι. 4 τῇ Ν | Ἢ Kai ἔρχεται τὸ τρίτον, καὶ » “ greatly.” sense, is obsolete. 4 “fall of anguish ;” vissime angot ;” Beza, “ gravissime angi te worden.” after “ anguish.” > a δημονεῖν. ¥ “even to;” ἕως: So parallel (E. V.) Matt. 26 : 38. 2 Cor. 1 : 13. ae tarry.” Luke ἃ “trial; πειρασμόν. So Rob. (ὧν loco, ἐκϑαμβέω.) Bretsch. (ἦν verbo), “ era- ;” Belg., “ zeer beangst In conformity with the text, a period is placed So Sharpe, Dick., Wakef. Wesley, Kend., Dick., Thom., Sharpe. “Ye” is dropped as superffuons. So Kend., Dick., Wakef., Campbell, Thom., Geneva, Tyndale. t “wilt.” This word is a supplement, and should be ttalicized. The generic sense of this word is deemed most appropriate here, viz., a trial, proof, putting to the “Sore,” in this} ¥ “indeed ;” μὲν». from Cranmer. w “speaking ;” “ disant ;” Iber., x “sleeping ;” Zespltow, Ateis 26 av ἐ ᾿βεβαρημένοι, καὶ οὐκ ῃδεισαν τί | ἡ δὲ σὰρξ So parallel (E. V.) Matt. 26 : 41. ley, Wakef., Dick., Camp., Sharpe, Thom. εἰχεών. participial construction “ saying.” “ diciendo.” καϑεύδοντας. mis ;” Belg., “ slafende ;” De Wette, “ schlafend ; “ dormientes.” : » “they knew not ;” οὐκ ἤδεισαν. Wesley, Campbell, Wakef. | REVISED VERSION. James, and John, and began to be Pgreatly amazed, and full And he saith to < them, My soul is exceeding sorrowful reven to death: starry here and watch. And he went forward a little, and fell on the ground, and prayed that if it could be possible, the hour might pass from him. And he said, Abba, Father, all things are possible to thee; of anguish. 35 36 ‘|take away this cup from me: nevertheless, not what I will, but what thou twie. And he cometh and findeth them ὦ ing, and saith to Peter, Simon, sleepest thou? couldst thou not watch one hour? Watch and pray, lest ye enter into "trial. The spirit ‘indeed is ready, but the flesh is weak. And again 39 he went away, and prayed, vspeaking the same words. And when he returned, he 40 found them *sleeping again (for their eyes were heavy) ; yand ?they knew not what to answer him. And he cometh 41 the third time, and saith to Wes- “Truly” was taken Wesley, Pechy. Sharpe adopts the Belg., “sprekende ;” 8. Fr., Dick., Pechy. §. Fr., “ endor- ” Vulg., Beza, Pechy, Wesley, Campbell, Wakefield, Dick., Thom., Sharpe, Kend. be rendered, according to its usual sense, by and. As no negative precedes καὶ, it should Pechy, Sharpe, Kendrick, “ Wist” is obsolete. The pluperf. _test. So Kend., Thom. See ch. 1 : 13, note. of εἴδω has the force of an imperf. Rob. 98 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. KING JAMES’ VERSION. time, and saith unto them, Sleep on now, and take your rest: it is enough, the hour is come; behold, the Son of man is betrayed into the hands of sinners. 42 Rise up, let us go; lo, he that betrayeth me is at hand. 43 And immediately while he yet spake, cometh Judas, one of the twelve, and with him a great multitude with swords and staves, from the chief priests, and the scribes, and the elders. 44 And he that betrayed him, had given them a token, saying, Whomsoever I shall kiss, that same is he; take him, and lead him away safely. 45 And as soon as he was come, he goeth straightway to him, and saith, Master, Master, and kissed him. 46 And they laid their hands on him, and took him. 47 And one of them that stood GREEK TEXT. λέγει αὐτοῖς, Καθεύδετε τὸ λοι- πὸν καὶ ἀπέχει: ἦλθεν ἡ ὧρα' ἰδοὺ, παραδίδοται ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου εἰς τὰς χεῖ- pas τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν. σθε, ἄγωμεν: ἰδοὺ, ὁ παραδιδούς με ἤγγικε. τ Καὶ εὐθέως, ἔτι αὐτοῦ λα- λοῦντος; παραγίνεται ᾿Πούδας, εἷς ὧν τῶν δώδεκα, καὶ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ὄχλος πολὺς μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων, παρὰ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων καὶ τῶν πρε- σβυτέρων. ** δεδώκει δὲ ὁ παρα- διδοὺς αὐτὸν σύσσημον αὐτοῖς, > / ἀναπαυεσθε. / ἃ x , Cen λέγων, “Ov av φιλήσω, αὐτὸς ᾽ , SN ey ἐστι: κρατῆσατε AUTOV, καὶ ἀπα- γάγετε ἀσφαλῶς. “ὅ Kai ἐλ- θὼν, εὐθέως προσελθὼν αὐτῷ λέγει, “PaBBi, ῥαββί: καὶ κατε- φίλησεν αὐτόν. © Οἱ δὲ ἐπέ- βαλον er αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας av- TOV, καὶ ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν. | His δέ τις τῶν παρεστηκό- 2-3 / ἐγείρε-. REVISED VERSION. them, *Sleep on still, and take It is enough, the *pehold, the Son of man ‘is delivered up into the *Rise, let us go; behold, he, who ¢delivereth your rest. hour is come ; hands of sinners. me up, is at hand. mediately, while the was yet speaking, cometh Judas, ®being one of the twelve, and with him a great ‘crowd with swords and ‘clubs, from the chief priests, and the scribes, and the elders. And he !who de- livered him up, had given them Whomsoever I shall kiss, ‘that is he; take him, and lead him away safely. And ‘when he came, he went "immediately to him, and saith, °Rabbi, Rabbi; and kissed him. And they laid their hands on him, and took him. And one a sign saying, of those, who stood by, drew, « “Sleep on still, and take your rest ;” Καϑεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν f «he was speaking ;” αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος. And im-: 45 46 47 Wakef., Dickinson, καὶ ἀναπαύεσϑε. The critical Editions differ as to the punctua- tion of this sentence. Griesbach, Knapp, Tittmann, Robinson (Harmony), place the interrogative sign after ἀναπαύσϑε, thus, furnishing the sense, “ Do ye sleep on still (or still further), and take your rest?” Scholz, Tischendorf, Lachmann, Fritzsche, Bloomfield, follow the punctuation of the Text. Recept., Of the two modes of rendering, that of the Τὸ. V. is deemed to be most probably accurate. “Still” has been substituted for now,” as it more clearly presents the idea of “ henceforward.” As an alter- native rendering, “ Sleep hereafter (τὸ dowdy), and take your rest.” The thought, in this case, is supposed to be, “Take an- other time to sleep, as Judas is now at hand.” So Erasmus, “Dormite posthae et requiescete.” b “behold ;” dod. yv. 41 (E. V.) Wakefield, Pechy, Dick. Wesley. So Matt. 26 : 46. ° “is delivered up.” See ch. 3 : 19, note. d « Rise ;” “ arise Ἐγείρεσϑε. “Up” is superfluous. “ Rise” or ” 15 a common rendering of this verb, in B. V. 9 “delivereth me up.” See ch. 3 : 19, note. Sharpe, Thom. ” = “being one of the twelve ;” ets ὧν τῶν δώδεκα. So the same phrase (E. V.) John 6:71. S. Fr. “qui etait l'un des douze ;” Iber., “ que era uno de los doce.” See ch. 2 i “elubs;” ξύλων. Wesley, Campbell, Thom., Pechy. Hras., Beza, Castal., “ fustibus ;” Liddell (én verbo), “ a thick cudgel.” See* ch. 3 : 19, ἐν Ἀπ crOwds : 4, note. } “who delivered him up, 6 παραδιδοὺς. note. k “that is he;” employed in place of οὗτος. “er ist’s;” Belg., “ die is’t.” 1 “when he came;”,é4%a7. Sharpe, Thom, By this render- ing, which gives the sense of the text, we are relieyed from the disagreeable hzssing sound in “ as soon as.” m “he went ;” προσελϑὼν. Pechy, Wakef. » “immediately.” See ch. 1 : 10, note. ° “ Rabbi.” See ch. 9 : 5, note. αὐτός ἐστι. By Hellenistic usage, αὐτός is Bloomf., Fritz. (7m loco). De Wette, THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. 99 KING JAMES’ VERSION. by, drew a sword, and smote a servant of the high priest, and cut off his ear. 48 And Jesus answered and said unto them, Are ye come out as against a thief, with swords and with staves to take me? 49 I was daily with you in the temple, teaching, and ye took me not: but the scriptures must be fulfilled. 50 And they all forsook him|, 7 sk and edi ἀφέντες αὐτὸν 51 And there followed him a|” certain young man, having a linen cloth cast about his naked body; and the young men laid hold on him. 52 And he left the linen cloth, and fled from them naked. 53 And they led Jesus away to the high priest: and with him were assembled all the chief priests, and the elders and the scribes. 54 And Peter followed him afar off, even into the palace of the high priest: and he sat with ws, καὶ ἀφεῖλεν λαβεῖν με; > > > lal ΑἹΤ αὐτων. γραμματεῖς. GREEK TEXT. ᾽ὔ Ν ΄ὔ΄ των σπασάμενος τὴν μαχαιραν ΕΣ ἣν ΄ a ἔπαισε Tov δοῦλον τοῦ ἀρχίιερέ- 1δ Καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ᾿Ϊησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ᾿ς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθετε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων συλ- 5 καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἤμην πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ διδάσκων, καὶ οὐκ ἐκρατήσατέ με: πληρωθῶσιν αἱ γραφαί. - , , Kai εἷς τις νεανίσκος ἠκολού- > - / θει αὐτῷ, περιβεβλημένος σιν- 3 col Sova ἐπὶ γυμνοῦ. ἂν © αὐτὸν οἱ νεανίσκοι" ‘\ \ / Ων mv λιπὼν τὴν σινδονα γυμνὸς ἐφυγεν BS KAT ἀπήγαγον τὸν ‘Tn- σοῦν πρὺς Tov ἀρχιερέα: συνέρχονται αὐτῷ πᾶντες οἱ ἀρ- χιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι καὶ οἱ we δὲ Καὶ "ὁ Πέτρος > Ν ὕ » ,ὔ > tal ἀπὸ μακρόθεν ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ ο 3, > \ > ἈΝ a ἕως ἔσω εἰς THY αὐλὴν τοῦ ἀρχ- REVISED VERSION. rhis sword and smote sthe ser- vant of the high priest and cut Cs > Lal ἊΝ » / ᾿ . αὐτου TO ὠτιον. οἵδ his ear. And Jesus an- 48 swered and said to them, ‘Haye ye come out as against swords and ¢ a ‘robber, with 49 μ- telubs to take me? I was daily with you in the temple, teach- ing, and ye took me not: but the scriptures must be fulfilled. And they all forsook him and fled. And there followed him a certain young man, having a linen cloth ‘thrown round jis naked body; and the young men vtook *him; and he left the linen cloth, and fled from them naked. And they led Jesus away to the high priest: and with him Ythere assembled all the chief priests, and the elders, and the scribes. And Peter followed him “far off, even into “the court of the high priest: ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα ὅ0 Καὶ ,ὕὔ 5, πάντες ἐφυγον. σι 1 Ν a καὶ κρατοῦσιν 52 « Qh ὁ δὲ KaTa- σι ον καὶ Ῥ “his sword ;” τὴν μάχειραν. Wakef., Campbell, Sharpe. Ther., “ [su] espada.” The article here has the force of a posses- sive pronoun. Kiihner, 2 244,4. “A sword” was first used by Wiclif and Tyndale. So τὸ ὠτέον, in this verse, is properly rendered in H. V. “ his ear.” a “the servant ;” τὸν δοῦλον. Wesley, Wakefield, Thomson, Campbell, Sharpe. De Wette, “dem Knechte ;” Belg., “den dienstknecht ;” Iber., un siervo.” r “Have ye come out;” ἐξήλϑετε. auxiliary with the intransitive verb “to come.” note. “Have” is the proper See ch 1 : 35, * “robber ;” ληστὴν. See ch. 11: 17, note. ¢ “with.” This supplement before “clubs” is quite unneces- sary. It is omitted (1. V.) in y. 43, where the text is precisely the same. Omitted by Wesley, Wakef., Pechy, Camp., Sharpe, Thomson. " “clubs.” See v. 43, note. Y “thrown round ;” περιβεβλημένος. Sharpe, “thrown about.” Th our usus loquendi, we employ “ thrown round,” in cases of this kind, rather than “ cast about.” . » “took ;” κρατοῦσιν. The present is used here, as in many other instances, instead of the aorist. Stuart (Gram.), 3136 (b). Trollope, p. 131. This verb is rendered by “take” (E. V.) vy. 44,46. Matt. 26 : 50, ete. ~ In conformity with the colon of the Greek text, a semicolon is placed after “ him.” y “there assembled ;” συνέρχονται. Wesley. As this verb is a deponent midd. (Bretsch., Liddell), it should not be rendered as a passive. Pechy, “there came together;” Tyndale and Geneva, “came;” Cranmer, “come.” The euphonic adverb “there” is inserted in accordance with our usus loquend:. Vulg., Beza, Castal., “ convenerunt ;” Mont. and Eras., “ conveniunt ;” Kend., “ assembled ;” Pechy, “there came together ;” Iber., “se juntaron ;” De Wette, “es versammelten sich.” = “far off.’ See ch. 5 : 6, note. « “the court ;” τὴν αὐλὴν. Thom., Campbell, Pechy, Rob. (in verbo). Bretsch., “ atriwm, prima «dium pars vel subdialis, vel in eedificiis splendidioribus porticu circumdata Mare. 14 : 54, 66; 15:16.” Liddell, “ Post-Homerie, the αὐλή was the court, or quadrangle, round which the house itself was built, having a cor- ridor all round,” ete. See Rob. The word is occasionally (by synecdoche) used for the house itself, and hence for a palace or the residence of a person of rank. I place this note in the 100 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. KING JAMES’ VERSION. the servants, and warmed himself at the fire. 55 And the chief priests, and all the council, sought for witness against Jesus to put him to death ; and found none. 56 For many bare false witness against him, but their witness agreed not together. 57 And there arose certain, and bare false witness against him, saying, 58 We heard him say, I will destroy this temple that is made with hands, and within three days I will build another made without hands. 59 But neither so did their wit- ness agree together. 60 And the high priest stood up in the midst, and asked Jesus, saying, Answerest thou nothing ? what is it which these witness against thee ? GREEK TEXT. Ἢ wee , Lepews’ Kal ἣν συγκαθήμενος με- Ν fod c ΄- / τὰ TOV ὑπηρετῶν, Kal θερμαινό- Ν Ν cr 5 ΄ \ μενος πρὸς To φῶς. ”~ Οἱ δὲ > “ WG? Ν 7ὔ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ ὅλον τὸ συνέδριον 4 Ἀν nn? a ἐζήτουν κατὰ τοῦ ᾿Ϊησοῦ pap- > \ ~ / Tupiav, eis TO θανατῶσαι αὐτόν" \ > ov 56 \ καὶ οὐχ εὕρισκον. πολλοὶ γὰρ ἐψευδομαρτύρουν κατ᾽ αὐ- TOU, καὶ ἰσαι αἱ μαρτυρίαι οὐκ ἦσαν. καί τινες ἀναστάντες ἐψευδομαρτύρουν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ, λέ- “ g 7 > / γοντες, τι ἡμεῖς ἠκούσα- > col , ¢ Sa μεν αὐτοῦ λέγοντος, ᾿ τι ἐγὼ / Ν ἊΝ -“ Ἂν καταλύσω τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον τὸν Δ \ lod « χειροποίητον, καὶ διὰ τριῶν ἡμε- “- + > pov addov ἀχειροποίητον οἰκο- δομήσω. °° Kai οὐδὲ οὕτως ἴση ἣν ἡ μαρτυρία αὐτῶν. Kai ἀναστὰς ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς εἰς τὸ μέσον ἐπηρώτησε τὸν ᾿Ϊ]ησοῦν, λέγων, > ’ fd > / Οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν ; σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν; aL δὲ / @ / Tl OUTOL REVISED VERSION. and he sat with the officers, and warmed himself at the fire. And the chief priests, and all 55 the council sought for « officers Rob., renders it by officers, John 7 ERP OX 5. Fr., “ les sergens.” © “testimony ;” S. Er, Iberian, “ testimonio.” persons” who give testimony. , αρτυρέαν. note. ἃ “testified falsely ;” ἐψευδοκαρτύρουν. hess (v.57), Camp. (v.57), Thom. (v. 57). ness” having become obsolete; a substitute must be employed which will harmonize with “the existing state of (our) language.” See ch. 10 : 19, note. © “testimonies.” See vy. 55, note. f “together,” after “agree,” ig superfluous. Kend., Thom., Pechy. De Wette, “ Hof;” Vulg., Mont., Eras., ’ G. Fr., “la cour ;” Bele., “de zale” (hall) ; ;” ὑπηρετῶν. Pechy, Campbell. of this word, here, and in some other passages, Bretsch. says, “(dicitur) de ministris magistratuum, apparitores ; satellitibus.” “the attendants or beadles of the sanhedrim.” 72325 18 33, 12,22; 19:6. In the parallel, John 18 : 18, it is properly dis- tinguished from δοῦλοι, “servants,” by rendering it “ officers.” Kend., Pechy, Wakefield, Dick. “un temoignage;” G. Fr., “quelque témoignage ;” “Witness” is now applied only “to In fourteen instances, out of thirty-seven, the E. V. renders it “ testimony.” 5 “ certain ones ;” after “ certain.” “men.” On the force EK. Y. Acts k “and yet ;” xai. ch. 7 : 24, note. See ch. 10 : 19, 1 “not even;” οὐδὲ. Kend., Dickinson, “To bear wit- Castal., “ ne-quidem.” m “thus ;” οὕτως. h « testified falsely.” i “made with hands ;” Camp., Pechy, Sharpe. of χειροποίητον» and ἀχειροποίητον, I suggest the idiomatic phrases, “ made by hand,” and, “ not. made by hand.” ) “not made with hands ;” τίνες. A complement is always necessary Some translators have used “ persons,” others The aboye is the most simple. See v. 56, note. χειροποίητον. Wesley, Thomson, See Rob. As an alternative rendering . ἀχειροποίητον. See last note. In cases where καὶ is apparently adversa- tive, or, in other words, where the adyersative particle is under- stood, “and yet” is an appropriate rendering. “ καὶ copulative,” III. Rob., καὶ. (E. V.) John 9:30, “and yet.” Hoog., See Rob., Kend., Pechy. Erasmus, Beza, Rob., Kend. So frequently, in E. VY. Ὁ “what do these testify?” τέ οὗτοί καταμαρτυροῦσιν; Ken- drick. The supplement of the E. V., “zs τῇ which,” is dropped as superfluous. It is dropped by estos.” We can imitate the conciseness of the text, with- out departing from our idiom. So Iber., “ Qui estan deponiendo See v. 56, note. Ἀ THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. 101 ΝΕ ene ae ΟΝ a ee en ee KING JAMES’ VERSION. 61 But he held his peace, and answered nothing. Again the high priest asked him, and said unto him, Art thou the Christ, the Son of the Blessed ? 62 And Jesus said, I am: and ye shall see the Son of man sitting on the right hand of power, and coming in the clouds of heaven. 63 Then the high priest rent his clothes, and saith, What need we any further witnesses ? 64 Ye have heard the blasphe- my: what think ye? And they all condemned him to be guilty of death. 65 And some began to spit on him, and to cover his face, and to buffet him, and to say unto him, Prophesy: and the servants did | 63 © GREEK TEXT. > ΄’ὔ Ν » \ > ΄ ἐσιώπα, καὶ οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίνατο. / Ν Ε) Πάλιν 6 ἀρχιερεὺς ἐπηρώτα av- Ν Ν ,ὔ > fal Ν 3 ε τὸν, καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, Σὺυ εἰ ὁ r N eX - 2 a “Χριστὸς, ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ εὐλογητοῦ; ᾿. Ἔ Nes fol ry > , δ “Ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν, “Eyo > Ν 5 Ν εΝ a εἶμι. καὶ ὀψεσθε τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ 2 / / > ΄- ἀνθρώπου καθήμενον ἐκ δεξιῶν tad , / τῆς δυνάμεως, καὶ ἐρχόμενον με- τὰ τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. \ ἣν Co 4 \ O δὲ ἀρχιερεὺς διαῤῥήξας τοὺς χιτῶνας αὐτοῦ λέγει, Ti ἔτι χρεί- zr , y / av ἔχομεν μαρτύρων; °* ἠκού- σατε τῆς βλασφημίας- τί ὑμῖν ε Ν "4 ¢ φαίνεται; Οἱ δὲ πάντες κατέκρι- x 9 “4 ΄΄ ναν αὐτὸν εἶναι ἔνοχον θανάτου. 65 A / > / > Καὶ jp&avro τινες ἐμπτύειν av- ral Δ Ἂν , τῷ, καὶ περικαλύπτειν τὸ πρόσω- UC > cal Ν / re TOV αὐτοῦ, καὶ κολαφίζειν αὐτὸν, N ΄ So Δ , καὶ λέγειν avt@, Προφητευσον" REVISED VERSION. But che was silent, and answer- 61 ed nothing. Again the high priest asked him, and said to him, Art thou Pthe Anointed, the Son of the Blessed? And 62 Jesus said to him, I am: and ye will see the Son of man sit- ting sat the right hand τοῦ the Mighty One, and coming ‘with the clouds of heaven. And the 63 high priest rent his clothes, and saith, ‘What further need have we of witnesses? Ye have 64 heard the "reyiling : what think ye? And they all condemned him ‘as worthy of death. And 65 some began to spit on him, and to cover his face, and “to beat him with their fists, and to say strike him with the palms of their καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέται hands. τὸν ἔβαλλον. 66 And as Peter was beneath °° Kat ὄντος ο “he was silent;” ἐσεώπα. Rob., Kend., Wakef., Pechy, Camp. “To be silent” is found in (E. V.) 1 Sam. 2:9. Ps. 22:2; 28:1; 30:12, etc. See ch. 3 : 4, note. Ρ “the Anointed.” Tber., “el Ungido.” See ch. 8 : 29, note. 4 “at.” See ch. 10 : 37, note. r “of the Mighty One ;” τῆς duvauews. The abstract is here used for the concrete. Rob., divas. Bretsch., “ ἐκ δεξεῶν τῆς δυνάμεως, ad dextram Dei, quatenus yirtus ejus manifesta est in celo.” Vulgate, “ Dei;” Beza, “ potentie Dei;” Span., “de Dios ;” Belg., “der kracht [Gods].” As an alternative render- ing, “ of the power of God.” “ Mighty One” is used for “ God” (Ε. V.) Isa. 1 : 24; 30: 29; 49 : 26; 60:16. The supplement “of God,” in this case, I take from Luke 22 : 69, τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ Θεοῦ. Should it be deemed best to retain the rendering of the E. V., then the article τῆς should be rendered, thus, “ the Power.” De Wette has “der Majestat.” §. Fr., “de la Puis- sance ;”’ Iber,, “de la Potestad;” Thomson, “ THAT POWER ;” Wakef., “ of divine power ;” Camp., “ the Almighty.” ® “with ;” wera. The usual signification of this preposition with a genitive. So Wesley, Wakefield, Sharpe. Vulg, Beza, Montanus, Castal., “cum ;” S. Fr., “ayec;” Iber., “con;” De Wette, “ mit ;” Belg., “ met.” t “What further need have we;” τί ἔτε χρείαν ἔχομεν. So parallel (E. V.) Matt. 26;65, Wesley, Pechy, This is the natural order, ῥαπίσμασιν av-|to him, Prophesy: and the xofficers ’struck him with their τοῦ Πέτρου ἐν) open hands. And as Peter was 66 u “yeviling.” See ch. 3 : 28, note. ¥ “as worthy of death ;” αὐτὸν εἶναι ἔνοχον ϑανάτου. “ To be guilty of death” is widely different from the usus loguend: of the present age. “Condemned him to be worthy of death,” would violate our idiom. ‘The above rendering presents the thought with exactness, and whenever we can reach exactness, we secure the great end of translation. S. Fr., “le condamneérent comme ayant mérité de la mort ;” Castalio, “ut morte dignum damnaye- runt ;” Ital., “lo condemnarono come degno di morte ;” Tyndale and Geneva, “They all gave sentence that he was worthy of death.” This ancient rendering is far superior to that of the E. V., which seems to have been taken from the Vulgate “ con- demnayerunt eum esse reum morte.” w “to beat—with—fists ;” κολαφέξειν. Tynd., Kend., Pechy, Rob. Thom., “smote him with their fists ;” Iber., “ maltratarlo ἃ puiadas.” “Buffet” is too general in signification, to present the idea of the Greek verb. Besides this, it is now used only in the metaphorical sense. x “ officers.” See v. 54, note. Υ “sttuck—with their open hands;” δαπίσμασιν. Kend., Dick. Rob. (βάλλω and ὁάπισμα.) Belg., “ gaven hem kinne- bakslagen” (“gave him blows on the jaws”). Suidas (quoted by Bretsch.) thus defines δαπέσαε, “ πατάξαι τὴν γνάϑον ἁπλῇ τῇ χειρί." The phrase, “ to strike with the palms of the hand,” has never gained any currency in our language. 102 KING JAMES’ VERSION. in the palace, there cometh one of the maids of the high priest: 67 And when she saw Peter warming himself, she looked upon him, and said, And thou also wast with Jesus of Nazareth. 68 But he denied, saying, I know not, neither understand I what thou sayest. And he went out into the porch; and the cock crew. 69 And a maid saw him again, and began to say to them that stood by, This is one of them. 70 And he denied it again. And a little after, they that stood by said again to Peter, Surely thou art one of them: for thou art a Galilean, and thy speech agreeth thereto. 71 But he began to curse and to swear, saying, | know not this man of whom ye speak. 72 And the second time the cock crew. And Peter called to mind the word that Jesus said unto him, Before the cock crow twice, thou shalt deny me thrice. And when he thought thereon, he wept. : :. “the court.” See v. 54, note. 2 “of the maid-servants ;” τῶν παιδισκῶν. Thom., Camp., Dick. for “a man-servant.” ete. Bretsch., “ ancilla, serva.” pare Galat. 4 : 22, 23, 30, 31. > «Thou also ;” Kat σὺ. So Pechy drops “ and.” The correlative παῖς is a common term See (HE. V.) Matt.8:6,13. Luke 7: “ Maid” is too general. So parallel (E. V.) Matt. 26 : 69. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XIV. GREEK TEXT. “ DNS ΄ 4 , “ τῇ αὐλῃ κάτω, ἔρχεται μία τῶν “ ΄“ / παιδισκῶν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως, ™ καὶ > fal Ν ΄ ἰὴ ἰδοῦσα τὸν Πέτρον θερμαινομε- Ss νον, ἐμβλέψασα αὐτῷ λέγει, ἂν Ν lol an Kai ov pera τοῦ Na apnvot mbes ε \ ΄ ᾿]ησοῦ ἦσθα. δ᾽ Ὃ δὲ ἠρνήσα- , 5 \ το, λέγων, Οὐκ οἶδα, οὐδὲ ἐπί- Ἄν; σταμαι τί σὺ λέγεις. Καὶ ἐξ- tod Ve > Ν ΄ Ν ἦλθεν ἔξω εἰς τὸ προαύλιον: καὶ ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησε. ὃ Καὶ ἡ 7 > - DN 7 παιδίσκη ἰδοῦσα αὐτὸν πάλιν yy , ΄- / ἤρξατο λέγειν τοῖς παρεστηκό- νὰ - “ σιν, Ὅτι οὗτος ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐστιν. ε \ 4. ΄ τὸ τῷ δὲ πάλιν ἠρνεῖτο. Καὶ Ἂς Ν ΄ὔ ΄ cal μετὰ μικρὸν πάλιν οἱ παρεστῶ- yy lod »») > tal Tes ἔλεγον τῷ Πέτρῳ, “ληθῶς ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ: καὶ yap Τ.αλιλαῖος 5 \ ¢ / « ΄ὔ εἰ, καὶ ἡ λαλιά σου ὁμοιάζει. 7 ε \ 3, 1 °O δὲ ἤρξατο ἀναθεματίζειν \ > 72 dp > Ss Ν καὶ ὀμνύειν, τι οὐκ οἰδα Tov a ΟΣ ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον, ὃν λέγετε. 5 Καὶ ἐκ δευτέρου ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώ- vnoe. Καὶ ἀνεμνήσθη ὁ {Π|- a / “Ὁ 53 tal Tpos TOU ῥήματος ov εἶπεν αὐτῷ ΕΓ a a Ν 3 / ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς, “Ort πρὶν ἀλέκτορα σ΄ / φωνῆσαι δὶς, ἀπαρνήσῃ pe τρίς. Ne, 33 \ 37 καὶ ἐπιβαλὼν ἐκλαιε. REVISED VERSION. below in ‘the court, there com- eth one "οἵ the maid-servants of the high priest: and when she saw Peter warming himself, she looked on him, and saith, *Thou also wast with Jesus of Nazareth. But he denied, say- ing, I know not, ‘nor under- stand * what thou sayest. And he went out into the porch; and the cock crew. And ‘the maid- servant ‘seeing him again, be- gan to say to those who stood by, This is one of them. And he denied ®t again. And a little after, those who stood by, said again to Peter, Surely thou art one of them: for thou art a Galilean, and thy speech agreeth "fo it. But he began to curse and to swear, saying, I know not this man of whom ye speak. And the second time the cock crew. And Peter called to mind the word which Jesus said to him, Before the cock shall crow twice, thou wilt deny me thrice. And when he thought ‘on it, he wept. 67 69 72 Campbell, Dick., Pechy, and Sharpe. G. Fr. and 5. Fr., “la Wakef., Pechy, 7, Com- f “seeing ;” ἐδοῦσα. Sharpe. servante ;” Span. and Iber., “la criada;” Ital., “la fantesca ;” De Wette, “die Magd.” The article obviously refers to the same maid-servant who is mentioned in v. 66. See Bloomfield and Trollope (Analecta) zn loco. Wakef., Kend., Campbell, Dickinson, ® «7t” his word is really a supplement, and should have See ch. 13 : 11, note. a «ΤΡ after “understand,” is superfluous. The pronoun is not used in De Wette, S. F'r., Iber. e “the maid-servant ;” ἡ zracdéoxn. See vy. 66, note. The definite article is demanded here. It is used by Wesley, Wakef., © “nor ;” οὐδὲ. been italicized in the EH. V., as it is by Wakef. h “to it.” This swpplement is substituted for thereto, now used as a egal term. i “on it.” In conformity with present usage, this is sub- stituted for thereon. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XV. 103 KING JAMES’ VERSION. CHAP. XY. AnD straightway in the morn- ing the chief priests held a con- sultation with the elders and scribes, and the whole council, and bound Jesus, and carried him away, and delivered him to Pi- late. GREEK TEXT, CHAP. XV. KAI εὐθέως ἐπὶ τὸ πρωὶ συμβούλιον ποιήσαντες οἱ ἀρχ- ιερεῖς μετὰ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ γραμματέων, καὶ ὅλον τὸ συνέδριον, δήσαντες τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν ἀπήνεγκαν καὶ παρέδωκαν τῷ REVISED VERSION. CHAP. Xv. AND ‘immediately in the 1 morning, "the chief priests ‘took counsel with the elders and scribes, and the whole council, and bound Jesus, and carried him away, and ‘delivered him up to Pilate. And Pilateasked 2 2 And Pilate asked him, Art Wire thou the King of the Jews? And : he answering, said unto him, Thou cal > / ; τῶν Lovdatov ; sayest az. Ἧ GOK» πολλά: *6 δὲ swered nothing. 2 Nae 4 > ξ 2 Καὶ ΕΠ ΘΟ εν AU-!him, Art thou the King of the \ ε TENE Sas B x \ : i TOV ὁ LLIAATOS, VU εἰ ὁ PAGLAEUS| Jows? And he answering, said ε Nees) Ν Τ᾿ Ἶ O δε ἀποκριθεὶς | to him, Thou sayest if. Ἶ : 3 TES 3 And the chief priests accused | 7€ UTP, << λέγεις. him of many things: but he an-|Ka77yopouy αὐτοῦ Ol ἀρχίερεις of many things. And. 3 3 Kal ief pri αὐ) the chief priests accused him eAnd Pilate 4 Tina (λ i i i ἰλᾶτος παλιν} asked him again, saying, An- 4 And Pilate asked him again, ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτὸν, λέγων, Οὐκ swerest thou nothing? behold saying, Answerest thou nothing? behold how many things they wit- ness against thee. 5 But Jesus yet answered no- thing; so that Pilate marvelled. 6 Now at that feast he released » Te > , ” / ἑ δ αποκρινῃ οὐδέν; ἴδε, πόσα σου how many things ‘they testify - c ΝΣ ΤΣ καταμαρτυροῦσιν: ὃ Ὃ δὲ ᾿Ζ]η-} ἀραΐπδι thee. a ae AS. >Q\ > / o iF - σοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη, WaTE|swered ‘nothing further; so 4G Νὴ Δ θαυμάζειν τὸν IlAarov. AY NOPE NX > , » ° Kara δὲ ἑορτὴν ameAvev av-| at that feast ‘he used to release But Jesus an- 5 that Pilate "wondered. Now 6 See ch. 1 : 10, note. b “the chief priests,” οἷο. ; συμβούλεον ποιήσαντες of ἀρχ- 2 “immediately.” ἐερεῖς μετὰ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καέ γραμματέων, καὶ ὅλον τὸ συνέδριον. I haye retained the rendering of the E. V., though it is not free from difficulty. The grammatical construction of that version puts “council” in the objective case, coupling it to “scribes,” as that is connected with “ elders,” which is governed by the preposition with. Now, in the text, πρεσβυτέρων and γοαμματέων (governed by wera) are genitives, while ὅλον τὸ συνέδριον» is placed in the nominative. The text is closely fol- lowed by Mont., “consilium facientes summi sacerdotes cum senioribus et scribis, et universus consessus.” Beza, “ consilio inito, summi sacerdotes cum senioribus et scribis, totusque con- sessus, vinctum Jesum abduxerunt.” Castalio, “inito consilio, Pontifices una cum Senatoribus et Scribis, totusque consessus, Jesum colligant,” ete. To present the thought which the gram- matical construction demands, the S. Fr. has “les principaux sacri- ficateurs avec les anciens et les scribes et tout le conseil consul- terent ensemble aprés avoir 116 Jesus,” etc. So Ital., “i principali sacerdoti cogli anziani e scribi e tutti il concistoro tennero con- siglio. Dopo ayer legato Gesu.”— Fritzsche remarks on this passage : “Optime comparata sunt voce. καὶ ὅλον τὸ συνέδριον post v. of ἀρχιερεῖς meta τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ γραμματέων. Declarant ut enim illa et, ut paucis verbis absolvam, universum synedrium.—Lectio Er. Schmiddii καὶ ὅλου τοῦ συνεδρίου ex Syro aliisque translationibus derivata emendatio est. Nam si, ut debemus, ὅλον τὸ συνέδριον retinemus, id grammatice cum remo- tiore v. of ἀρχεερεῖς coheret:” The rendering of Tyndale (which has been substantially followed by Cranmer, Geneva, and the common EH. V.) was derived from the Vulgate, “summi sacer- dotes, cum senioribus, et scribis et universo consilio.” This is, as though we read with Schmiddius, zat ὅλου rad συνεδρίου. I sub- mit the following rendering for consideration, “ the chief priests, with the elders and scribes, even the whole council, consulted, and bound Jesus.” ° “took counsel ;” συμβούλιον ποιήσαντες. Pechy. So (E. V.) ch.3:6. See Rob., συμβούλιον (joined with λαμβάνειν), “ to take counsel.” - ἃ « delivered—up.” See ch. 8 : 19, note. ¢ There is nothing in the text corresponding to, “but he answered nothing.” f “they testify ;” καταμαρτυροῦσιν. note. ® “nothing further ;” οὐκέτε οὐδὲν. Pechy. Rob., οὐκέτε. h «wondered ;” ϑαυμάζειν. See ch.5:20. Wakef., Kend., Wesley. e 1 «he used to release ;” ἀπέλυεν. Kendrick,, Wakef., Pechy, Bloomf. (N. T.), Camp. John 18 : 39, ἔστε δὲ συνήϑεια ὑμῖν, “jut ye have a custom.” The parallel, Matt. 27:15, εἰώϑει ἀπολύειν, B. V., “he was wont.” The verb here being in the imperfect, may properly signify what is usual or customary ; con- tinued and repeated action in present time.” Stuart (Gram.), 2136. II. a. See Trollope (Gram.), p. 129, 2. 2 (in loco). Tyn- dale, “was wont;” Beza (Ed. 1624), “solitus erat solvere ;” Vulg., “ solebat dimittere ;” Castal., “ solebat laxare.” Kend. See ch. 14 : 56, 104 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XV. KING JAMES’ VERSION. unto them one prisoner, whomso- ever they desired. 7 And there was one named Barabbas, which lay bound with them that had made insurrection with him, who had committed murder in the insurrection. 8 And the multitude crying aloud, began to desire him to do as he had ever done unto them. 9 But Pilate answered them, saying, Will ye that Lr ese unto you the King of the Jews 10 (For he knew that te chief priests had delivered him for en- vy:) 11 But the chief priests moved the people that he should rather release Barabbas unto them. 12 And Pilate answered, and said again unto them, What will ye then that I shall do unto him whom ye call the King of the Jews? 13 And they cried out again, Crucify him. 14 Then Pilate said unto them, Why, what evil hath he done? And they cried out the more ex- ceedingly, Crucify him. GREEK TEXT. a , vA > a τοῖς ἕνα δεσμιον, OVTEP NTOVYTO. 3 \ / n Tay δὲ ὁ λεγόμενος BapaBBas a a / μετὰ τῶν συστασιαστῶν δεδεμε- rn Mp / vos, οἵτινες ἐν TH στάσει φόνον , Ν 5 , πεποιήκεισαν. ὃ καὶ ἀναβοήσας cy ” > “ \ ὁ ὄχλος ἤρξατο αἰτεῖσθαι, καθὼς cal X: 7 ἀεὶ ἐποίει αὐτοῖς. ὃ ὁ δὲ Πιλά- » ΄ > o , / Tos ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς, λέγων, Oe- 3 / eon \ / λετε ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν Tov βασιλεα > Tovdaiov; ' ?Eyivocke ὅτι διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώ- ΝΕ τῶν Ν γὰρ κεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς. δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς ἀνέσεισαν τὸν ὄχ- λον, ἵνα μᾶλλον τὸν Βαραββᾶν a § ’ ἀπολύσῃ αὐτοῖς. ὁ δὲ Πιλά- ; a Tos ἀποκριθεὶς πάλιν εἶπεν av- a ry 5 , , A τοῖς, Lt οὖν θελετε ποιήσω ὃν / , ΄ λέγετε βασιλεα τῶν ᾿Ϊ]ουδαίων; © ¢ » / 15. Οἱ δὲ πάλιν ἔκραξαν, Σταύ- / \ , ρωσον αὐτόν. 1 Ὃ δὲ Πιλά- wy > lad , \ τος ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς, Tt yap κα- Ἂς 3 ͵ c ΑΝ , κὸν ἐποίησεν; Οἱ δὲ περισσοτε- » / / pos ἔκραξαν, Σταύρωσον αὐτόν. REVISED VERSION. to them one prisoner, whomso- ever ΠΟΥ asked. And there 7 was one named Barabbas, ‘lying bound ‘with his fellow-insur- gents, who had committed mur- der in the insurrection. And 8 =the crowd crying aloud, began "to ask him to do as he had ever done to them. But Pilate an- 9 swered them, saying, Will ye that 91 shall release to you the King of the Jews? (Forhe knew 10 ;|that the chief priests Phad de- ulivered him up ¢from envy.) But the chief priests ‘stirred up tthe crowd, that he should rather release Barabbas to them. And Pilate ‘answering again, said to them, What will ye then that I shall do to him, whom ye call King of the Jews? vAnd they 18 cried out again, Crucify him. »But Pilate said to them, Why, what evil hath he done? And they cried out the more ex- ceedingly, Crucify him. *Then 15 i “they asked ΠΝ usually rendered “ ask,” in H. V. > = 7/TOVYTO. k “]ying bound ;” δεδεμένος. Pechy. 1 “with his fellow-insurgents ;” Kendrick, See Rob. μετὰ τῶν συστασιαστῶν. ”» Pechy. This verb is| τ “stirred up; + | these two passages. ® “the crowd.” ἀνέσεισαν. Pechy, Rob. So (Εἰ. V.) Luke 23 : 5. t “answering again ;’ Wesley, Wakef., Kend., Sharpe, The word occurs only in See ch. 2 : 4, note. 7 ἀποκριϑεὶς πάλιν. Sharpe. Vulg., Thom., Pechy. Rob. (in verbo), “a fellow-insurgent ;” Beza, “oum seditionis sociis.” Though “ insurgent” is not found in the BE. V., it is still now well understood by all English readers. Wherever we have appropriate words, it is desirable to avoid periphrases in translation. As στάσαι, a correlate word, is ren- dered “insurrection” in this verse, there seems to be no good reason why we may not employ “ insurgent.” m “the crowd.” See ch. 2 : 4, note. ἈΠ ito. ask 3)” Sharpe, Wesley, Rob. This is the usual rendering of the verb, in the N. T. αἰτεῖσϑαι. 9 “TJ shall release ;” ἀπολύσω. subj. accords with present usage. “TJ shall do” (E. V.) p “had delivered—up.” This rendering of the aorist So ποιήσω in the next verse, See ch. 1 : 14, note. a “from envy ;” δεὰ φϑόνον. Kend. Although “ through envy” would express the thought, it is deemed advisable to restrict (as far as possible) the use of “ through” to cases where διὰ is followed by the genitive. “iterum respondens ;” Iber., “respondio de nuevo.” On the ground that πάλιν is construed with ἀποκριϑεὶς, a comma is placed after “ again.” ἃ “whom ye call King ;” ὃν λέγετε βασιλέα. As the noun is anarthrous in the text, no article is deemed necessary in the yersion. So Thom., Pechy, Iber., 5. Fr., De Wette; Dan. The Belg. inserts the indefinite article, “ een Koning.” y “And they cried out again ;” Οἱ δὲ πάλιν ἔκραξαν. Sharpe, “and they again cried out.” dha ἔκραξαν relers to ἀναβοή-" σας, yY.8. Hence σάλεν is to be construed with ἔκραξαν. Fritz., “ad ad sublatum (y. 8) clamorem (non ad yerba alta voce enunciata) pertinet.” We are thus relieved from the difficulty of supposing (without proof) that the crowd had previously cried, “ Crucify him !” ~ “But;” δὲ. Pechy, Thom., Dick. Vulg., Eras., “ vero ;” Beza, “autem.” The particle is obviously adversative. x “Then ;” καὶ. Rob. καὶ, “At the beginning of a sentence, where any thing is narrated as done immediately, or soon after THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XV. KING JAMES’ VERSION. 15 And so Pilate, willing to content the people, released Bar- abbas unto them, and delivered Jesus, when he had scourged him, to be crucified. 16 And the soldiers led hin away unto the hall, called Preto- rium; and they call together the whole band ; 17 And they clothed him with purple, and platted a crown of thorns, and put it about his head, 18 And began to salute him, Hail, King of the Jews! . 19 And they sinoie him on the head with a reed, and did spit upon him, and bowing their knees, worshipped him. 20 And when they had mocked him, they took off the purple from him, and put his own clothes on him, and led him out to erucify him. 21 And they compel one Simon a Cyrenian, who passed by, coin- that which the preceding context narrates; here zai is equiva- lent to the more usual τότε, then, after that.” Rob., Lexilog., I. p. 26 (quoted by Rob. and Liddell), says that this verb differs from ϑέλω (or ἐϑέλω) in expressing a mere inclina- tion, or willingness, while the latter expresses choice, or pur- Υ “being willing ;” βουλόμενος. pose. 2 “to satisfy ;” τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιῆσαι. Rob. (in loco, ἱκανὸν.) Vulg., facere ;” 5S. Fr., “ satisfaire ;” 5 Fritz., a «the crowd.” > « delivered—up.” See ch. 2 : 4, note. ¢ “the palace ;” τῆς αὐλῆς. Wesley, Kend., Erasmus, Beza, Castalio, “ satis- “ Notat satisfacere alicut, h. 6. efficere, ne quis habeat quod queratur.” See ch. 1 : 14, note. The Pretorium was the palace GREEK TEXT. 5 ¢ Ἂν ΄ ΄ tal AO δὲ Πιλάτος βουλόμενος τῷ ὄχλῳ τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιῆσαι, ἀπέλυ- σεν τὸν -“Βαραββᾶν' καὶ παρέ- δωκε τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν, φραγελλώσας, τ : AEN EURO kt "Οἱ δὲ στρατιῶται amnya- \ » a z γον αὐτὸν ἔσω τῆς αὐλῆς, ὃ ἐστι πραιτώριον, καὶ συγκαλοῦσιν “ \ > 17 Xe f ὅλην THY σπεῖραν, “' καὶ ἐνδυ- SN / ουσιν αὐτὸν πορφύραν, Kat περι- / > a / > ,ὔ τιθέασιν αὐτῷ πλέξαντες aKay-| ἣ ΓΞ θινον στέφανον, ' καὶ ἤρξαντο ΄ῳ » Ν rn σπαζεσθαι avrov, Χαῖρε, Ba- cod “ > , 9 NL» σιλεῦ τῶν Lovdaiwy: ~ Kat ἐτυ- > - \ \ ΄ὔ πτον αὐτοῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν καλάμῳ, ἣν » / > o As / καὶ ἐνέπτυον αὐτῷ, καὶ τιθέντες. τὰ γόνατα προσεκύνουν αὐτῷ. A Kete-c ore ἐνέπαιξαν αὐτῷ, ἐξέ- δυσαν αὐτὸν τὴν τ πορφύραν, ἐνέδυσαν αὐτὸν τὰ ἱμάτια ἴδια: καὶ ἐξάγουσιν αὐτὸν, σταυρώσωσιν αὐτόν. ον καὶ γαρεύουσι παράγοντά τινα καὶ \ Ta o «νὰ 3 ay- wy aa l= REVISED VERSION. Pilate *being willing *to satisfy "the crowd, released Barabbas to them, and *delivered up Je- sus, when he had scourged him, And the sol- led him away into ‘the to be crucified. diers palace ‘which is ‘the Pretorium ; the whole band; and they clothed him with purple, and ‘braided a crown of thorns and put it about his head, and began to salute him, Hail, King of the Jews! And they head with a reed, *and-spit on him, and bowing their knees, ‘did reverence to him. And when they had mocked him, they took off the purple from him, and put his own /garments and they called together Esmote his on him, and led him out to erucify him. And they compel one Simon, a Cyrenian, ‘who 20 21 erceihes oceurs in ὃ. Fr., ” βούλομαι. Butt.,| £ “ braided ; « Braid,” Thom. paient la téte ;” This article is a supplement. Tber., De Wette. σλέξαντες. the same signification, but and “ Plait.” Vulg., “verberabant illius caput ; In the parallel, Matt. 27 So Rob. (i loco.) is now obsolete. Vulg., Mont., eo Ditto 5 a5 ἐτυσπτο αὐτοῦ τὴν LEGALLY. ” “percutiebant caput ejus ; A definite article « Plait” has See Webster, Beza, Castal., render the verb by different inflections of plecto (* to braid,” “ intertwine”). De Wette, “ flechten.” & «smote his head ;”’ Kend., Wakef., “ kept smiting his head;” 8. Fr., “ils lui frap- Erasmus, ” Beza, “verberabant ejus caput.” : 30, the text is ἔτυπτον εἰς τὴ» κεφα- λὴν, rendered in the E. V., “smote him on the head.” the language of the text in the two parallels (Matt. and Mark) is Sharpe, Although erected by Herod, and which at the time of the crucifixion was the residence of the procurators, when they visited Jerusalem. Strictly speaking, this αὐλή was probably the inclosed court where the procurator or his substitute sat to administer justice, and which was also “the place of armes” for the guard. See Rob., αὐλή. Bloomt. (in loco.) To avoid the necessity of using the phrase “the court of the palace,” this note is placed in the margin, “ or court.” @ “which is;” Sharpe. S. Fr., “qui est;” Wette, “ das ist ;” Iber., “ que es ;” Belg., “ welk is.” De g 3 oOo ἐστι. different, the translators haye presented a verbal harmony to the reader, which is not authorized by the Greek. Many such in- stances occur in the E. V. of the Evangelists. ’ is obsolete, and “ did” Bul- h “and spit ;” καὶ ἐνέσττυον. “ Spat” is superfluous. The present form of the imperfect is spit. lion’s Eng. Gram. Webster. ' “ did reverence ;” προσεκύνουν. Sce ch. 5 : 6, note. } “ garments ; o (E. V.) v. 24. This is the usual rendering of this noun, in the E. V. See ch. 5 : 28, note. k “who was passing by ;” Wesley, Sharpe, ” ἡμάτια. παράγοντά. 106 KING JAMES’ VERSION. ing out of the country, the father of Alexander and Rufus, to bear! ¢ his cross. 22 And they bring him unto the place Golgotha, which is, be- ing interpreted, The place of a skull. 23 And they gave him to drink, wine mingled with myrrh: but he received 7¢ not, 24 And when they had eruci- fied him, they parted his earments, casting lots upon them, what every man should take. 25 And it was the third hour, and they crucified him. 26 And the superscription of his accusation was written over, THE KING OF THE JEWS. 27 And with him they crucify two thieves, the one on his right | hand, and the other on his left. 28 And the scripture was ful- filled, which saith, And he was numbered with the transgressors. 29 And they that passed by, THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XV. GREEK TEXT. Hove. “Κυρηναῖον, ἐρχόμενον ἀπ᾽ ἀγροῦ, τὸν πατέρα, ᾿Αλεξάνδρου καὶ Povdov, ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυ- ρὸν αὐτοῦ. ΚΑ΄ φέρουσιν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ Τ᾽ολγοθὰ τόπον, 6 ἐστι μεθερ- Kpaviov / / PLN VEVO[LEVOY, τόπος. | 92 σ- ᾽ a a “Καὶ ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ πιεῖν ἐσμυρ- Uy 9 ε \ yA νισμένον οἶνον: ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔλαβε. 24 TN , > \ Kai σταυρώσαντες αὐτον, διε- , Ν . ΄ 5 col ΄ μέριζον τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ, βάλ- ΄σ 2 Ν λοντες ἘΠ ΩΣ ἐπ᾿ αὐτὰ, τίς τί ἄρῃ. > ἦν δὲ wpa Bema καὶ ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν. 7° Kat ἦν ἡ ἐπιγραφὴ τῆς αἰτίας αὐτοῦ ἐπι- ΄ Veo evi τ βασιλεὺς τῶν » 7 Τουδαίων. Kai σταυροῦσι δύο λῃστὰς, ἕνα ἐκ Se A τ Ie > / δεξιῶν Kai eva ἐξ εὐωνύμων av- a aD Ke ἐπληρώθη. ἡ γραφὴ n λέγουσα, Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων δ. Καὶ οἱ παραπο- σὺν αὐτῷ του. ἐλογίσθη. REVISED VERSION. was passing by, coming !from the country, the father of Alex- ander and Rufus, to bear his cross. And they bring him to ma place, Golgotha, which, be- ing interpreted, is, "A place of a skull. eAnd they gave him wine mingled with myrrh to drink ; but Phe did not receive it. And when they had cruci- fied him, they parted his gar- ments, casting lots «for them, what reach should take. And it was the third hour, ‘when they crucified him. And the ‘inscription of his accusation “was written over him, THE KING OF THE Jews. And with 27 him they crucify two ‘robbers, one Yat his right hand, and the other vat his left. And the scripture was fulfilled, which saith, And he was numbered «with transgressors. And those 29 « 28 28 Kend. Thom. Σ᾽ The participial construction is adopted by Wakef. and| there is a double interrogative here, “ who should take what.” With the change of “ every one” to “each,” the thought is 1 “from ; Kend., Pechy, Dick., Wakef., Thom. The E. V. unnecessarily substitutes the usual signification of ἐκ (“out of”) for that of aro (“ from”). m “a place;” τόπος. So in parallel (Εἰ. V.) Matt. 27 : 33. As this noun is anarthrous in Matt. and Mark, though not in Luke and John, a close adherence to the text is deemed proper in rendering the word. In conformity with the punctuation of Wesley, a comma is inserted after “place.” The indefinite article is employed by Wakefield, Sharpe, Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva, Pechy. an (ἀγροῦ.) n Ar place ; : 33. Wesley, Wakef., ° “And they gave him wine,” ete. ‘This arrangement is the natural one for English readers; one in which the words are most easily enunciated and recollected. So De Wette, “ sie gaben ihm Myrrhen-Wein zu trinken.” ” τόπος. So parallel (E. V.) Matt. 27 Sharpe, Pechy. See last note. P “he did not receive zt.” See last note. 9 “for them;” ἐπ᾽ αὐτὰ. Sharpe. he preposition marks the object in reference to which the action is performed. “ Upon” or “on” fails to bring out this idea with sufficient distinctness. In cases like that before us, we employ “ for.” τ “each ;” tis. Wakef., Sharpe, Kend., Dick. properly exhibited in the E. V. s “when ;” καὶ. Wesley, Kend., Camp., Wakef. Hoogeven “Put for wa, Mark 15:25. Heb. 8:8.” Bloomf. Greenf. De Wette, “da;” Iberian, “ cuando ;” Ital., Beza, “ quando ;” Castal., “ cum.” (on καὶ), (N. T.) “che ;” t “inscription ;” Dick., Thom., Camp. “inscripeion.” Rob, ἐπιγραφὴ. Sharpe, Pechy, Kend., Wesley, Hras., Beza, Castal., “ inscriptio ;,” Iber., u “was written over him ;” Pechy. The supplement him is taken from Luke 23 : 38, Hy—yeyoaupérn ix αὐτῷ. Belg., “ was boven hem geschreven.” Some trans- lators haye supposed that ἐστε, in composition, in this instance does not modify the verb at all, and that érweyeauuévn is equivalent to γεγραμμένη. If this view is well founded, then the rendering should be simply, “was written.” Looking at the parallel quoted above, I deem the proper translation, “ written over.” ᾿ > , YV— ETTLYEVOAMMEVN. Y “robbers ;” λῃστὰς. Kend., Dick., Thom., Camp., Pechy. Vulg., Eras., Mont., Beza, Castal., “Jatrones ;” Ital., “ladroni ;” Tber., “ ladrones ;” De Wette, “ Rauber ;” 8. I'r., “ brigands.” ww “ot” “at” See ch. 10 : 37, note. x “ with transgressors ;”” The article of E. V. μετὰ ἀνόμων. In strictness, | is dropped by Kend., Camp., Sharpe. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XV. 107 KING JAMES’ VERSION. railed on him, wagging their heads, and saying, Ah, thou that destroyest the temple, and buildest it in three days, 30 Save thyself, and come down from the cross. 31 Likewise also the chief priests mocking, said among them- selves with the scribes, He saved others; himself he cannot save. 32 Let Christ the King of Israel descend cross, that we may see and be- lieve. And they that were cruci- fied with him, reviled him. 33 And when the sixth was come, there was darkness over the whole land, until the ninth hour. 34 And at the ninth hour Jesus eried with a loud voice, saying, Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani? which is, being interpreted, My God, my God, why hast thou for- saken me ? 35 And some of them that stood by, when they heard ἐξ, said, Be- hold, he ealleth Elias. 86 And one ran and filled a sponge full of vinegar, and put τέ hour GREEK TEXT. , > / SN ρεύομενοι ἐβλασφήμουν avTor, > Xx Ἂς ’ ΄σ κινοῦντες Tas κεφαλᾶς αὐυτῶν, ἊΝ ’ > Ν . 7 καὶ λέγοντες, Οὐαὶ, 0 καταλύων τὸν ναὸν, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις οἰκοδομῶν, σῶσον σεαυτὸν, καὶ κατάβα ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυροῦ. « ͵ \ Ἂς cf > Lol Opotws δὲ καὶ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς ἐμπαίζοντες πρὸς ἀλλήλους μετὰ τῶν γραμματέων ἔλεγον, “Ad- ΕΝ ε \ » ΄ 'λοὺυς ἔσωσεν, ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται now from the} a σ᾿ x e σῶσαι. ὁ ἄριστος ὁ βασι- \ an? \ , a λεὺς τοῦ Ισραηλ καταβάτω νῦν » ἊΝ ΄- lol δ / ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυροῦ, iva ἴδωμεν Kal / aa ΄ πιστεύσωμεν. Καὶ οἱ συνεσταυ- 4 cal / ρωμένοι αὐτῷ “ὠνείδιζον αὐτόν. 33 ΄,΄ WEG! “ , 1 ἐνομένης δὲ wpas ἕκτης, σκὸ- τος ἐγένετο ep ὅλην τὴν γῆν, ἕως ὥρας ἐννάτης: * καὶ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῇ ἐννάτῃ ἐβόησεν ὁ ᾿Ϊησοῦς > Δ. φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, λέγων, ᾿Πλωὶ, > Δ. ca , a Exroi, appa σαβαχθανί; ὃ 3 / « / ἐστι μεθερμηνευόμενον, O Θεὸς ε / , 3 ,ὔ μου, ὁ Θεύς μου, εἰς τί με ἐγκατέ- i > \ a hives; Ἢ Kat τινὲς τῶν παρε- ,ὕ / στηκότων ἀκούσαντες ἔλεγον, ἊΝ , : cr Ὁ ᾿]δοὺ, ᾿Πλίαν φωνεῖ. “ὃ Apa- \ Vo , ὧν δὲ εἷς, καὶ γεμίσας σπόγγον μ ᾿ REVISED VERSION. who passed by ’reviled him, wagging their heads, and say- ing, Ah! thou that destroyest the temple, and buildest ἐξ in three days, save thyself, and come down from the cross. *In 31 like manner also the chief priests, mocking, said ‘to one another with the scribes, He saved others; himself he can not save. *Let the Anointed, the King of Israel come down now from the cross, that we may see and believe. And those, who were crucified with him, ‘reproached him. And 33 when ‘the sixth hour came, there was darkness over the whole land, till the ninth hour. And at the ninth hour Jesus 34 eried with a loud voice, saying, Wloi, Eloi, ‘lamma sabachthani? ‘which, being interpreted, My God, my God, why hast thou forsaken me? And some 35 of those, who stood by, ®hear- ing it, said, Behold, he calleth Elijah. And one ran and "filled 36 a sponge with vinegar, and oo oS st) τῷ y “reviled ;” ἐβλασφήμουν. (BE. V.) Matt. 27:39. See ch. 3 x “Tn like manner ;” Ὁκοίως--- και. Rob. (i verbo) “ Likewise” “in like manner,” and “ also.” rendered “ likewise,” in the E. V. spurious. ” = “to one another;” πρὸς ἀλλήλους. Wesley. As an alternative inter sese illudentes, cum scribis dicebant. Ὁ “Tet—come down ;” the parallel, Matt. 27 © “reproached ;” ὠνεέδεξον. καταβάτω. Campbell, Thom. : 28, note. Wesley, Kend., Pechy. is ambiguous, at it signifies both See Webster. The particle δὲ of the Text. Recept. (after Ὁμοίως) is canceled by Griesbach, Scholz, Lach., Knapp, Titt., Fritz, Bloomf., Tischend., Rob. (Harmony.) So κατάβα, vy. 30, and :42. Wakef., Sharpe, Wesley, Pechy. So (E. V.) Luke 6 : 22. So parallel Camp., Robinson. “ Reyile” Reyision. ‘Ouoiws is always It is| See ch. 1 : 38, note. e “Jamma 3” See ch. 4 : 41, note. So Sharpe. Thom., Kend., Castalio, “ Pontifices | cido, es.” ” “hearing Rom. ΠΡ ΟΣ Ibn, 453 af Liddell, is the uniform rendering of βλασφημέω, in this 4 “ the sixth hour came ;” in other instances, a change is made to avoid the ungrammatical construction of the auxiliary “to be,” with an intransitive verb. λαμμᾶ. ferred word is followed. So Sharpe, Kend., Campbell, Dick., De rendering, “ the chief priests, mock-| Wette, Belg., Iber. ing among themselves with the scribes, said,” ete. Iber., “los principes de los sacerdotes tambien, con los escribas, burlandose de [el] unos con otros, decian ;” £ “which, being interpreted, is ; ©” ἀκούσαντες. h « filled a sponge with ; field, Kendrick. S. Fr., “remplit de vinaigre une éponge ;” De Wette, “ fiillete einen Schwamm.” 1 Pet. 4:14. Kend., Dick., Pechy, “to throw a reproach upon one.” γενομένης---ὥρας ἕκτης. Here, as The Greek orthography of this trans- 2 , 6 ἐστε μεϑερκμηνευόκενον. (“ which, interpreted, is”); Iber., “que, tradu- Wesley, Kend., Wakef,, Camp. ” Sharpe, Wake- γεμίσας σπόγγον». “Full” is superfluous. It 108 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XV. KING JAMES’ VERSION. on a reed, and gave him to drink, saying, Let alone; let us see whether Hlias will come to take him down. : 37 And Jesus cried with a loud voice, and gave up the ghost. 38 And the vail of the temple was rent in twain, from the top to the bottom. 39 And when the centurion which stood over against him, saw that he so cried out, and gave up the ghost, he said, Truly this man was the Son of God. 40 There were also women looking on afar off, among whom was Mary Magdalene, and Mary the mother of James the less, and of Joses, and Salome ; 41 Who also, when he was in Galilee, followed him, and minis- tered unto him; and many other women which came up with him unto Jerusalem. 42 And now, when the even was come, (because it was the was taken from Tyndale. Montanus. ! “winding it;” σπεριϑείς. sponge. See Rob. (im verbo.) “ cireumponens calamo.” stalk. } “gave him drink ;” rendered Rom. 12 : 20. current in our language. k “ Worbear ;” Agere. Vulg., “implens spongiam accto.” Literally, “putting zt round,” that is, according to our usus loquendi, “ winding it,” i. e., the Beza, “ circumposita ; This act of “ winding around” was the natural one for attaching the sponge to the “reed,” ἐπότιζεν αὐτὸν. 20 : 35, ἐποτίσατέ we, “ ye gaye me drink.” This corresponds with present usage ; while “to give to drink” is a phrase which has never been Thom., Rob., “to leave unheeded.” GREEK TEXT. ὄξους, περιθείς Te καλάμῳ, ἐπό- τιζεν αὐτὸν, λέγων, "A bere, ἴδω- μεν εἰ ἔρχεται ᾿ Πλίας καθελεῖν αὐτόν. “Ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς ἀφεὶς φωνὴν μεγάλην ἐξέπνευσε. 38 καὶ τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχίσθη εἰς Ovo, ἀπὸ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω. ὅ9γδὼν δὲ ὁ κεντυρίων ὁ παρε- στηκὼς ἐξ ἐναντίας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι οὕτω κράξας ἐξέπνευσεν, εἶπεν, ᾿Αληθῶς ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος υἱὸς ἦν Θεοῦ. “ ἾΕσαν δὲ καὶ γυ- ναῖκες ἀπὸ μακρόθεν θεωροῦσαι, ἐν ais ἣν καὶ Mapia ἡ Mayda- ληνὴ, καὶ “αρία ἡ τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ ‘Loon μήτηρ, καὶ Σαλώμη, * at καὶ, ὅτε ἣν ἐν τῇ ΠΤ. αλιλαίᾳ, ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ, καὶ διηκόνουν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἄλλαι πολ- at αἱ συναναβᾶσαι αὐτῷ εἰς “Ἱεροσόλυμα. " Καὶ ἤδη ὀψίας γενομένης, ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευὴ, ὃ ἐστι προσ- REVISED VERSION. ‘winding zt ona reed Jgave him *Forbear ; see whether Elijah will come drink, saying, let us to take him down. And Jesus luttering a loud cry ™expired. And the vail of the temple was rent "in two, from top to bot- tom. And when the centurion, rPwho stood by over against him, saw that he eried out 480, and expired, he said, Truly this man was the Son of God. There were also women looking on ‘far off, among whom was Mary Magdalene, and Mary the mother of James tthe younger, and of Joses, and Salome ; who also, when he was in Galilee, followed him, and ministered to him; and many other women, who came up with him to Jeru- salem. And now, "evening hay- ing come ‘(‘since it was the 41 So | Camp. Bretsch. breathed his last.” Ὁ “in two ” Vulg., | Sharpe. “Twain” Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castalio, “ expirayit.” As an alternative rendering, the idiomatic phrase, “ he ;” els δύο. Rob., Kend., Pechy, Wakef., Os Camp., is now confined to poetry. The phrase “ Let alone” requires a supplement like “ him.” The thought may be well expressed as aboye. Wakefield, “ Hold!” Dick., “ Desist.” Alternative rendering, “ Let hzm alone.” 1 “uttering ;” ἀφεὶς. Rob. (in verbo) (spoken “ of the voice, to send forth, to utter ;” Beza, Castal., “ emissa voce magna.” “Utter” is often used in the E. V. for the act of sending forth loud sounds. Habak.3:10. Joel3:16. Rey. 10:3. ” 2&6 Wesley, Kend., Pechy, Wakefield, ? m “expired ;” ἐξέπνευσε. or hysop- ° “from top to bottom ;” ἀπὸ ἄνωϑεν ἕως κάτω. Sharpe, Camp., Kend., Thom. Son EsaVayeNattd |e me who stood by;” ὁ παρεστηκὼς. Pechy. Liddell, “to The verb is thus| stand by, or be by.” Often rendered thus in E. V. 4 “so.” This is the natural arrangement in English. Wake- field. * “expired.” See v. 37, note. 5 “for off.’ See ch. ὃ : 6, note. t “the younger ;” τοῦ μικροῦ. Rob. (in verbo), “in a com- parative sense, for less, younger ; Lat. ‘ minor natu,’ Mark 15:40.” So Thom., Pechy, Camp., Dick. Bretsch. (7 Joco), “mor natu, junior.” See ch. 1 : 32, note. Dick. So (E. « “evening having come.” v “since;” ἐπεὶ. Rob., Pechy, 13:3. Iber., “ pués.” V.) 2 Cor. we, THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XVI. 109 KING JAMES’ VERSION. preparation, that is, the day be- fore the sabbath,) 43 Joseph of Arimathea, an honourable counsellor, which also waited for the kingdom of God, came, and went in boldly unto Pilate, and craved the body of Jesus. 44 And Pilate marvelled if he were already dead: and calling unto him the centurion, he asked him whether he had been any while dead. 45 And when he knew ἐξ of the centurion, he gave the body to Joseph. 46 And he bought fine linen, and took him down, and wrapped him in the linen, and laid him in a sepulchre which was hewn out of a rock, and rolled a stone unto the door of the sepulchre. 47 And Mary Magdalene and Mary the mother of Joses beheld where he was laid. CHAP. XVI. Anp when the sabbath was past, Mary Magdalene, and Mary the mother of James, and Salome, had bought sweet spices, that they might come and anoint him. 2 And very early in the morn- GREEK TEXT. aBBarov, *° ἦλθεν ᾿Ιωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ ᾿Αριμαθαίας, εὐσχήμων βουλευ- τὴς, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχύ- μενος τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ" τολμήσας εἰσῆλθε πρὸς Π|ιλά- τον, καὶ ἠτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ᾿]ησοῦ.. “' ὁ δὲ Πιλάτος ἐθαύ- μασεν εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκε" καὶ προσ- καλεσάμενος τὸν κεντυρίωνα, ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτὸν εἰ πάλαι ἀπέ- Gave: “ἢ καὶ γνοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ κεν- τυρίωνος, ἐδωρήσατο τὸ σῶμα ᾿Τωσήφ. καὶ ἀγοράσας σινδόνα, καὶ καθελὼν αὐτὸν, ἐν- eiAnoe TH σινδόνι, καὶ κατέθηκεν τῷ a ΓΝ 3 , EN ESD αὐτὸν ἐν μνημείῳ, ὃ Nv λελατο- μημένον ἐκ πέτρας: καὶ προσεκύ- ΄ 7X’ Ν / a λισε λίθον ἐπὶ τὴν Ovpav τοῦ ἐλ e \ y , « μνημείου. ἢ δὲ Μαρία 7 MaySarnvy καὶ Mapia ᾿Ϊ]ωσῆ ἐθεώρουν ποῦ τίθεται. CHAP. XVI. KAT διαγενομένου τοῦ σαβ- βάτου, Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ καὶ Μαρία ἡ τοῦ ᾿]ακώβου καὶ Σα- Opn ἠγόρασαν ἀρώματα, ἵνα ἐλ- i Ἢ : θοῦσαι ἀλείψωσιν αὐτόν. 2 καὶ REVISED VERSION. preparation, that is, the day be- fore the sabbath), Joseph of Arimathea, an honorable coun- selor, Ywho himself also *was waiting for the kingdom of God, came and went in boldly to Pilate, and yasked for the body of Jesus. And Pilate wondered ‘that she was already dead: and calling *to him the centurion, he ‘inquired of him whether he had been ‘now long dead. And when he knew zt ‘from the centurion, he gaye the body to Joseph. And he bought fine linen, and took him down, and wrapped him in the linen, and laid him in fa tomb, which was hewn out of a rock, and rolled a stone to the door of the tomb. And Mary Mag- dalene and Mary the mother of Joses saw where he was laid. CHAP. XVI. Anp when the sabbath was past, Mary Magdalene, and Mary the mother of James, and Salome, had bought sweet spices, that they might come and anoint him. And *very AT ~ “ who himself also : ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς. Camp. x “was waiting ;” Kend. y “asked for ;” Rob. 5 Ππαὺ τὴν εξ De Wette, “dass ;” S. Fr., ἡτήσατο. Wakef., Kend., Pechy, ἣν προσδεχόμενος. gressive Form of the verb is adopted by Wakef., Dick., Thomson, Geneva, Kendrick, Wakef., This is the ordinary rendering of the verb, in the N. T. Wakef., Pechy, Kend., Wesley, Dick., Thom. Tomer wales gues αὖ." Sharpe. This Pro- ley, Pechy. gestorben sei.” b ( to him.” Pechy, “to inquire of.” 4 “now long ;” “long.” Rob. (εἢ « “he was already dead ;” See ch. 3 ¢ “inquired of him ; σιάλαι. Alternative rendering, “ any time.” ἤϑη τέϑνηκε. : 13, note. " ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτὸν. Rob. (in loco.) Camp. Kend., Dick., W S. Fr., “il était deja mort ;” De Wette, “ er schon Thus εἰ is for ὅτε, and we may render, “ wondered that he was already dead [so soon].” es- Rob. (ia verbo), Pechy and Sharpe, quotes this passage in illustration of a peculiar usage as to εἰ, and renders it by “that.” According to this usage, “it is spoken of things, not merely possible, but certain, and dependent on no condition.” This is especially the case after verbs expressing emotion. Butt., 3139, m. 60. Bloomfield (% loco), “ Beza and others render the εἰ by an, as if there were a doubt; whereas, εἢ is used with Pavuafew, as the Latin si with mirari (indeed, with all yerbs of wonder), to express, what is not doubted, but wondered e “from ;” ἀσὸ. Pechy, Sharpe, Q., Walef., Kend. £ “a tomb;” μνημείῳ. The Τὺ. V. is not uniform in render- ing this noun. Sometimes it has “ tomb,” and at others “ sepul- chre.” This remark applies also to its renderings of τάφος. 1 employ “ tomb” for μι ηκείον. ®& “tomb.” See last note. a “very early ;” Wesley, Kend., Sharpe, Pechy. λέαν πρωΐ. 110 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XVI. KING JAMES’ VERSION. ing, the first day of the week, they came unto the sepulchre at the rising of the sun: 3 And they said among’ them- selves, Who shall roll us away | the stone from the door of the sepulchre ? 4 (And when they looked, they saw that the stone was rolled away,) for it was very great. 5 And entering into the sep- ulchre, they saw a young man sitting on the right side, clothed in a long white garment; and they were affrighted. 6 And he saith unto them, Be not affrighted: ye seek Jesus of Nazareth, which was crucified: he is risen ; he is not here: be- hold the place where they laid him. 7 But go your way, tell his dis- ciples and Peter, that he goeth before you into Galilee: there | shall ye see him, as he said unto | you. 8 And they went out quickly, GREEK TEXT. AG “ cal , λίαν πρωὶ τῆς μιᾶς σαββάτων a Ν - ἔρχονται ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον, ava- / Ee LN 3 NS, τείλαντος τοῦ ἡλίου. καὶ ελε- Ν « \ ὙΠ] > 7 γον πρὸς eavtas, Tis ἀποκυλίσει e - Ν a / a ἡμῖν τὸν λίθον ἐκ τῆς θύρας τοῦ μνημείου; * Καὶ ἀναβλέψασαι an a / € θεωροῦσιν ὅτι ἀποκεκύλισται ὃ {7 5 \ 7 / λίθος. ἣν yap μέγας σφοδρα. 5 > coal Ν cal Kal εἰσελθοῦσαι εἰς TO μνημεῖ- 53 /, ov, €ldov νεανίσκον καθήμενον 5 a ΄ ἐν τοῖς δεξιοῖς, περιβεβλημένον Ν 'στολὴν λευκήν: καὶ ἐξεθαμβή- Ἔ \ θησαν. ° 6 δὲ λέγει αὐταῖς, My 5 ΄ ΄ rn ἐκθαμβεῖσθε. ᾿Ϊ]ησοῦν ζητεῖτε Ν Ν Ἂν 5 "4 τὸν Διαζαρηνὸν τὸν ἐσταυρωμέ- νον" “ἢγέρθη, οὐκ ἔστιν ὧδε: ἴδε, τόπος ὕπου ἔθηκαν αὐτόν. ᾿ ἀλλ᾽ ὑπάγετε, εἴπατε τοῖς μα- | ὁ θηταῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ “Πέτρῳ. ὅτι προάγει ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν 7 «λιλαίαν" ἐκεῖ αὐτὸν ὄψεσθε, καθὼς εἶπεν ὑμῖν. ὃ Καὶ ἐξελθοῦσαι ταχὺ REVISED VERSION. early, *on the first day of the week, they came to the stomb, at the rising of the sun: and 3 they *were saying among them- selves, Who will roll away the stone ‘for us from the door of the ‘tomb? (and ‘looking up, they saw that the stone had been rolled away,) for it was very great. And entering into 5 the ‘tomb, they saw a young man sitting Jat the right side, clothed in a long ‘white robe; and ‘they were terrified. And 6 he saith to them, "Be not térri- fied: ye seek Jesus of Nazareth, who was crucified; "he hath risen, he is not here: behold the place where they laid him. But °go, tell his disciples, rand 7 especially Peter, sHe goeth be- fore you into Galilee: there "ye will see him, as he said to you. And they went out, and fled 8 De Wette, “sehr frithe.” dered “early.” See Rob., rout. break and sunrising. > “on the first day ;” De Wette, “am ersten Wochentage.” See ch. 15 a “were saying: ;” Beza, “ dicebant.” the imperfect. 8. Fr., < Huy. τῆς μιᾶς. e “tomb.” : 46, note. ἔλεγον. “ elles disaient.” ST TOnRUS ise This is the proper singularity and harshness of the E. V. is thus obviated. f “tomb.” See ch. 15 : 46, note. ® “looking up ;” ἀναβλέψασαι. βλέπω. Bretsch., S. Fr., “ levant les yeux.” h “had been rolled away ;” the perfect has the force of a pluperfect. Still, if we suppose, with some, that it has the force of a present, In (E. V.) John 20 : 1, πρωὶ is rven- Liddell, “ generally early.” It properly indicates the morning twilight, the period between day- Sharpe, Kend., Pechy, Dick. Wakef., Thom. Vulg., Erasmus, This rendering preserves the usual force of Kend., Pechy. “suspicio, sursum specto, sie aufblicken ;” ἀποκεκύλισται. Camp. This may be regarded as one of the few cases where LST at k “white robe ;” (E. V.) Luke 15 : 22. Pechy. n “he hath risen ;” ᾿ ὑπάγετε. order in English. The Rob., ava- particular.” a“ He goeth,” etc. Sharpe, Pechy, goeth before you.” ples. Wette, Wakef., Dick. Trollope, 250, p. 133, See ch. 10: στολὴν λευκήν. Campbell, Thom., Sharpe. 1 “they were terrified ;” m “ Be not terrified.” Seer, ἡγέρϑη. Kend., Pechy, Camp., Thom. P “and especially ;” “When a part is subjoined to a whole, by way of emphasis, xaé may be rendered and especially, imprimis, Mark 16 : such constructions μεάλεστα is understood. 37, note. Wesley, Kendrick, Pechy, Xrodn is properly rendered “ robe” Reve Crs lili en Geel ἐξεϑαμβήϑησαν. Kend., Thom., See last note. See ch. 6 : 14, note. o (E. V.) ch. 5:19, 34; 6 : 38; ete. See ch. 1 : 44, note. zat. Q., Bloomf. (N. T.) Rob. (καὶ), 1 δὴ Thom., Dick., “in 7 Q. Ὅτι, before προάγει, is pleonastic. furnishes the following citation from De Wette, “not ‘that’ he The direct speech is addressed to the disci- The particle is treated as pleonastic by Beza, Castalio, De As the particle has the same use with our idiom would demand that it should be rendered “had been rolled away,” especially as the verbs of the preceding context are in the past. ! “tomb.” See ch. 15 : 46, note. our sign of quotation, I commence the following sentence with a capital. r “ye will see ; Sharpe. 5. ταχὺ (“quickly”) of the Text. Recept. is reyected as spurious ” ὄψεσϑε. Ρ- THE GOSPEL ACCORDING ΤῸ MARK.—CHAP. XVI. 111 KING JAMES’ VERSION. GREEK and fled from the sepulchre; for they trembled, and were amazed: neither said they any thing to any man; for they were afraid. , . 9 Now, when Jesus was risen ΠΟ ede early, the first day of the week, Kal οὐδενὶ οὐδὲν he appeared first to Mary Mag- σαββάτου ἐφάνη πρῶτον Mapia|the week, ἔφυγον ἀπὸ τοῦ μνημείου" εἶχε from the ttomb ; δὲ αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις" TEXT. REVISED VERSION. “for trembling and amazement had _ seized them, vand they said vnothing εἶπον, ἐφοβοῦν- “Ὁ ὑ =to any one; for they were afraid. Now Jesus »having 9 9 Al \ δὲ A , i a ναστας O€ TPL TPT | risen early, zon the first day of appeared first to dalene, out of whom he had cast) τῇ “αγδαληνῇ, ἀφ᾽ ἧς ἐκβε-. | Mary Magdalene, out of whom seven devils. 10 And she went and told them that had been with him, as they mourned and wept. 11 And they, when they had κλαίουσι. βλήκει ἑπτὰ δαιμόνια. πορευθεῖσα ἀπήγγειλε τοῖς μετ᾽ = ΄ Ξ' ᾿αὐτοῦ γενομένοις, πενθοῦσι καὶ he had cast seven demons. *She went and told those, who had been with him, as they mourned and wept. And they, ῦ ἐκείνη = 0 - 1 1 » - 5 , | κάκεινοι ἀκουσαν- | when they heard that he was 5 Υ κι > ᾽ὔ « ~ | . heard that he was alive, and had) res ὅτι @ καὶ ἐθεάθη ὑπ᾽ αὐτῆς alive, and had been seen “by been seen of her, believed not. After that, he appeared in another form unto two of them, > ’ ηπίστησαν. 9 \ \ - ν ὥστ; 12 Mera δὲ ταῦτα, ber, tbelieved not. δυσὶν ἐξ αὐτῶν περιπατοῦσιν = tbe After that, he appeared in another form to two of them as ‘they were as they walked, and went into the | ἐφανερώθη ἐν ἑτέρᾳ μορφῇ, πο- walking, going into the coun- country. 13 And they went and told i¢| unto the residue: neither believed they them. λοιποίς" 14 Afterward he appeared unto | σαν. the eleven, as they sat at meat, and upbraided them with their unbelief, and hardness of heart, ρευομένοις εἰς ἀγρόν. νοι ἀπελθόντες ἀπήγγειλαν τοῖς it *to the rest: οὐδὲ ἐκείνοις ἐπίστευ- they believe them. 4 oe > 4 Yorepov ἀνακειμένοις » cal ΄σ - 3 7 αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἕνδεκα ἐφανερώθη, - ,ὕ \ a καὶ ὠνείδισε THY ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν, 5 ἊΝ , a ΄ because they believed not them | καὶ σκληροκαρδίαν, ὅτι τοῖς θεα-᾿ - ω : KaKel-| try, And they went and told ‘neither did )Afterwards he appeared to the eleven, as they reclined at table, and up- braided them for their unbelief and Jobstinacy of heart, because they believed not those, who μι 4 by Griesbach, Scholz, Knapp, Tittmann, Lach., Tischend. Not recognized by Syriac or Vulgate. Bloomf. says it is omitted in most of the best MSS. See ch. 15 : 46, note. « “for trembling and amazement had seized them ;” εἶχε δὲ This more literal rendering is accu- rate, and preserves the enerey of the text. So (in substance) Kend., Sharpe, Pechy. 8. Fr., “or le tremblement et le trouble les avaient saisies;”” De Wette, “es hatte sie aber Schrecken und Entsetzen ergriffen ;” Fae “ende bevinge ende ontzettinge hadde haar bevangen.” νυ “and;” καὶ. Wesley, Pechy, Kend., Wakef., Dick., Sharpe. Ξ Fr., “et ;” Iber., “i;” De Wette, “und ;” Belg., ende. vw “nothing ;” οὐδὲν. Sharpe, Kend., Wesley, Dick., Camp., Thom. Iber., “ nada.” x “to any one;” οὐδενὶ (preceded by a negative). Wesley, Dick., Camp., Thom. t “tomb.” αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις. Kend., y “haying risen;” ἀναστὰς. Sharpe, Pechy, Kend., Dick., Camp. Iber., “ habiendo resuscitato.” τ “on the first ;” Kend. See v. 2, note. πρώτῃ. De Wette, “am ersten.” See ch. 1 © The supplementary “ and” verse is unnecessary. a “ demons.” : 34, note. at the commencement of this It is dropped by Wesley, Wakcf., Camp. Nothing see ΟΝ to it in Vulg., Eras., Beza, Castal., Belg., De Wette, 5. Fr., Iber., Ital. shat sie they heard ;” ἀκσύσαντες. Sharpe, Dick., Pechy. a “by her;” ὑπ᾿ αὐτῆς. Wakef., Kend., Dickinson, Sharpe, Camp., Thom. e “believed not ;” Thom. ἠπίστησαν. Sharpe, Camp., Dickinson, £ “they were walking ;” Wakef., Sharpe. Ἐ τ σοῖπσ τ" “ σοίησ᾽ ; περιπατοῦσιν. Wesley, Pechy, Sharpe, Wesley, Pechy. The thought, presented in this passage, may be expressed according to our usus loquendi by this rendering, “ they were walking into the country.” Still, the more literal phraseology is perhaps preferable. πορευομένοις. Kend., Wakef., Thom. So Luke 12:26. Acts h “to the rest ;” τοῖς λοιποῖς. λοιπός is rendgred (E. V.) Matt. 27 : 49. Dials 610: ' “neither did they believe them.” order in English. ) “afterwards.” This is the present orthography. It occurs, however, in the E. V., Exod. 11:1. 1 Sam.9:13. Job 18:2 Gal. 3 : 23. So Sharpe. « “they reclined.” See ch. 2 1 “ obstinacy of heart ;” De Wette, “ Hartsinnigkeit. Kend. This is the natural : 15, note. See ch. 10 : 5, note. ox), φοκαρδίαν. KING JAMES’ VERSION. which had seen him after he was risen. 15 And he said unto them, Go ye into all the world, and preach | « the gospel to every creature. 16 He that believeth and is baptized, shall be saved; but he that believeth not, shall be damned. 17 And these signs shall follow them that believe: In my name shall they cast out devils; they shall speak with new tongues ; 18 They shall take up serpents ; and if they drink any deadly thing, it shall not hurt them ; they shall lay hands on the sick, and they shall recover. 19 So then, after the Lord had spoken unto them, he was received up into heaven, and sat on the right hand of God. 20 And they went forth, and preached every where, the Lord | working with them, and confirm: | ing the word with signs follow- ing. Amen. | \ > Ν τὸν ουρᾶνον», THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK.—CHAP. XVI. GREEK TEXT. σαμένοις αὐτὸν ἐγηγερμένον οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν. © Καὶ εἶπεν av- Tots, “Πορευθέντες εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἅπαντα, κηρύξατε τὸ εὐαγγέλιον πᾶσῃ τῇ κτίσει. | ὁ πιστεύσας καὶ βαπτισθεὶς σωθήσεται: 6 \ / / δὲ ἀπιστήσας κατακριθήσεται. τὸ / \ lal ,ὔ 1 σημεία δὲ τοῖς πιστεύσασι a {2 “ ταῦτα παρακολουθήσει: ἐν τῷ > , / / 3 a G ὀνόματί μου δαιμονια ExBadovor / / - γλώσσαις λαλήσουσι καιναῖς" 1 » ᾽ a Ὰ ΄ » ὄφεις ἀροῦσι: κἂν θανάσιμον , > \ » \ ΄ὔ τι πίωσιν, οὐ μὴ αὐτοὺς βλάψει" ΓΟ lol 5 ἐπὶ ἀῤῥώστους χεῖρας ἐπιθησου- τς σι, καὶ καλῶς ἕξουσιν. c Ἂν 3 pans ἊΣ 19. “Ὁ μὲν οὖν Κύριος, μετὰ Ν lal > ΄σ » > τὸ λαλῆσαι αὐτοῖς, aveAnpen εἰς 5 / καὶ ἐκάθισεν ἐκ r - fol 9() 3 “ ἊΝ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ: “" ἐκεῖνοι δὲ / oye (E a ἐξελθόντες ἐκήρυξαν πανταχοῦ, fol ia - \ τοῦ Κυρίου συνεργοῦντος, καὶ τὸν / col Ν fol > |\Aoyov βεβαιοῦντος διὰ τῶν ἐπα- / / κολουθούυντων σημείων. "Apny. | signs? REVISED VERSION. had seen hint, "after he had risen. And he said to them, "Go into all the world, preach the gospel to every creature. He that believeth and 915. im- mersed, shall be saved, but he that believeth not, Pshall be condemned. And these signs sshall accompany those, who believe: in my name they shall cast out ‘demons; they shall speak with new tongues; they shall take up serpents; and if they drink any deadly thing, it shall ‘not hurt them at all; iis shall lay hands on the sick, and they shall recover. So then, after the Lord had spoken to them, the was taken up into heaven, and sat "αὐ the right hand of God. And they went forth, and preached every where, the Lord working with them, and confirming the word, ‘through “the *accompanying 15 16 18 20 m “ after he had risen ;” π « Go into,” ete. there is no especial emphasis belonging to ley, Kendrick, Pechy, Camp. there is no conjunction in the text. © “igs immersed.” See ch. 1 : 4, note. P “shall be condemned ;” κατακριϑήσεται. Kend., Dick., Sharpe. rendered by “ condemn the present one. ” 4 “shall accompany ;” chy, Dick., Wakef., Thom. “ accompanaran.” r “demons.” See ch. 1 : 34, note. αὖ τὸν ἐγ ηγερμένον. The nominative “ye” This verb occurs nineteen times, and is in all cases, except Rom. 14 : παρακολουϑήσει. 5. Fr., “ accompagneront ;” Iber., 8 “not—at all ;” means Sharpe. is unnecessary, as it. Omitted by Wes- “And” (of E. V.) is omitted, as BB vy “through ;” dca (cum genit.) Rob., Q., Wakef,| « the ;” TOV. 23, and x “accompanying signs ;” 2 Rob. (2 loco), Pe- : Ἦν accompanied them. ΠΣ “«Ἡμήν > ov t “he was taken up ; (in loco, ἐπαπολουϑέω.) . 4). Robinson (a), “ Not at all, by ;” Wesley, “ in no wise.” ” ἀναλήφϑη. Sharpe, Kend., Camp. See ch. 10 : 37. Rob. ἐπακολουϑούντω» σημείων. Knapp, Bloomf., Tisch. It is spurious. no As σημείων» is definite (σημεῖα, y. 17), the article should be retained. Rob. As an alternative rendering, “ which So Kend. ” is omitted by Griesb., Scholz, Schott, Lach., Titt., THE REVISED VERSION -OF THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. WITH MARGINAL READINGS. οι 10 ΠῚ 12 13 THE REVISED VERSION OF PEt ΟΡ ΗΑ ΟΝ τὸ MARK. WITH MARGINAL READINGS. I.—TueE beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God; as it is written in the prophets, Behold, I send my messenger before thy face, who shall prepare thy way before thee; a voice of one crying in the desert, Prepare the way of the Lord, make his paths straight. John was immersing in the desert, and preaching the immersion of repentance, for the remission of sins. And there went out to him all the country of Judea, and those of Jerusalem, and were all immersed by him in the river Jordan, confessing their sins. And John was clothed with camel’s hair, and with a leathern girdle about his loins; and he ate locusts and wild honey. And he preached, saying, One mightier than I, cometh after me, the strap of whose shoes I am not | worthy to stoop down and loose. I indeed immerse you in water, but he will immerse you in the Holy Spirit. And it came to pass in those days, that Jesus came from Nazareth of Galilee, and was immersed by John in the Jordan. And immediately coming up out of the water, he saw the heavens parted, and the Spirit like a dove descending upon him. And there came a voice from the heavens, say- ing, Thou art my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased. And immediately the Spirit sendeth him forth into the desert. And he | was there, in the desert, forty days, tried by | Satan; and was with the wild beasts; and the | angels ministered to him. Now after John was delivered up, Jesus came into Galilee preaching the gospel of the kingdom of God, and saying, The time is ful- filled, and the kingdom of God draweth near; repent and believe the gospel. Now as he was walking by the sea of Gali- lee, he saw Simon, and Andrew, his brother, casting a net into the sea; for they were fishers. And Jesus said to them, Come after me, and 1 will make you become fishers of men. And immediately they left their nets, and followed him. And going on a little further thence, he saw James, the son of Zebe- dee, and John, his brother, who also were in the ship, mending their nets. And immedi- ately he called them; and they left their father Zebedee in the ship with the hired servants, and went after him. And they went into Capernaum; and imme- diately on the sabbath, he entered into the synagogue and taught. And they were aston- ished at his teaching, for he taught them as one haying authority, and not as the scribes. And there was in their synagogue a man with an unclean spirit; and he cried out, saying, Ah! what have we to do -with thee, Jesus of Na- zareth ? hast thou come to destroy us? I know thee, who thou art, the Holy One of God. Jesus rebuked him, saying, Be silent, and come out of him. And the unclean spirit convulsing him, and crying out with a loud voice, came out of him. And they were all amazed, 80 And 2 14 15 16 116 28 99 94 38 39 40 41 43 44 45 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. that they questioned among themselves, saying, What is this? What new teaching is this? for with authority he commandeth even the unclean spirits, and they obey him. And di- rectly his fame spread abroad through the whole surrounding region of Galilee. And immediately, when they came out of the synagogue, they entered into the house of Si- mon and Andrew, with James and John. But Simon’s mother-in-law lay sick with a fever; and immediately they tell him of her. And he came and took her by the hand, and lifted her up; and immediately the fever left her, and she ministered to them. And evening haying come, when the sun set, they brought to him all the sick, and the demoniacs. And the whole city was gathered together at the door. And he healed many who were sick with various dis- eases, and cast out many demons; and he did not suffer the demons to speak, because they knew him. And in the morning, rising up while it was quite dark, he went out, and departed into a solitary place, and there prayed. And Simon, and those with him, followed after him. And when they had found him, they say to him, All are seeking thee. And he saith to them, Let us go into the neighboring towns, that I may preach there also ; for I have come forth for this. And he preached in their synagogues through the whole of Galilee, and cast out demons. And a leper cometh to him, beseeching him, and kneeling to him, and saying to hin, If thou wilt, thou canst cleanse me. And Jesus, moved with compassion, stretched out his hand, and touched him, and saith to him, I will, be cleansed. And as he spoke, immediately the leprosy departed from him, and he was cleansed. And he strictly charged him, and immediately sent him away: and saith to him, See that thou say nothing to any one; but go show thyself to the priest, and offer on account of thy cleansing, what Moses commanded, for a testi- mony to them. But he went out, and began to publish ἐξ much, and to blaze abroad the matter, so that Jesus could no longer openly enter into a city, but was without in desert places: and they came to him from every quarter. Ii.—Anp again he entered into Capernaum, after some days; and it was heard that he was in the house. And immediately many were assembled, so that even the place before the door could no longer contain them: and he spoke the word to them. And they come to | him, bringing a paralytic, carried by four. And as they could not come near him on ac- count of the crowd, they unroofed the place where he was; and digging through, they let down the couch on which the paralytic lay. And Jesus seeing their faith, saith to the paralytic, Child, thy sins are forgiven thee. But there were some of the scribes sitting there, and reasoning in their hearts, Why doth this man thus utter revilings? Who can for- give sins but one, even God? And immedi- ately, when Jesus perceived in his spirit that they thus reasoned within themselves, he said to them, Why do ye reason these things in your hearts? Which is easier, to say to the para- lytic, Thy sins are forgiven thee; or to say, Rise, and take up thy couch and walk? — But that ye may know that the Son of man hath ‘power on earth to forgive sins (he saith to the paralytic), I say to thee, Rise, and take up thy couch, and go into thy house. And immediately he rose, and taking up the couch, went forth before them all; so that they were all amazed, and glorified God, saying, We never saw i thus. ᾿ And he went forth again by the sea-side; and all the crowd came to him, and he taught them. And as he passed along, he saw Levi, the son of Alpheus, sitting at the tax-oflice, and said to him, Follow me. And he rose and fol- lowed him. And it came to pass, as he re- clined at table in his house, that many tax- gatherers and sinners also reclined with Jesus and his disciples, for they were many, and they followed him. And when the scribes and the Pharisees saw him eating with tax-gatherers and sinners, they said to his disciples, Why is it that he eateth and drinketh with the tax- | gatherers and sinners? And Jesus hearing τέ, saith to them, Those who are well, have no * or, “ authority.” to (Ze) 8) 10 Il 12 14 10 ΠῚ 18 19 20 23 2 3 4 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. need of a physician, but those who are sick. I came not to call the righteous, but sinners. And the disciples of John and of the Pharisees used to fast; and they come, and say to him, Why do the disciples of John, and those of the Pharisees fast, but thy disciples fast not? And Jesus said to them, Can the sons of the bride- chamber fast, while the bridegroom is with them? As long as they have the bridegroom with them, they can not fast. But the. days will come, when the bridegroom will be taken away from them, and then they will fast in those days. And no one seweth a piece of undressed cloth on an old garment; else the new piece, which filleth it up, taketh from the old, and a worse rent is made. And no one putteth new wine into old bottles; else the new wine doth burst the bottles, and the wine is spilt, and the bottles will be ruined: but | new wine must be put into new bottles. And it came to pass, that he went through the fields of grain on the sabbath; and his dis- ciples began, as they went, to pluck the ears of grain. And the Pharisees said to him, Be- hold, why are they doing on the sabbath that which is not lawful? And he said to them, Have ye never read what David did, when he had need, and was hungry, he and those with him? how he went into the house of God, in the days of Abiathar, the high priest, and ate the show-bread, which it is not lawful for any to eat, except the priests, and gaye to those who were with him? And he said to them, The sabbath was made for man, not man for the sabbath: *therefore, the Son of man is Lord also of the sabbath. IIJ.—Anp he entered again into the syna- gogue; and there was a man there who had a withered hand. And they watched him, fo see whether he would heal him on the sabbath, that they might accuse him. And he saith to the man, who had the withered hand, Rise up in the midst. evil? to save life, or to kill? But they were "F075 80) ὙΠ ΟΝ And he saith to them, Is it || lawful to do good on the sabbath, or to do | silent. And when he had looked round on | them with anger, grieving for the hardness of their hearts, he saith to the man, Stretch out thy hand. And he stretched ἐξ out: and his hand was restored. And the Pharisees went out, and immediately took counsel with the Herodians against him, how they might destroy him. And Jesus withdrew with his disciples to the sea: and a great multitude from Galilee followed him, and from Judea, and from Jeru- salem, and from Idumea, and from beyond the Jordan; and those about Tyre and Zidon, a ereat multitude, hearing what great things he did, came to him. And he spoke to his dis- ciples, that a small ship should wait on him, on account of the crowd, lest they should press on him. For he had healed many, so that as many as had diseases rushed on him to touch him. And the unclean spirits, when they saw him, fell down before him, and cried out, say- ing, Thou art the Son of God. And he strictly charged them not to make him known. And he goeth up into the mountain, and calleth.to him, whom he would: and they came to hin. And he appointed twelve, that they should be with him, and that he might send them forth to preach, and to have power to heal diseases, and to cast out the demons. And Simon he surnamed Peter. And James the son of Zebe- dee, and John the brother of James (and he stirnamed them Boanerges, which is, Sons of Thunder), and Andrew, and Philip, and Bar- tholomew, and Matthew and Thomas, and James the son of Alpheus, and Thaddeus, and Simon the Cananite, and Judas Iscariot, who also delivered him up. And they went into a house. And the crowd cometh together again, so that they could not even eat bread. of it, they went out to lay hold of him: for they said, He is beside himself. And the scribes, who came down from Jerusalem, said, He hath Beelzebub, and by the prince of the demons, he easteth out the demons. called them to Aim, and said to them in para- bles, How can Satan cast out Satan? if a kingdom is divided against itself, that And when his kindred heard 2 And he : And 2 ΤΙ oO 12 16 18 118 i 25 26 27 34 90 bo kingdom can not stand. And if a house is divided against itself, that house can not stand. And if Satan riseth up against himself, and is divided, he can not stand, but hath an end. No one can enter into the strong one’s house, and plunder his goods, unless he shall first bind the strong one; and then he will plunder his house. ‘Truly, I say to you, all sins will be for- given to the sons of men, and whatever revil- ings they may utter; but he who shall revile the Holy Spirit, never hath forgiveness, but is liable to eternal condemnation: because they | said, He hath an unclean spirit. Now his brethren and his mother came, and standing without, sent to him, calling him. And a crowd was sitting about him; and they said to him, Behold, thy mother and thy brethren without are seeking thee. And he answered them, saying, Who is my mother, or my breth- ren? And looking around on those, who sat about him, he saith, Behold my mother and my brethren! For whoever shall do the will of God, he is my brother, and my sister, and | mother. IV.—Anp again he began to teach by the sea-side: and a great crowd was gathered to him, so that he entered into the ship and sat in the sea; and all the crowd was by the sea, on the land. by parables, and said to them in his teaching, Hearken; behold the sower went out to sow. | And it came to pass as he sowed, some fell by the way-side, and the birds came and devoured it. And some fell on the rocky ground, where it had not much earth; and immediately it sprung up, because it had no depth of earth: but when the sun was up, it was scorched; and because it had no root, it withered away. And some fell among the thorns, and the thorns grew up, and choked it, and it yielded no fruit. And some fell into the good ground, and yielded fruit, growing up and increasing, and ἐξ bore, some thirty, and some sixty, and some a hundred. And he said, He who hath ears to hear, let him hear. And when he was alone, those, who were about him, with the twelve, asked him concerning the parable. And he taught them many things | THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. And he said to them, To you it is given to know the secret of the kingdom of God: but to those without, all these things are done in parables: that seeing they may see, and not perceive ; and hearing they may hear, and not understand ; lest they should turn, and their sins should be forgiven them. And he saith to them, Know ye not this parable? and how then will ye know all my parables? The sower soweth the word. And these are they by the way-side, where the word is sown; and when they have heard, Satan cometh immediately, and taketh away the word, which was sown in their hearts. And these are they in like manner, who are sown on the rocky ground; who, when they have heard the word, immediately receive it with joy; and have no root in themselves, but endure for a time; afterwards, when afflic- tion or persecution ariseth on account of the word, immediately they fall away. And these are they, who are sown among the thorns, such as hear the word, and the anxieties of this world and the deceitfulness of riches, and the ἴω: 12 ky 18 19 inordinate desires of other things entering in, . choke the word, and εὖ becometh unfruitful. And these are they, who were sown on the good ground; such as hear the word, and receive it, and bring forth fruit, some thirty, some sixty, and some a hundred. And he said to them, Is the lamp brought to be put under the bushel or under the table-seat, and not to be set on the lamp-stand? Jor there is nothing hidden which will not be manifested; nor was any thing kept secret, but that it should come to light. If any one hath ears to hear, let him hear. And he said to them, Take heed what ye hear; by the measure with which ye meas- ure, it will be measured to you; and to you, who hear, more will be added. For whoever hath, to him will be given: and he who hath not, even what he hath will be taken from him. And he said, The kingdom of God is as if a man should cast seed on the ground; and should sleep, and rise night and day, and the seed should spring and grow up, he knoweth not how. For the ground bringeth forth fruit ἃ or “he,” as in (E. V.) Matt. 13 : 22. 20 21 22 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. 119 90 21 32 33 34 39 40 41 bo σι of itself; first the blade, then the ear, then the full grain in the ear. But when the fruit offereth itself, immediately he putteth in the sickle, because the harvest hath come. And he said, To what shall we liken the kingdom of God? or with what comparison shall we compare it? [δ zs like a grain of mustard-seed, which, when it is sown on the ground, is least of all the seeds on the ground: and yet when it is sown, it groweth up and becometh the greatest of all the herbs, and shooteth out great branches, so that the birds of the air can lodge under its shadow. And with many such parables, he spoke the word to them, even as they were able to hear it. But without a parable, he did not speak to them: and when they were alone, he ex- plained all things to his disciples. And that day, evening having come, he saith to them, Let us pass over to the other side. And leaving the crowd, they took him as he was in the ship. And there were also other little ships with him. And there arose a great storm of wind, and the waves dashed into the ship, so that it was now filling. And he was at the stern, asleep on the pillow: and they awake him and say to him, Teacher, dost not thou care that we are perishing? And he rose and rebuked the wind, and said to the sea, Be silent, be still! And the wind ceased, and there was a great calm. And he said to them, Why are ye so fearful? How is it that ye have no faith? And they feared exceedingly, and said to one another, Who then is this, that even the wind and the sea obey him? V.—Anp they came to the other side of the sea, into the country of the Gadarenes. And as he came out of the ship, immediately there met him out of the tombs a man with an un- clean spirit, who had his dwelling in the tombs: and no one could bind him, not even with chains: because he had often been bound with fetters and chains, and the chains had been burst asunder by him and the fetters broken in pieces: nor could any one tame him. And always, night and day, he was in the tombs and in the mountains, erying out, and cutting himself with stones. But when he saw Jesus far off, he ran and did reverence to him, and eried out with a loud voice and said, What have I to do with thee, Jesus, Son of the Most High God? I implore thee by God, that thou torment me not; (for he had said to him, Come out of the man, unclean spirit.) And he asked him, What is thy name? And he saith to him, My name is Legion, for we are many. And he besought him earnestly that he would not send them away out of the country. And there was there by the mountain a great herd of swine feeding. And the demons besought him, saying, Send us into the swine, that we may enter into them. And immediately Jesus gave them leave. And the unclean spirits went out, and entered into the swine: and the herd rushed down the steep into the sea (they were about two thousand), and were choked in the sea. And those, who fed them, fled and reported i in the city and in the country. And they went out to see what it was that had been done. And they come to Jesus and see the demoniac, who had-had the legion, sitting and clothed, and in his right mind: and they were afraid. And those who saw ἐξ, told them how it befell the de- moniac, and concerning the swine. And they be- gan to entreat him to depart from their borders. And as he went into the ship, he who had been possessed with the demons, entreated him that he might remain with him. And yet he did not suffer him, but saith to him, Go home to thy friends and tell them how much the Lord hath done for thee, and hath pitied thee. And he departed, and began to publish in Decapolis how much Jesus had done for him. And all wondered. And when Jesus had passed over again in the ship to the other side, a great crowd gathered to him; and he was by the sea. And behold, there cometh one of the rulers of the synagogue, Jairus by name; and when he saw him, he fell at his feet, and entreated him earnestly, saying, My little daughter is at the point of death: I pray thee, come and lay thy hands on her, that she may be healed; and she will live. And he went with him; oo 10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 23 24 12 30 36 37 38 39 40 41 0 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. and a great crowd followed him, and pressed on him. And a certain woman, who had had an issue of blood twelve years, and had suffered much from many physicians, and had spent all that she had, and was not at all benefited, but rather grew worse, having heard of Jesus, came in the crowd behind, and touched his garment: for she said, If I may but touch his garments, I shall be healed. diately the fountain of her blood was dried up; and she felt in her body that she was healed of the plague. And immediately, Jesus knowing in himself that the power had gone out of him, turned round in the crowd, and said, Who touched my garments? And his dis- ciples said to him, Thou seest the crowd press- ing on thee, and sayest thou, Who touched me? And he was looking round to see her who had done this. But the woman fearing and trembling, knowing what had been done to her, came and fell down before him, and told him all the truth. And he said to her; Daughter, thy faith hath healed thee; go in peace and be whole of thy plague. While he was still speaking, there came some from the house of the ruler of the synagogue, who said, Thy daughter is dead; why troublest thou the teacher any further? But as soon as Jesus heard the word that was spoken, he saith to the ruler of the synagogue, Fear not, only believe. And he suffered no one to fol- low him except Peter, and James, and John the brother of James. And he cometh to the house of the ruler of the synagogue, and seeth a tumult, ‘and those who wept and wailed much. And when he came in, he saith to them, Why do ye make a tumult, and weep? the child is not dead, but sleepeth. And they laughed at him. But when he had put them all out, he taketh the father and the mother of the child, and those with him, and entereth in where the child was lying. And he took the child by the hand, and saith to her, Talitha- cumi; which is, being interpreted, Damsel (I say to thee), rise. And immediately the damsel ΒΥ o7, “even.” And imme- ° rose, and walked about, for she was twelve years old. And they were greatly astonished. And he charged them strictly that no one should know it; and commanded that some- thing should be given her to eat. VI.—Anp he went out from thence, and came into his own country; and his disciples follow him. And the sabbath having come, he began to teach in the synagogue; and many hearing him, were astonished, and said, From whence hath this mun these things? and what wisdom is this, which is given to him, that even such mighty works are wrought by his hands? Is not this the carpenter, the son of Mary, the brother of James, and Joses, and Judas, and Simon? and are not his sisters here with us? And they had a difficulty as to him. But Jesus said to them, A prophet is not without honor, except in his own country, and among his own kindred, and in his own house. And he could do no mighty works there, except that he laid his hands on a few sick persons, and healed them. And he wondered on account of their unbelief. And he went round the villages teaching. And he called to him the twelve, and began to send them forth two by two; and gave them power over the unclean spirits; and com- manded them that they should take nothing for their journey, except a staff only; no bag, no bread, no money in their girdle; but be shod with sandals; and not put on two coats. And he said to them, Wherever ye enter into a house, there remain, till ye depart from that place. And whoever shall not receive you, nor hear you, when ye depart thence, shake off the dust under your feet, for a testimony to them. Truly I say to you, it will be more tolerable for Sodom or Gomorrah in the day of judgment, than for that city. And they went out and preached that men should repent. And they cast out many demons, and anointed with oil many that were sick, and healed them. And king Herod heard of him’ (for his name had become known), and he said, John the Immerser hath risen from the dead, and therefore mighty works are active in him. 43 11 12 13 14 23 24 25 30 91 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. 121 Others said, It is Elijah. And others said, It is a prophet, tas one of the prophets. But when Herod heard of him, he said, This is John whom I beheaded; he hath risen from the dead. For Herod himself had sent forth, and laid hold of John, and bound him in the prison for the sake of Herodias, his brother Philip’s wife; for he had married her. For John had said to Herod, It is not lawful for thee to have thy brother’s wife. So Herodias had a grudge against him, and would have killed him; and yet could not: for Herod feared John, knowing that he was a just and holy man, and observed him; and when he heard him, he did many things and heard him gladly. And a convenient day having come, when Herod on his birth-day made a supper for his lords, and commanders, and the chief men | of Galilee; and when the daughter of the same | Herodias came in, and danced, and pleased | Herod, and those who reclined with him at | table, the king said to the damsel, Ask me | whatever thou wilt, and I will give ἐξ to | thee, even to the half of my kingdom. And he swore to her, Whatever thou shalt ask me, I will give it to thee, even to half of my kingdom. And she went out, and said to her mother, What shall I ask? And she said, The head of John the Immerser. And she came in immediately with haste to the king, and asked, saying, I will that thou wouldst give me forth- with, on a platter, the head of John the Immerser. And the king was exceedingly sorry, yef on account of his oaths, and’ of those who reclined with him at table, he would not reject her. And immediately the king sent one of his guard, and commanded his head to be brought; and he went and beheaded him in the prison; and brought his head on a platter, and gave it to the damsel; and the damsel gave it to her mother. And when his disciples heard of i, they came and took up his corpse, and laid it in a tomb. And the apostles came together to Jesus, and told him all things, both what they had done, and what they had taught. And he said to ® or, “like one of the anctent prophets.” them, Come ye yourselves apart into a desert place, and rest a little while: for there were many coming and going, and they had no lei- sure not even to eat. And they departed into a desert place by the ship privately. And the crowds saw them going away, and many knew him, and ran thither by land from all the cities, and outwent them and came together to him. And Jesus coming forth, saw a great crowd, and was moyed with compassion towards them, because they were like sheep having no shepherd: and he began to teach them many things. And when the day was now far spent, his disciples came to him, and said, This is a desert place, and now much time hath passed ; send them away, that they may go into the surrounding country and villages, and buy themselves loaves: for they have nothing to eat. But he answered and said to them, Give ye them something to eat. And they say to him, Shall we go and buy two hundred penny- worth of loaves, and give them that to eat? But he saith to them, How many loaves haye ye? go and see. And when they knew, they say to him, Five, and two fishes. And he com- manded them to make all recline by companies on the green grass. And they lay down in squares, by hundreds, and by fifties. And when he had taken the five loaves and the two fishes, he looked up to heaven, and blessed, and broke the loayes, and gave them to his disci- ples to set before them; and the two fishes he divided to them all. And they all ate, and 42 were satisfied. And they took up twelve bas- 43 kets full of the fragments and of the fishes. And 44 those, who ate of the loaves, were five thousand men. And immediately he constrained his disci- 45 ples to enter into the ship, and go before him to the other side towards Bethsaida, while he sent away the crowd. And when he had dismissed 46 them, he departed into the mountain to pray. And evening having come, the ship was in the 47 midst of the sea, and he alone on the land. And 48 he saw them harassed in rowing; for the wind was against them: and about the fourth watch 33 84 40 41 | of the night he cometh towards them, walking on the sea, and would have passed by them. But when they saw him walking on the sea, 49 122 50 51 bo THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. they supposed it was an apparition, and they cried out; for they all saw him, and were ter- rified. And immediately he spoke with them and saith to them, Take courage: it is 1; fear not. And he went up to them into the ship; and the wind ceased: and they were exceed- ingly amazed in themselves beyond measure, and wondered. For they did not understand by means of the loaves, for their heart was stupid. And when they had passed over, they came to the land of Gennesaret, and drew to the shore. And when they came out of the ship, immediately they knew him, and ran through the whole surrounding region, and began to carry about on couches, those who were sick, where they heard he was. And wherever he entered into villages, or cities, or country, they laid the sick in the streets, and besought him that they might but touch the fringe of his garment: and as many as touched him were healed. VII.—Awnp. the Pharisees, and some of the scribes, who had come from Jerusalem, came together to him. his disciples eating bread with defiled, that is, with unwashed hands, they found fault: for the Pharisees, and all the Jews, except they wash their hands with the fist, eat not, holding | the tradition of the elders. And when they come from the market, except they immerse themselves, they eat not. And there are many other things, which they have received to hold, such as immersions of cups, and pots, and brazen vessels, and table-seats. Then the Pharisees and scribes asked him, Why do not thy disci- | ples walk according to the tradition of the elders, but eat bread with unwashed hands? And he answered and said to them, Well did Isaiah prophesy concerning you, hypocrites, as it is written, This people honoreth me with their lips, but their heart is far from me. But, in vain do they worship me, teaching for doc- | For lay- | trines, the commandments of men. ing aside the commandment of God, ye hold the tradition of men, such as immersions of And when they saw some of | | cast the demon out of her daughter. pots and cups; and many other such like things ye do. And he said to them, Full well ye set aside the commandment of God, that ye may keep your own tradition. For Moses said, Honor thy father and thy mother; and, He who scurseth father or mother, shall surely be put to death. But ye say, If a man shall say to his father or his mother, Be that Corban, that is a gift, by which thou mightest have been profited by me; he shall be free. And ye suffer him no more to do anything for his father or his mother; making yoid the word of God by your tradition, which ye have delivered: and many such like things ye do. And when he had called all the crowd to Aim, he said to them, Hear me all of you, and understand. There is nothing from without the man, which entering into him, can defile him: but the things, which come out of him, are those that defile the man. If any one hath ears to hear, let him hear. And when he entered into the house from the crowd, his disciples asked him concerning the parable. And he saith to them, Are ye also so void of understanding Ὁ do ye not perceive, that nothing from without, which entereth into the man, can defile him: because it entereth | not into his heart, but into the stomach, and || goeth out into the sink, cleansing all the food? And he said, That which cometh out of the man, that defileth the man. For from within, out of the heart, come forth evil thoughts, adulteries, fornications, murders, thefts, covet- ousness, malice, deceit, lasciviousness, an evil eye, reviling, pride, foolishness; all these evil things come forth from within, and defile the man. And he rose from thence, and went away into the borders of Tyre and Zidon, and en-. tered into a house, and would have no one know it: but he could not be hidden. For a woman, whose young daughter had an un- clean spirit, heard of him, and came and fell at his feet (the woman was a Greek, a Syro- phenician by nation,) and she besought him to But Jesus said to her, Let the children first be @ or, “loaves.” 5 or, “ revileth.” 10 11 15 16 24 29 30 31 bo THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. satisfied; for it is not right to take the chil- dren’s bread, and cast if to the dogs. And she answered and said to him, Yes, Lord: yet the dogs under the table eat of the children’s crumbs. And he said to her, For this saying, go; the demon hath gone out of thy daughter. And when she came into her house, she found the demon gone out, and her daughter laid on the bed. And again, departing from the borders of Tyre and Zidon, he came to the sea of Galilee, through the midst of the borders of Decapolis. And they bring to him one deaf, having an impediment in his speech; and they beseech him to put his hand on him. And he took him aside from the crowd, and put his fingers into his ears, and he spit, and touched his tongue: and looking up to heaven, he groaned, | and said to him, Ephphatha, that is, Be opened. And immediately his ears were opened, and the bond of his tongue was loosed, and he spoke plainly. And he charged them that they should tell no one: but the more he charged them, so much the more a great deal they published τέ; and were beyond measure astonished, saying, He hath done all things well; he maketh both the deaf to hear, and the dumb to speak. VIII.—In those days, the crowd being very great, and having nothing to eat, he called his disciples to Aim, and saith to them, I have com- passion on the crowd, because they have now remained with me three days, and have nothing to eat: and if 1 send them away to their homes fasting, they will faint by the way: for some of them have come from far. And his disci- ples answered him, Whence can any one satisfy these men with *bread here in a desert? And he asked them, How many loaves have ye? And they said, Seven. And he commanded the crowd to lie down on the ground: and he took the seven loaves, and gave thanks, and broke them, and gave to his disciples to set before them; and they set them before the crowd. And they had a few small fishes: and he blessed, and commanded to set them also before ® or, “loaves.” | them. So they ate and were satisfied ; and they took up seven baskets of the fragments, which were left. And those, who ate, were about four thousand: and he sent them away. And immediately he entered into the ship with his disciples, and came into the region of Dalmanutha. And the Pharisees came forth, and began to question with him, seeking of him a sign from heayen, trying him. And he groaned deeply in his spirit, and saith, Why doth this generation seck a sign? Truly I say to you, There shall no sign be given to this generation. And he left them, and entering into the ship again, departed to the other side. And the disciples had forgotten to take *bread, neither had they but one loaf with them in the ship. And he charged them, saying, Take heed, beware of the leaven of the Phari- sees, and of the leaven of Herod. And they reasoned among themselves, saying, J¢ 7s because we haye no ‘bread. And Jesus knowing τέ, saith to them, Why do ye reason that it is be- cause ye have no “bread, do ye not yet perceive nor understand? have ye your heart still stupe- fied? having eyes, see ye not? and having ears, hear ye not? and do ye not remember? When I broke the five loaves among the five thousand, how many baskets full of fragments took ye up? They say to him, Twelve. And when the seven among the four thousand, how many bas- kets full of fragments took ye up? And they said, Seven. And he said to them, How is it that ye do not understand? And he cometh to Bethsaida; and they bring a blind man to him and beseech him to touch him. And he took the blind man by the hand, and led him out of the village; and when he had spit on his eyes: he put his hands on him and asked him if he saw any thing? And he looked up, and said, I see men like trees, walk- ing. Then he put his hands on his eyes again, and made him look up: and he was restored, and saw every man clearly. And he sent him away to his house, saying, Neither go into the village, nor tell i to any one in the village. And Jesus and his disciples went out into ae gy, “loaves.” 123 19 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. 30 31 32 35 36 37 38 bo the villages of Cesarea Philippi: and, on the way, he asked his disciples, saying to them, Who do men say that I am? And they an- swered, John the Immerser; and others, Elijah; but others, one of the prophets. And he saith to them, But who say ye that lam? And Peter answering saith to him, Thou art the Anointed. And he charged them that they should tell no one concerning him. And he began to teach them, that the Son of man must suffer many things, and be rejected by the elders, and the chief priests and scribes, and be put to death, and after three days rise again. And he spoke the saying plainly. And Peter took him aside, and began to rebuke him. But when he had turned round and looked on his disciples, he rebuked Peter, saying, Get be- hind me, Satan: for thou favorest not the things of God, but the things of men. And when he had called the crowd to him with his disciples, he said to them, Whoever will come after me, let him deny himself, and take up his cross, and follow me. For who- ever would save his life, will lose it, but who- ever shall lose his life for my sake and the gospel’s, he will save it. For what will it profit a man if he should gain the whole world, and lose his ‘soul? or what will a man give as a ransom for his soul? For whoeyer shall be ashamed of me, and of my words, in this adulterous and sinful generation; of him also will the Son of man be ashamed, when he cometh in the glory of his Father with the holy angels. ITX.—Anp he said to them, Truly I say to you, That there are some of those standing here, who will not taste of death, till they have seen the kingdom of God come with power. And after six days, Jesus taketh with him Peter, and James, and John, and leadeth them up into a high mountain apart by themselves; and *he was transfigured before them. And his garments became shining, exceedingly white, like snow; such as no fuller on earth can ® or, “life.” > or “his appearance was changed.” whiten. And there appeared to them Elijah, with Moses: and they were talking with Jesus. And Peter answering, saith to Jesus, Rabbi, it is good for us to remain here: and let us make three booths; one for thee, and one for Moses, and one for Elijah. For he knew not what to say: for they were greatly terrified. And there came a cloud which overshadowed them; and a voice came out of the cloud, say- ing, This is my beloved Son: hear him. And suddenly, on looking round, they no longer saw any one, except Jesus alone with them- selves. And as they came down from the mountain, he charged them that they should relate to no one what they had seen, till the Son of man should have risen from the dead. And they kept that saying to themselves, questioning with one another what that meant, To rise from the dead. And they asked him, saying, Why say the scribes, that Elijah must first come? And he answered and said to them, Elijah indeed cometh first, and restoreth all things, and how it is written of the Son of man, that he must suffer many things, and be despised. But I say to you, that Elijah hath both come and that they have done to him whatever they would, as it is written of him. And when he came to his disciples, he saw a great crowd about them, and the seribes questioning with them. And immediately all the crowd, when they beheld him, were greatly amazed, and running to Aim, saluted him. And he asked the scribes, What are ye questioning with them? And one of the crowd answered and said, Teacher, I have brought to thee my son, who hath a dumb spirit; and wherever he taketh him, he dasheth him down, and he foameth and grindeth his teeth, and pineth away; and I spoke to thy disciples to cast him out, and they could not. And he answereth them, and saith, O unbelieving generation, how long shall I be with you? how long shall I bear with you? Bring him to me. And they brought him to him: and when he saw him, immediately the spirit convulsed him; and he fell on the ground, and rolled, foaming. And he asked his father, How long is it since this came on him? And he said, From child- 4 1 12 18 14 17 18 19 20 21 99 an bo fer 27 28 30 31 33 34 90 36 37 38 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. 125 hood. And often he hath east him into fire and into waters to destroy him; but if thou | canst do any thing, have compassion on us, and help us. And Jesus said to him, If thou canst belieye—all things are possible for him who believeth. And immediately the father of the child cried out, and said, with tears, Lord, I believe; help mine unbelief. When Jesus saw the crowd was running together, he rebuked the unclean spirit, saying to him, Dumb and deaf spirit, I command thee, come out of him, and enter into him no more. And the spirit cried out, and convulsed him violently, and came out of him; and he became like one dead; so that many said, He is dead. But Jesus took him by the hand, and lifted him up; and he rose. And when he came into a house, his disci- ples asked him privately, Why could not we east him out? And he said to them, This kind ean come forth by nothing, except by prayer and fasting, And they departed thence and passed through Galilee; and he did not wish that any one should know 7. For he taught his disciples and said to them, The Son of man is delivered up into the hands of men, and they will put him to death; and after he hath been put to death, he will rise the third day. But they did not understand the saying, and were afraid to ask him. And he came to Capernaum; and being in the house, he asked them, What did ye dispute about among yourselves by the way? But they were silent, for they had disputed among themselves, by the way, who would be greatest. And he sat down, and called the twelve, and saith to them, If any one desireth to be first, *he will be last of all, and servant of all. And he took a little child, and set it in the midst of them; and when he had taken it in his arms, he saith to them, Whoever shall receive one of such little children in my name, receiveth me: and whoever receiveth me, receiveth not me, but him who sent me. And John answered him, saying, Teacher, we saw one casting out demons in thy + or, “let him be least of all, and servant of all.” name, who doth not follow us, and we for- bade him, because he doth not follow us. But 39 Jesus said, Forbid him not: for there is no one, who will do a miracle in my name, and be able readily to speak evil of me. For he who 40 is not against tus, is for us. For whoever shall 41 give you a cup of water to drink in my name, because ye belong to Christ, truly I say to you, he shall by no means lose his reward. And 42 whoever shall cause one of the little ones, who believe in me, to sin, it would be better for him if a millstone should be hung about his neck, and he should be cast into the sea. And 43 if thy hand shall cause thee to sin, cut it off: it is better for thee to enter into life maimed, than having two hands to go away into hell, into the unquenchable fire; where their worm 44 dieth not, and the fire is not quenched. And 45 if thy foot causeth thee to sin, cut it off; it is better for thee to enter into life lame, than having two feet to be cast into hell, into the unquenchable fire: where their worm dieth not, 46 and the fire is not quenched. And if thine 47 eye causeth thee to sin, pluck it out: it is better for thee to enter into the kingdom of God, with one eye, than having two eyes, to be cast into hell-fire: where their worm dieth 48 not, and the fire is not quenched. For every 49 one shall be salted with fire, and every sacrifice shall be salted with salt. Salt is good: but if 50 the salt becometh tasteless, how will ye restore its saltness? Have salt in yourselves, and be at peace with one another. X.— or, “Get not wrongfully.” And he was | into the kingdom of God! And the disciples were astonished at his words. But Jesus an- swereth again, and saith to them, Children, how difficult it is for those who trust in riches, to enter into the kingdom of God! It is easier for a camel to go through the eye of a needle, than for a rich man to enter into the kingdom of God. And they were exceedingly astonished, saying among themselves, Who then can be saved? And Jesus looking on them, saith, With men, ἐξ is impossible, but not with God; for with God all things are possible. Then Peter began to say to him, Behold, we have left all, and followed thee. And Jesus an- swered and said, Truly I say to you, There is no one who hath left house, or brethren, or sisters, or father, or mother, or wife, or chil- dren, or lands, for my sake, and the gospel’s, who shall not receive a hundred-fold now in this time, houses, and brethren, and sisters, and mothers, and children, and lands, with persecu- tions, and in the world to come, eternal life. But many who are first, will be last; and the last, first. And they were on the way, going up to Jerusalem; and Jesus went before them: and they were amazed; and as they followed, they were afraid. And again he took the twelve aside, and began to tell them what things would befall him, saying, Behold, we are going up to Jerusalem, and the Son of man will be delivered up to the chief priests, and to the scribes; and they will condemn him to death, and will de- | liver him up to the Gentiles; and they will mock him, and scourge him, and spit on him, and put him to death: and the third day he will rise again. And James and John, the sons of Zebedee, come to him, saying, Teacher, we wish that thou wouldst do for us whatever we shall ask. And he said to them, What do ye wish me to do for you? And they said to him, Grant to us that we may sit, one at thy right hand, and the other at thy left hand, in thy glory. But Jesus said to them, Ye know not what ye ask: are ye able to drink the cup which I drink? and to be immersed with the immersion, with which I am immersed? And they said to him, 24 25 30 31 32 33 94 35 36 37 38 39 τ \ THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. 127 40 41 46 τ 3 We are able. And Jesus said to them, Ye will indeed drink the cup, which I drink, and be immersed with the immersion, with which I am immersed. But to sit at my right hand and at my left, is not mine to give; except to those for whom it is prepared. And when the ten heard if, they began to be much displeased with James and John. But Jesus called them to him, and saith to them, Ye know that those who are accounted rulers of the nations, lord it over them; and their great ones exercise authority over them. But it shall not be so among you: but whoever would become great among you, ‘shall be your minister: and whoever of you would become first, *shall be servant of all. For even the Son of man came not to be min- istered to, but to minister, and to give his life a ransom for many. And they came to Jericho: and as he went out of Jericho with his disciples, and a great crowd, blind Bartimeus, the Son of Timeus, sat by the way-side begging. And when he heard that it was Jesus of Nazareth, he began to cry out, and say, Jesus, Son of David, have mercy on me! And many charged him to be silent: but he cried out much more, Son of David, have mercy on me! And Jesus stopped, and commanded him to be called: and they call the blind man saying, Take courage, rise; he ealleth thee. And he, casting away his gar- ment, rose and came to Jesus. And Jesus an- swered and said to him, What wilt thou that I should do for thee? And the blind man said to him, Lord, that I may receive my sight. And Jesus said to him, Go; thy faith hath made thee whole. And immediately he re- ceived his sight, and followed Jesus in the way. XI.—Anp when they drew near to Jerusa- lem, to Bethphage, and Bethany, at the mount of Olives, he sendeth forth two of his disciples, and saith to them, Go into the village over against you, and immediately on entering it, ye will find a colt tied, on which no man hath ever sat; loose him, and lead him to me. And ** or, (fut. for imperat.) “let him be.” | him; and he sat on him. if any one should say to you, Why do ye this? say ye, The Lord hath need of him; and imme- diately he will send him hither. And they went away, and found the colt tied at the door without, in the street; and they loose him. And some of those who stood there, said to them, What are ye doing, loosing the colt? And they said to them as Jesus had com- manded: and they let them go. And they led the colt to Jesus, and cast their garments on And many spread their garments in the way: and others cut branches from the trees, and strewed them in the way. And those who went before, and those who followed, cried out, saying, Hosanna, blessed be he, who cometh in the name of the Lord. Blessed be the coming kingdom of our father David: Hosanna in the highest. And Jesus entered into Jerusalem, and into the temple: and when he had looked round on all things, the time being now late, he went out to Bethany, with the twelve. And the next day, when they were coming from Bethany, he was hungry. And seeing a fie-tree far off, having leaves, he went to see whether he might perhaps find anything on it: and when he came to it, he found nothing but leaves: for it was not the time for figs. And he answered and said to it, Let no one eat fruit of thee hereafter for ever. And his dis- ciples heard it. And they come to Jerusalem : _ and Jesus went into the temple, and began to drive out those who sold and bought in the temple, and overturned the tables of the money- changers, and the seats of those who sold doves; and would not suffer any one to carry an article through the temple. And he taught, saying to them, Is it not written, My house | shall be called a house of prayer for all na- tions? but ye have made it a den of robbers. And the seribes and chief priests heard τέ, and sought how they might destroy him; for they feared him, because all the crowd was aston- ished at his doctrine. And when evening came, he went out of the city. And in the morning, as they passed by, | they saw the fig-tree dried up from the roots. And Peter remembering, saith to him, Rabbi, οο 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 12 22 23 24 25 31 32 33 bo 5 8 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. behold, the fig-tree, which thou didst curse, is dried up. And Jesus answering, saith to them, Have faith in God. For truly I say to you, that whoever shall say to this mountain, Be thou removed, and be thou cast into the sea; and shall not doubt in his heart, but shall believe that what he saith will come to pass; he shall have whatever he saith. Therefore I say to you, Whatever things ye ask, when ye pray, believe that ye will receive, and ye shall have them. And when ye stand praying, forgive, if ye have any thing against any one; that your Father also, who is in the heavens, may for- give you your trespasses. But if ye do not forgive, neither will your Father, who is in the heavens, forgive your trespasses. And they come again to Jerusalem: and as he was walking in the temple, there come to him the chief priests, and the scribes, and the elders, and say to him, By what authority doest thou these things? and who gave thee this authority to do these things? And Jesus answered and said to them, I also will ask you one question, and answer me, and I will tell you by what authority I do these things. The immersion of John, was it from heaven, or from men? answer me. And they reasoned among them- selves, saying, If we shall say, From heaven ; he will say, Why then did ye not believe him? But if we shall say, From men,—they feared the people; for all held John to be really a | prophet. And they answered and said to Jesus, We do not know. And Jesus answering, saith to them, Neither do I tell you by what author- ity I do these things. XII.—Anp he began to speak to them by | parables. A man planted a vineyard, and set a hedge about zt, and dug a wine-vat, and built a tower, and let it out to husbandmen, and went abroad. the husbandmen, that he might receive from the husbandmen some of the fruit of the vineyard. And they took him, and beat him, and sent him away empty. And again he sent to them an- other servant: and at him they cast stones, and | wounded him in the head, and sent him away shamefully handled. And again he sent another, And at the season, he sent a servant to | | \| | i and him they killed ; and many others; of whom they beat some and killed some. Therefore hav- ing yet one son, his beloved, he sent him also to them last, saying, They will reverence my son. But those husbandmen said among themselves, This is the heir, come let us kill him, and the in- heritance will be ours. And they took him and killed him, and cast him out of the vine- yard. What therefore will the lord of the vineyard do? He will come and destroy the husbandmen, and give the vineyard to others. Have ye not even read this scripture: The stone, which the builders rejected, hath become the chief corner-stone; this was the Lord’s doing and it is wonderful in our eyes? And they sought to lay hold of him, but feared the crowd; for they knew that he had spoken the parable against them; and they left him and went away. And they send to him some of the Pharisees, and of the Herodians, to catch him by talk. And when they came, they say to him, Teacher, we know that thou art true, and carest for no one, for thou regardest not the person of men, but teachest the way of God in truth: Is it lawful to give tribute to Cesar, or not? Shall we give, or shall we not give? But he, know- ine their hypocrisy, said to them, Why do ye try me? bring me a penny, that I may see 7, And they brought 7. And he saith to them, Whose image and inseription is this? And they said to him, Cesar’s. And Jesus answer- ing, said to them, Render to Cesar the things, which are Cesar’s, and to God the things, which are God’s. And they wondered at him. And there come to him Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection; and they asked him, saying, Teacher, Moses wrote this for us, If a man’s brother should die, and leave a wife behind him, and leaye no children, that his brother should take his wife, and raise up off-. spring for his brother. There were seven brethren ; and the first took a wife, and dying left no offspring. And the second took her, and died, neither left he any offspring: and the third likewise. And the seven took her, and left no offspring: last of all, the woman died also. In the resurrection therefore, when 7 12 13 14 15 16 ΤΠ 18 19 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. 28 30 31 382 33 34 35 36 81 98 they rise, to which of them will she be a wife? for the seven had her for a wife. And Jesus answering, said to them, Do ye not therefore err, because ye know not the scriptures, nor the power of God? For when they shall rise from the dead, they neither marry, nor are given in marriage ; but are like ¢he angels, who are in the heavens. But as to the dead, that they rise; have ye not read in the book of Moses—at the bush—how God spoke to him, saying, I am the God of Abraham, and the God- of Isaac, and the God of Jacob? He is not the God of the dead, but of the living: ye therefore do greatly err. And one of the scribes came, and having heard them reasoning together, and perceiving that he had answered them well, asked him, Which is the first commandment of all? And Jesus an- swered him, The first of all the commandments is, Hear, O Israel ; The Lord our God is one Lord: and thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and with all thy mind, and with all thy strength: this zs the first commandment.’ And the second, like it, zs this, Thou shalt love thy neighbor as thyself: there is no other commandment greater than these. And the scribe said to him, Well, Teacher, thou hast spoken truly, for there is One; and there is no other besides him: and to love him with all the heart, and with all the under- standing, and with all the soul, and with all the strength, and to love one’s neighbor as oneself, is more than all the whole burnt-offer- ings and the sacrifices. And when Jesus saw that he answered discreetly, he said to him, Thou art not far from the kingdom of God. And no one durst question him any further. And Jesus answered and said, while he taught in the temple, How say the scribes, that the Anointed is the son of David? For David himself said by the Holy Spirit, The Lord said to my Lord, Sit thou at my right hand, till I make thine enemies thy footstool. David therefore himself calleth him Lord, and how then is he his son? And the great crowd heard him gladly. And he said to.them in his teaching, Beware of the scribes, who love to walk about in long robes, and Jove salutations in the market-places, and the first seats in the synagogues, and the first, places in the feasts: who devour widows’ houses, and for a pretense make long prayers ; these will receive greater condemnation. And Jesus sat over against the treasury, and beheld how the crowd cast money into the treasury: and many who were rich, cast i much. And there came a poor widow, and she cast in two mites, which make a farthing. And he called his disciples to Aim, and saith to them, Truly I say to you, that this poor widow hath cast in more than all those, who have cast into the treasury. For they all cast in out of their abundance: but she out of her | poverty, east in all that she had, even her whole living. XIII.—Anp as he went out of the temple, one of his disciples saith to him, Teacher, see, what stones, and what buildings! And Jesus answering said to him, Seest thou these great buildings? there will not be left one stone on another, which will not be thrown down. And as he sat on the mount of Olives, over against the temple, Peter, and James, and John, and Andrew asked him privately, Tell us, when will these things be? and what will be the sign when all these things are about to be fulfilled? And Jesus answering them, began to say, Take heed lest any one should deceive you. For many will come in my name, saying, I am he, and will deceive many. And when ye shall hear of wars, and rumors of wars, be not troubled, for these things must come to pass ; but the end is not yet. For nation will rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom: and there will be earthquakes in various places, and there will be famines, and commotions: these are the beginnings of sorrows. But take heed to your- selves, for they will deliver you up to councils, and ye will be beaten in the synagogues: and ye will stand before governors and kings for my sake, for a testimony to them. And the gospel must first be published among all the nations. But when they shall lead you, and deliver you up, be not anxious beforehand as to what ye shall speak, nor do ye meditate: but 129 39 40 41 42 43 44 bo 10 1 130 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. whatever shall be given you in that hour, that speak; for it is not ye, who speak, but the Holy Spirit. Now the brother will deliver up the brother to death, and the father the child: and children will rise up against parents, and cause them to be put to death. And ye will be hated by all for my name’s sake: but he, who shall endure to the end, he will be saved. But when ye shall see the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel, the prophet, standing where it ought not (let him, that readeth, understand,) then let those in Judea flee to the mountains: and let not him, that is on the house-top, go down into the house, nor enter to take any thing out of his house: and let not him, that is in the field, return back to take his garment. But woe to those who are with child, and to those who suckle in those days! But pray that your flight be not in the winter. For in those days there will be affliction, such as hath not been from the be- ginning of the creation, which God created, till now, nor ever will be. Lord had shortened the days, no flesh would be saved: but for the sake of the elect, whom he hath chosen, he hath shortened the days. And then if any one shall say to you, Behold, here as the Anointed, or, Behold, he zs there: believe ἐξ not. For false anointed ones, and false prophets will rise, and show signs and wonders, to seduce, if possible, even the elect. But take ye heed: behold, I have foretold you all things. But in those days, after that affliction, the sun 12 13 14 15 her light, and the stars of heaven will fall, and the powers that are in the heavens will be shaken. And then they will see the Son of man coming in clouds with great power and glory. And then he will send forth his angels, and gather together his elect from the four winds, from the end of earth to the end of heaven. Now learn the parable of the fig-tree: When its branch now becometh tender, and putteth forth *the leaves, ye know that the summer is near: so also, when ye shall see these things coming to pass, know that he is 28 29 δ or, “its leaves.” And except the | || this waste of the ointment made? will be darkened, and the moon will not give | near at the doors. Truly I say to you, that 30 this generation will not pass away, till all these things shall have come to pass. Heaven and 31 earth will pass away: but my words will not pass away. But concerning that day or hour knoweth no 32 one, not even the angels, who are in heaven, nor | the Son, but the Father only. Take heed, watch and pray: for ye know not 33 when the time is. *As a man going abroad, 34 who left his house, and gave authority to his servants, and to each his work; and commanded the porter to watch. Watch therefore: for ye 35 | know not when the master of the house cometh, at evening, or at midnight, or at cock-crowing, or in the morning: lest coming suddenly, he 36 should find you sleeping. And what I say to 37 you, I say to all, Watch. XIV.— Now after two days, was the passo- | ver and the feast of wnleavened bread: and the chief priests and the scribes sought how they might take him by craft, and put him to death. But they said, Not during the feast, lest there should be an uproar of the people. And when he was in Bethany, in the house of Simon the leper, as he reclined at table, there came a woman having an alabaster-box of oint- ment of spikenard, pure and very costly ; and bo | she broke the box, and poured ἐξ on his head. And there were some, who were much dis- pleased among themselves, and said, Why was For this ointment might have been sold for more than three hundred pence, and given to the poor. And they murmured against her. But Jesus said, Let her alone; why do ye trouble her? she hath wrought a good work for me. For 7 ye have the poor with you always, and when- ever ye will, ye can do them good, but me ye have not always. She hath done what she 8 could: she hath anointed my body beforehand for the burial. Truly I say to you, Wherever this gospel shall be preached throughout the 5 2 oy, “It is as when a man,” etc. > or, “ Now the passover and the feast of unleavened bread were to be two days afterwards.” _ THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. 131 whole world, what she hath done, shall also be 10 spoken of, for a memorial of her. And Judas Iscariot, one of the twelve, went to the chief | 11 priests to deliver him up to them. And when they heard if, they were glad, and promised to give him money. conveniently deliver him up. And the first day of the feast of unleavened bread, when they killed the passover, his disci- ples say to him, Where wilt thou that we shall go and prepare, that thou mayest eat the passo- ver? And he sendeth forth two of his disci- ples, and saith to them, Go into the city, and a man bearing a pitcher of water will meet 14 you: follow him. 12 13 saith, Where is the guest-chamber, where I shall eat the passover with my disciples? And he will show you a large upper room furnished and prepared: there prepare for us. And his disci- ples went forth, and came into the city and found things even as he had said to them, and they prepared the passover. And eyening having come, he cometh with the twelve. And as they reclined at table, and were eating, Jesus said, Truly I say to you, One of you, who eateth with me, will deliver me up. And they began to be sorrowful, and to say to him, one by one, Is it 1? and another said, Is it 1? And he answered and said to them, 1 zs one of the twelve, who dippeth with me in the dish. The Son of man indeed departeth, as it is written concerning him: but woe to that man, through whom the Son of man is delivered up, It had been good for that man, if he had not been born. And as they were eating, Jesus took bread, and blessed, and broke 7, and gaye to them, and said, Take: this ismy body. And he took the cup, and when he had given thanks, he gave it to them: and they all drank of it. And he said to them, This is my blood, that of the new covenant, which is shed for many. ‘Truly I say to you, I shall drink no more of the fruit of the vine, till that day, when I drink it new in the kingdom of God. And when they had sung a hymn, they went out into the mount of Olives. And Jesus saith 15 16 17 18 26 And he sought how he might | And wherever he shall enter, | say to the master of the house, The Teacher | to them, Ye will all desert me this night: for it is written, I will smite the shepherd, and the sheep will be scattered. But after I haye risen, I will go before you into Galilee. But Peter said to him, Though all should desert thee, yet I will not. And Jesus saith to him, Truly I say to thee, that thou, to-day, even in this night, before the cock shall crow twice, wilt deny me thrice. But he spoke the more vehemently, If I must die with thee, I will by no means deny thee. And so also said they all. And they came to a place named Gethse- mane: and he saith to his disciples, Sit here, till I shall pray. And he taketh with him Peter, and James, and John, and began to be greatly amazed, and full of anguish. And he saith to them, My soul is exceeding sorrowful even to death: tarry here and watch. And he went forward a little, and fell on the ground, and prayed that if it could be possible, the hour might pass from him. And he said, Abba, Fa- ther, all things ave possible to thee; take away this cup from me: nevertheless, not what I will, but what thou wilé. And he cometh and findeth them sleeping, and saith to Peter, Simon, sleep- est thou? couldst thou not watch one hour? Watch and pray, lest ye enter into trial. The spirit indeed is ready, but the flesh is weak. And again he went away, and prayed, speaking the same words. And when he returned, he found them sleeping again (for their eyes were heavy); and they knew not what to answer him. ; And he cometh the third time, and saith to them, Sleep on still, and take your rest. It is enough, the hour is come; behold, the Son of man is delivered up into the hands of sinners. Rise, let us go; behold, he, who delivereth me up, is at hand. And immediately while he was yet speaking, cometh Judas, being one of the twelve, and with him a great crowd with swords and clubs, from the chief priests, and the seribes, and the elders. And he, who delivered him up, had given them a sign, saying, Whomsoever I shall kiss, that is he; take him, and lead him away safely. And when he came, he went immediately to him, and saith, Rabbi, Rabbi; and kissed him. 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 132 46 41 48 49 δ0 51 52 64 65 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. And they laid their hands on him, and took him. And one of those, who stood by, drew his sword and smote the servant of the high priest and cut off his ear. And Jesus answered and said to them, Have ye come out as against a robber, with swords and clubs to take me? I was daily with you in the temple, teaching, and ye took me not: but the scriptures must be fulfilled. And they all forsook him and fled. And there followed him a certain young man, having a linen cloth thrown round his naked body; and the young men took him; and he left the linen cloth, and fled from them naked. And they led Jesus away to the high priest : and with him there assembled all the chief priests, and the elders, and the scribes. And Peter followed him far off, even into the *court of the high priest: and he sat with the officers, and warmed himself at the fire. And the chief priests, and all the council sought for testimony against Jesus to put him to death; and found none. For many testified falsely against him, but their testimonies did not agree. And cer- tain ones rose, and testified falsely against him, saying, We heard him say, I will destroy this temple made with hands, and within three days, 1 will build another not made with hands. And yet not even thus, did their testimony agree. And the high priest rose up in the midst, and asked Jesus, saying, Answerest thou nothing? what do these testify against thee? But he was silent, and answered nothing. Again the high priest asked him, and said to him, Art thou the Anointed, the Son of the Blessed? And Jesus said to him, I am: and ye will see the Son of man sitting at the right hand of the Mighty One, and coming with the clouds of heaven. And the high priest rent his clothes, and saith, What further need have we of witnesses? Ye have heard the reyviling : ‘what think ye? And they all condemned him as worthy of death. And some began to spit on him, and to cover his face, and to beat him with their fists, and to say to him, Prophesy : * or, “ palace.” > or, “ what appeareth to you?” | wast with Jesus of Nazareth. and the officers struck him with their open hands. And as Peter was below in the court, there cometh one of the maid-servants of the high priest: and when she saw Peter warming him- self, she looked on him, and saith, Thou also But he denied, saying, I know not, nor understand what thou sayest. And he went out into the porch; and the cock crew. And the maid-servant seeing him again, began to say to those, who stood by, This is one of them. And he denied ἐξ again. And a little after, those, who stood by, said again to Peter, Surely thou art one of them: for thou art a Galilean, and thy speech agreeth to it. But he began to curse and to swear, saying, 1 know not this man of whom ye speak. And the second time the cock crew. And Peter called to mind the word, which Jesus said to him, Before the cock shall crow twice, thou wilt deny me thrice. And when he thought on it, he wept. XV.—AnD immediately in the morning, the chief priests took counsel with the elders and scribes, and the whole council, and bound Jesus, and carried him away, and delivered him up to Pilate. And Pilate asked him, Art thou the King of the Jews? And he answering, said to him, Thou sayest ἐξ. And the chief priests ac- cused him of many things. And Pilate asked him again, saying, Answerest thou ‘nothing ? behold how many things they testify against thee. But Jesus answered nothing further ; so that Pilate wondered. Now at that feast he used to release to them one prisoner, whomsoever they asked. And there was one named Barabbas, lying bound with his fellow-insurgents, who had commit- ted murder in the insurrection. And the crowd crying aloud, began to ask him to do as he had ever done to them. But Pilate an- swered them, saying, Will ye that I shall re- lease to you the King of the Jews? (For he Knew that the chief priests had delivered him up from envy.) But the chief priests stirred up the crowd, that he should rather release Barabbas to them. And Pilate answering 66 67 68 69 70 71 co 10 11 12 THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. 133 again, said to them, What will ye then that I shall do to him, whom ye call King of the 13 Jews? And they cried out again, Crucify him. 14 But Pilate said to them, Why, what evil hath he done? And they cried out the more exceed- 15 ingly, Crucify him. Then Pilate being willing to satisfy the crowd, released Barabbas to them, and delivered up Jesté, when he had scourged him, to be crucified. And the soldiers led him away into the palace, which is the Pretorium ; and they called together the whole band; and they clothed him with purple, and braided a crown of thorns, and ‘put it about his head, and be- gan to salute him, Hail, King of the Jews! And they smote his head with a reed, and 16 17 18 19 spit on him, and bowing their knees, did rey- | And when they had mocked | him, they took off the purple from him, and | 20 erence to him. put his own garments on him, and led him out | 21 to crucify him. And they ‘compel one Simon, a Cyrenian, who was passing by, coming from the country, the father of Alexander and Rufus, to bear his cross. And they bring him to a place, Golgotha, which, being interpreted, is, *A place of a skull. And they gave him wine mingled with myrrh to drink ; but he did not receive i#. And when they had crucified him, they parted his gar- ments, casting lots for them, what each should take. And it was the third hour, when they crucified him. And the inscription of his accu- sation was written over him, THE KING OF THE Jews. And with him they crucify two robbers, one at his right hand, and the other at his left. And the scripture was fulfilled, which saith, those, who passed by, reviled him, wagging their heads, and saying, Ah! thon that de- stroyest the temple, and buildest ἐξ in three days, save thyself, and come down from the cross. In like manner also the chief priests, mocking, said to one another with the scribes, He sayed others; himself he can not save. 32 Let the Anointed, the King of Israel come 30 91 * or, “put it about him.” > or, “skull-place.” And he was numbered with transgressors. And | Τ down now from the cross, that we may see and believe. And those, who were crucified with: him, reproached him. And when the sixth 33 hour came, there was darkness over the whole land, till the ninth hour. And at the ninth hour Jesus cried with a loud voice, saying, Eloi, Eloi, lamma sabachthani? which, being inter- preted, is, My God, my God, why hast thou forsaken me? And some of those, who stood by, hearing ἐξέ, said, Behold, he calleth Elijah. And one ran and filled a sponge with vinegar, and winding ἐξ on a reed gave him drink, say- ing, Forbear ; let us see whether Elijah will come to take him down. And Jesus uttering a loud ery expired. And the vail of the temple was rent in two, from top to bottom. And when the centurion, who stood by over against him, saw that he cried out so, and expired, he said, Truly this man was the Son of God. There were also women looking on far off, among whom was Mary Magdalene, and Mary the mother of ° James the younger, and of Joses, and Salome; who also, when he was in Galilee, followed him, and ministered to him; and many other women, who came up with him to Jerusalem. And now, evening having come (since it was 42 the preparation, that is, the day before the sabbath), Joseph of Arimathea, an honorable 94 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 counselor, who himself also was waiting for the kingdom of God, came and went in boldly to Pilate, and asked for the body of Jesus. And Pilate wondered that he was already dead: and calling to Aim the centurion, he inquired of him whether he had been now long dead. And when he knew 7 from the centurion, he gave the body to Joseph. And he bought fine linen, and took him down, and wrapped him in the linen, and laid him in a tomb, which was hewn out of a rock, and rolled a stone to the door of the tomb. And Mary Magdalene and Mary the mother of Joses saw where he was laid. 41 XVI.—Anp when the sabbath was past, Mary Magdalene, and Mary the mother of James, and Salome, had bought sweet spices, that they might come and anoint him. And bo 134 3 σι oO -1: co 10 11 very early, on the first “day of the week, they came to the tomb, at the rising of the sun: and they were saying among themselves, Who will roll away the stone for us from the door of the tomb ? (and looking up, they saw that the stone had been rolled away,) for it was very great. And entering into the tomb, they saw a young man sitting at the right side, clothed in a long white robe ; and they were terrified. And he saith to them, Be not terrified: ye seek Jesus of Nazareth, who was crucified ; he hath risen, he is not here: behold the place where they laid him. But go, tell his disciples, and especially Peter, He goeth before you into Galilee: there ye will see him, as he said to | you. tomb ; for trembling and amazement had seized them, and they said nothing to any one; for they were afraid. Now Jesus haying risen early, on the first day of the week, appeared first to Mary Mag- dalene, out of whom he had cast seven demons. She went and told those, who had been with him, as they mourned and wept. when they heard that he was alive, and had And they went out, and fled from the | And they, | THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK. been seen by her, believed not. After that, he appeared in another form to two of them as they were walking, going into the country. And they went and told i to the rest: neither did they believe them. Afterwards he appeared to the eleven, as they reclined at table, and upbraided them for their unbelief and obstinacy of heart, because they believed not those, who had seen him, after he had risen. And he said to them, Go into all the world, preach the gospel to every creature. He that believeth and is immersed, shall be saved, but he that believeth not, shall be condemned. And these signs shall accompany those, who believe: in my name they shall cast out demons ; they shall speak with new tongues; they shall take up serpents ; and if they drink any deadly thing, it shall not hurt them at all; they shall lay hands on the sick, and they shall recover. So then, after the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven, and sat at the right hand of God. And they went forth, and preached every where, the Lord working with them, and confirming the word, through the accompanying signs. μι 2 18 14 20 eS ΣΝ... :....ὕ if We ee wee”... be a 6 + ww : + See ς Abc ape 2 ες : εν ἘΠ » φῶ ῳ . ψ τςπ ὧς τ ey ως ἃ τ αρ τὸ ρὲ eh aa a a He LR eal ape alee at δὲ σὐμαα, αὶ neg ας eo ἃς ὃς πον I hat eee 8 προς em chee Tey Me Me eat te δ ὩΣ hae ae φ- ων ὦ ee ty nt ἐς Ὁ ΣΝ Sa at en oer pannel arene tate gh des ea aaa Ah δι Ἂς. ἃ tia ite ety tet + Ἂ eens τς ety ΡΝ. να 45. οἱ ὁ ven ee wo oe i Pealk maha rene eR Spy Gttas yess phlaslg ty